JP7196895B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines.

Among game machines such as pachinko machines, there is a game machine provided with a ball entrance (Patent Document 1).

JP 2014-161397 A

However, the above-described conventional gaming machine has a problem that there is room for improvement in the flow of game balls.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of improving the flow of game balls .

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 comprises: a game area formed so that game balls can flow down; a ball entrance arranged in the game area and into which game balls can enter; A game machine comprising a ball flow-down means arranged upstream of a ball opening and capable of guiding game balls to the ball entrance, wherein the ball flow-down means comprises a flow-down path for flowing game balls, and a flow-down path. a first position where a game ball that overhangs and flows down the flow path can collide; and an operation means configured to apply a load to a game ball flowing down the flow-down path when positioned at the first position, wherein the operation means is positioned at the first position. In the first state in the case, after the game ball collides with the operating means and passes through the predetermined portion of the flow path, the operating means is maintained at the first position, and the operating means is positioned at the first position. In the second state in the case where the game ball collides with the operating means based on passing through the flow-down path and passes through the predetermined portion, the operating means is displaced to the second position, and the operation The means is configured to be displaceable in the front-rear direction, and the game machine is configured to be capable of guiding a game ball to the ball entrance while the operating means is maintained at the first position.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 1, it is possible to improve the flow of game balls.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment; FIG. 1 is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 1 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is a front perspective view of a 1st flow-down apparatus. It is a front view of a 1st flow-down apparatus. FIG. 7 is a side view of the first flow-down device as viewed in the direction of arrow VII in FIG. 6 ; FIG. 8 is a top view of the first flow-down device as viewed in the direction of arrow VIII in FIG. 7 ; It is a partial back perspective view of a 1st flow-down apparatus. It is an exploded front perspective view of a sorting body. (a) to (c) are front views of a sorting body. (a) and (b) are partial front views of the first flow-down device. It is a partial front view of a 1st flow-down apparatus. (a) and (b) are partial front views of the first flow-down device. It is a partial front view of a 1st flow-down apparatus. (a) and (b) are partial front views of the first flow-down device. (a) and (b) are partial front views of the first flow-down device. It is a partial front view of a 1st flow-down apparatus. (a) and (b) are partial front views of the first flow-down device. (a) and (b) are partial front views of the first flow-down device. (a) and (b) are partial front views of the first flow-down device. It is a partial front view of a 1st flow-down apparatus. It is a front perspective view of a 2nd flow-down apparatus. It is a front view of a 2nd flow-down apparatus. FIG. 25 is a partial front view of the second flow-down device in area XXV of FIG. 24; 25(a) to 25(c) are partial front views of the second flow-down device in range XXV of FIG. 24; FIG. (a) is a partial top view of the second flow-down device as viewed in the direction of arrow XXVIIa in FIG. 24, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the second flow-down device taken along line XXVIIb-XXVIIb in FIG. 27(a). . 25 is a partial front view of the second flow-down device in area XXVIII of FIG. 24; FIG. (a) is a partial front view of the second flow-down device in range XXVIII of FIG. 24, and (b) is a partial top view of the second flow-down device viewed in the direction of arrow XXIXb in FIG. 29(a). (a) is a partial front view of the second flow-down device in range XXVIII of FIG. 24, and (b) is a partial top view of the second flow-down device viewed in the direction of arrow XXXb in FIG. 30 (a). (a) and (b) are partial front views of the second flow-down device in area XXVIII of FIG. (a) is a partial front view of the second flow-down device in the range XXVIII of FIG. 24, and (b) is a partial top view of the second flow-down device viewed in the direction of arrow XXXIIb in FIG. 32(a). (a) is a partial front view of the second flow-down device in range XXVIII of FIG. 24, and (b) is a partial top view of the second flow-down device as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXIIIb of FIG. 33 (a). (a) is a partial front view of the second flow-down device in range XXVIII of FIG. 24, and (b) is a partial top view of the second flow-down device viewed in the direction of arrow XXXIVb of FIG. 34 (a). 25 is a partial front view of the second flow-down device in area XXVIII of FIG. 24; FIG. (a) is a partial front view of the second flow-down device in range XXVIII of FIG. 24, and (b) is a partial top view of the second flow-down device viewed from the direction of arrow XXXVIb in FIG. 36(a). (a) is a partial front view of the second flow-down device in range XXVIII of FIG. 24, and (b) is a partial top view of the second flow-down device viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVIIb of FIG. 37(a). It is a partial front view of a 2nd flow-down apparatus. It is a partial front view of a 2nd flow-down apparatus. (a) is a front view of a second flow-down device in a second embodiment, and (b) and (c) are cross-sectional views of the second flow-down device taken along line XLb-XLb in FIG. 40(a). (a) And (b) is a front view of a 2nd flow-down apparatus. It is a front view of a 2nd flow-down apparatus. It is a front view of the 1st falling-down apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. FIG. 44 is a side view of the first flow-down device viewed in the direction of arrow XLIV in FIG. 43; 45 is a top view of the first flow-down device as viewed in the direction of arrow XLV in FIG. 44. FIG. (a) and (b) are partial front views of an introduction passage. (a) is a partial cross-sectional view of the first flow-down device along line XLVIIa-XLVIIa in FIG. 43, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the first flow-down device along line XLVIIb-XLVIIb in FIG. 47(a). . FIG. 47B is a partial cross-sectional view of the first flow-down device taken along line XLVIII-XLVIII in FIG. 47(b); 44(a) and 44(b) are cross-sectional views of the route distribution portion taken along line XLVIIa-XLVIIa in FIG. 43. FIG. 44(a) and 44(b) are cross-sectional views of the route distribution portion taken along line XLVIIa-XLVIIa in FIG. 43. FIG. 44(a) and 44(b) are cross-sectional views of the route distribution portion taken along line XLVIIa-XLVIIa in FIG. 43. FIG. 44(a) and 44(b) are cross-sectional views of the route distribution portion taken along line XLVIIa-XLVIIa in FIG. 43. FIG. (a) and (b) are partial front views of a first flow-down device in a fourth embodiment. (a) and (b) are partial front views of the first flow-down device. (a) and (b) are partial front views of the first flow-down device. FIG. 25 is a partial front view of the second flow-down device in the fifth embodiment in the range corresponding to range XXV of FIG. 24; (a) to (c) are partial front views of the second flow-down device in the range corresponding to range XXV in FIG. 24. FIG. It is a front view of the 2nd flow-down apparatus in 6th Embodiment. (a) is a cross-sectional view of the second flow-down device taken along line LIXa-LIXa of FIG. 58, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the second flow-down device taken along line LIXb-LIXb of FIG. 59(a). FIG. 59(a) is a cross-sectional view of the second flow-down device along line LX-LX. FIG. 59(a) is a cross-sectional view of the second flow-down device taken along line LXI-LXI of FIG. 59(a). (a) is a cross-sectional view of the second flow-down device taken along line LIXa-LIXa of FIG. 58, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the second flow-down device taken along line LXIIb-LXIIb of FIG. 62(a). FIG. 62(a) is a cross-sectional view of the second flow-down device taken along line LXIII-LXIII of FIG. 62(a). (a) is a cross-sectional view of the second flow-down device taken along line LIXa-LIXa of FIG. 58, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the second flow-down device taken along line LXIVb-LXIVb of FIG. 64(a). Fig. 64(a) is a cross-sectional view of the second flow-down device taken along line LXV-LXV of Fig. 64(a); FIG. 64(a) is a cross-sectional view of the second flow-down device along line LXVI-LXVI. 67 is a cross-sectional view of the second flow-down device taken along line LIXa-LIXa of FIG. 58. FIG. FIG. 68 is a cross-sectional view of the second flow-down device taken along line LXVIII-LXVIII of FIG. 67; FIG. 68 is a cross-sectional view of the second flow-down device along line LXIX-LXIX of FIG. 67; FIG. 68 is a cross-sectional view of the second flow-down device taken along line LXVIII-LXVIII of FIG. 67; FIG. 68 is a cross-sectional view of the second flow-down device along line LXIX-LXIX of FIG. 67; FIG. 68 is a cross-sectional view of the second flow-down device taken along line LXVIII-LXVIII of FIG. 67; FIG. 68 is a cross-sectional view of the second flow-down device along line LXIX-LXIX of FIG. 67; FIG. 59 is a cross-sectional view of the second flow-down device taken along line LIXa-LIXa of FIG. 58; FIG. 75 is a cross-sectional view of the second flow-down device taken along line LXXV-LXXV of FIG. 74; FIG. 75 is a cross-sectional view of the second flow-down device taken along line LXXVI-LXXVI of FIG. 74; FIG. 75 is a cross-sectional view of the second flow-down device taken along line LXXV-LXXV of FIG. 74; FIG. 75 is a cross-sectional view of the second flow-down device taken along line LXXVI-LXXVI of FIG. 74; FIG. 75 is a cross-sectional view of the second flow-down device taken along line LXXV-LXXV of FIG. 74; FIG. 75 is a cross-sectional view of the second flow-down device taken along line LXXVI-LXXVI of FIG. 74; FIG. 59 is a cross-sectional view of the second flow-down device taken along line LIXa-LIXa of FIG. 58; FIG. 59 is a cross-sectional view of the second flow-down device taken along line LIXa-LIXa of FIG. 58; It is a front perspective view of the 2nd flow-down apparatus in 7th Embodiment. 1 is a front perspective view of a rolling bed device; FIG. (a) is a front view of the second flow-down device, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the first annular member taken along the line LXXXVb-LXXXVb of FIG. 85 (a), and (c) is a view of FIG. FIG. 10 is a cross-sectional view of the second annular member taken along line LXXXVc-LXXXVc of a). 85(a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the second annular member taken along line LXXXVc-LXXXVc of FIG. 85(a). 85(a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the second annular member taken along line LXXXVc-LXXXVc of FIG. 85(a). 85(a) and 85(b) are cross-sectional views of the first annular member taken along line LXXXVb-LXXXVb of FIG. 85(a). 85(a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the second annular member taken along line LXXXVc-LXXXVc of FIG. 85(a). 85(a) and 85(b) are cross-sectional views of the first annular member taken along line LXXXVb-LXXXVb of FIG. 85(a). 91(a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the second annular member taken along the line LXXXVc-LXXXVc in FIG. 85, and (c) is a cross-sectional view of the second annular member as viewed in the direction of arrow XCIc in FIG. 91(a). It is a partial internal view. FIG. 85(a) is a partial top view of the second flow-down device as viewed in the direction of arrow IX. 85(a) and 85(b) are cross-sectional views of the first annular member taken along line LXXXVb-LXXXVb of FIG. 85(a). 85(a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the second annular member taken along line LXXXVc-LXXXVc of FIG. 85(a). Fig. 85(a) is a partial top view of the second flow-down device as viewed in the direction of arrow XCII in Fig. 85(a). 85(a) and 85(b) are cross-sectional views of the first annular member taken along line LXXXVb-LXXXVb of FIG. 85(a). 85(a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the second annular member taken along line LXXXVc-LXXXVc of FIG. 85(a). 85(a) and 85(b) are cross-sectional views of the first annular member taken along line LXXXVb-LXXXVb of FIG. 85(a). 85(a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the second annular member taken along line LXXXVc-LXXXVc of FIG. 85(a). 85(a) and 85(b) are cross-sectional views of the first annular member taken along line LXXXVb-LXXXVb of FIG. 85(a). 85(a) and 85(b) are cross-sectional views of the second flow-down device taken along line CIa--CIa of FIG. 85(b). FIG. 5 is a diagram showing an outline of various counters in the first control example; (a) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the main controller in the first control example, (b) is a block showing the electrical configuration of the RAM in the main controller in the first control example; It is a diagram. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first hit random number table in the first control example, (b) is a first random number counter and a small hit determination in the first special symbol in the first control example It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the value, (c) schematically shows the correspondence between the first random number counter in the first control example and the small hit determination value in the second special symbol It is a schematic diagram, and (d) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence of the 2nd hit random number counter in a 1st control example, and the hit in a normal design. (a) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a ROM within a sound ramp control device in a first control example; (b) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a RAM within the sound ramp control device in the first control example; It is a block diagram showing. It is a game flow diagram showing, as an example, the flow of a game played by the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart explaining the flow from winning to the left start winning prize port or the right start winning prize port to occurrence of a jackpot game in the first control example. It is a time chart explaining the flow from the winning to the medium start winning opening in the first control example to the occurrence of the jackpot game. 4 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit; It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation process executed by the MPU in the main controller. It is a flow chart showing a small hit start setting process executed in the special symbol variation start process. It is a flow chart which shows the start prize-winning processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart showing normal symbol variation processing that is executed by the MPU in the main controller. 4 is a flow chart showing through gate passage processing executed by an MPU in the main controller; 4 is a flowchart showing tuyere passage processing that is executed in timer interrupt processing that is executed by the MPU in the main control unit; 4 is a flowchart showing V entrance passage processing executed by the MPU in the main controller; 4 is a flow chart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main controller; 4 is a flow chart showing start-up processing executed by an MPU in a main controller; 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by an MPU in a main controller; It is a flowchart which shows a big-hit control process performed by MPU in a main control device. It is a flow chart showing a jackpot time accessory device operation start process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flow chart showing a jackpot time accessory device opening process executed by the MPU in the main control device. 4 is a flow chart showing details of abnormality processing executed by an MPU in a main control unit; It is a flow chart which shows small hit control processing performed in main processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows the small winning end processing executed by the MPU in the main controller. Fig. 4 is a flow chart showing the start-up process performed by the MPU in the audio ramp controller; 4 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device; 4 is a flow chart showing ramp editing processing executed by an MPU in the audio ramp control device; 4 is a flow chart showing command determination processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device; FIG. 4 is a flow chart showing the hit-related processing performed by the MPU in the audio ramp controller; FIG. It is a front view of the game board in the eighth embodiment. It is a partial front perspective view of the game board. It is a partial front exploded perspective view of a game board. (a) is a rear view of the front device, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the front device taken along line CXXXIb-CXXXIb of FIG. 134(a). (a) is a rear view of the body plate portion, (b) is a side view of the body plate portion viewed in the direction of arrow CXXXVb in FIG. 135(a), and (c) is a side view of FIG. 135(d) is a partial cross-sectional view of the body plate portion taken along line CXXXVc-CXXXVc, and FIG. 135(d) is a partial cross-sectional view of the body plate portion taken along line CXXXVd-CXXXVd of FIG. 135(c); 136(a) is a top view of the retractable member, (b) is a side view of the retractable member viewed in the direction of arrow CXXXVIb in FIG. 136(a), and (c) is an arrow CXXXVIc in FIG. 136(a). It is a front view of the projecting/withdrawing member in a direction view. (a) is a top view of a transmission rod, (b) is a side view of the transmission rod viewed in the direction of arrow CXXXVIIb in FIG. 137(a), and (c) is an arrow CXXXVIIc in FIG. 137(a). It is a front view of a transmission rod in direction view. 134(a) to 134(c) are cross-sectional views of the front side device taken along line CXXXIb-CXXXIb of FIG. 134(a). (a) is a front view of the back side device and the transmission device, and (b) is a side view of the back side device and the transmission device. It is a rear view of a back side apparatus. It is a rear view of a main-body board part. (a) is a top view of a second transmission rod, (b) is a side view of the second transmission rod viewed in the direction of arrow CXLIIb in FIG. 142(a), and (c) is a ) is a front view of the second transmission rod as viewed in the direction of arrow CXLIIc. 1 is a front perspective view of a transmission device; FIG. It is a front exploded perspective view of a transmission device. 145(a) is a front view of the first transmission member, and (b) is a side view of the first transmission member viewed in the direction of arrow CXLVb in FIG. 145(a). FIG. 146(a) is a front view of the second transmission member, and (b) is a side view of the second transmission member viewed in the direction of arrow CXLVIb in FIG. 146(a). FIG. (a) to (f) are front views of the transmission device and the second transmission rod for explaining the operation of the transmission device in chronological order. FIG. 131 is a cross-sectional view of the pre-winning falling-down device taken along line CXLVIII-CXLVIII of FIG. 131; FIG. 131 is a cross-sectional view of the pre-winning falling-down device taken along line CXLVIII-CXLVIII of FIG. 131; FIG. 131 is a cross-sectional view of the pre-winning falling-down device taken along line CXLVIII-CXLVIII of FIG. 131; FIG. 131 is a cross-sectional view of the pre-winning falling-down device taken along line CXLVIII-CXLVIII of FIG. 131; FIG. 148 is a partial cross-sectional view of the pre-prize flowing-down device taken along the CLIII-CLII line in FIG. 148; FIG. 148 is a partial cross-sectional view of the pre-prize flowing-down device taken along the CLIII-CLII line in FIG. 148; FIG. 148 is a partial cross-sectional view of the pre-prize flowing-down device taken along the CLIII-CLII line in FIG. 148; FIG. 148 is a partial cross-sectional view of the pre-winning falling-down device along the CLV-CLV line in FIG. 148; (a) to (c) are diagrams showing changes over time of the retractable member in the first operation pattern. (a) to (g) are schematic diagrams schematically showing an internal channel and a sphere passing through the internal channel. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the relationship between the timing at which the ball enters the internal flow path and the length of time required for the ball to completely pass through the internal flow path in the first operation pattern; (a) to (g) are schematic diagrams schematically showing an internal channel and a sphere passing through the internal channel. (a) to (g) are schematic diagrams schematically showing an internal channel and a sphere passing through the internal channel. (a) to (g) are schematic diagrams schematically showing an internal channel and a sphere passing through the internal channel. (a) to (c) are diagrams showing changes over time of the retractable member in the fourth operation pattern. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the relationship between the timing at which the ball enters the internal flow path and the length of time required for the ball to completely pass through the internal flow path in the fourth operation pattern; It is a time chart explaining the flow from the winning to the left starting winning opening or the right starting winning opening to the end of the small hit game in the first control example. It is a time chart explaining the flow from the winning to the middle start winning opening in the first control example to the end of the small winning game. 166(a) is a front view of a second transmission member in the ninth embodiment, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the second transmission member taken along line CLXVIb-CLXVIb of FIG. 166(a). FIG. (a) to (f) are front views of the transmission device and the second transmission rod for explaining the operation of the transmission device in chronological order. (a) is a diagram showing time-measured changes in the rotation direction of the first transmission member in a fifth operation pattern, and (b) to (d) are diagrams showing time-measured changes in the retractable member in the fifth operation pattern. It is a diagram. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing the relationship between the timing at which a ball enters the internal flow path and the length of time required for the ball to completely pass through the internal flow path in the fifth operation pattern; FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the operation pattern and each parameter in ream formation. FIG. 149 is a partial cross-sectional view of the pre-winning falling-down device along the line corresponding to the CLII-CLII line in FIG. 148 in the tenth embodiment; FIG. 148 is a partial cross-sectional view of the pre-prize flowing-down device along the line corresponding to the CLIII-CLII line in FIG. 148; FIG. 172 is a partial cross-sectional view of the pre-prize flowing-down device taken along line CLXXIII-CLXXIII in FIG. 172; (a) is a time chart explaining the flow of state change of the removal device in the sixth operation pattern, and (b) is a time chart explaining the flow of state change of the removal device in the seventh operation pattern; be.

BEST MODE FOR CARRYING OUT THE INVENTION Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko game machine (hereinafter simply referred to as "pachinko machine") 10 will be described as a first embodiment with reference to FIGS. 1 to 39. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 whose outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. and an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, the outer frame 11 is provided with metal hinges 18 at two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). A frame 12 is supported toward the front side so that it can be opened and closed.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning slots 26, 27, 28, 63 and the like is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. Balls (game balls) flow down in front of the game board 13 to play a pinball game. The inner frame 12 includes a ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that shoots a ball to the front area of the game board 13, and a shooting unit that guides the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the front upper side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1). 14 and a lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are unlocked by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and has a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening at its substantially central portion. A glass unit 16 having two sheet glasses is arranged on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front side of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.例文帳に追加

The front frame 14 has an upper tray 17 for storing balls projected to the front side and formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface, and the upper tray 17 discharges prize balls, rental balls, and the like. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the inclination guides the ball thrown into the upper tray 17 to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4). A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17 . The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device (not shown) is changed, or the content of the super ready-to-win effect is changed. .

The front frame 14 is provided with light-emitting means such as various lamps around its periphery (for example, corner portions). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when a big win is made or when a predetermined ready-to-win state is reached, and play a role of enhancing the effect during the game. Illuminated portions 29 to 33 containing light emitting means such as LEDs are provided on the periphery of the window portion 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as production lamps such as big win lamps, and the respective electric decoration parts 29 to 33 are lit by lighting or blinking of built-in LEDs at the time of a big win or a ready-to-win production. Alternatively, it flashes to indicate that the jackpot is in progress or that the player is in the process of reaching one step before the jackpot. In addition, an indicator lamp 34 is provided in the upper left part of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1).

In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized on the lower side of the right electrical decoration part 32, and a pasting space K1 (Fig. 2) can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more splendor, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin, which is plated with chrome, is attached to the area around the electric decorations 29-33.

A ball rental operation unit 40 is arranged below the window portion 14c. The ball rental operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41 , a ball rental button 42 and a return button 43 . When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with banknotes, cards, etc. inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the balls are released according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which the balance information of the card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on to display the remaining amount in numbers as the balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain lending balls based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and lending balls are supplied to the top tray 17 as long as the card or the like has a balance. be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are directly lent to the upper tray 17 from a ball leasing device or the like without going through the card unit, that is, a so-called cash machine, does not require the ball leasing operation unit 40. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation portion to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to achieve commonality between a pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine.

In the lower tray unit 15 positioned below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. there is On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 is provided which is operated by the player to hit the ball in front of the game board 13. As shown in FIG.

Inside the operating handle 51, there are a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball shooting unit 112a, a shooting stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball during the pressing operation, and a rotation of the operating handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) for detecting a dynamic operation amount (rotational position) based on a change in electrical resistance is incorporated. When the operating handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the amount of rotation operation. A ball is shot with a strength (shooting intensity) corresponding to , and is hit in front of the game board 13 with a flying distance corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball extraction lever 52 is provided at the lower front portion of the lower tray 50 for operation when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. The ball extracting lever 52 is always biased to the right, and when it is slid to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed in the bottom of the lower tray 50 is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball extracting lever 52 is normally performed with a box (generally called a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 50 to receive the balls ejected from the lower tray 50 . The operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower tray 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower tray 50 .

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape as viewed from the front, a large number of nails (not shown) for guiding balls, windmills, rails 61 and 62, and two rails. A general winning opening 63, a relatively large movable ball-entering accessory device 190, a left-start winning opening 26 disposed at the lower left position of the movable ball-entering accessory device 190, and a medium-start winning opening disposed at the center position. An opening 28 is provided with a right starting winning opening 27 disposed at the lower right position, and its peripheral edge portion is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1).

The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmissive resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures arranged on the rear side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof.

The general winning opening 63, the left start winning opening 26, the right starting winning opening 27, the middle starting winning opening 28, and the movable ball entry accessory device 190 are arranged in through-holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are used to play games. It is fixed by a tapping screw or the like from the front side of the board 13 .

The game ball thrown into the game area randomly enters the normal winning hole 63, the left starting winning hole 26, the middle starting winning hole 28 or the right starting winning hole 27 in the process of flowing down. Or, the ball enters the movable ball entry accessory device 190 when activated (when opened).

A game ball entering each winning hole is recovered to the back side of the game board 13 through a through hole formed in the game board 13. - 特許庁

On the other hand, the game ball that has flowed into the movable ball entry accessory device 190 is discharged after being subjected to a sorting operation through processes such as flowing down, rolling, rising, etc., and collected to the back side of the game board 13. be. Note that the sorting operation in the movable ball entry accessory device 190 will be further described later with reference to another drawing.

When a specific condition is satisfied (for example, when a game ball enters the left start winning opening 26, the middle starting winning opening 28, or the right starting winning opening 27, the movable ball entry accessory device 190 receives a predetermined is stopped in the form of a small win), allowing the inflow of game balls. That is, the movable ball entry accessory device 190 has a movable piece 190a (so-called blade member) provided at the upper position of the game area, and this movable piece 190a is, for example, a large opening solenoid 209a (see FIG. 4). By the function of the link mechanism using , it reciprocates along the board surface by a predetermined angle.

As shown in the figure, the movable piece 190a is in a substantially upright state, closing the big winning opening switch 190b. When the movable ball entry device 190 is activated, the movable piece 190a is displaced so as to fall down in the left and right direction in the game area centering on the base end thereof, and the large winning opening switch 190b is opened to perform the movable ball entry role. It enables the inflow of the game ball to the object device 190 (the entry of the game ball to the big winning opening switch 190b). Since the movable piece 190a and the big winning opening switch 190b are located in the upper position in the game area, especially near the position where the game ball is first hit, they are driven into the game area when the movable ball entry accessory device 190 is activated. The game ball is guided by the nail at the upper position to easily reach the movable piece 190a, and is guided by the movable piece 190a as it is to flow into the big winning opening switch 190b.

In addition, the movable ball-entering accessory device 190 operates even when a prescribed condition is satisfied (when a game ball passes through any specific area provided inside the movable ball-entering accessory device 190). , allows the ball to enter the big winning slot switch 190b. The specific area in the movable ball entry accessory device 190 will be further described later.

In the movable ball entry device 190, there is a first flow-down device 300 for flowing down the game ball that has flowed into the large winning opening switch 190b, and a game that has passed through the fixed area disposed in the first flow-down device 300. A second flow-down device 400 is provided to distribute the balls to flow down and through which specific area.

All the game balls that have flowed into the movable ball-entering accessory device 190 through the big winning opening switch 190b are guided into the movable ball-entering accessory device 190 through the introduction passage 310 of the first flow-down device 300. All the game balls that have flowed into the movable ball entry accessory device 190 are detected by the big winning opening switch 190b.

Further, in the movable ball entry accessory device 190, a route distribution section 320 is arranged following the introduction passage 310. As shown in FIG. The route distribution unit 320 performs a distribution operation for guiding a game ball to a normal route or to a special route. If the game ball is guided to the normal route, the probability of winning a big hit after that is low, but if the game ball is guided to the special route, the big win is after that compared with the case where the game ball is guided to the normal route. more likely to become Details of the route allocation unit 320 will be described later.

Further, in the movable ball-entering accessory device 190, a distribution slope section 350 is arranged following the route distribution section 320. As shown in FIG. The distribution slope part 350 allows the game ball that has entered the large winning opening switch 190b of the movable ball entry device 190 to pass through a defined area in which it is confirmed to be guided to a specific area, or to pass through the confirmed area. It sorts out whether to discharge without.

Here, the "determined area" is an area that must pass before the game ball passes through the specific area, so if the game ball passes through the determined area, the game ball will eventually will do. However, when the game ball passes through the fixed area, the game ball has not yet passed through the specific area, so it is not a big hit in the strict sense, but from the player's point of view, the game ball can pass through the fixed area. , a de facto hit.

In any case, the distribution slope section 350 distributes whether the game ball passes through the fixed area or is discharged without passing through the fixed area. The details of the distribution slope portion 350 will be described later.

A second flow-down device 400 is arranged downstream of the first distribution slope portion 350 . The second flow-down device 400 distributes the game balls that have passed through the defined area to be discharged after passing through one of the plurality of specific areas.

That is, in the previous distribution slope portion 350, distribution such as whether or not to pass through the fixed area was performed, but in this second flow down device 400, the game ball that passed through the fixed area and was virtually confirmed as a big hit is divided according to what kind of profit is given. The details of the second flow-down device 400 will be described later.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. As shown in FIG. Mainly referring to FIG. 2, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described below.

In front of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially circular arc is planted, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. An arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by is erected. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area is formed in which a game is played by the behavior of . The game area is the front surface of the game board 13 and is defined by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails (a winning opening is provided and a shot is fired). area where the ball flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the balls shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. As shown in FIG. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left part in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning into the ball guide passage again. be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the ball. is attenuated and rebounded toward the center.

First pattern display devices 37A and 37B having a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are provided in the lower left part of the game area when viewed from the front (lower left part in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are for displaying according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the game state of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used properly according to whether the ball has won the left and right start prize openings 26 and 27 or the middle start prize opening 28. . Specifically, when the ball enters the left and right starting winning openings 26 and 27, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball enters the middle starting winning opening 28, The first symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use the LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving mode or the normal mode by the lighting state, indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the process of changing by the lighting state, or display the stop symbols. The lighting state indicates whether or not the symbol corresponds to the small win, the number of reserved balls is indicated by the lighting state, and the number of rounds during the big win and an error are displayed by the 7-segment display device. The plurality of LEDs are configured so that each LED has a different emission color (for example, red, green, and blue), and depending on the combination of the emission colors, it is possible to suggest various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. can.

In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery (a lottery to determine whether or not a game ball flowing down the movable ball-entering accessory device 190 passes through a specific area) is held when a prize is won at the big winning slot switch 190b. . In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big win (big win lottery), and also determines the kind of big win when it is determined as a big win. A 16R jackpot, a 7R jackpot, and a 3R jackpot are prepared as the jackpot types determined here. In the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, symbols corresponding to the type of the jackpot are displayed in the case of a jackpot.

Here, the “16R jackpot” is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 16 rounds, the “7R jackpot” is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 7 rounds, and the “3R jackpot” is The maximum number of rounds is 3 rounds.

One round is a unit that divides the number of prize balls for a jackpot. In this embodiment, during one round, the movable piece 190a tilts, the large winning opening switch 190b is opened, and 30 seconds elapse or 10 game balls pass through the large winning opening switch 190b. Since there are 10 prize balls when one game ball passes through the big winning opening switch 190b, about 100 prize balls can be obtained in each round.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the first round ends when the game ball passes through the definite area hole 340 (the definite area switch 340a at the back, see FIG. 5), so the first round is the prize ball. None. That is, a maximum of about 200 prize balls can be obtained with a 3R jackpot, a maximum of about 600 prize balls can be obtained with a 7R jackpot, and a maximum of about 1500 prize balls can be obtained with a 16R jackpot.

The time-saving state (time-saving medium) refers to a game state in which only the winning probability of the second symbol is increased while the big winning probability remains the same, and the ball is likely to enter the medium start winning opening 28.例文帳に追加On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state, it means that the game is not in the time-saving state (the state in which the winning probability of the second symbol is not increased).

In this embodiment, a time saving switch 190d (the front side of the discharge detection switch 190c) through which the game ball passes after passing through the specific area hole 440 is provided, and the game ball passes through the time saving switch 190d to reduce the time. Move to

During the time saving, not only is the winning probability of the second pattern increased, but also the time during which the electric accessary 28a attached to the medium start winning opening 28 is opened is changed, and a longer time is set than during the normal time. . When the electric accessory 28a is in the open state (open state), the balls enter the middle start winning opening 28 more than when the electric accessory 28a is in the closed state (closed state). becomes easy. Therefore, during the time saving, it becomes a state in which the ball is likely to enter the medium start winning opening 28, and the large winning opening switch 190b can be easily opened.

In addition, the time saving switch 190d is arranged in such a manner that only the game ball passing through the third specific area hole 443 (see FIG. 23) arranged at the left end among the plurality of specific area holes 440 passes. As will be described later, the third specific area switch 443a (see FIG. 23) is arranged in the third specific area hole 443 so that the player can win the jackpot with the smallest profit (3rd round jackpot) among the specific area holes 440. It is a hole that

That is, according to the present embodiment, even if the game ball flowing down the second dropping device 400 results in a jackpot with the smallest profit (three-round jackpot), the player can receive an auxiliary profit by giving a time saving. can be given. On the other hand, if a jackpot with a larger profit than the 3-round jackpot is won, it is possible to prevent the player from gaining an excessively large profit by not granting time saving.

In addition, during the time saving, instead of changing the opening time of the electric accessory 28a associated with the middle start winning opening 28, or in addition to changing the opening time, the electric accessory 28a may be changed to increase the number of times the is opened more than during normal operation. In addition, during the time saving, the winning probability of the second pattern is not changed, and at least the time during which the electric accessory 28a associated with the middle start winning opening 28 is opened and the number of times the electric accessory 28a is opened in one hit. Either one may be changed. In addition, during the time saving, the time for opening the electric accessory 28a associated with the middle start winning opening 28 and the number of times the electric accessory 28a is opened per hit are not changed, only the winning probability of the second symbol. may be changed to be higher than normal.

The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning holes 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. In addition, a movable ball entry accessory device 190 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. In the movable ball entry accessory device 190, the winning (starting winning) to the left and right start winning openings 26, 27 and the middle starting winning opening 28 is used as a trigger, and while synchronizing with the variable display on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, A movable piece 190a that opens and closes, and a second pattern display device (not shown) composed of an LED that variably displays the second pattern triggered by the passage of the ball through the through gate 67 are provided. In addition, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer circumference of the movable ball-entering accessory device 190 .

The second pattern display device alternately lights up a symbol "O" and a symbol "X" as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) for a predetermined time each time the ball passes through the through gate 67. This is for variable display. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if the winning lottery is won, the second symbol display device stops and displays the symbol "○" after the second symbol is variably displayed. If the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variable display of the second symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol ("○" symbol in this embodiment), the electric accessory 28a attached to the middle start winning opening 28 is displayed for a predetermined time. is configured to be activated (opened) only.

The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set so as to be shorter during the time saving than during the normal game state. As a result, the variable display of the second symbols is performed in a short period of time during the time saving, so that more winning lotteries can be performed than during the normal period. Therefore, since the chance of winning in the winning lottery increases, the player can be given many chances of opening the electric accessory 28a of the medium start winning prize opening 28.例文帳に追加Therefore, during the time saving, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is likely to enter the middle start winning opening 28.例文帳に追加

It should be noted that during the time saving, the state where the ball is likely to win the middle start winning opening 28 during the time saving by other methods such as increasing the winning probability, increasing the opening time and the number of opening times of the electric accessory 28a for one time. In this case, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be fixed regardless of the game state. On the other hand, if the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set shorter than during the normal time during the time saving, the winning probability may be made constant regardless of the game state, and the electric role for one winning may be set. The opening time and number of openings of the object 28a may be fixed regardless of the game state.

The through gates 67 are assembled to the game board on the left and right sides of the movable ball entry accessory device 190, and are configured so that a part of the ball launched to the game board can pass through. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a win, the symbol "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and if the result of the winning lottery is a loss. For example, an "x" symbol is displayed as a variable display stop symbol.

The number of times the ball passes through the through gate 67 is suspended up to a total of four times, and the number of suspended balls is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B described above, and is displayed on the second symbol suspension lamp (not shown). is also displayed. Four second symbol holding lamps corresponding to the maximum number of holdings are provided, and arranged symmetrically below the movable ball entry accessory device 190 .

The variable display of the second pattern is performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second pattern display device as in the present embodiment. It may be performed using a part of the ball accessory device 190 . Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol holding lamp may be performed by a part of the movable ball entry accessory device 190 . Also, the maximum number of held balls for passage of the ball through the through gate 67 is not limited to 4, and may be set to 3 or less, or 5 or more (for example, 8). Also, the number of through gates 67 to be attached is not limited to one, and may be plural (for example, two). Also, the mounting position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the left and right of the movable ball-entering accessory device 190, and may be above the movable ball-entering accessory device 190, for example. In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol reservation lamp.

Left and right start winning openings 26 and 27 in which balls can win are provided at the left and right lower sides of the movable ball entry accessory device 190 . When the ball enters the left and right starting winning openings 26 and 27, the left starting winning opening switch 210a and the right starting winning opening switch 210b provided on the back side of the game board 13 are turned on, and the left starting winning opening switch 210a and the right starting winning opening switch 210a are turned on. A lottery is made by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 4) due to the turning on of the mouth switch 210b, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is displayed on the first symbol display device 37A, and the movable piece 190a is displayed a predetermined number of times (this It is opened once in this embodiment) and closed after a predetermined period of time (0.5 seconds in this embodiment).

On the other hand, on the center side of the left and right starting winning openings 26 and 27 in a front view, a middle starting winning opening 28 in which a ball can win a prize is arranged. When the ball enters the middle start prize opening 28, the middle start prize opening switch 210c provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on. ), a display corresponding to the lottery result is displayed on the first symbol display device 37B, and the movable piece 190a repeats opening and closing a predetermined number of times (two times in this embodiment) (opening period is 0.5 seconds, and the interval between the first and second is 2 seconds).

A lottery is performed for each of the starting prize-winning ports 26, 27, and 28 so that a 1/1 small prize is won. Therefore, in this embodiment, there is no jackpot lottery due to game balls passing through the respective start winning openings 26 , 27 , 28 . After the lottery, the movable piece 190a repeats opening and closing a predetermined number of times after a randomly selected opening period (1 to 5 seconds).

In addition, the left and right starting winning openings 26, 27 and the middle starting winning opening 28 are also one of the winning openings from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the left and right start prize-winning openings 26 and 27 and the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the middle start prize-winning opening 28 are configured to be the same. However, the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the left and right starting prize openings 26 and 27 and the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the middle start prize opening 28 are different numbers, for example, the left and right start prize winning. The number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the openings 26 and 27 may be three, and the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the middle start prize opening 28 may be five.

An electric accessary 28a is attached to the medium start winning opening 28. - 特許庁This electric accessory 28a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 28a is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to enter the middle start winning opening 28. On the other hand, as a result of the variable display of the second symbol triggered by the passage of the ball through the through gate 67, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device, the electric accessory 28a is in the open state (enlarged state), and the ball is in a state where it is easy for the ball to enter the middle start winning port 28.例文帳に追加

As described above, during time saving, the probability of winning the second symbol is higher than during normal time, and the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is short, so the symbol "○" in the variable display of the second symbol is more likely to be displayed, and the number of times the electric accessory 28a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Furthermore, during time saving, the time during which the electric accessory 28a is released is also longer than during normal operation. Therefore, during the time saving, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is more likely to enter the middle start winning opening 28 than in the normal time.

The probability of winning the 16R jackpot as the type of jackpot selected when the jackpot is won is set higher when the ball enters the middle start prize opening 28 than when the ball enters the left and right start prize openings 26, 27. (It is made easy to collectively enter a plurality of game balls into the movable ball entry accessory device 190). On the other hand, the left and right starting prize-winning ports 26 and 27 do not have an electric accessory like the middle-starting prize-winning port 28, and the ball can always win a prize.

A large winning opening switch 190b is arranged on the upper part of the movable ball entry accessory device 190. - 特許庁In the pachinko machine 10, after winning the left and right start winning openings 26, 27 or the middle starting winning opening 28, the game ball entering the movable ball entry accessory device 190 passes through the specific area hole 440. When the jackpot hits, the first pattern display device 37A or the first pattern display device 37B is turned on so that the jackpot stop pattern is displayed after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) elapses, and the stop pattern corresponding to the jackpot is movably entered. The occurrence of the big win is shown by displaying it on a part of the ball accessory device 190 . After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (jackpot, jackpot game) in which the ball is likely to win. As this special game state, the normally closed movable piece 190a is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or until 10 balls are won).

The large winning opening switch 190b is closed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and after the closure, the large winning opening switch 190b is opened again for a predetermined period of time. The opening and closing operation of the big winning slot switch 190b can be repeated up to, for example, 15 times (16 rounds excluding the first round). The state in which this opening and closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is given a game value (game value) by paying out a larger amount of prize balls than usual. is done.

Incidentally, the special game state is not limited to the form described above. A large opening that is opened and closed separately from the big winning opening switch 190b is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big win is lit on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the big winning opening switch 190b is opened for a predetermined time. A large opening provided separately from the large winning opening switch 190b is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when the ball enters the large winning opening switch 190b while the large winning opening switch 190b is open. The game state may be formed as a special game state. Also, the number of the big winning opening switch 190b is not limited to one, and one or a plurality of two or more (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is limited to the upper side of the movable ball entry accessory device 190. Instead, for example, it may be below the left and right start winning openings 26 and 27 .

An affixing space K1 for affixing a certificate stamp, an identification label, or the like is provided at the right corner of the lower side of the game board 13. 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with an out port 71 . Balls that flow down the game area and do not win in any of the winning holes 26, 27, 28, 63 are guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through an out hole 71. - 特許庁In addition, all the game balls hit into the game area, including the game balls entered into the movable ball entry accessory device 190, are recovered to the back side of the game board 13.例文帳に追加The collected game balls are discharged out of the frame from the back side of the pachinko machine 10 through an out passage assembly (not shown), and join the replenishment route of the island facility (not shown).

The game board 13 is provided with a large number of nails for properly dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the balls, and various members (accessories) such as windmills.

An example of the game of the gaming machine in this embodiment will be described. The purpose of the game of this embodiment is to pass the game ball through the specific area hole 440, shift the game state to the special game state, and obtain the prize ball. Therefore, the player adjusts the strength of the game ball so that the game ball slides down the upper surface of the center frame 86 and shoots it. As a result, when the game ball hits a large number of nails and enters each start winning opening 26, 27, 28, the movable piece 190a is opened. At this time, if the game ball can enter the movable ball entry accessory device 190 with good timing, the game ball passes through the specific area hole 440 according to the subsequent flow down mode of the game ball, so that the player can enter the game ball. By visually recognizing the flow of the ball, you can enjoy whether you can get a big hit or lose while watching the actual movement of the game ball.

That is, the first condition for obtaining a big hit is to open the movable piece 190a, and the second condition is to enter the game ball into the movable ball entry accessory device 190 when the movable piece 190b is opened.

Therefore, a hitting method that does not allow the game ball to reach the center frame 86 (so-called “choro hitting”) or a hitting method that allows the game ball to reach the return rubber 69 (so-called “right hitting”) is used to obtain a big hit in this embodiment. is disadvantageous.

As will be described later, in the present embodiment, a structure is adopted in which two game balls are easily entered into the movable ball entry accessory device 190 at the same time to obtain a big win. Therefore, the player shoots the game ball toward the upper end of the center frame 86 (the triangular pointed apex), causing the game ball to spread to the left and right. The aim is to hit two balls in total, one at a time, so that the game can be played so as to easily obtain a big win.

As shown in FIG. 3, on the rear side of the pachinko machine 10, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 as a unit. In addition, each control board has an MPU as a 1-chip microcomputer that manages each control, a port that communicates with various devices, a random number generator that is used for various lotteries, and is used for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as required.

The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113, the display control device 114, the payout control device 111, the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 has a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each controller and each board.

In addition, the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover in an unopenable manner (caulking structure) by a sealing unit (not shown). consolidation). A sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing seal is peeled off in order to open the circuit board boxes 100, 102, or if the circuit board boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base and the box cover may be damaged. cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100, 102 have been opened.

The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and open upward, a tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail 131 downstream of the tank rail 131. a case rail 132 vertically connected to the side of the case rail 132; ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall, and a payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131 .

In addition, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with an operation knob 121 of a variable resistor, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate ball clogging (return to normal state) when a dispensing error such as a ball clogging in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4) occurs. The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when the pachinko machine 10 is to be returned to its initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

The main control unit 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are incorporated. In the main control unit 110, the MPU 201 executes the main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as the display setting in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the lottery of the display results in the second symbol display device.

In addition, various commands are transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the sub-controllers such as the payout controller 111 and the sound lamp controller 113 to operate. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

The RAM 203 stores various areas, counters, flags, contents of internal registers of the MPU 201, return addresses of control programs executed by the MPU 201, etc., and a stack area for storing various flags, counters, I/O, and the like. and a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When power is interrupted due to power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of power interruption (including power failure; the same applies hereinafter). On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on due to the cancellation of the power failure; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203 . Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 119) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by the start-up process (see FIG. 118) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. , NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 117) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol display device, the second symbol reservation lamp, and the lower side of the movable piece 190a of the big winning opening switch 190b. A large opening solenoid 209a for opening and closing rotationally driving left and right about the axis, an electric accessory solenoid 209b for driving an electric accessory 28a, or various solenoid motors 209 consisting of a motor etc. are connected. Various commands and control signals are transmitted to them via the input/output port 205 .

Various direct switches 210 which are different from the various switches 208 and are directly involved in the benefits given to the players are directly connected to the MPU 201 without going through the input/output port 205 .

Various solenoid motors 209 include, at least, a large opening solenoid 209a for opening and closing rotationally driving the electric accessory 28a toward the left and right around the lower side of the movable piece 190a of the big winning opening switch 190b. It has an electric accessory solenoid 209b, a retention solenoid 413 (see FIG. 23) that drives the flow prevention plate 412, and a drive motor 421b (see FIG. 23) that drives the movable plate 421a.

In addition, the various direct switches 210 include a left start winning opening switch 210a (see FIG. 2), a right starting winning opening switch 210b (see FIG. 2), a middle starting winning opening switch 210c (see FIG. 2), and a first specific area switch. 441a (see FIG. 23), a second specific area switch 442a (see FIG. 23), and a third specific area switch 443a (see FIG. 23).

The input/output port 205 also includes various switches 208 including a group of switches (not shown) and a group of sensors including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply 115, which will be described later. , and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erasing signal SG2 output from the RAM erasing switch circuit 253 .

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 storing control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main controller 110, the dispensing motor 216, the launch controller 112, and the like. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout controller 111 but not to the main controller 110 .

The shooting control device 112 controls the ball shooting unit 112a so that the shooting strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues an instruction to shoot the ball. . The ball shooting unit 112a has a shooting solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the shooting stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball is turned off (not operated). A shooting solenoid is energized corresponding to the amount of rotation operation (rotation position) of the handle 51 , and the ball is shot with strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51 .

The audio lamp control device 113 outputs audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing from a lamp display device (electrical parts 29 to 33, an indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and changes production (variation It controls the setting of the display mode of the 7-segment display performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and advance notice effects. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory and the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the other device 228, the frame button 22, and the like.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). and an erase switch circuit 253 . The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts supplied from the outside, and uses 12 volts to drive various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the various solenoid motors 209, motors, and the like. voltage, 5 volt voltage for logic, backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage and backup voltage are applied to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like. supply.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 at the time of power failure due to power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of stable DC 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power shutdown, power shutdown) has occurred when this voltage is less than 22 volts. Then, a power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. Even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input, and controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. Send to device 111 .

5 to 9 are diagrams showing the details of the configuration of the first flow-down device 300. FIG. 5 is a front perspective view of the first flow-down device 300, and FIG. 6 is a front view of the first flow-down device 300. 7 is a side view of the first flow-down device 300 viewed in the direction of arrow VII in FIG. 6, and FIG. 8 is a top view of the first flow-down device 300 viewed in the direction of arrow VIII in FIG. FIG. 9 is a partial rear perspective view of the first flow-down device 300. FIG.

5 and 6, the illustration of the front side wall of the introduction passage 310 and the front side wall of the route distribution portion 320 is omitted for the sake of easy understanding (that is, the game ball is placed inside the introduction passage 310). And it flows down inside the route distribution part 320, and it is not a mode in which the game ball falls toward the front side (front side in FIG. 5)).

As shown in FIGS. 5 to 9, the first flow-down device 300 includes a pair of introduction passages 310 through which game balls that have passed through the big winning port switch 190b (see FIG. 2) are guided, and end positions of the introduction passages 310. A route distributing portion 320 connected to the introduction passage 310 at (the center position in the left-right direction) through which game balls flow down, a distributing inclined portion 330 that causes the game balls thrown from the route distributing portion 320 to flow down forward, and A definite area hole 340, which is a hole with a size that allows one game ball placed on the front side of the distribution slant part 330 at the center in the left-right direction of the distribution slant part 330, and the definite area hole 340 It mainly includes a deviating hole 350 that is larger than the determined area hole 340 at a position deviated from the left and right.

The introduction path 310 is a path formed symmetrically with an inner diameter through which a game ball can pass, and is inclined downward toward a centrally arranged route distribution section 320, and its end position (route distribution A connecting portion with the portion 320) includes a first projecting portion 311 and a second projecting portion 312. As shown in FIG.

The first protrusion 311 is a protrusion that protrudes upward across the front-to-rear width direction of the introduction passage 310 . The game ball decelerates by coming into contact with the first projecting portion 311 .

The second protruding portion 312 is an inclined surface portion that limits the flow direction of the game ball sent from the introduction passage 310 toward the route distribution portion 320. It extends in an inclined manner.

The route distribution unit 320 performs a distribution operation of distributing incoming game balls to a normal flow path (normal route) or a special flow path (special route). In addition, the route distribution section 320 includes a route distribution section guiding path 321, a distribution body 322 that rotates when a game ball comes into contact with it, and a pair of special routes that are opened in the horizontal direction of the distribution body 322. 323, a normal route hole 324 that is opened rearward under the distribution body 322, and a special route guideway 325 that allows game balls that have passed through the special route hole 323 to flow down toward the distribution slope portion 350. and a normal route guiding path 326 for causing the game ball that has passed through the normal route hole 324 to flow down toward the distribution slope portion 350.例文帳に追加

The route distribution part guiding path 321 is a passage extending vertically downward for guiding the game balls from the introduction passage 310 to the distribution body 322, and is formed with a width that allows two game balls to be arranged side by side. .

The sorting body 322 is a member that is rotatably supported, and includes a fan-shaped section 322a arranged below the rotating shaft in an equilibrium state (see FIG. 6), and an intermediate part in the circumferential direction of the fan-shaped section 322a. It mainly includes a plate-like portion 322b extending from a position in a direction passing through the rotation axis (upward in FIG. 5) and integrally formed with the fan-like portion 322a.

As shown in FIG. 6, the fan-shaped portion 322a has a shape (a shape in which the left and right flat portions extend toward the special route hole 323) that guides (inflows) game balls into the special route hole 323 in a balanced state. be done.

The plate-like portion 322b is arranged in a first angular state (see FIG. 11(b)) and a second angular state (see FIG. 11(c)) when the distributing body 322 is positioned between a first angular state (see FIG. 11(b)) and a second angular state (see FIG. 11(c)). The distance between the two projecting portions 312 is extended to a length that is at least equal to or less than the diameter of the game ball.

The special route holes 323 are through holes drilled in the side walls of the route distribution portion 320 and are arranged as a pair of through holes opened in the horizontal direction of the distribution body 322 . The special route hole 323 guides the game ball entering the special route hole 323 to the special route guideway 325 . The special route guideway 325 is provided with special route switches 325a1 and 325b1, and game balls entering the special route hole 323 are detected by the special route switches 325a1 and 325b1.

The normal route hole 324 is a through hole formed in the rear wall portion near the bottom wall portion of the route distribution portion 320 . The normal route hole 324 has a raised portion 324a formed in the center thereof to reduce the height of the opening. Due to this raised portion 324a, the opening height of the central portion of the normal route hole 324 is made smaller than the diameter of the game ball. pass through the edge.

The special route guideway 325 includes a left guideway 325a and a right guideway 325b extending from a pair of special route holes 323, and they are formed symmetrically and asymmetrically in the longitudinal direction.

That is, the left guideway 325a has a left detection switch 325a1 for detecting the passage of the game ball inside it, and extends toward the front side and then vertically downward, while the right guideway 325b Equipped with a right detection switch 325b1 for detecting passage of game balls inside, it extends vertically downward without extending to the front side. By differentiating the front and rear arrangement in this manner, when the game balls pass through the pair of special route holes 323 at the same time, the game balls landing on the distribution inclined portion 330 are prevented from colliding in the left-right direction. can be done. As a result, the game ball that has passed through the special route guideway 325 can easily pass through the fixed area.

The special route switches 325a1 and 325b1 are sensors that detect passage of game balls. By confirming the detection signals of the special route switches 325a1 and 325b1, it is possible to determine how many game balls have passed through the special route.

Incidentally, the special route switches 325a1 and 325b1 may be used as a trigger for executing the effect. For example, within a predetermined period of time (for example, two seconds in the present embodiment) when the game ball passes through both the special route switches 325a1 and 325b1, then a plurality of game balls pass through the defined area hole 340, and the more advantageous side Since it is easy to win a big hit, when it is detected that the game ball has passed through both the special route switches 325a1 and 325b1, the player's interest can be heightened by performing intense fanning (intense light emission, sound effect). .

On the other hand, when the game ball is detected only at one of the special route switches 325a1 and 325b1 due to the irregular flow of the game ball, even if the game ball passes through the defined area hole 340, after that, any jackpot Since it is unknown whether the game will be successful (whether it will be a big hit on the side with the larger number of prize balls), the player's interest can be slightly enhanced by performing a modest stimulus (moderate light emission, sound effect).

In addition, for example, when repeatedly detecting that a game ball enters one of the special route switches 325a1 and 325b1 (for example, detecting three times in a row), it is illegal to fix the sorting body 322 in some way. By judging that the game is being performed and issuing an error, it is possible to prevent the player from cheating.

Since the exit of the special route guideway 325 is arranged near the front end of the distribution slope 330, the game ball discharged from the special route guideway 325 hits the protrusion 331 of the distribution slope 330. It flows down toward the front center side without touching.

The normal route guideway 326 extends rearward from both left and right ends of the normal route hole 324 while being inclined outward in the left-right direction, and extends vertically downward at its rear end. Since the exit of the normal route guideway 326 is arranged near the rear end of the distribution slope 330, the game ball discharged from the normal route guideway 326 hits the protrusion 331 of the distribution slope 330. It flows down toward the front side while touching.

The distribution inclined portion 330 is an inclined surface portion in which the cross section of the plane orthogonal to the front-rear direction is formed by a curved shape with a sunken central portion, and a plurality of protruding portions 331 are scattered and protuberantly provided on the middle portion.

A plurality of protrusions 331 are arranged in a row with inclination toward the right and left ends toward the front side, and a gap of about the diameter of a game ball is provided in the intermediate portion. Therefore, while most of the game balls discharged from the normal route guiding path 326 are flowed toward the left and right ends by the protrusions 331, some game balls pass through the gaps and go to the defined area hole 340.

The projecting portion 331 is arranged behind the position where the game ball discharged from the special route guideway 325 contacts the distribution slope portion 330 (upstream side of the distribution slope portion 330). Therefore, the game ball discharged from the special route guideway 325 can flow down to the front side while heading toward the center along the curved shape of the distribution inclined portion 330 without colliding with the protrusion 331. It becomes easier to pass through the area hole 340 .

On the other hand, the game ball discharged from the normal route guideway 326 flows down the distribution slope portion 330 while colliding with the protrusion 331, so whether or not the game ball passes through the defined area hole 340 is a random flow of the game ball. entrusted to sex. In this embodiment, since the release holes 350 arranged on the left and right sides of the defined area hole 340 are opened larger than the defined area hole 340, the game ball discharged from the normal route guideway 326 easily passes through the hole 350. Become.

That is, in this embodiment, a game ball passing through the special route guideway 325 can easily pass through the defined area hole 340 compared to a game ball passing through the normal route guideway 326. .

In addition, the game ball that entered the defined area hole 340 will pass through the defined area after that, and the game ball that has entered the exit hole 350 will be discharged without passing through the specific area after that. Become.

Here, a definite area switch 340a (see FIG. 5) is provided in the definite area, and game balls passing through the definite area are detected by the definite area switch 340a. In addition, an out passage (not shown) is formed at the lower edge of the movable ball entry accessory device 190 (see FIG. 2). For this reason, the game ball that enters the deviation hole 350 without entering the defined area hole 340 is guided to the out passage, and is discharged from the movable ball entry accessory device 190 without passing through the defined area or the specific area. be. A game ball flowing down the out passage passes through the discharge detection switch 190c, and a game ball passing through the out passage is detected by the discharge detection switch 190c. In addition, in this embodiment, the game ball that has passed through the defined area hole 340 is also configured to join the out passage and pass through the discharge detection switch 190c.

The discharge detection switch 190c detects the difference in the number of detected game balls that have entered the big winning opening switch 190b, and the difference disappears within a predetermined period (for example, within 15 seconds), so that the game can be stably performed. This is a switch to confirm that the For example, when game balls accumulate on the protrusion 331 of the distribution slope portion 330 and discharge of the game balls is delayed, it can be determined that a game ball discharge error has occurred, and an alarm can be set.

The sorting body 322 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 and 11. FIG. 10 is an exploded front perspective view of the sorting body 322, and FIGS. 11(a) to 11(c) are front views of the sorting body 322. FIG. 10 and 11(a) show the equilibrium state of the sorting body 322, and in FIG. 11(b), the first angle .theta. Angular states are illustrated, and FIG. 11C illustrates a second angular state in which the sorting body 322 rotates clockwise by a second angle θ2 from the first angular state. 11(a) to 11(c) show enlarged partial cross-sectional views at an intermediate position in the axial direction (perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 11) of the sorting body 322. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 10, the sorting body 322 includes the fan-shaped portion 322a, the plate-shaped portion 322b, and a pair of annular connecting rings that connect the fan-shaped portion 322a and the plate-shaped portion 322b at the front and rear ends. It has a portion 322c and an inner circumference that is flush with the inner circumference of the connecting ring portion 322c, and extends in the front-rear direction (axial direction of the sorting body 322) between the pair of connecting ring portions 322c. A resistance extending portion 322d formed of a split ring shape in which a cross section perpendicular to the extending direction is divided into halves, and a pair of connecting ring portions 322c are connected in a phase range where the resistance extending portion 322d is not formed. A spaced central portion 322e recessed radially outward from the inner peripheral surface of the ring portion 322c, and a rod-like member communicating with the pair of connecting ring portions 322c and provided on the back side wall of the route distribution portion 320. and a fixed pivot rod 322f.

The shaft support rod 322f is a member that is adhesively fixed to the rear side wall of the route distribution portion 320 and extends to the vicinity of the front side wall (not shown), and is composed of a cylindrical shape with an outer diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the connecting ring portion 322c. and a connecting rod portion 322f2, which is a rod-shaped member that connects the cylindrical support portions 322f1 and has a smaller cross-sectional shape than the cylindrical support portion 322f1.

The pair of columnar support portions 322f1 are arranged coaxially, and the spaced apart in the axial direction is the same as the spaced apart between the connecting ring portions 322c. As a result, the pair of supporting columnar portions 322f1 can support the pair of connecting ring portions 322c, so that the supporting state can be stabilized, and the rotating state of the fan-shaped portion 322a and the plate-shaped portion 322b can be stabilized. be able to.

As shown in FIG. 10, the connecting rod portion 322f2 has a substantially lower semi-circumferential portion that is flush with the outer periphery of the columnar support portion 322f1, and a substantially semi-circumferential upper portion that is recessed radially inward. The purpose will be described with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 11(a) and 11(b), the sorting body 322 is between the equilibrium state (see FIG. 11(a)) and the first angle state (see FIG. 11(b)). In this case, since the connecting rod portion 322f2 and the resistance extending portion 322d are separated from each other, frictional resistance is generated between the connecting rod portion 322f2 and the resistance extending portion 322d even if the distribution body 322 starts rotating. No. Therefore, in the state between the equilibrium state and the first angle state, the sorting body 322 can be easily rotated (rotational resistance can be suppressed).

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 11(b) and 11(c), the sorting body 322 is in the first angular state (see FIG. 11(b)) and the second angular state (see FIG. 11(c)). , the area of contact between the connecting rod portion 322f2 and the extended resistance portion 322d increases toward the second angle state. The resulting frictional resistance can be increased. Therefore, compared to the state between the equilibrium state and the first angle state, the distribution body 322 can be made less likely to rotate (rotational resistance can be increased).

Therefore, when the game ball abuts on the distributing body 322, the distributing body 322 can be rotated quickly at the start of the abutment, and the distributing body 322 can be rotated in such a manner that the force of rotation is gradually weakened.

The sorting operation of the route sorting unit 320 will be described with reference to FIGS. 12 to 22 . First, with reference to FIGS. 12 and 13, the case where one game ball A1 has flowed into the route distribution section 320 will be described. 12(a), 12(b) and 13 are partial front views of the first flow-down device 300. FIG. 12(a) shows the equilibrium state of the sorting body 322, FIG. 12(b) shows the first angle state of the sorting body 322, and FIG. 13 shows the second angle state of the sorting body 322. In addition, the flowing down of the game ball A1 is illustrated in chronological order.

As shown in FIG. 12(a), the game ball A1 that has flowed down the introduction passage 310 crosses over the first projecting portion 311 while being decelerated in the left-right direction by contacting the first projecting portion 311, and reaches the second projecting portion. It flows downward along the inclined surface of the portion 312 (towards the pivot rod 322f). Therefore, the game ball A1 is thrown vigorously to the left from the introduction passage 310 and is prevented from climbing over the distribution body 322, and lands on the left and right ends of the fan-shaped portion 322a (positions close to the special route hole 323). is prevented.

From the state shown in FIG. 12(a), when the game ball A1 rolls on the upper surface of the second projecting portion 312a and flows down, the game ball A1 flows down along the arrow A1x shown in FIG. 12(b), It rolls along the slope of the fan-shaped portion 322a and reaches the position shown in FIG. 12(b) (position close to the special route hole 323).

12(a) to the first angle state shown in FIG. 12(b). By landing, the distribution body 322 rotates by the weight of the game ball A1. Therefore, the bouncing of the game ball A1 from the sorting body 322 is suppressed (absorbed), and the game ball A1 flows down in a state of pushing the sorting body 322.例文帳に追加

As shown in FIG. 12(b), the game ball A1 rolls on the upper surface of the fan-shaped portion 322a until the distribution body 322 reaches the first angular state (in this embodiment, about 0.5 seconds). Then, it flows downward to the right and reaches the front side of the special route hole 323 (left side in FIG. 12(b)). In this state, since the inclined surface of the fan-shaped portion 322a (the surface on which the game ball A1 rides) is sunk below the bottom surface of the entrance of the special route hole 323, the game ball A1 passes through the special route hole 323. be prevented from doing so.

Thereafter, the distribution body 322 is further rotated by the load applied from the game ball A1, and enters the second angular state shown in FIG. It drops downward and heads for the normal root hole 324 .

That is, when one game ball A1 flows into the route distribution section 320, the game ball A1 passes through the normal route hole 324.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 14 and 15, the case where two game balls A2 and A3 flow into the route distribution section 320 from the left and right at the same time will be described. 14(a), 14(b) and 15 are partial front views of the first flow-down device 300. FIG. 14(a), 14(b), and 15 show the balanced state of the sorting body 322, and the flow of the game balls A2 and A3 in chronological order.

As shown in FIG. 14(a), the game balls A2 and A3 that have flowed down the introduction passage 310 cross over the first projecting portion 311 while being decelerated in the horizontal direction by coming into contact with the first projecting portion 311, and reach the first position. It flows downward (towards the pivot rod 322f) along the inclined surface of the 2 projecting portion 312 .

Therefore, the game balls A2 and A3 are vigorously thrown from the lead-in passage 310 in the left-right direction and are prevented from getting over the distribution body 322, and the left and right ends of the fan-shaped portion 322a (positions close to the special route hole 323). is prevented from landing on

From the state shown in FIG. 14(a), when the game balls A2 and A3 roll on the upper surface of the second protruding portion 312a and flow down, the game balls A2 and A3 follow the arrows A1x and A2x shown in FIG. 14(b). After flowing down along, it lands on the inclined surface of the fan-shaped portion 322a. Note that the arrow A2x is a left-right reversed arrow of the arrow A1x.

Here, since the load applied to the sorting body 322 in the direction of rotation about the shaft support rod 322f is balanced, the rotation of the sorting body 322 is suppressed, and the sorting body 322 maintains a balanced state. Even while the game balls A2 and A3 flow left and right along the slope of the upper surface of the fan-shaped portion 322a, the game balls A2 and A3 flow in the same manner, so that the distribution body 322 is maintained in an equilibrium state. Therefore, the inclined surface of the fan-shaped portion 322a (the surface on which the game balls A2 and A3 are placed) is suppressed from sinking downward from the bottom surface of the entrance of the special route hole 323 (smoothly connected without a step). A2 and A3 flow into the hole 323 for special route.

That is, when two game balls A2 and A3 flow into the route distribution section 320 at the same time, the game balls A2 and A3 pass through the hole 323 for special route.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 16 to 18, the case where two game balls A4 and A5 flow into the route sorting section 320 at timings slightly shifted from left to right (for example, timings shifted by 0.5 seconds) will be described. do. 16(a), 16(b), 17(a), 17(b) and 18 are partial front views of the first flow-down device 300. FIG. 16A shows the equilibrium state of the sorting body 322, FIG. 16B shows the first angle state of the sorting body 322, and FIG. 17A shows the first angle state of the sorting body 322. As a state between the angular state and the second angular state, in FIG. 17B, the state between the first angular state and the equilibrium state of the sorting body 322 is shown, and in FIG. are shown, respectively, and the flow of game balls A4 and A5 is shown in chronological order.

In addition, in this embodiment, since the opening period of the movable piece 190b is 0.5 seconds, the game ball that enters the game ball by opening once does not cause a time delay of 0.5 seconds or more. is an example in which the game ball is shifted by the maximum deviation width (for example, one game ball A4 enters immediately after the opening of the movable piece 190b starts, and the other game ball A5 enters just before the movable piece 190b closes). sphere example).

As shown in FIG. 16(a), the game balls A4 and A5 that have flowed down the introduction passage 310 cross over the first projecting portion 311 while being decelerated in the horizontal direction by coming into contact with the first projecting portion 311, and reach the first position. It flows downward (towards the pivot rod 322f) along the inclined surface of the 2 projecting portion 312 .

Therefore, the game balls A4 and A5 are vigorously thrown from the lead-in passage 310 in the horizontal direction and are prevented from getting over the distribution body 322, and the left and right ends of the fan-shaped portion 322a (positions close to the special route hole 323). is prevented from landing on

From the state shown in FIG. 16(a), when the preceding game ball A4 rolls on the upper surface of the second projecting portion 312a and flows down, it flows down along the arrow A1x and then lands on the inclined surface of the fan-shaped portion 322a. Then, the sorting body 322 rotates clockwise and enters the first angular state shown in FIG. 16(b).

From the state shown in FIG. 16(b) until the game ball A5 lands on the distribution body 322, the distribution body 322 rotates further clockwise due to the weight of the game ball A4. In the state shown in a) (between the first angle state and the second angle state), the rotational resistance of the sorting body 322 increases and the rotation speed becomes slow. period can be lengthened. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball A4 from falling out of the distribution body 322 due to the distribution body 322 being in the second angular state before the subsequent game ball A5 lands on the distribution body 322. - 特許庁

As shown in FIG. 17(a), when the game ball A5 lands on the fan-shaped portion 322b, loads are applied to the distribution body 322 from both directions of rotation, and the loads in the rotation direction are balanced (cancelled). , as shown in FIG. 17(b), the sorting body 322 approaches an equilibrium state. Furthermore, by balancing the loads applied to the distribution body 322 from the game balls A4 and A5, the distribution body 322 is in an equilibrium state as shown in FIG. The surface on which A2 and A3 are placed is suppressed from sinking downward from the bottom surface of the entrance of the special route hole 323 (smoothly connected without a step), and the game balls A4 and A5 flow into the special route hole 323. be.

That is, when the two game balls A4 and A5 flow into the route sorting section 320 at slightly different timings, the game balls A4 and A5 pass through the hole 323 for special route. In this way, even if a plurality of game balls arrive with a time delay of 0.5 seconds, which is the opening period of the movable piece 190a, the distributing body 322 in the embodiment absorbs the deviation and opens the special route hole. 323 is configured in such a manner that a game ball can be thrown.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 19 and 20, the case where two game balls A6 and A7 flow into the route distribution section 320 from one side will be described. 19(a), 19(b), 20(a) and 20(b) are partial front views of the first flow-down device 300. FIG. 19A shows the equilibrium state of the sorting body 322, FIG. 19B shows the first angle state of the sorting body 322, and FIG. 20A shows the first angle state of the sorting body 322. As a state between the angular state and the second angular state, in FIG. 20(b), the distributing body 322 is illustrated as a state between the first angular state and the equilibrium state, and game balls A6, The flow of A7 is illustrated in chronological order.

As shown in FIG. 19(a), the game balls A6 and A7 that have flowed down the introduction passage 310 cross over the first projecting portion 311 while being decelerated in the horizontal direction by coming into contact with the first projecting portion 311, It flows downward (towards the pivot rod 322f) along the inclined surface of the 2 projecting portion 312 .

Therefore, the game balls A6 and A7 are thrown from the lead-in passage 310 vigorously in the horizontal direction and prevented from getting over the distribution body 322, and the left and right ends of the fan-shaped portion 322a (positions close to the special route hole 323). is prevented from landing on

In addition, when the game balls A6 and A7 flow down the lead-in passage 310 in a row, the game ball A6 contacts the first projecting portion 311 and is decelerated. The game ball A7 is decelerated while coming into contact with the game ball A6, and after the game ball A6 runs over the first projecting portion 311 and flows down, the game ball A7 comes into contact with the first projecting portion 311 and is decelerated. As a result, an interval is provided between the previous game ball A6 and the subsequent game ball A7 (about 1 second in this embodiment).

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 19(b), after the game ball A6 flows down along the arrow A1x, it lands on the inclined surface of the fan-shaped portion 322a, and after the distribution body 322 is rotated to the first angle state, , and is in the middle of getting over the first projecting portion 311 .

From the state shown in FIG. 19(b) until the game ball A7 lands on the distribution body 322, the distribution body 322 rotates further clockwise due to the weight of the game ball A6. In the state shown in a) (between the first angle state and the second angle state), the rotational resistance of the sorting body 322 increases and the rotation speed becomes slow. period can be lengthened. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball A6 from falling out of the distribution body 322 due to the distribution body 322 being in the second angular state before the subsequent game ball A7 lands on the distribution body 322. - 特許庁

After that, as shown in FIG. 20(a), the distribution body 322 is further rotated clockwise by the load of the game ball A6, so that the tip of the plate-like portion 322b approaches the second projecting portion 312 on the right side. . In this state, the game ball A7 rolls on the inclined surface of the second projecting portion 312 and flows down along the arrow A1x, thereby rolling on the upper surface of the plate-like portion 322b. Land on the left side. That is, the game balls A6 and A7 can be sorted to the left and right of the sorting body 322 by the plate-like portion 322b.

In addition, in this embodiment, the game ball A7 flows down at a speed toward the center of rotation of the distribution body 311 by the second projecting portion 312, so that the rotation angle of the plate-like portion 322b is insufficient (for example, FIG. 19 ( b) Even if the game ball A7 flows downward from the second projecting portion 312 in the state shown in b), the tip of the plate-like portion 322b (and between the second projecting portion 312) supports the game ball A7. By further rotating the distribution body 322 clockwise from there, the game ball A7 can reliably flow down to the left of the distribution body 322. - 特許庁

As shown in FIG. 20(a), when the game ball A7 lands on the left side of the fan-shaped portion 322b, loads are applied to the distribution body 322 from both directions of rotation, and the loads in the rotation direction are balanced (cancelled). ), so as shown in FIG. Furthermore, by balancing the loads applied to the distribution body 322 by the game balls A6 and A57, the distribution body 322 is in an equilibrium state, so that the inclined surface of the fan-shaped portion 322a (on which the game balls A6 and A7 ride) surface) is suppressed from sinking downward from the bottom surface of the entrance of the special route hole 323 (smoothly connected without a step), and the game balls A6 and A7 flow into the special route hole 323.

That is, when two game balls A6 and A7 flow into the route distribution section 320 from one side in a row, the game balls A6 and A7 pass through the hole 323 for special route.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 21 and 22, the case where two game balls A8 and A9 flow into the route sorting section 320 at greatly deviated timings (about 2 seconds in this embodiment) will be described. In such a state, for example, the movable piece 190a (see FIG. 2) is opened twice with one actuation opportunity, and each time it is opened, one game ball is released to the big winning opening switch 190b (see FIG. 2). ).

21(a), 21(b) and 22 are partial front views of the first flow-down device 300. FIG. 21(a) shows the second angular state of the sorting body 322, and in FIG. 3, the balanced state of the distribution body 322 is illustrated, and the downflow of game balls A8 and A9 is illustrated in time series.

As shown in FIG. 21(a), the distribution body 322 is placed in the second angle state by the load of the game ball A8, and after the game ball A8 is dropped, the distribution body 322 starts rotating toward the equilibrium state. However, since the rotational resistance is increased between the second angular state and the first angular state, the sorting body 322 rotates slowly.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 21(b), the game ball A9 lands on the distribution body 322 in a state between the first angle state and the second angle state. Here, since the rotational resistance of the distribution body 322 is large, the game ball A9 does not push the distribution body 322 like when it lands on the distribution body 322 in the equilibrium state. bounces on the inclined surface of the sorting body 322 and the angular state of the sorting body 322 is maintained between the first angular state and the second angular state.

Therefore, when the game ball A9 lands on the distributing body 322, the distributing body 322 does not immediately pass through the equilibrium state and the distributing body 322 turns to the opposite left and right side, and the distributing body 322 rotates slowly. Therefore, after placing the game ball A9 on the side (right and left end sides of the fan-shaped portion 322a) near the special route hole 323 along the inclination of the fan-shaped portion 322b, the distribution body 322 is allowed to reach an equilibrium state. can be done. As a result, as shown in FIG. 22(b), the game ball A9 can flow into the special route hole 323 at the same time as the distribution body 322 is brought into equilibrium.

That is, when the two game balls A8 and A9 flow into the route distribution section 320 at a timing that is greatly shifted (in this embodiment, about 2 seconds), the previous game ball A8 passes through the normal route hole 324. , the later game ball A9 passes through the hole 323 for special route.

In order to achieve this, in the present embodiment, after the game ball contacts the distribution body 322 and changes the state of the distribution body 322 from the equilibrium state to the second angle state, it returns to the first angle state. The period (approximately 4 seconds) is set to be equal to or longer than the interval (2 seconds in this embodiment) from closing to opening when the movable piece 190a (see FIG. 2) is opened twice.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the period required for the game ball that has passed through the normal route hole 324 to pass through the normal route guideway 326 and the distribution slope portion 330 and reach the defined area hole 340 is from 4 seconds to 5 seconds. Designed to fit in seconds. In addition, the period required for the game ball that has passed through the special route hole 323 to pass through the special route guideway 325 and the distribution slope portion 330 and reach the fixed area hole 340 is set to be 2 seconds to 3 seconds. Designed.

That is, for example, in FIG. 21(a), when both the game balls A8 and A9 reach the definite area hole 340, the game ball A8 enters the definite area about 4 to 5 seconds after the state of FIG. 21(a). After reaching the hole 340, the game ball A9 moves from the state shown in FIG. 21(a) to the state shown in FIG. 21 (a) after 2.5 seconds to 3.5 seconds), it reaches the defined area hole 340 (equilibrium state is reached in about 1 second, and the reaching area hole 340). Therefore, the game balls A8 and A9 reach the defined area hole 340 with a difference of 2.5 seconds at the maximum.

In this way, when two game balls enter the movable ball entrance accessory device 190 by one small winning lottery, the maximum deviation interval when these game balls reach the fixed area hole 340 is It is set to approximately 2.5 seconds. Based on this, the extension period of the retention solenoid 413 of the second flow-down device 400, which will be described later, is set to 5 seconds. As a result, it is possible to ensure that a plurality of game balls are retained by the flow blocking plate 412 and then flowed down again.

Next, the second falling device 400 in which the game balls that have passed through the determined area hole 340 (see FIG. 5) of the first falling device 300 flow down will be described.

23 is a front perspective view of the second flow-down device 400, and FIG. 24 is a front view of the second flow-down device 400. FIG. As shown in FIGS. 23 and 24, the second flow-down device 400 is a device for flowing down the game ball that has passed through the defined area hole 340 (see FIG. 5), which is composed of a plurality of branched flow paths. A first branch area 410 that branches into two, and a second branch guide flow path R2, which is the upper flow path branched from the first branch area 410. A game ball that has flowed down a second branched region 420 that branches into two and a third branch guide channel R3 that is a lower channel branched from the first branched region 410 reaches and reaches the second branched channel 420 A third branch area 430, which is an area where the game ball that has flowed down the special guidance channel R4, which is the channel on the front side branched by , reaches, and where the channel branches into two, and a plurality of discharges of the game ball , and the branch areas 410 to 430 are connected to guiding flow paths R1 to R6 for guiding game balls.

The first branch guiding flow path R1 is a flow path in which a game ball that has passed through the defined area hole 340 (see FIG. 5) is guided, and after extending to the lower right, the direction that deviates slightly to the right from the vertical direction ( downwardly sloping direction toward the lower right) and is connected to the first branch region 410 from above. That is, the game ball flows into the first branch area 410 along a direction slightly deviating to the right from the vertical direction (diagonally lower right direction). In the present embodiment, the first branch guiding flow path R1 is configured to discharge the inflowing game ball to the first branch area 410 in 3 seconds at the maximum.

The second branch guidance flow path R2 is an upper flow path branched from the first branch region 410, extends downward to the left, and is connected to the second branch region 420 from the right side.

The third branch guide flow path R3 is a lower flow path branched from the first branch region 410, and extends in a downwardly inclined direction toward the front side, and then in a direction downwardly inclined to the left. After extending vertically downward, it is connected to the third branch region 430 from above.

The special guide channel R4 is a channel on the near side branched from the second branch region 420, and after extending vertically downward, joins the vertically extending portion of the third branch guide channel R3 from above. do. After the game ball flows into the special guiding channel R4, it takes one second to reach the distribution protrusion 431 and flow to either the left or right channel.

The first delay induction channel R5 is a right channel branched from the third branch region 430, extends downward to the right, and has a second specific region hole 442 at its lower end.

The second delay induction channel R6 is a rear-side channel branched from the second branch region 420, extends downward to the left, and has a third specific region hole 443 at the left end.

As shown in FIG. 24, the third branch guidance flow path R3 has a longer path than the second branch guidance flow path R2, but has a greater inclination angle. Therefore, it is possible to uniformize the flow-down positions (left-right positions) of the game balls flowing down the respective induction paths R2 and R3. In the present embodiment, two game balls simultaneously thrown from the first branch area 410 to the second branch guide channel R2 and the third branch guide channel R3 stop in the second branch guide channel R2. The shape of the flow path is designed so that when the ball enters the special guidance flow path R4 without any movement, the balls come into contact with each other in the vertical direction at the confluence position.

As shown in FIG. 24, the first delay induction channel R5 has a larger inclination angle and a shorter extension length than the second delay induction channel R6. That is, compared to the case where the game ball passes through the first delay guide channel R5 (about 2 seconds in this embodiment), the case where the game ball passes through the second delay guide channel R6 (about 2 seconds in this embodiment) 5 seconds), the staying time of the game ball is longer. In addition, a plurality of deceleration projections for decelerating the game ball are provided on the bottom surface of each guide flow path R5, R6.

The specific region hole 440 includes a first specific region hole 441 arranged in the left channel branched from the third branch region 430 and a second specific region hole 441 arranged in the lower end of the first delay guide channel R5. It mainly includes a region hole 442 and a third specific region hole 443 arranged at the left end of the second delay induction channel R6.

The first specific area hole 441 is a hole for guiding the game ball to the first specific area for the 16-round jackpot, and the first specific area switch 441a is provided directly below it. Thereby, the game ball passing through the first specific area hole 441 and passing through the first specific area is detected by the first specific area switch 441a.

The second specific area hole 442 is a hole for guiding the game ball to the second specific area for the 7-round jackpot, and the second specific area switch 442a is arranged directly below it. Thereby, the game ball passing through the second specific area hole 442 and passing through the second specific area is detected by the second specific area switch 442a.

The third specific area hole 443 is a hole for guiding the game ball to the third specific area for the 3-round jackpot, and the third specific area switch 443a is arranged directly below it. Thereby, the game ball passing through the third specific area hole 443 and passing through the third specific area is detected by the third specific area switch 443a.

Here, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, for example, even if the game ball passes through the third specific area and the game ball passes through the first specific area while the three-round jackpot effect is being executed, , the game ball becomes invalid (not interrupted because the 3R jackpot process is already running), and the 16-round jackpot effect is not executed. Therefore, it has been a cause of player's dissatisfaction. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when a game ball can pass through a plurality of specific areas, the game ball is configured to first pass through the specific area that provides more profit to the player. be. The details will be described later.

The configuration of the first branch region 410 will be described with reference to FIG. 25 . 25 is a partial front view of the second flow-down device 400 in area XXV of FIG. 24. FIG. As shown in FIG. 25, the first branched region 410 abuts from the right side of the game ball flowing down the first branch guide channel R1, and reflects the game ball toward the second branched channel R2. and a flow prevention configured to be capable of appearing and retracting in such a manner as to switch between a protruding state extending inwardly of the second branch guiding flow path R2 and the third branch guiding flow path R3 and a retracted state retreating outward. It has a plate 412 and a retention solenoid 413 that drives the flow blocking plate 412 and is arranged on the back side of the second branch guidance channel R2.

The contact wall 411 is a side wall extending vertically upward with a length equal to or less than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, the distribution of the game balls can be changed depending on whether there is one game ball coming toward the contact wall 411 or when there are two or more game balls. How the contact wall 411 distributes game balls will be described with reference to FIG.

In the overhanging state, the flow blocking plate 412 narrows the size of the inner openings of the second branch guiding flow path R2 and the third branch guiding flow path R3 to the diameter of the game ball or less to stop the game ball. On the other hand, in the retracted state, the flow blocking plate 412 is sunk outside the second branch guide channel R2 and the third branch guide channel R3, so that the game ball is released from stagnation.

That is, by keeping the flow-down prevention plate 412 in the overhanging state, it is possible to temporarily stop the game ball that has flowed down the first branch guide flow path R1 and reached the left side of the contact wall 411, and then, By switching the driving state of the staying solenoid 413 to put the flow prevention plate 412 in the retracted state, the game ball can be thrown to the left. Therefore, the timing of throwing the game ball downward from the vicinity of the contact wall 411 can be arbitrarily defined depending on the control of the retention solenoid 413 .

26(a) to 26(c) are partial front views of the second flow-down device 400 in the area XXV of FIG. 24. FIG. 26(a) to 26(c) show how two game balls B1 and B2 flow into the first specific area 410 in chronological order. The state immediately before the entered game ball B1 contacts the contact wall 411 is illustrated, and in FIG. 26(b), the game ball B2 entered later contacts the game ball B1 and is pushed away to the right. FIG. 26(c) shows a state in which the game balls B1 and B2 are separated, the game ball B1 flows into the second branch guiding flow path R2, and the game ball B2 flows into the third branch guiding flow path R3. is illustrated. 26(a) to 26(c), the flow blocking plate 412 is shown in an overhanging state.

As shown in FIG. 26(a), the previous game ball B1 flows downward along the extending direction of the first branch induction path R1, and collides with the contact wall 411 on the right side. After landing on the bottom plate of the second branch guide channel R2 together with the second branch guide channel R2, it flows down the second branch guide channel R2 to the left.

At this time, the game ball B1 starts to flow leftward into the second branch guiding flow path R2 from a state in which the speed in the horizontal direction is suppressed (a state in which it has landed). Then, at the position where it rebounds leftward from the contact wall 411 (see FIG. 26(b)), the flow is blocked by the flow blocking plate 412 and stays for a while.

As the game ball B2 flows into the first branch area 410 while the game ball B1 is staying, the game ball B2 contacts the game ball B1 before contacting the contact wall 411. - 特許庁At the time of this contact, the game ball B1 is placed at a position slightly shifted to the left from the contact wall 411, and the game ball B2 hits the game ball B1 from above on the right side of the center of the game ball B1. touch. Therefore, due to the contact, a rightward load is applied from the game ball B1 to the game ball B2.

Also, since the game ball B2 has a velocity component in the lower right direction along the extending direction of the first branch guide flow path R1, it moves rightward after contact with the game ball B1. Here, since the extension height of the contact wall 411 is shorter than the diameters of the game balls B1 and B2, the game ball B2 can be moved to the right while overcoming the contact wall 411.例文帳に追加As a result, the game ball B2 flows down the third branch guiding flow path R3, is blocked by the flow blocking plate 412 below the game ball B1, and stays there for a while.

The staying solenoid 413 is the period (this When a period sufficiently longer than (in this embodiment, 5 seconds) has passed (in this embodiment, 3 seconds), the drive state is switched to the retracted state. Therefore, even if the two game balls B1 and B2 flow into the first branch guide flow path R1 at different intervals, the flow start timing when the game balls B1 and B2 stop once and start flowing again. And the flow starting position can be fixed.

When two game balls B1 and B2 collectively enter the first branch area 410, the subsequent game ball B2 is entered into the third branch guidance flow path R3 more advantageous than the second branch guidance flow path R2. be able to. On the other hand, when the game ball enters the first branch area 410 one by one, the game ball is blocked by the contact wall 411 no matter how many times the game ball enters the first branch area 410, so that the game ball enters the third branch guide flow path R3. Inflow is prevented.

Therefore, it is possible to change the manner of branching of game balls depending on the number of game balls entering the first branch area 410 collectively, and when two game balls enter the first branch area 410 together. , can be prevented from flowing into the second branch guidance channel R2.

12 to 20, as a step before the game balls flow into the first branch area 410, when two game balls enter the first flow-down device 300, two game balls are thrown to the special route hole 323 at almost the same timing and flow down to the defined area hole 340 (see FIG. 5), so the situation where two game balls are collectively entered into the first branch area 410 is This is a situation that occurs with a high probability when two game balls enter one flow-down device 300 together.

27(a) is a partial top view of the second flow-down device 400 as viewed in the direction of arrow XXVIIa in FIG. 24, and FIG. 27(b) is the second flow-down device 400 as viewed along line XXVIIb-XXVIIb in FIG. 27(a). is a partial cross-sectional view of the. 27(a) and 27(b), the area corresponding to the second branch area 420 is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 27(a) and 27(b), the second branched region 420 is arranged at a position where the game ball that has passed through the second branched guide flow path R2 abuts, and performs a constant reciprocating swing motion. A distribution operation device 421, a special area hole 422 through which game balls distributed by the distribution operation device 421 to the front side (lower side in FIG. A first delay preparation hole 423 through which the game balls distributed to 27 (a) upper side) passes, and a prevention wall portion 424 that prevents the game balls distributed by the distribution operation device 421 from going to the opposite side. Prepare the Lord.

The distribution operation device 421 generates a movable plate 421a that is rotatably pivotally supported near the outlet position of the first branch guide channel R2, and a driving force that drives the movable plate 421a. and a driving motor 421b fixed to a portion (not shown).

The movable plate 421a is in contact with the right side of the prevention wall portion 424 and has a rotating shaft extending vertically at a position intersecting with the central axis of the second branch guiding flow path R2. With reference to the state along the central axis of the flow path R2 (the state indicated by the solid line in FIG. 27(a)), it swings back and forth (up and down in FIG. 27(a)) by a predetermined angle (45° in this embodiment). to rotate back and forth. In addition, the rotation operation is an operation that continues from when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on (other than when the power is turned off) until the power is turned off. 1 second).

In this embodiment, the movable plate 421a is positioned between the pair of reference straight lines L1 that connect the rotating shaft of the movable plate 421a and the front and rear side wall ends of the second branch guide flow path R2. The state in which the movable plate 421a is arranged is referred to as the staying state of the movable plate 421a, and the state in which the movable plate 421a is arranged outside the pair of reference straight lines L1 including the state in which the pair of reference straight lines L1 and the longitudinal direction of the movable plate 421a coincide with each other. This state is referred to as the passage permitting state of the movable plate 421a.

The special area hole 422 guides the passing game ball to the special guiding flow path R4. Therefore, the game ball that has been turned to the front side (lower side in FIG. 27(a)) by the movable plate 421a falls vertically downward while flowing into the third branched guidance flow path R3 from the special guidance flow path R4, It flows into the third branch area 430 .

On the other hand, the special area hole 423 guides the passing game ball to the second delay guiding flow path R6. Therefore, the game ball whose direction is changed to the back side (upper side in FIG. 27(a)) by the movable plate 421a passes through the second delay guide flow path R6 and the third specific area hole 443. As shown in FIG.

28 is a partial front view of the second flow-down device 400 in area XXVIII of FIG. 24. FIG. 28, a region corresponding to the third branch region 430 is illustrated. As shown in FIG. 28, the third branch area 430 is an area where a game ball that has passed through the third branch guidance flow path R3 enters from above, and is located from the exit position of the third branch guidance flow path R3 to the third branch area 430. A distribution projection 431 projecting vertically upward is provided at a position extending from the central axis of the branch guidance channel R3.

The distribution protrusion 431 is formed in a mountain shape that is bilaterally symmetrical with respect to a line extending from the central axis of the third branch guiding flow path R3. Therefore, the game ball that has flowed down the third branch guide flow path R3 has its center vertically above the center of the distribution projection 431 when it starts contacting the distribution projection 431 . Therefore, the probability of distributing the game balls to the left and right is halved (50% each).

Next, with reference to FIGS. 29 to 39, several aspects of the game balls B1 and B2 passing through the second branch area 420 and the third branch area 430 will be described separately. First, with reference to FIGS. 29 to 31, the case where the game ball B1a flows down without staying in the second branch area 420 and passes through the special area hole 422 will be described.

29(a) is a partial front view of the second flow-down device 400 in the range XXVIII of FIG. 24, and FIG. 29(b) is a portion of the second flow-down device 400 viewed in the direction of arrow XXIXb in FIG. 29(a). FIG. 30(a) is a partial front view of the second flow-down device 400 in range XXVIII of FIG. 24, and FIG. 31(a) and 31(b) are partial front views of the second flow-down device 400 in area XXVIII of FIG. 24. FIG. 29(a), 29(b), 30(a), 30(b), 31(a) and 31(b), the first branch region 410 contains two A series of figures shows how the hit game balls B1a and B2a flow down.

As shown in FIGS. 29(a) and 29(b), when the game ball B1a reaches the second branch area 420, the movable plate 421a leaves the special area hole 422 side and is in the pass-allowed state, The game ball B1a reaches the special area hole 422 and drops into the special area hole 422 as shown in FIGS.

Here, the leftward flow of the game balls B1a and B2a from the first branched area 410 occurs with the first branched area 410 as the starting point, so the aspect of the second branched guide flow path R2 ( By setting the extension length and inclination angle) and the third branch guide flow path R3 (extension length and inclination angle), it is possible to aim at the position of the game balls B1a and B2a flowing down.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 31(a), when the game ball B1a falls into the special area hole 422 without being decelerated by the movable plate 421a in the second branch area 420, the third branch guide flow path R3 The shape of the flow path is designed so that the passing game ball B2a falls on the upper surface.

For example, the game ball flows down from the second branch guide flow path R2 to the special area hole 422 in 2 seconds, and falls from the special guide flow path R4 to the third branch area 430 in 1 second, while the third branch guide flow It is constructed in such a manner that the game ball runs down the path R3 in about 2.5 seconds.

Here, when the game ball B2a moves from the state shown in FIG. 30(a) to the state shown in FIG. Free fall vertically downward as the speed of is killed. Therefore, in the state shown in FIG. 31(a), the game ball B2a is greatly reduced in speed in the horizontal direction and speed in the vertical direction. The game ball B1a and the game ball B2a can be stably brought into contact with each other by dropping the game ball B1a toward the position where the speed is greatly reduced.

As shown in FIG. 31(a), after the game balls B1a and B2a fall vertically downward in a row from the state in which the game balls B1a and B2a are in contact with each other at the top and bottom, the game balls B2a on the lower side are distributed projections. Collide with 431. In that case, the ratio of the game balls B2a distributed to the distribution projections 431 is half left and right (50%). By doing so, the game ball B1a is easily sorted to the opposite left and right sides of the game ball B2a. Therefore, the two game balls B1a and B2a can be easily made to flow down in both directions of the distribution projection 431 one by one.

In this embodiment, after the game balls B1a and B2a are sorted by the sorting projection 431, compared to the period required for the game balls to pass through the first specific region switch 441a, the second specific region switch 442a The period required for the game ball to pass through is greatly lengthened.

Therefore, by causing the two game balls B1a and B2a to flow down one by one in both directions of the distribution projection 431, the game balls B1a and B2a are dropped before the game balls B1a and B2a pass through the second specific area switch 442a. B2a can be passed through the first specific area switch 441a. As a result, compared to the case where one game ball flows into the third branch area 430, it is possible to improve the probability that the player wins a 16-round jackpot (a jackpot with a larger profit than a 7-round jackpot).

A case where the game ball B1b temporarily stays in the second branch area 420 and then passes through the special area hole 422 will be described with reference to FIGS. 32 to 35 .

32(a) is a partial front view of the second flow-down device 400 in the range XXVIII of FIG. 24, and FIG. 32(b) is a portion of the second flow-down device 400 viewed in the direction of arrow XXXIIb in FIG. 32(a). 33(a) is a partial front view of the second flow-down device 400 in range XXVIII of FIG. 24, and FIG. FIG. 34(a) is a partial front view of the second flow-down device 400 in range XXVIII of FIG. 24, and FIG. 34(b) is an arrow XXXIVb of FIG. 34(a). 35 is a partial front view of the second flow-down device 400 in area XXVIII of FIG. 24. FIG.

32(a), 32(b), 33(a), 33(b), 34(a), 34(b) and 35, The flow of two game balls B1b and B2b that have entered is shown in the series of figures.

As shown in FIGS. 32(a) and 32(b), when the game ball B1b reaches the second branch area 420, the movable plate 421a rotates toward the first delay preparation hole 423. In this case, the game ball B1b is prevented from progressing by the tip of the movable plate 421a, and temporarily (for about 1 second) at the position shown in FIG. After staying there, the movable plate 421a rotates further and flows down toward the special area hole 422 (see FIG. 33(b)). Here, since the game ball B2b continues to flow down even while the game ball B1b stays, the game ball B1b reaches the special area hole 422 with a deviation from the timing at which the game balls B1b and B2b abut.

As shown in FIG. 34(a), at the timing when the game ball B1b starts to flow into the special guide channel R4, the game ball B2b has already reached the distribution projection 431 and has been distributed in the third branch area 430. there is

After that, as shown in FIG. 35, the game ball B1b reaches the distribution protrusion 431. As shown in FIG. Here, when the game balls B1b and B2b are distributed by the distribution protrusion 431, the game balls B1b and B2b do not interfere with each other, so the distribution ratio for each game ball B1b and B2b is 50/50 (50%). .

That is, the player can obtain two chances to cause the game balls B1b and B2b to flow into the first special area hole 441. Therefore, when only one game ball enters the second flow down device 400, By comparison, it is possible to make it easier to improve the profit that the player can obtain.

Further, as shown in FIG. 35, the first delay flow path R5 is arranged between the distribution projection 431 and the second specific area hole 442, so that the game ball B2b that reaches the distribution projection 431 earlier is distributed to the second specific area hole 442 side, while the game ball B2b is flowing down the first delay guide flow path R5 (about 2 seconds), the later game ball B1b is in the first specific area Passing through the hole 441 (one second after the state shown in FIG. 34 (a), that is, passing while the game ball B2b is flowing down the first delay guidance flow path R5), to the first specific area switch 441a A condition of being detected (a condition in which a player wins a 16-round jackpot) can be configured. As a result, it is possible to easily improve the profit that the player can obtain.

A case where the game ball B1c passes through the first delay preparation hole 423 without staying in the second branch area 420 will be described with reference to FIGS. 36 to 39. FIG.

36(a) is a partial front view of the second flow-down device 400 in the range XXVIII of FIG. 24, and FIG. 36(b) is a portion of the second flow-down device 400 viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVIb in FIG. 36(a). 37(a) is a partial front view of the second flow-down device 400 in range XXVIII of FIG. 24, and FIG. 38 and 39 are partial front views of the second flow-down device 400. FIG.

36(a), 36(b), 37(a), 37(b), 38 and 39, two game balls B1c, The flow of B2c is illustrated in the series of figures.

As shown in FIGS. 36(a) and 36(b), when the game ball B1c reaches the second branch area 420, the movable plate 421a leaves the first delay preparation hole 423 side and is in a pass-allowing state. In this case, the game ball B1c reaches the first delay preparation hole 423 and drops into the first delay preparation hole 423 without decelerating as shown in FIGS.

The game ball B1c that has fallen into the first delay preparation hole 423 flows down the second delay guidance flow path R6 toward the third specific area hole 441.例文帳に追加Here, as shown in FIGS. 38 and 39, the game ball B2c that has flowed down the third branch guide flow path R3 is distributed to the left and right by the distribution protrusion 431, and the first ball B2c on the side with the longer distance to the specific area The period (approximately 2 seconds) in which the game ball B2c completely flows down the delay induction path R5 is shorter than the period (approximately 5 seconds) in which the game ball B1c completely flows down the second delay induction path R6. .

That is, regardless of whether the game ball B2c is sorted to the left or right by the sorting protrusion 431, before the game ball B1c flows down the second delay induction path R6 and passes through the third specific area switch 443a, The game ball B2c can be made to flow into the first specific area switch 441a or the second specific area switch 442a. As a result, it is possible to easily improve the profit that the player can obtain.

Thus, in this embodiment, two game balls are collectively entered into the first flow-down device 300, and the route distribution unit 320 and distribution The inclined part 330 is arranged, and the player can easily obtain the profit by playing a game in which two game balls are put into the movable ball entry device 190 at once.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a plurality of game balls enter the movable ball entry accessory device 190 and enter the fixed area hole 340 together, the following second falling device 400 is one Compared to the case where the game balls flow down, it has a structure that makes it easier to win a big win with a larger profit. As a result, the interest of the player can be improved.

Next, a second flow-down device 2400 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 40 to 42. FIG.

In the first embodiment, the case of earning a period until the game ball passes through the third specific area switch 443a by configuring the second delay guidance flow path R6 as a long and gently sloping flow path has been described. The second flow-down device 2400 in the second embodiment extends for a predetermined period of time with the entry of a game ball into each start winning opening 26 to 28 (see FIG. 2) as an operating trigger, and the game ball falls into the specific area hole 2440. A time blocking plate 2411 is provided to block. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 40(a) is a front view of the second flow-down device 2400 in the second embodiment, and FIGS. 24 is a cross-sectional view of device 2400. FIG. In FIG. 40(a), illustration of the cover member disposed on the front side is omitted and the inner surface of the specific area hole 2440 is illustrated, which is the same as in FIGS. 40(b) shows a state in which the time blocking plate 2411 is extended, and FIG. 40(c) shows a state in which the time blocking plate 2411 is retracted.

As shown in FIG. 40( a ), the second flow-down device 2400 includes a first branch guide channel R1, a timed branch region 2410 connected to the first branch guide channel R1, and a time limit of the timed branch region 2410. and an electromagnetic solenoid 2420 that changes the state of the blocking plate 2411 .

The timed branch area 2410 is an area for throwing the game ball that has flowed down the first branch guide flow path R1 to one of the specific areas, and the specific area hole 2440 that is the entrance through which the game ball flows into the specific area is played. Equipped with a time blocking plate 2411 that temporarily prevents the ball from passing through, and several specific area holes 2440 (three in this embodiment) through which game balls are thrown.

The time blocking plate 2411 protrudes inside the specific area hole 2440 (projects downward in FIG. 40(b)) and sinks outside the specific area hole (inverts upward in FIG. 40(b)). The immersed state can be configured by the driving force of the electromagnetic solenoid 2420, and the upper surface of the plate in the overhanging state is arranged at a position sunk downward by the radius of the game ball from the entrance (upper surface) of each specific area hole 2440. .

The electromagnetic solenoid 2420 is energized with the fact that the game ball has passed through the defined area switch 340a (see FIG. 5), and constitutes an overhanging state. The overhanging state is longer than the period (maximum 10 seconds in this embodiment) required for the game ball to pass through the first branch guiding flow path R1 and be placed inside each specific area hole 2440. It is maintained for a long enough period (12 seconds). Thereby, the falling timing of the game ball falling from each specific area hole 2440 can be aligned.

Each specific area hole 2440 is a hole of a size that allows one game ball to pass through, and a first specific area hole 2441 in which the game ball that has flowed down to the first branch guiding flow path R1 falls with an equal probability. , a second specified area hole 2442 , and a third specified area hole 2443 .

The first specific area hole 2441 is a hole for guiding the game ball to the first specific area for the 16-round jackpot, and the first specific area switch 2441a is provided directly below it. Thereby, the game ball passing through the first specific area hole 2441 and passing through the first specific area is detected by the first specific area switch 2441a.

The second specific area hole 2442 is a hole for guiding the game ball to the second specific area for the 7-round jackpot, and the second specific area switch 2442a is arranged directly below it. Thereby, the game ball passing through the second specific area hole 2442 and passing through the second specific area is detected by the second specific area switch 2442a.

The third specific area hole 2443 is a hole for guiding the game ball to the third specific area for the 3-round jackpot, and the third specific area switch 2443a is arranged directly below it. Thereby, the game ball passing through the third specific area hole 2443 and passing through the third specific area is detected by the third specific area switch 2443a.

Here, as shown in FIG. 40(a), the distances H1 to H3 from the specified area holes 2441 to 2443 to the specified area switches 2441a to 2443a are different. That is, the distance (distance H2) from the second specified area hole 2442 to the second specified area switch 2442a is longer than the distance (distance H1) from the first specified area hole 2441 to the first specified area switch 2441a, The distance (distance H3) from the third specified area hole 2443 to the third specified area switch 2443a is longer (distance H3) than the distance (distance H2) from the second specified area hole 2442 to the second specified area switch 2442a (distance H1<distance H2<distance H3). Since the specific area holes 2441 to 2443 have the same flow-down resistance, when a plurality of game balls fall into the specific area holes 2441 to 2443 in a manner of aligning the falling timing, the player can obtain a profit. can be the maximum profit in the specific area holes 2441-2443 through which the playing ball passes. In the present embodiment, the flow resistance is equal, but this effect may be achieved by changing the flow resistance and equalizing the distances H1 to H3.

41 and 42, an example of the flow-down mode of the game balls B10 and B11 when two game balls B10 and B11 enter the second flow-down device 2400 together will be described.

41(a), 41(b) and 42 are front views of the second flow-down device 2400. FIG. 41(a), 41(b) and 42 show how the two game balls B10 and B11 that enter the third falling device 2400 flow down in time series.

As shown in FIG. 41(a), when the first game ball B10 enters the third specific area hole 2443 with an equal probability, the game ball B10 becomes a lid, and the later game ball B11 enters the third specific area. A ball cannot enter the hole 2443 . As a result, when two game balls enter the second flow-down device 2440, the two game balls are prevented from entering the same specific area hole 2440 (for example, the third specific area hole 2443). can be done.

As shown in FIG. 41(b), the subsequent game ball B11 enters the second specified area hole 2442 or the first specified area hole 2441 with an equal probability. In addition, in FIG. 41(b), the case where the game ball B11 enters the first specific area hole 2441 is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 42, when the electromagnetic solenoid 2420 is de-energized and the time blocking plate 2411 is put into the retracted state, the game balls B10 and B11 fall at the same time. At this time, since the distance H1 is shorter than the distance H3, the game ball B11 passes through the first specific area switch 2441a and is detected, and then the game ball B10 passes through the third specific area switch 2443a. Therefore, the passage of the game ball B10 through the third specific area switch 2443a becomes invalid, and the player can obtain a 16-round jackpot.

As a result, in this embodiment, when two game balls B10 and B11 enter the second flow-down device 2440, both of them can be prevented from entering the same specific area holes 2441 to 2443, It is possible to adopt an aspect in which the game balls entering the specific area holes 2441 to 2443 which are more advantageous for the player are effectively detected by the specific area switches 2441a to 2443a. As a result, compared to the case where one game ball flows into the second flow-down device 2400, the player can obtain a higher-profit jackpot.

Next, the first flow-down device 3300 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 43 to 52. FIG. In the first embodiment, the case where the flow path of the game ball changes due to the contact of the game ball with the distribution body 322 has been described. By colliding the game balls with each other, it is configured in a manner to change the flow path of the game balls. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

43 is a front view of the first flow-down device 3300 according to the third embodiment, FIG. 44 is a side view of the first flow-down device 3300 viewed in the direction of arrow XLIV in FIG. 43, and FIG. It is a top view of the 1st flow-down apparatus 3300 in arrow XLV direction view. In FIG. 43, the illustration of the front side wall of the introduction passage 3310 and the front side wall of the route distribution portion 3320 is omitted for the sake of easy understanding (that is, the game balls are placed inside the introduction passage 3310 and the route swing). It is not a mode in which the game ball falls toward the front side (the front side in FIG. 43), but flows down the inside of the part 3320).

As shown in FIGS. 43 to 45, the first flow-down device 3300 includes an introduction path 3310 that guides a game ball entered into the big winning opening switch 190b (see FIG. 2) to a route sorting section 3320, and an introduction path Root distribution part 3320 into which game balls passing through 3310 enter, distribution slope part 330 having projection part 331, fixed area hole 340, and deviation hole 350 are mainly provided.

The introduction passage 3310 is a branch area 3311 arranged in the central part in a front view, and a flow path that is formed downwardly inclined toward the branch area 3311 and is connected to the branch area 3311 for allowing game balls to flow down. An upper flow path 3312 and a flow path formed downwardly from the branch area 3311 in both left and right directions in a front view and allowing game balls to flow down are connected to the connection flow paths 3314 and 3315 at the left and right ends. A side flow path 3313, a right connecting flow path 3314 extending from the right end of the lower flow path 3313 toward the rear side without any component in the left-right direction and inclined downward, and the left end of the lower flow path 3313. The left side connection flow path 3315 extends downward from the part toward the front side without a left-right component, and the connection flow paths 3314 and 3315 project upward at the left and right inner positions of the lower bottom plate. and a protrusion 3316 that is

The branch area 3311 has a partition wall portion 3311a which is a wall portion for allowing game balls thrown from the upper flow path 3312 in a state in which no game balls are housed to flow into the lower flow paths 3313 on the same left and right sides.

The partition wall portion 3311a is a position separated by one game ball (one game ball in the left-right direction) from the position where the bottom plate of the upper flow path 3312 is cut off, and extends the bottom plate of the lower flow path 3313 in the left-right direction. It is a wall part that extends upward from the position where it is provided at a height equal to or less than the diameter of the game ball.

The function of the partition wall portion 3311a will be described with reference to FIG. 46(a) and 46(b) are partial front views of the introduction passage 3310. FIG. 46(a) and 46(b) show in chronological order how the game balls B20 and B21 flow down when the game balls B20 and B21 collectively enter from one entrance of the introduction passage 3310. be done.

When the game ball enters the introduction passage 3310 from the right side, it falls vertically by entering the branch area 3311 from the upper flow path 3312, and is restricted from moving leftward by the partition wall portion 3311a, and continues to flow downward. Enter the ball into the road 3313.

That is, if the number of game balls flowing down the introduction passage 3310 is one, or even if there are two, the game balls flowing down the upper flow path 3312 from one of the left and right sides are divided into branch areas 3311 , the ball is entered into the lower channel 3313 in a manner of being bounced back to the same side. The lead-in passage 3310 has a bilaterally symmetrical shape, which is the same even if the game ball enters from the left side.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 46(a), when the two game balls B20 and B21 gather from the right side and flow down the introduction passage 3310, the previous game ball B20 enters the branch area 3311 from the upper flow path 3312. In the state of falling in the vertical direction, the later game ball B21 can get over the previous game ball B20 before turning left or right. Since the projecting portion 3316 has a height equal to or less than the diameter of the game ball, in this case, the game ball B21 climbs over the projecting portion 3316 and enters the lower flow path 3313 on the left side of the projecting portion 3316.

Therefore, when two game balls enter the lead-in path 3310 together, one ball enters the lead-in path 3310 from both the left and right sides, or two balls enter the lead-in path 3310 from either the left or right side. Game balls can be entered into the route distribution section 3320 in a mode of one left and one right.

Returning to FIG. 43 to FIG. 45, description will be made. The game ball that has passed through the lower flow path 3313 falls downward along the extending direction of the connection flow paths 3314 and 3315 (the direction with no horizontal component). Each of the connecting channels 3314 and 3315 is configured such that the lower bottom plate (the lower plate in FIG. 43) slopes downward toward the center. Therefore, when a game ball sent from the lower channel 3313 to each connecting channel 3314, 3315 lands on the lower bottom plate of each connecting channel 3314, 3315, there is almost no left-right velocity, and the lower bottom plate. It rolls in the left-right center direction according to the inclination.

After that, the game ball comes into contact with the projecting portion 3316 and is decelerated, and then flows into the route distribution portion 3320 . As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball entering the route distribution section 3320 from jumping out in the horizontal direction, and to roll the game ball along the shape of the inner surface of the route distribution section 3320 . Since the extension directions of the connecting flow paths 3314 and 3315 are different in the front-rear direction, the front-rear position of the game ball entering the route distribution section 3320 is slightly shifted.

Next, the route distribution section 3320 will be described with reference to FIGS. 47 and 48. FIG. 43 to 45 will be referred to as necessary in the description of the route allocation unit 3320. FIG. FIG. 47(a) is a partial cross-sectional view of the first flow-down device 3300 along line XLVIIa-XLVIIa in FIG. 43, and FIG. 47(b) is the first flow-down device 3300 along line XLVIIb-XLVIIb in FIG. 47(a). 48 is a partial cross-sectional view of the first flow-down device 3300 taken along line XLVIII-XLVIII in FIG. 47(b).

The route distribution unit 3320 includes a pair of guide rails 3321 that guide the rolling of the game ball entered from the lead-in passage 3310, and a region in which the game ball can move in the left-right center position of the guide rail 3321 in the front-rear direction (Fig. 47 (a) vertical direction), a special route hole 3323 configured as a hole in which the game ball can fall at the center position in the front-rear direction of the enlarged area 3322, and the terminal end of each guide rail 3321 A normal route hole 3324 configured as a hole in which a game ball can fall, and a normal route hole 3324 in which the game ball that has passed through the normal route hole 3324 flows backward and falls to the rear end of the distribution inclined portion 330 A route guideway 3326 is mainly provided.

The guide rail 3321 is curved downward in a front view to support the game ball with two rails arranged in parallel in the front and rear direction and regulate the flow path of the ball. In addition, since the pair of guide rails 3321 are rotationally symmetrical with respect to the left-right center point when viewed from above, the guide rail 3321 that guides the game balls flowing in from the left side will be described, and the guide rail 3321 on the opposite side will be described. omitted.

The guide rail 3321 includes a central rail portion 3321a extending along the curved shape of the bottom plate (lower plate in FIG. 43) of the route distribution portion 3320 near the center position in the front-rear direction of the route distribution portion 3320, and a central rail portion 3321a. and an auxiliary rail portion 3321b provided side by side in a parallel positional relationship with the rail portion 3321a.

The central rail portion 3321a and the auxiliary rail portion 3321b have the same protrusion height (protrusion height toward the center of the curve) in cross-sectional shape. Formation of the central rail portion 3321a is omitted in the lateral central portion corresponding to the hole 3323 for the special route. In addition, the formation of the auxiliary rail portion 3321b is omitted from the position shifted to the left and right outward from the portion where the central rail portion 3321a is omitted to the central portion. A normal route hole 3324 is drilled downward at a position where the left-right direction velocity of a game ball that has entered the ball and has not collided with another game ball substantially disappears. Note that the central rail portion 3321a is shared by the pair of guide rails 3321 .

The enlarged area 3322 is provided with a special route hole 3323 in the lower part (the inner part in the vertical direction of the paper in FIG. It has an inclined surface 3322a arranged in front and rear positions of the hole 3323, and a curved receiving wall 3322b arranged as a wall portion that is convexly curved in the front and rear direction of the inclined surface 3322a.

The inclined surface 3322a is connected to the end of the auxiliary rail portion 3321b on the center side (the end of the portion where formation is omitted), and has a downward convex curved shape (Fig. 48). The inclined surface 3322a is configured in a mode that gently ascends from the curved side wall 3322a1 toward the curved receiving wall 3322b.

The special route hole 3323 is a hole for dropping a game ball near the center position of the front end portion of the distribution slope portion 330 (see FIG. 43). Therefore, the game ball that has dropped through the special route hole 3323 has a higher probability of entering the fixed area hole 340 than the game ball that has dropped through the normal route hole 3324 .

The normal route hole 3324 is a hole for guiding a game ball to a normal route guideway 3326 (see FIG. 43). Therefore, the game ball that has fallen through the normal route hole 3324 passes through the normal route guiding path 3326 and falls near the rear end of the distribution slope portion 330 (see FIG. 43). Therefore, the game ball that has dropped through the normal route hole 3324 has a lower probability of entering the fixed area hole 340 than the game ball that has dropped through the special route hole 3323 .

With reference to FIGS. 49 and 50, the flow down mode of the game ball B22 when one game ball B22 flows into the route distribution section 3320 will be described. FIGS. 49(a), 49(b), 50(a) and 50(b) are cross-sectional views of the route distribution portion 3320 along line XLVIIa-XLVIIa in FIG. 49(a), 49(b), 50(a) and 50(b) show the flow of the game ball B22 flowing down the route distribution section 3320 in chronological order. be.

As shown in FIG. 49(a), the game ball B22, which has been decelerated by flowing down the left connecting channel 3315 and coming into contact with the projecting portion 3316, is supported by the guide rail 3321 and rolls in the horizontal direction.

As shown in FIG. 49(b), when the game ball B22 reaches the enlarged area 3322, the state in which the game ball B22 is supported by the auxiliary rail portion 3321b is shifted to the state in which the curved side wall 3322a1 supports it.

In this state, the curved side wall 3322a1 is sunk below the central rail portion 3321a, so the center of gravity of the game ball B22 moves toward the inclined surface 3322a (the game ball B22 leans against the inclined surface 3322a).

As shown in FIG. 50(a), the game ball B22 passes above the special route hole 3323 while leaning against the inclined surface 3322a. In this state, the speed of the game ball B22 in the left-right direction is high, so it is unlikely that the game ball B22 will fall into the special route hole 3323. In addition, it is possible to prevent the game ball B22 from colliding with the opening end of the special route hole 3323 and decelerating.

As shown in FIG. 50(b), the game ball B22 passing above the special route hole 3323 reaches the normal route hole 3323 at the right end and falls. Therefore, when one game ball B22 enters the route distribution section 3320, the game ball B22 is preferentially entered into the normal route hole 3324. Therefore, whether or not the game ball B22 passes through the fixed area hole 340 (see FIG. 45) depends on the randomness when it collides with the protrusion 331 of the distribution slope portion 330 and randomly changes direction and flows down. be done.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 51 and 52, the flowing down mode of the game balls B23 and B24 when two game balls B23 and B24 flow into the route distribution section 3320 will be described. 51(a), 51(b), 52(a) and 52(b) are cross-sectional views of the route distribution portion 3320 along line XLVIIa-XLVIIa in FIG. 51(a), 51(b), 52(a) and 52(b), the manner of the game balls B23 and B24 flowing down the route distribution section 3320 is shown in chronological order. illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 51(a), the game balls B23 and B24, which are decelerated by flowing down the right connecting channel 3314 and the left connecting channel 3315 and coming into contact with the projecting portion 3316, are supported by the guide rails 3321 and roll in the direction

Here, since the pair of guide rails 3321 also serve (share) the central rail portion 3321a, as shown in FIG. collide.

Since the game balls B23 and B24 are displaced in the front-rear direction (vertical direction in FIG. 51(a)) and flow down, the collision produces a velocity in the front-rear direction. That is, as shown in FIG. 52(a), the game balls B23 and B24 flow down toward the curved side wall 3322a1 and collide with the curved side wall 3322a1.

Since the curved side wall 3322a1 is formed in a convex curved shape in the front-rear direction, it applies a load in the direction of pushing back the game balls B23 and B24 in the left-right direction, thereby increasing the speed of the game balls B23 and B24 in the left-right direction. be killed.

Therefore, neither of the game balls B23, B24 can reach the normal route hole 3324, and as shown in FIG. It drops into the root hole 3323 .

Therefore, when two game balls B23 and B24 enter the route distribution section 3320, the game balls B23 and B24 are preferentially entered into the special route hole 3323. Therefore, the probability that both the game balls B23 and B24 pass through the determined area hole 340 (see FIG. 45) is dramatically improved.

That is, when two game balls B23 and B24 enter the route distribution section 3320, the number of game balls is higher than when one game ball B22 enters the route distribution section 3320. The probability of passing through the defined area hole 340 can be dramatically improved.

As described above, in this embodiment, when a plurality of game balls enter the ball, the game balls collide with each other in the route distribution section 3320 of the first flow-down device 3300, and the game balls pass through the special route hole 3323. can improve the probability of influx into

Next, the first flow-down device 4300 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 53 to 55. FIG. In the first embodiment, a game ball comes into contact with the distribution body 322, and the flow path of the game ball changes depending on whether or not the distribution body 322 is balanced depending on how the weight of the game ball is applied. The route allocating unit 4320 of the first flow-down device 4300 in the fourth embodiment is configured in such a manner as to change the route after ejection of the game ball depending on how many game balls stay on the left side of the ejection solenoid 4323. be. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

53(a) and 53(b) are partial front views of the first flow-down device 4300 in the fourth embodiment. FIG. 53(a) shows a state in which the injection solenoid 4323 is retracted, and FIG. 53(b) shows a state in which the injection solenoid 4323 is energized and extended.

As shown in FIGS. 53(a) and 53(b), the first flow-down device 4300 includes an introduction passage 310 (the first projecting portion 311 is omitted) and a game ball thrown from the introduction passage 310. It mainly comprises a route distribution section 4320 for distribution, a distribution slope section 330, a defined area hole 340, and a deviation hole 350 (see FIG. 5).

The route distribution part 4320 includes a route distribution part guideway 4321 that guides the entering game ball to the drop hole 4321a, and a retention that extends in a direction downwardly inclined to the right below the drop hole 4321a. a flow path 4322, and an injection solenoid 4323 fixed to the first flow-down device 4300 so that the movable portion can be pulled toward the inside of the retention flow path 4322 along the extending direction of the retention flow path 4322; , a special route hole 4324 that allows game balls to flow down to the special route guideway 325 (left side guideway 325a) of the first embodiment, and a normal route hole that allows game balls to flow down to the normal route guideway 326 (see FIG. 5) 4325 and .

The staying channel 4322 is formed so that the distance from the position where the game ball falling through the drop hole 4321a lands to the injection solenoid 4323 in the retracted state is longer than one game ball. As a result, when two game balls B31 and B32 (see FIG. 55(a)) enter the first flow-down device 4300, the remaining flow path 4322 on the left side of the injection solenoid 4323 Two game balls B31 and B32 can be arranged along the extending direction of 4322.例文帳に追加

The injection solenoid 4323 operates when the game ball passes through the starting winning openings 26, 27, 28 (see FIG. 2). That is, the game ball entering the large winning opening switch 190b (see FIG. 2) which is opened when the game ball passes through the starting winning openings 26, 27, 28 reaches the staying flow path 4322. The retracted state is maintained for a sufficient period of time (for example, 5 seconds according to the present embodiment), and then the state is rapidly changed to the extended state (the movable portion is extended). As a result, the game ball is ejected toward the left of the retention channel 4322 .

54(a) and 54(b) are partial front views of the first flow-down device 4300. FIG. In addition, in FIG. 54(a), a state in which the game ball B30 reaches the staying flow path 4322 is shown while the ejection solenoid 4323 is retracted, and in FIG. is shown.

As shown in FIG. 54(a), when one game ball B30 enters the first flow-down device 4300, one game ball B30 reaches the left side of the ejection solenoid 4323 (ejection solenoid One game ball B30 leans against 4323).

When the injection solenoid 4323 changes to the overhanging state in this state, the game ball B30 jumps out toward the normal route hole 4325, and the game ball B30 falls into the normal route hole 4325 (the game ball B30 is for the normal route). Injection solenoid 4323 is extended in a manner that provides an initial velocity to reach hole 4325).

The game ball that has fallen into the normal route hole 4325 is guided to the normal route guideway 326 (see FIG. 5). Furthermore, whether or not the game ball B30 enters the defined area hole 340 (see FIG. 5) depends on randomness when the game ball B30 flows down the distribution slope portion 330 (see FIG. 5). On the other hand, when two game balls enter the first flow-down device 4300, the situation changes.

55(a) and 55(b) are partial front views of the first flow-down device 4300. FIG. 55(a) shows a state in which two game balls B31 and B32 have reached the retention passage 4322 with the injection solenoid 4323 retracted, and FIG. 55(b) shows the injection solenoid 4323 is energized and the movable portion protrudes.

As shown in FIG. 55(a), when two game balls B31 and B32 are entered into the first flow-down device 4300, on the left side of the retracted injection solenoid 4323, the injection solenoid 4323 Two game balls B31 and B32 are arranged along the projecting direction (along the extending direction of the staying flow path 4322).

When two game balls B31 and B32 are arranged side by side and the injection solenoid 4323 is projected as shown in FIG. Since the two balls are heavy, the game balls B31 and B32 do not reach the normal route hole 4325, and the two game balls B31 and B32 fall into the special route hole 4324 in front of it.

Since the game ball that has fallen into the special route hole 4324 is guided to the special route guideway 325, when the two game balls B31 and B32 enter the first flow-down device 4300, as described above, the determination A situation is formed in which the game balls B31 and B32 are likely to enter the area hole 340 (see FIG. 5).

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the number of game balls entering the first flow-down device 4300 is different, the electric operation device (ejection solenoid 4323) that operates in a mode of moving the game balls moves the game balls By making the (flying distance) different, it is possible to make the subsequent flow-down path of the game ball different.

According to this, two game balls are brought into contact with the movable member (for example, the distribution body 322 (see FIG. 5) in the second embodiment) from both sides in the moving direction to bring the movable member into a balanced state. , Since it is not necessary to divide two game balls into the left and right sides of the distribution body 322, the structure of the route distribution part guideway 4321 is simplified (a hole structure of a size that allows only one game ball to pass through). can be done.

In addition, since the ejection solenoid 4323 operates with high durability and accuracy, it is possible to prevent malfunction such as a game ball entering the special route hole 4324 even though only one game ball enters the retention channel 4322. can be suppressed.

Next, a second flow-down device 5400 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 56 and 57. FIG. In the first embodiment, the contact wall 411 is configured as a fixed portion, and when two game balls enter the first branch area 410, one game ball enters the third branch guide flow path R3. Although the case of being balled has been described, the first branching area 5410 of the second flow-down device 5400 in the fifth embodiment has an operation wall 5411 that continues to operate at regular intervals from the time the power is turned on. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

56 is a partial front view of the second flow-down device 5400 in the fifth embodiment in the range corresponding to range XXV in FIG. 24. FIG. As shown in FIG. 56, the first branched region 5410 of the second flow-down device 5400 has a rotating shaft in the bottom plate portion of the second branched guide flow path R2, and rotates reciprocatingly at predetermined intervals after the power is turned on. It has a letter-shaped working wall 5411 .

The operation wall 5411 is in an inclined state (shown by a solid line in FIG. 56) in which a game ball arriving from above is guided to the right by electric operation of a drive motor (not shown), and the contact wall 411 in the first embodiment. (See FIG. 24) and a vertical state (illustrated by imaginary lines in FIG. 56) in which the wall portion extends vertically upward at a position similar to that shown in FIG.

Therefore, when two game balls enter the first branch area 5410 in the vertical state, the game balls flow down in the same manner as described above in the first embodiment. On the other hand, in this embodiment, it is possible to construct a case where two game balls enter the first branch area 5410 in the inclined state. The flow-down mode will be described below.

57(a) to 57(c) are partial front views of the second flow-down device 5400 in the range corresponding to range XXV in FIG. 24. FIG. 57(a) to 57(c) illustrate the tilted state of the action wall 5411, and the flow-down manner of the two game balls B40 and B41 that have flowed into the first branch area 5410 are illustrated in chronological order. be.

As shown in FIGS. 57(a) to 57(c), when the operation wall 5411 is in the inclined state, the gap between the extension tip and the second branch guide flow path R2 is set to be equal to or less than the diameter of the game ball. The position and cross-sectional shape of the axis of rotation are determined. Therefore, in the tilted state, the two game balls B40 and B41 are both guided to the third branch guiding flow path R3.

Therefore, the two game balls B40 and B41 can be reliably guided to the third branch area 430 (see FIG. 31), and the distribution projections 431 distribute the two game balls B40 and B41 one by one to the left and right. Since it can be easily done, the game ball B40 or the game ball B41 can be easily dropped into the first specific area hole 441.例文帳に追加As a result, the player can easily obtain the 16-round jackpot obtained by passing the game ball through the first specific area switch 441a (see FIG. 31). When the game balls B40 and B41 enter the first branch area, the player can watch the game balls flow down.

On the other hand, when the operation wall 5411 is in a vertical state, when two game balls enter the first branch area 5410, as described in the first embodiment, the game balls are inserted one by one into the second branch guidance channel. R2 and the third branch guiding flow path R3 flow down (see FIG. 26). The game ball flowing down the R2 is not stopped on the movable plate 421a (see FIG. 27), and the game ball flowing down the second branch guide channel R2 passes through the special guide channel R4. It merges into the third branch guidance channel R3 (see FIGS. 29 to 31). That is, when the operation wall 5411 is in an inclined state, the two game balls B40 and B41 are moved to the left and right by the distribution projection 431 in the same manner as when the two game balls B40 and B41 enter the first branch area 5410. Since the game balls B40 or B41 can be easily distributed one by one, the game balls B40 or B41 can be easily dropped into the first specific area hole 441.例文帳に追加As a result, the player can easily obtain the 16-round jackpot obtained by passing the game ball through the first specific area switch 441a (see FIG. 31).

As a result, depending on the state of the operating members (the operating wall 5411 and the movable plate 421a (see FIG. 27)), the points where the game ball flows differently are the first branch area 5410 and the second branch area 420 (see FIG. 24). It can be configured in multiple locations. When two game balls enter the first branch area 5410 when the movable wall 5411 is in a slanted state, the player can safely watch the subsequent flow down of the game balls. On the other hand, when two game balls enter the first branch area 5410 when the movable wall 5411 is in the vertical state, the player pays attention to how the game balls subsequently flow down in the second branch area 420. It will be.

Therefore, it is possible to improve the attention to the falling game ball, increase the variation of the falling game ball, and provide a fresh game.

In this embodiment, the period during which the motion wall 5411 maintains the inclined state is shorter than the period during which the motion wall 5411 maintains the vertical state, thereby preventing the player from becoming too advantageous. there is That is, in the present embodiment, the motion wall 5411 maintains the vertical state for a first period (for example, 4 seconds), then maintains the inclined state for a second period (for example, 1 second), and then the vertical state is changed. The state change is repeated from the time of power-on in such a manner that the state is maintained only for the first period. That is, when a game ball enters the first branch area, the probability that the action wall 5411 is in an inclined state can be set to a predetermined ratio (20%), and two game balls B40 and B41 It is possible to reduce the probability of being guided to the third branch guiding flow path R3.

Next, a second flow-down device 6400 in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 58 to 82. FIG. In the second embodiment, when a plurality of game balls flow into the timed branch area 2410 and fall into the specific area hole 2440, there is a difference between the profit that can be expected from the game balls that fall earlier and the profit that can be expected from the game balls that fall later. Although the case where does not occur, the second falling-down device 6400 in the sixth embodiment includes a profit increasing device 6450 that makes the profit expected from the game ball that falls later greater than the profit that can be expected from the game ball that falls first. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

58 is a front view of the second flow-down device 6400 in the sixth embodiment, FIG. 59(a) is a cross-sectional view of the second flow-down device 6400 taken along line LIXa-LIXa in FIG. 58, and FIG. ) is a cross-sectional view of the second flow-down device 6400 taken along line LIXb-LIXb in FIG. 59(a). In FIG. 58, illustration of the lid member disposed on the front side is omitted, and the inner surface of the specific area hole 6440 is partially illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 58, 59(a), and 59(b), the second flow-down device 6400 includes a first branch guide channel R1 and a timed branch area connected to the first branch guide channel R1. 6410, a specific area hole 6440 in which the game ball flowing down the timed branch area 6410 falls, a profit increasing device 6450 operated by the game ball that has fallen into the specific area hole 6440 (dropped and bounced off), and a game It mainly comprises a slide delay device 6460 operated by the game ball in the process of the ball falling into the specific area hole 6440, and a limiting device 6470 that partitions the inside of the timed branch area 6410 by operation and limits the downflow path of the game ball.

The timed branch area 6410 is an area in which the game ball that has flowed down the first branch guide flow path R1 is thrown to one of the specific areas, and the game ball flows down toward the specific area hole 6440 by rolling on the top A plate-shaped rolling plate 6412 that can be configured, a time limit blocking plate 2411 that temporarily prevents the game ball from passing through the specific area hole 6440 that is the entrance for the game ball to flow into the specific area, and the time limit and an electromagnetic solenoid 2420 that changes the state of the blocking plate 2411 . Note that the time blocking plate 2411 is obliquely arranged according to the shape of the specific area hole 6440, unlike the second embodiment.

The rolling plate 6412 is provided with a recessed portion 6412a that is recessed rearward in a shape that encloses the movement locus of the movement blocking surface 6451d of the profit increasing device 6450 in a top view, and is on the front side (the front side of the paper surface of FIG. 58). It is installed in a posture inclined downward toward the front, and has a plurality of protrusions on its upper surface, and is assembled in a manner to cover the slide delay device 6460 arranged below it.

The specific area hole 6440 mainly includes a plurality of (three in this embodiment) specific area holes, that is, a first specific area hole 6441, a second specific area hole 6442, and a third specific area hole 6443. Area holes 6441-6443 are formed from a shape that operably accommodates profit multiplier 6450 at entry opening 6440i for receiving a playing ball.

In this embodiment, since the profit increasing device 6450 is configured as a device that rotates around a rotation axis that extends to the left and right, it is arranged outside the operating trajectory of the profit increasing device 6450 so as not to interfere when the profit increasing device 6450 rotates. A wall portion forming the specific area hole 6440 is arranged on the side.

The specific area hole 6440 is a hole of a size that allows one game ball to pass through, and when a single game ball flows down to the first branch guide flow path R1, the game ball It mainly includes a first specified area hole 6441, a second specified area hole 6442, and a third specified area hole 6443 that drop.

The first specific area hole 6441 is a hole for guiding the game ball to the first specific area for the 16-round jackpot. and an oblique flow path that flows backward obliquely downward, and the first specific area switch 2441a is disposed inside the oblique flow path. Thereby, the game ball passing through the first specific area hole 6441 and passing through the first specific area is detected by the first specific area switch 2441a.

In addition, the time block plate 2411 is projected in the overhanging state above the first specific area switch 2441a (see FIG. 60), and prevents the game ball from flowing down the first specific area hole 6441 in the overhanging state .

The second specific area hole 6442 and the third specific area hole 6443 have the same internal shape as the first specific area hole 6441, and the second specific area hole 6442 inserts the game ball into the second specific area for the 7 round jackpot. It is a hole for guiding, and differs in that the third specific area hole 6443 is a hole for guiding the game ball to the third specific area for the 3-round jackpot.

That is, the second specific area switch 2442a is arranged inside the oblique flow path of the second specific area hole 6442, and the third specific area switch 2443a is arranged inside the oblique flow path of the third specific area hole 6443. .

As a result, the game ball that passes through the second specific area hole 6442 and passes through the second specific area is detected by the second specific area switch 2442a, passes through the third specific area hole 6443, and passes through the third specific area. A game ball to be played is detected by the third specific area switch 2443a.

Here, as shown in FIG. 60, the distances H1 to H3 from the specified area holes 6441 to 6443 to the specified area switches 2441a to 2443a are different. That is, compared to the distance (distance H1) from the diagonal channel inlet of the first specified area hole 6441 to the first specified area switch 2441a, the distance from the diagonal channel inlet of the second specified area hole 6442 to the second specified area switch 2441a is The distance (distance H2) to 2442a is increased, and the distance (distance H2) from the inlet of the oblique flow path of second specific area hole 6442 to second specific area switch 2442a (distance H2) is increased. The distance (distance H3) from the inlet of the channel to the third specific area switch 2443a is lengthened (distance H1<distance H2<distance H3).

As a result, when game balls fall at the same timing from the entrances of the oblique channels of the specific area holes 6441 to 6443, the specific area switches 2441a to 2443a with the shorter distances H1 to H3 are effectively detected. , the player can win a jackpot with more rounds.

The slide delay device 6460 is a member that is operably arranged below the rolling plate 6412 and protrudes to the inside of the second specific area hole 6442 and the inside of the third specific area hole 6443, and is located below the rolling plate 6412. A long plate-shaped rotating plate 6461 that rotates around a fixed axis is connected at one end (right in FIG. 59(a)) in the long direction of the rotating plate 6461, and slides in the front-rear direction. A right side slide plate 6462R that is operably supported, a left side slide plate 6462L that is connected to the other end of the rotating plate 6461 in the longitudinal direction and supported so as to be slidable in the front-rear direction, each of the slide plates 6462R, It mainly includes urging springs 6463R and 6463L that urge 6462L forward.

In the state shown in FIG. 59(a) (the state in which no external force is applied), the slide delay device 6460 is in a balanced state. In this balanced state, the inward projections of the specific area holes 6442 and 6443 of the right slide plate 6462R and the left slide plate 6462L are substantially the same.

From this balanced state, when the game ball starts to fall into each of the specific area holes 6442, 6443, a load is applied from the game ball to the right slide plate 6462R or the left slide plate 6462L, and each slide plate 6462R, 6462L slides forward and backward. do. At this time, since the slide plates 6462R and 6462L are connected to both ends of the rotary plate 6461, the slide plates 6462R and 6462L move in opposite directions. That is, when one slide plate (eg, the right slide plate 6462R) slides backward, the other slide plate (eg, the left slide plate 6462L) slides forward.

The slide plates 6462R and 6462L are formed to have the same length in the longitudinal direction, but have different tip shapes. In other words, the right slide plate 6462R has a tip that slopes down toward the front side, and the left slide plate 6462L has a flat tip (horizontally extending).

Therefore, for example, when game balls flow into the second specific area hole 6442 and the third specific area hole 6443 at the same time, the left slide plate 6462L preferentially slides backward (the right slide plate 6462R protrudes forward). Therefore, the falling of the game ball to the third specific area hole 6443 is delayed. 70 to 72 will be described later on the action and effect at that time.

Each biasing spring 6463R, 6463L is formed from the same spring member and has a natural length in a balanced state. In this embodiment, the elastic springs (loose springs) that take one second or longer for the slide plates 6462R and 6462L to return to the balanced state from the retracted state due to the action of the game ball are the urging springs 6463R. , 6463L.

The profit increasing device 6450 mainly includes a first rotating member 6451 arranged inside the first specific area hole 6441 and a second rotating member 6452 arranged inside the second specific area hole 6442. . Next, the detailed configuration of the profit increasing device 6450 will be described.

FIG. 60 is a cross-sectional view of the second flow-down device 6400 along line LX-LX in FIG. 59(a). As shown in FIG. 60, the first rotating member 6451 includes a main body member 6451a having a substantially cylindrical shape whose width dimension in the axial direction (the direction perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 60) is substantially equal to the diameter of the game ball, and its main body. A recessed portion 6451b that is recessed in a substantially fan-like shape in a substantially 1/4 circumferential portion of the member 6451a, a transmission portion 6451c that is formed to protrude along the peripheral surface in an oblique front upper portion of the main body member 6451a, and its transmission portion. 6451c on the left side (in the depth direction of the paper surface of FIG. 60). By being accommodated in the portion 6451b, it is constructed in a mode (center-of-gravity balance) in which the weight of the game ball causes a backward rolling motion to a transmission state (see FIG. 65).

The main body member 6451a is formed so that the center of the circle forming the outer circumference coincides with the rotation axis, and the center of gravity G1 of the first rotation member 6451 is provided at the lower front side of the rotation axis in the standby state shown in FIG. As a result, when the main body member 6451a tends to fall forward in the standby state, the body member 6451a is supported by the cover member arranged on the front side, thereby stabilizing the posture in the standby state shown in FIG.

The recessed portion 6451b has upper and lower side surfaces VS1 extending in the vertical direction (vertical direction) and front and rear side surfaces HS1 extending in the front-rear direction (horizontal direction) in the standby state shown in FIG.

The upper and lower side surfaces VS1 are arranged above the rotation shaft of the first rotating member 6451, and the distance V1 between the side surface on the back side of the third specific area hole 6443 is slightly longer than the diameter of the game ball. be done.

As a result, when the game ball starts falling into the third specific area hole 6443, the weight of the game ball can be used to apply a load to the right slide plate 6462R via the game ball. In addition, after the game ball is accommodated in the recessed portion 6451b and the first rotating member 6451 begins to roll backward, the distance between the upper and lower side surfaces VS1 and the side surface on the back side of the third specific area hole 6443 is the distance By narrowing more than V1 (that is, than the diameter of the game ball), another game ball newly falls into the third specific area hole 6443, or the game ball already housed in the concave portion 6451b bounces back. It is possible to prevent

The transmission portion 6451c has an arcuate side surface RS that is recessed in the vicinity of the rear end portion to have an arcuate cross-section and extends in the left-right direction. is inclined in a downwardly inclined manner at .

The radius of curvature of the circular arc side surface RS1 is the same as the radius of curvature of the game ball. As a result, when a game ball is placed on the arc side surface RS1, the game ball can be supported at multiple points, and the effect of guiding the game ball by the arc side surface RS1 can be improved.

The moving blocking surface 6451d is formed below a straight line extending along the surface on which the circular arc side surface RS1 is formed (side surface at the upper end in FIG. 66). As a result, in the transmission state (see FIG. 65), the moving blocking surface 6451d is arranged below the upper surface of the rolling plate 6412 on which the game ball rolls, so that the game ball and the moving blocking surface 6451d are in the transmission state. Contact can be prevented.

In addition, when the first rotating member 6451 is in the standby state and the limiting device 6470 is in the post-operation state, the moving blocking surface 6451d is designed so that the gap between the moving blocking surface 6451d and the limiting device 6470 is equal to or less than the size of the game ball. Configured.

In the standby state, the front side surface of the moving blocking surface 6451d contacts the rear side surface of the transmission portion 6452c of the second rotating member 6452 (see FIG. 59(b)).

FIG. 61 is a cross-sectional view of the second flow-down device 6400 taken along line LXI--LXI in FIG. 59(a). As shown in FIG. 61, the second rotating member 6452 has the same cross-sectional shape as the first rotating member 6451 except that it does not have a portion corresponding to the moving blocking surface 6451d. That is, the second rotating member 6452 includes a main body member 6452a having a substantially cylindrical shape with a width dimension in the axial direction (the direction perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 61) being substantially equal to the diameter of the game ball, and a main body member 6452a having a substantially 1 It mainly includes a recessed portion 6452b that is recessed in a substantially fan-like shape in the /4 peripheral portion, and a transmission portion 6452c that is formed to protrude along the peripheral surface at the obliquely front upper portion of the main body member 6452a, as shown in FIG. When the game ball is accommodated in the recessed portion 6452b in the standby state shown, the weight of the game ball is configured to roll backward to the transmission state (see FIG. 66) (center-of-gravity balance).

As with the body member 6451a of the first rotating member 6451, the body member 6452a is formed such that the center of the circle forming the outer circumference coincides with the rotation axis, and the center of gravity G2 of the second rotating member 6452 is shown in FIG. In the standby state, it is provided on the lower front side of the rotating shaft. In the standby state, when the body member 6452a is about to fall forward, the posture is stabilized in the standby state shown in FIG. 61 by being supported by the cover member arranged on the front side.

The recessed portion 6452b, like the recessed portion 6451b of the first rotating member 6451, has upper and lower side surfaces VS2 and front and rear side surfaces HS2.

The upper and lower side surfaces VS2 are arranged above the rotation axis of the second rotating member 6452, and the distance V2 between the side surfaces on the back side of the second specific area hole 6442 is slightly longer than the diameter of the game ball. be done.

As a result, when the game ball starts falling into the second specific area hole 6442, the weight of the game ball can be used to apply a load to the left slide plate 6462L via the game ball. In addition, after the game ball is accommodated in the recessed portion 6452b and the second rotating member 6452 starts to roll backward, the distance between the upper and lower side surfaces VS and the side surface on the back side of the second specific area hole 6442 is the distance By narrowing more than V2 (that is, than the diameter of the game ball), another game ball newly falls into the second specific area hole 6442, or the game ball already housed in the recessed portion 6452b bounces back. It is possible to prevent

Similarly to the transmission portion 6451c of the first rotating member 6451, the transmission portion 6452c is provided with an arcuate side surface RS2 that is recessed in the vicinity of the rear end portion so as to have an arcuate cross-section and extends in the left-right direction. It is formed so as to be slanted downward in the transmission state as it goes inward (the depth direction of the paper in FIG. 61).

In addition, the transmission portion 6452c is configured such that the right end thereof interferes with the movement blocking surface 6451d in the movement trajectory (see FIG. 59(b)). Therefore, when the second rotating member 6452 rotates backward, the transmission portion 6452c pushes the moving blocking surface 6451d, and the first rotating member 6452 also rotates backward (FIGS. 64(a) and 64). (b)).

The radius of curvature of the circular arc side surface RS2 is the same as the radius of curvature of the game ball. As a result, when a game ball is placed on the arc side surface RS2, the game ball can be supported at multiple points, and the effect of guiding the game ball by the arc side surface RS2 can be improved.

Next, referring to FIGS. 62(a), 62(b) and 63, the transmission state of the first rotating member 6451 will be described. FIG. 62(a) is a cross-sectional view of the second flow-down device 6400 along line LIXa-LIXa in FIG. 58, and FIG. 62(b) is a cross-sectional view of the second flow-down device 6400 along line LXIIb-LXIIb in FIG. FIG. 63 is a cross-sectional view of the second flow-down device 6400 along line LXIII-LXIII of FIG. 62(a). 62(a), 62(b), and 63 show the transmission state of the first rotating member 6451, and FIG. 63 shows a game ball accommodated in the concave portion 6451b.

As shown in FIGS. 62(a), 62(b), and 63, in the transmission state of the first rotating member 6451 after the first rotating member 6451 rolls backward due to the weight of the game ball, the transmission portion 6451c The backward rotation is stopped by the rear end abutting against the rear side surface of the entrance opening 6440i (the rear side surface of the entrance opening 6440i functions as a detent). In addition, as shown in FIG. 63, in the transmission state, the game ball remains on the upper surface of the time blocking plate 2411, and in this state, the game ball hits the front and rear side surfaces HS1 in the rotation direction of the first rotating member 6451. Since they are in contact with each other, the first rotating member 6451 is prevented from rolling forward. As a result, the posture of the first rotating member 6451 is stabilized in the transmission state.

In addition, since the game ball on the time blocking plate 2411 is maintained on the time blocking plate 2411 until the electromagnetic solenoid 2420 operates and the game ball falls, depending on the operation control of the electromagnetic solenoid 2420, the transmission state The maintenance period can be controlled.

As shown in FIG. 63, in the transmission state of the first rotating member 6451, the entrance opening 6440i of the third specific area hole 6443 is blocked by the transmission part 6451c, and other game balls can be prevented from falling.

In the transmission state, the transmission portion 6451c is arranged below the front end of the rolling plate 6412 (the left end in FIG. A game ball reaching the entrance opening 6440i can be placed smoothly on the upper surface of the transmission part 6451c.

As described above, the transmission portion 6451c is configured in such a manner that it is inclined downward toward the left side (the depth direction of the paper surface of FIG. 63) in the transmission state, so that the game ball riding on the upper surface of the transmission portion 6451c is caused to flow down leftward. be able to. For example, in the state of FIG. 62(a), when the game ball rides on the upper surface of the transmission portion 6451c, the game ball is directed toward the second specific area hole 6442 along the inclination of the transmission portion 6451c (FIG. 62(a) ) toward the left).

Therefore, the transmission part 6451c has the effect of preventing a plurality of game balls from flowing down to the third specific area hole 6443, and the flow direction of the game ball flowing down toward the third specific area hole 6443. can be switched to the downstream direction toward the second specified area hole 6442 (or the first specified area hole 6441 ), which can be expected to be more profitable than the third specified area hole 6443 .

Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 63, in the transmission state of the first rotating member 6451, the moving blocking surface 6451d slips under the upper surface of the rolling plate 6412, so that the game ball does not come into contact with the moving blocking surface 6451d. A game ball can freely move in the left-right direction above the concave portion 6412a.

From the state shown in FIG. 63, when the electromagnetic solenoid 2420 is actuated and the time blocking plate 2411 is in a retracted state (a state in which it is drawn outward from the third specific flow area hole 6443), the game ball falls and the first rotating member 6451 is moved. Since the load that stops the forward rolling motion is released, the first rotating member 6451 rolls forward and returns to the standby state (see FIG. 60).

Next, the transmission state of the second rotating member 6451 will be described with reference to FIGS. 64 to 66. FIG. 64(a) is a cross-sectional view of the second flow-down device 6400 along line LIXa-LIXa in FIG. 58, and FIG. 64(b) is a cross-sectional view of the second flow-down device 6400 along line LXIVb-LXIVb in FIG. 65 is a cross-sectional view of the second flow-down device 6400 along line LXV-LXV of FIG. 64(a), and FIG. 66 is a cross-sectional view of the second flow-down device along line LXVI-LXVI of FIG. 64(a). 6400 is a cross-sectional view. 64 to 66 illustrate the transmission state of the first rotating member 6451 and the second rotating member 6452, and FIG. 65 illustrates a game ball accommodated in the concave portion 6452b.

As shown in FIGS. 64 to 66, in the transmission state after the second rotating member 6452 rolls backward under the weight of the game ball, the rear end of the transmission portion 6452c hits the rear side of the entrance opening 6440i. The contact stops the rotation in the backward rotation direction (the side surface of the inlet opening 6440i on the back side functions as a rotation stopper). In addition, as shown in FIG. 65, in the transmission state, the game ball remains on the upper surface of the time blocking plate 2411, and in this state, the game ball hits the front and rear side surfaces HS2 in the rotation direction of the second rotating member 6452. Since they are in contact with each other, the second rotating member 6452 is prevented from rolling forward. As a result, the posture of the second rotating member 6452 is stabilized in the transmission state.

As shown in FIG. 66, the first rotating member 6451 also rotates backward based on the backward rotation of the second rotating member 6452 . Here, game balls are not housed in the recessed portion 6451b of the first rotating member 6451, but the rear end portion of the transmission portion 6452c of the second rotating member 6452 moves forward to the movement blocking surface 6451d of the first rotating member 6451. 64(b)), the first rotating member 6451 also rotates backward based on the backward rolling motion of the second rotating member 6452, and the forward rolling motion of the first rotating member 6451 is prevented. be. Accordingly, when the second rotating member 6452 enters the transmitting state, the first rotating member 6451 also enters the transmitting state.

As shown in FIGS. 65 and 66, in the transmission state of the second rotating member 6452, the entrance opening 6440i of the second specific area hole 6442 is blocked by the transmission part 6452c, and other game balls are second specific. Dropping into area hole 6442 can be prevented. In addition, since the first rotating member 6451 is also in the transmission state, the entrance opening 6440i of the third specific area hole 6443 is blocked by the transmission part 6451c, and other game balls fall into the third specific area hole 6443. can be prevented.

In the transmission state of the second rotating member 6452, the transmission portion 6452c is arranged below the front end portion (the left end portion in FIG. 65) of the rolling plate 6412, so that it rolls on the rolling plate 6412 to A game ball reaching the entrance opening 6440i of the second specific area hole 6442 can be placed smoothly on the upper surface of the transmission part 6452c.

As described above, the transmission portion 6452c is configured to be inclined downward toward the left side (the depth direction of the paper surface of FIG. 65) in the transmission state, so that the game ball riding on the upper surface of the transmission portion 6452c is caused to flow down to the left. be able to. For example, in the state of FIG. 65, when the game ball rides on the upper surface of the transmission part 6452c, the game ball is directed toward the first specific area hole 6441 along the inclination of the transmission part 6452c (leftward in FIG. 64(a) toward).

Therefore, the transmission part 6452c has the effect of preventing a plurality of game balls from flowing down to the second specific area hole 6442, and the flow direction of the game ball flowing down toward the second specific area hole 6442. can be switched to the flow direction toward the first specified area hole 6441 that can be expected to be more profitable than the second specified area hole 6442 .

Furthermore, since the first rotating member 6451 is also in the transmitting state when the second rotating member 6452 is in the transmitting state, the transmitting portion 6452c has flowed down toward the third specific area hole 6443 with the least expected benefit. It is possible to switch the flow direction of the game ball to the flow direction toward the first specific area hole 6441 where the expected profit is the largest. As a result, the player can experience the dramatic effect of the great reversal, and the player's interest can be improved.

From the state shown in FIGS. 64 to 66, when the electromagnetic solenoid 2420 is actuated and the time blocking plate 2411 is in a recessed state (a state in which it is pulled outward from the second specific flow area hole 6442), the game ball falls and the second rotation Since the load that stops the forward rolling motion of the member 6452 is released, the second rotating member 6452 rolls forward, and accordingly the first rotating member 6451 also rolls forward, returning to the standby state (see FIG. 60).

Next, the operation inside the second flow-down device 6400 when two game balls reach the timed branch area 6410 and head toward the second specific area hole 6442 and the third specific area hole 6443, respectively, will be described. .

67 is a cross-sectional view of the second flow-down device 6400 along line LIXa-LIXa in FIG. 58, FIG. 68 is a cross-sectional view of second flow-down device 6400 along line LXVIII-LXVIII in FIG. 67, and FIG. FIG. 68 is a cross-sectional view of the second flow-down device 6400 taken along line LXIX-LXIX in FIG. 67;

70 and 72 are cross-sectional views of the second flow-down device 6400 along line LXVIII-LXVIII in FIG. 67, and FIGS. 71 and 73 are cross-sectional views of second flow-down device 6400 along line LXIX-LXIX in FIG. It is a diagram. 67 to 69 show two game balls B61 and B62 that flow down the timed branch area 6410 and reach the specific area hole 6440 on the front side with a time difference t1 (t1=1 second). 71 shows a state in which the game ball B61 pushes the left slide plate 6462L, and FIGS. be done.

In addition, in this embodiment, after the game ball B61 starts contacting the left slide plate 6462L (see FIG. 68), 0.1 second elapses until the left slide plate 6462L is completely pushed in, and then the second rotating member 6452 is configured in such a manner that 0.4 second elapses until the transmission state is reached. 67 to 69 (elapsed time t=0), FIGS. 70 and 71 show the timing at t=0.1 seconds, and FIGS. , t=0.5 seconds timing conditions are shown.

68 and 69 illustrate a state in which the game ball B62 is flowing down the upper surface of the rolling plate 6412 and the game ball B61 is beginning to contact the tip of the left slide plate 6462L.

From this state, when the game ball B61 begins to fall into the second specific area hole 6442, the left slide plate 6462L is pushed outward of the second specific area hole 6442 by the game ball B61 as shown in FIGS. Based on this, the right slide plate 6462R protrudes inward of the third specific area hole 6443. As shown in FIG.

In this case, by narrowing the entrance opening 6440i of the third specific area hole 6443, the game ball B62 stays outside the entrance opening 6440i (above the right slide plate 6462R). In this embodiment, after the slide plates 6462R and 6462L are moved, one second elapses from the time the load is released until the balanced state is restored. Even after falling further from the state shown, the right side slide plate 6462R maintains the overhanging state.

From the state shown in FIG. 70, the game ball B61 is further dropped, and when time elapses, the second rotating member 6452 rolls backward and enters a transmission state (see FIG. 72). The state shown in FIG. 72 is the state where the elapsed time t=0.5 seconds. In this state, the right side slide plate 6462R maintains the protruded state, so the game ball B62 is still in the entrance opening 6440i. placed outside.

Then, in the process of the backward rolling operation until the second rotating member 6452 (and the first rotating member 6451) enters the transmission state, the game ball B62 comes into contact with the transmitting portion 6451c of the first rotating member 6451 and is pushed up. , the game ball B62 is arranged on the upper surface of the transmission portion 64514c.

After that, the game ball B62 flows down toward the first specific area hole 6441 along the inclination of the upper surfaces of the rolling parts 6451c and 6452c. That is, according to the present embodiment, the downflow path of the game ball B62, which was likely to flow into the third specific area hole 6443 (the hole with the smallest expected profit) until just before, is changed by the action of the game ball B61. , to the first specific area hole 6441 (the hole with the highest potential profit). As a result, the player can get a sense of a great comeback, and the player's interest can be improved.

FIGS. 74 to 80 describe a case where two game balls B63 and B64 begin to fall into the second specified area hole 6462 and the third specified area hole 6463 at the same time.

74 is a cross-sectional view of the second flow-down device 6400 taken along line LIXa-LIXa of FIG. 58, FIG. 75 is a cross-sectional view of the second flow-down device 6400 taken along line LXXV-LXXV of FIG. 74, and FIG. FIG. 75 is a cross-sectional view of the second flow-down device 6400 taken along line LXXVI-LXXVI of FIG. 74;

77 and 79 are cross-sectional views of the second flow-down device 6400 along line LXXV-LXXV in FIG. 74, and FIGS. 78 and 80 are cross-sectional views of the second flow-down device 6400 along line LXXVI-LXXVI in FIG. It is a diagram.

74 to 76 show two game balls B63 and B64 that flow down the timed branch area 6410 and reach the specific area hole 6440 on the front side with a time difference t1 (t1=0 seconds, that is, at the same time). 77 and 78 show a state in which the game ball B63 pushes the left slide plate 6462L, and in FIGS. Transmission states are illustrated.

74 to 76 (elapsed time t=0), FIGS. 77 and 78 show the timing at t=0.1 seconds, and FIGS. , t=0.5 seconds timing conditions are shown.

FIG. 75 shows a state in which the game ball B63 is beginning to contact the tip of the left slide plate 6462L. Due to the difference in tip shape of the slide plates 6462L and 6462R, in this state (state of elapsed time t=0), the game ball B64 placed at the same height as the game ball B63 is different from the right slide plate 6462R. They are not in contact (see FIG. 76).

As shown in FIGS. 77 and 78, the left slide plate 6462L is pushed out of the second specific area hole 6442 and the right slide plate 6462R is pushed out of the second specific area hole 6442 based on the game ball B63 falling further from the state shown in FIG. projects inward of the third specific area hole 6443 .

In this case, by narrowing the entrance opening 6440i of the third specific area hole 6443, the game ball B64 stays outside the entrance opening 6440i (above the right slide plate 6462R). In this embodiment, after the slide plates 6462R and 6462L are moved, one second elapses from the release of the load to the return to the balanced state. Even after falling further from the state shown, the right side slide plate 6462R maintains the overhanging state.

Here, in the course of the game ball B64 falling, the game ball B64 also contacts the tip of the right slide plate 6462R. Since the tip of the plate 6462R will get under the game ball B64, the component of the load applied from the game ball B64 to the right slide plate 6462R is greater in the direction perpendicular to the slide movement direction than in the slide movement direction. Become. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball B64 from interfering with the projecting action of the right slide plate 6462R.

From the state shown in FIG. 77, the game ball B63 is further dropped, and when time elapses, the second rotating member 6452 rolls backward and enters a transmission state (see FIG. 79). The state shown in FIG. 79 is the state where the elapsed time t=0.5 seconds. In this state, the right side slide plate 6462R maintains the protruded state, so the game ball B64 is still in the entrance opening 6440i. placed outside. Then, when the second rotating member 6452 (and the first rotating member 6451) enters the transmitting state, the game ball B64 comes into contact with the transmitting portion 6451c of the first rotating member 6451 in the course of the backward rolling operation until it enters the transmitting state. By being pushed up, the game ball B64 is arranged on the upper surface of the transmission portion 64514c.

After that, the game ball B64 flows down toward the first specific area hole 6441 along the inclination of the upper surfaces of the rolling parts 6451c and 6452c. That is, according to this embodiment, when two game balls B63 and B64 reach the second specific area hole 6442 and the third specific area hole 6443 at the same time, the third specific area hole 6443 (expected profit The downflow path of the game ball B64 that was likely to flow into the hole with the smallest value) is changed to the downflow path toward the first specific area hole 6441 (the hole with the largest expected profit) by the action of the game ball B63. You can switch. As a result, it is possible to create an opportunity to attract attention to the game balls flowing down the path that has not been noticed in the past, and to effectively utilize the corresponding space of the pachinko machine 10 as a performance space, and the performance allows the player to play. can give the player a feeling of a great reversal, so that the player's interest can be improved.

In this embodiment, the tip of the right slide plate 6462R is formed with an inclined surface, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the tip of the left slide plate 6462R may be formed with an inclined surface, and the tip of the right slide plate 6462L may be formed in a rectangular shape.

In this case, when the game balls B63 and B64 fall into the second specific area hole 6442 and the third specific area hole 6443 at the same time, the game ball B63 about to fall into the second specific area hole 6442 is transmitted by the second rotating member 6452. It will be pushed out to the upper surface of the part 6452c, and the game ball B63 goes to the first specific area hole 6441. In this case, since the distance of rolling on the upper surface of the game ball B63 transmission part 6452c can be shortened, the game ball B63 can reach the first specific area hole 6441 at an early stage, resulting in a big hit. period can be shortened.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, in order to make the game ball B64 headed to the third specific area hole 6443 go to the first specific area hole 6441, the configuration in which the tip of the right slide plate 6463R is intentionally inclined is adopted. ing. According to the configuration of this embodiment, the situation in which only the lowest profit is likely to be obtained from the game ball B64 can be changed at once to the situation in which the maximum profit can be obtained by the flowing down of the game ball B64. This can instill in the player the feeling that the game ball B64 heading for the third specific area 6443 cannot be ignored, and enhances the attention of the path heading for the third specific area 6443, which is usually neglected. Therefore, attention can be drawn to the entire timed branch area 6410 of the second flow-down device 6400 .

That is, even if the tip of either the right slide plate 6462R or the left slide plate 6462L is formed with an inclined surface, when two game balls flow into the timed branch area 6410 at a short interval, at least one of the game balls will pass through the first special area switch 2441a, which gives the greatest profit to the player. Therefore, while maintaining the effect of increasing the profit given to the player with the later game balls, the profit given finally can be made the maximum profit, so that the interest of the player is improved. It is possible to achieve both the effect (the effect of keeping the player from getting bored, the excitement) and the effect of maximizing the actual profit (the number of balls put out).

81 and 82 are cross-sectional views of the second flow-down device 6400 along line LIXa-LIXa in FIG. 81 and 82, the two game balls B65 and B66 flowing down inside the second flow-down device 6400 are illustrated in chronological order, and the state after the restriction device 6470 is activated is illustrated. .

As shown in FIGS. 81 and 82, the restriction device 6470 has a rotating shaft at the rear end of the timed branch area 6410, and directs the game balls B65 and B66 to the third specific area hole 6443 after the operation. It has a partition rod 6471 that makes it flow down.

The partition rod 6471 is arranged in a state of contact with the game ball at the height of the central position of the games B65 and B66 rolling on the upper surface of the rolling plate 6412 . As a result, it is possible to prevent the game balls B65 and B66 in contact with the partition bar 6471 from overcoming the partition bar 6471 and moving to the left.

A description will be given of how the game balls B65 and B66 flow down inside the second flow-down device 6400 in a state after the restricting device 6470 operates.

In FIG. 81, the first rotating member 6451 is in a standby state. In this case, as described above, the size of the gap between the partition bar 6471 of the limit device 6470 and the movement blocking surface 6451d of the first rotating member 6451 is set to be equal to or less than the size of the game ball. Therefore, in the state shown in FIG. 81, the game ball B65 does not go to the left side of the partition bar 6471, but is stopped to the right side of the partition bar 6471 and flows down toward the third specific area hole 6443.

Therefore, in the state after the restriction device 6470 operates, when a single game ball flows down to the second flow-down device 6400, it is possible to form a state in which it always falls into the third specific area hole 6443. As a result, for example, while improving the probability of entering a ball into the movable ball entry device 190 (see FIG. 2) by a time-saving game, in a big win state in which a single game ball enters the second flow down device 6400, a big win is achieved. By unifying the ball output (lowest ball output) obtained by the game ball falling into the third specific area hole 6443, it is easy to continue the time-saving game, but the ball output of one big hit is easy. It is possible to configure a game machine that suppresses. As a result, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that satisfies the desire of a player who wants to continue playing for a long time after a big win, even though the balls may not be put out so much.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the game ball that has fallen through the third specific area hole 6443 is configured to pass through the time reduction switch 190d, by obtaining a jackpot during the time reduction game, the time reduction game is promised again. becomes. As a result, the player can continue to enjoy the jackpot game and the time-saving game while suppressing the consumption of game balls.

On the other hand, when two or more game balls flow down to the second falling-down device 6400 after the restriction device 6470 has been activated, the first game ball B65 rotates the first rotating member 6451 as shown in FIG. By doing so, the second game ball B66 rolls on the upper surface of the transmission portion 6451c of the first rotating member 6451 toward the second specific area hole 6442 or the first specific area hole 6441. That is, in the state after the restriction device 6470 operates, by allowing a plurality of game balls to enter the second dropping device 6400, it is possible to obtain a large number of outgoing balls in the jackpot game, so the second dropping device 6400 Entering a plurality of game balls is accompanied by a practical profit. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to play a game in which the shooting intensity of game balls is adjusted in order to enter a plurality of game balls into the movable ball entry accessory device 190 .

Thus, in this embodiment, when two game balls enter the second flow-down device 6400 together, the operation of the profit increase device 6450 causes the specific area hole 6440 into which the previous game ball has flowed to acquire The profit that can be obtained by the specific area hole 6440 into which the later game ball has flowed can be forcibly increased with respect to the profit that can be obtained. As a result, it is possible to change the flow-down path of the subsequent game ball by the action of the previous game ball, so that attention to the movement of the game ball can be improved.

In addition, in this embodiment, since the later game ball does not make a smaller profit than the first game ball, it is safer than usual to see which specific area hole 6440 the later game ball will flow into. be able to.

In addition, in this embodiment, the first game ball that has flowed into the second flow-down device 6400 can be configured to reliably flow down to the third specific area hole 6443. (In the present embodiment, this is combined with acquisition of time saving), thereby expanding the range of game characteristics.

Next, a second flow-down device 7400 in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 83 to 101. FIG. In the first embodiment, the game balls flow down by their own weight and are distributed to the specific area holes 441 to 443, but the second flow-down device 7440 in the seventh embodiment applies the driving force to move the game balls. It has a game ball driving device 7450 that generates. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

83 is a front perspective view of a second flow-down device 7400 in the seventh embodiment, and FIG. 84 is a front perspective view of a rolling floor device 7410. FIG. In addition, in FIG. 83, a game ball that flows down the first branch guide flow path R1 and starts to flow into the game ball driving device 7450 is illustrated. Also, FIG. 84 corresponds to a state in which the game ball driving device 7450 and the like are removed from FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 83 and 84, the second falling-down device 7400 includes a rolling floor device 7410 extending in the left-right direction and allowing game balls to pass through on the upper surface side, and the rolling floor device 7410 rolls. A pair of annular rotary distribution devices 7420 for distributing game balls and made of translucent resin material, a driving device 7430 for generating rotational driving force of the rotary distribution devices 7420, and a rolling floor device 7410. A plurality of specific area holes 7440 that are open to and allow the game balls distributed to the rotary distribution device 7420 to flow down, and the rotating shaft is arranged in a manner that the axial direction is along the extending direction of the rolling floor device 7410 A game ball driving device 7450 that is provided.

The rolling floor device 7410 includes a first branch guiding flow path R1, left and right support columns 7411L and 7411R that rotatably support the rotation sorting device 7420, and a tilting floor 7412 that can be tilted by the weight of the game ball. , an inclined flow path 7413 inclined downward to the left where the game ball that has passed leftward through the left support column 7411L rolls, a pair of support holes 7414 that support the game ball driving device 7450, and the driving of the driving device 7430 A motor support hole 7415 that supports the motor 7431, an inflow sensor 7416 that is a sensor that detects a game ball immediately before flowing into the screw member 7453 from the first branch guide flow path R1 and is arranged below the support hole 7414, Mainly provide

The left support post 7411L is configured in a T-shaped post shape, and includes a main post 7411a extending in the vertical direction, a branch post 7411b extending in the front-rear direction at the upper end of the main post 7411a, and a branch post 7411b extending in the front-rear direction in a symmetrical shape. and a collar 7411c composed of a rotatable ring-shaped member projecting from the upper surface of the branch post 7411b.

The main post 7411a is arranged on the side facing the second specific area hole 7442 drilled along the vertical direction and the tilting floor 7412, and supports the tilting floor 7412 so that the tilting floor 7412 can tilt vertically. and a bearing portion 7411a1.

The upper surface of the branch pillar 7411b is recessed in an arc shape centering on the rotation axis of the rotary distribution device 7420, and the rotary distribution device 7420 is rotatably supported (fitted) in the concave portion. A plurality of collars 7411c are arranged in the vicinity of the front and rear ends of the branch pillar 7411b, and the protruding margin from the upper surface of the branch pillar toward the rotating shaft side of the rotary distribution device 7420 is constant. As a result, the rotary distribution device 7420 can be rotated while being in contact with the plurality of collars 7411c, and the rotation of the rotary distribution device 7420 can prevent abrasion caused by rubbing against the branch pillars 7411b. Durability can be improved.

The right support column 7411R is provided with a third specified area hole 7443 instead of the second specified area hole 7442, and an extension member 7411h that projects inside the hole due to the operation of the tilting floor 7412. has the same configuration as the left support column 7411L, so its description is omitted.

The inclined floor 7412 is supported by the bearing portion 7411a1, and can change its state between an upward state in which a game ball is not placed and a downward state in which a game ball is placed on it. It is recessed in an arc shape centering on the rotation axis of. It should be noted that the distance between the recessed portion of the upper surface and the cylindrical portion 7453a of the game ball driving device 7450 is arranged so as to be longer than the diameter of the game ball. Thereby, it becomes possible for the game ball to roll while swinging in the front-rear direction (circumferential direction of the arc) in the recessed portion of the upper surface.

The inclined flow path 7413 is an inclined flow path that guides the game ball that has reached the left side of the left support column 7411L to the first specific area hole 7441, and the side support column in which the first specific area hole 7441 is drilled. 7413a.

In this embodiment, side support columns 7413a and left and right support columns 7411R and 7411L having specific area holes 7440 are arranged side by side in the horizontal direction. As a result, it is possible to easily form a structure that prevents the game ball from flowing down by the time blocking plate 2411 (see FIG. 40). That is, in this embodiment, the time blocking plate 2411 described in the second embodiment is arranged at a position that narrows the inner diameter of each specific area hole 7440 (see FIG. 85(a)). As a result, when a plurality of game balls enter different specific area holes 7440 from the relationship with the difference in height of each specific area switch 2441a to 2443a of this embodiment, the profit given to the player The game ball can be passed through the higher switch first. Therefore, since the player can win the jackpot with the higher profit, it is possible to prevent the player from being discouraged.

In addition, the time blocking plate 2411 is arranged at a position where only one game ball can be accommodated in the specific area hole 7440 and the second and subsequent game balls are not accommodated (depth corresponding to the diameter of the game ball). Therefore, since only a single game ball is accommodated in the single specific area hole 7440, when two or more game balls flow down to the second flow-down device 7400, the player can move to the second specific area By passing the game ball through the switch 2442a, a jackpot of 7 rounds or more that can be obtained can be obtained.

The rotation sorting device 7420 is a device composed of an annular rotary member fitted to the top surfaces of the left and right support columns 7411L and 7411R, and is a first annular rotation member fitted to the top surface of the left support column 7411L. It mainly includes a member 7421 and a second annular member 7422 fitted to the upper surface of the right support column 7411R.

The first annular member 7421 includes a main body portion 7421a formed in a cylindrical shape, a plurality of openings 7421b opened by removing a wall portion at the central portion in the width direction of the main body portion 7421a, and the opening portions 7421b. A recessed fitting portion 7421c in which the outer peripheral surface of the main body portion 7421a is recessed toward the center of rotation on the widthwise outer side of the widthwise central portion where the opening is formed, and the recessed fitting portion 7421c on the widthwise outer side of the recessed fitting portion 7421c. and a gear 7421d formed around the circumference of the .

The first annular member 7421 alternately arranges the curved surface of the main body portion 7421a and the opening of the opening portion 7421b on the lower portion by the rotation operation of the driving device 7430 . As a result, when the game ball is made to flow down to the second specific area hole 7442 opened in the left support column 7411L (part of the case where the opening 7421b matches the opening of the second specific area hole 7442), the game ball When passing leftward without flowing down into the second specific area hole 7442 (part of the case where the opening part 7421b coincides with the opening of the second specific area hole 7442, and the body part 7421a blocks the second specific area hole 7442 case) and can be formed.

The opening 7421b is composed of a pair of openings having a size through which the game ball can pass. That is, every time the first annular member 7421 rotates 90 degrees, the portion arranged below the rotating shaft is switched between the main body portion 7421a and the opening portion 7421b. In addition, the side surface surrounding the opening 7421b is formed so as to face the inner peripheral side (a mode in which the corners on the outer peripheral side are chamfered). As a result, it is possible to reduce the degree of deceleration when the game ball abuts (gets caught in) the side surface of the opening 7421b.

The recessed fitting portion 7421c is a portion formed according to the arrangement of the collar 7411c of the rolling floor device 7410. As shown in FIG. Since the first annular member 7421 rotates while the collar 7411c is in contact with the recessed fitting portion 7421c, the collar 7411c is placed in contact with the main body portion 7421a in the horizontal direction. Therefore, the collar 7411c and the body portion 7421a abut on each other in the left-right direction (rotational axis direction), thereby suppressing axial displacement of the first annular member 7421 .

The gear 7421d serves as a transmission portion that meshes with the first gear 7432 of the driving device 7430 . In this embodiment, since the first annular member 7421 and the second annular member 7422 are rotated by the same drive motor 7431 with the same gear ratio, the first annular member 7421 and the second annular member 7422 means that the rotation speed, the timing of starting rotation, and the timing of ending rotation are the same.

Similar to the first annular member 7421, the second annular member 7422 has a main body portion 7422a formed in a cylindrical shape, and a plurality of openings formed by removing a wall portion at the central portion in the width direction of the main body portion 7422a. an opening 7422b, a recessed fitting portion 7422c recessed in the main body portion 7422a with its outer peripheral surface facing the center of rotation outside the center in the width direction where the opening 7422b is opened, and the recess and a gear 7422d formed along the circumference outside the fitting portion 7422c in the width direction. It mainly includes a plurality of projecting portions 7422e projecting inwardly.

The configurations of the recessed fitting portion 7422c and the gear 7422d are the same as those of the recessed fitting portion 7421c and the gear 7421d of the first annular member 7421, so the description thereof will be omitted.

The opening 7422b is composed of three openings having a size through which the game ball can pass, and the openings drilled over 60 degrees around the rotation axis are arranged at intervals of 60 degrees. That is, every time the second annular member 7422 rotates by 60 degrees, the portion arranged below the rotating shaft switches between the main body portion 7422a and the opening portion 7422b. In addition, unlike the opening 7421b of the first annular member 7421, the side surface surrounding the opening 7422b is formed perpendicular to the circumference.

The protruding portion 7422e is a portion protruding in a strip shape in the left-right direction for moving the game ball in the rotational direction when the game ball rolls on the main body portion 7422a. The opposite side surface of the portion 7422b is formed with an inclined surface facing the opposite side of the opening 7422b. Note that, in the present embodiment, among the boundaries between the main body portion 7422a and the openings 7422b, the projecting portion 7422e is arranged at the boundary between the two openings 7422b, and the projecting portion 7422e is disposed at the boundary between the one opening 7422b. The setting portion 7422e is not arranged.

The drive device 7430 is a device that generates a rotational driving force for the rotation distribution device 7420, and includes a drive motor 7431 that is supported with its rotary shaft inserted into the motor support hole 7412, and a rotary shaft of the drive motor 7431. A first gear 7432 fixed and meshed with the first annular member 7421 , and a first gear 7432 coaxially fixed to the rotation shaft of the drive motor 7431 and meshed with the second annular member 7432 . and a second gear 7433 that

In the present embodiment, the first gear 7432 and the second gear 7433 are configured from gears of the same shape, and the gears 7421d and 7422d of the rotation distribution device 7420 are configured from gears of the same shape. The gear ratio between the annular member 7421 and the second annular member 7422 is the same.

The specific region holes 7440 are a first specific region hole 7441 arranged inside the side support column 7413a, a second specific region hole 7442 arranged inside the left support column 7411L, and a second specific region hole 7442 arranged inside the right support column 7411R. and a third specific region hole 7443 arranged.

The first specific area hole 7441 is a hole for guiding the game ball to the first specific area for the 16 round jackpot, and the first specific area switch 2441a is arranged inside. Thereby, the game ball passing through the first specific area hole 7441 and passing through the first specific area is detected by the first specific area switch 2441a.

The second specific area hole 7442 and the third specific area hole 7443 have the same internal shape as the first specific area hole 7441, and the second specific area hole 7442 inserts the game ball into the second specific area for the 7 round jackpot. It is a hole for guiding, and differs in that the third specific area hole 7443 is a hole for guiding the game ball to the third specific area for the 3-round jackpot. That is, the second specific area switch 2442 a is arranged inside the second specific area hole 7442 , and the third specific area switch 2443 a is arranged inside the third specific area hole 7443 .

As a result, the game ball that passes through the second specific area hole 7442 and passes through the second specific area is detected by the second specific area switch 2442a, passes through the third specific area hole 7443, and passes through the third specific area. A game ball to be played is detected by the third specific area switch 2443a.

By projecting the time blocking plate 2411 (see FIG. 40) above the first specific area switch 2441a, the second specific area switch 2442a, and the third specific area switch 2443a, It is possible to prevent (delay) the game ball from flowing down the specific area holes 7441 , 7442 , 7443 .

Here, as shown in FIG. 85, the distances H1 to H3 from the specified area holes 7441 to 7443 to the specified area switches 2441a to 2443a are different. That is, the distance (distance H2) from the second specified area hole 7442 to the second specified area switch 2442a is longer than the distance (distance H1) from the first specified area hole 7441 to the first specified area switch 2441a, The distance (distance H3) from the third specified area hole 7443 to the third specified area switch 2443a is longer (distance H3) than the distance (distance H2) from the second specified area hole 7442 to the second specified area switch 2442a (distance H1<distance H2<distance H3).

As a result, when game balls fall at the same timing from near the upper end of each of the specific area holes 7441 to 7443, the specific area switches 2441a to 2443a with shorter distances H1 to H3 are effectively detected. can win jackpots with more rounds.

The game ball driving device 7450 includes a driving motor 7451 held with a rotating shaft inserted through a pair of supporting holes 7414, and a rotating shaft of the driving motor 7451 that is rotatably supported by the pair of supporting holes 7414. It mainly includes a columnar shaft member 7452 that rotates by the driving force of a drive motor 7451 and a spiral screw member 7453 that is integrally formed with the shaft member 7452 .

The screw member 7453 is a member integrally molded with the shaft member 7452, and is formed by a cylindrical portion 7453a and a thin plate spirally wound along the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 7453a. and a spiral plate portion 7453b.

The diameter of the cylindrical portion 7453a is formed in such a size that the distance between the rotating distribution device 7420 and the inclined floor 7412 is equal to or greater than the diameter of the game ball. Thereby, the game ball can be passed between the rotary distribution device 7420 and the inclined floor 7412 and the cylindrical portion 7453a.

In the spiral plate portion 7453b, the distance between the thin plates adjacent to each other in the left-right direction is equal to or greater than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, the game ball is accommodated between the adjacent plates of the spiral plate portion 7453b, and can be moved leftward based on the rotation of the screw member 7453. In this embodiment, the distance between adjacent plates is designed to be 25 mm.

The support columns 7411L and 7411R have a lateral width of 20 mm, and the specific area holes 7442 and 7443 are arranged at the center positions of the support columns 7411L and 7411R in the lateral width direction (see FIG. 101(a)). ).

In addition, the diameter of the spiral plate portion 7453b as viewed in the axial direction is equal to or less than the inner diameter of the trajectory of the projecting portion 7422e of the second annular member 7422. As shown in FIG. This prevents the rotation distribution device 7420 and the screw member 7453 from interfering with each other.

In addition, in this embodiment, the spiral plate portion 7453b is formed as a left-handed screw with the right end portion as a base point. Therefore, the game ball can be moved to the left by rotating the screw member 7453 clockwise with the right end viewed (right side view). In this embodiment, the screw member 7453 is rotationally driven in a constant drive manner to move the accommodated game ball to the left at a speed of 10 mm per second (V=10 mm/s) from the time the power is turned on.

The phase relationship between the first annular member 7421 and the second annular member 7422 will be described with reference to FIG. It should be noted that the phase relationship described below is merely an example, and the phase relationship between the first annular member 7421 and the second annular member 7422 is not limited to this.

85(a) is a front view of the second flow-down device 7400, and FIG. 85(b) is a cross-sectional view of the first annular member 7421 taken along line LXXXVb-LXXXVb of FIG. 85(a). (c) is a cross-sectional view of the second annular member 7422 along line LXXXVc-LXXXVc of FIG. 85(a). In addition, in FIG. 85(a), illustration of the driving device 7430 is omitted for easy understanding.

As shown in FIGS. 85(a) to 85(c), the opening 7421b of the first annular member 7421 is located above the near side (in FIG. 85(b), the vertical line passing through the rotation axis of the first annular member 7421). and the horizontal line, the boundary between the body portion 7422a and the opening 7422b of the second annular member 7422 is on the vertical line passing through the rotation axis of the second annular member 7422. It consists of topological relationships that are arranged in . The states shown in FIGS. 85(b) and 85(c) are defined as the initial state of the rotary sorting device 7420 and explained.

85(b) and 85(c), the annular members 7421 and 7422 are rotationally driven counterclockwise at 60 degrees per second (10 rpm). In addition, the timing of the start of driving is controlled when the game ball has entered the fixed area switch 340a (see FIG. 5), and is controlled to stop after rotating for several seconds. As described above, in this embodiment, since the screw member 7453 and the annular members 7421 and 7422 are driven at different timings, it is difficult for the player to predict the movement pattern. , 7422 to shoot a game ball.

In this embodiment, the widthwise dimension of the body portions 7421a and 7421b (excluding the gears 7421b and 7422b) of the annular members 7421 and 7422 is 20 mm, and the widthwise dimension of the openings 7421b and 7422b is 12 mm. Centered in the width direction. Since the diameter of the game ball is 11 mm, at the timing when the game ball pushed by the screw member 7453 and moving to the left is arranged at the center position in the width direction of the openings 7421b and 7422b, the openings of the openings 7421b and 7422b are opened. When the specific area holes 7442 and 7443 corresponding to are not arranged (when they do not fit together), the game ball passes leftward.

Also, the distance between the body portions 7421a and 7422a of the ring members 7421 and 7422 (ignoring the gear 7422) is set at 30 mm.

Therefore, after the game ball is placed at the position where the game ball can fall into the third specific area hole 7443 (the center position in the width direction of the first annular member 7421), the position where the second specific area hole 7442 can fall (the second annular The moving distance until the member 7422 is arranged at the center position in the width direction of the member 7422 is defined as 50 mm. That is, the game ball reaches the center position of the second specific area hole 7442 in about 5 seconds after passing through the center position of the third specific area hole 7443, and during this time each ring member 7421, 7422 rotates 300 degrees ( 85(b) and 85(c), it rotates by an angle of 300 degrees counterclockwise (that is, it is the same as rotating 60 degrees clockwise).

Next, the action of the second annular member 7422 will be described. The second annular member 7422 is a member that distributes whether to drop the game ball into the third specific area hole 7443 or flow down to the left without dropping it into the third specific area hole 7443, and the game ball to the left It is configured to be able to form a plurality of modes in which the water flows downward.

86(a) and 86(b) are cross-sectional views of the second annular member 7422 taken along line LXXXVc-LXXXVc in FIG. 85(a). In addition, FIG. 86(a) shows a state rotated 30 degrees counterclockwise from the initial state, and FIG. 86(b) shows a state rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 86(a). is illustrated. That is, FIG. 86(b) shows the state after one second has elapsed from the state shown in FIG. 86(a).

In the state shown in FIG. 86(a), when the center position of the game ball is placed at the right end position IN (see FIG. 85(a)) of the body portion 7422a of the second annular member 7422, the game is played after 1 second. By moving the ball 10 mm to the left, the center position of the game ball moves to the center position in the width direction of the second annular member 7422, so the center position in the width direction of the second annular member 7422 shown in FIG. The center position of the game ball is arranged at the position.

In this case, since the opening 7422b is arranged below the game ball when the center position of the game ball is arranged at the center position in the width direction of the second annular member 7422, the game ball falls into the third specific area hole 7443. do.

87(a) and 87(b) are cross-sectional views of the second annular member 7422 taken along line LXXXVc-LXXXVc in FIG. 85(a). In addition, FIG. 87(a) shows a state rotated 330 degrees counterclockwise from the initial state, and FIG. 87(b) shows a state rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 87(a). is illustrated. That is, FIG. 87(b) shows the state after one second has elapsed from the state shown in FIG. 87(a).

In the state shown in FIG. 87(a), when the center position of the game ball is placed at the right end position IN (see FIG. 85(a)) of the body portion 7422a of the second annular member 7422, the game is played after 1 second. By moving the ball 10 mm to the left, the center position of the game ball moves to the center position in the width direction of the second annular member 7422, so the center position in the width direction of the second annular member 7422 shown in FIG. The center position of the game ball is arranged at the position.

In this case, when the center position of the game ball is arranged at the center position in the width direction of the second annular member 7422, the wall surface of the main body portion 7422a is arranged below the game ball, so the game ball is placed in the third specific area hole 7443. 85(a) (inward direction in FIG. 87(b), second specific area hole 7442 side direction). At this time, the load that moves the game ball in the vertical direction of the traveling direction is not applied to the game ball from the second annular member 7422, so the game ball passes while positioned at the bottom of the second annular member 7422. do.

In this case, due to the driving force of the screw member 7453, it passes through the tilting floor 7412 while being positioned at the bottom of the upper surface of the tilting floor 7412, and reaches the first annular member 7421, so that the second specific area hole 7442 is reached. Whether or not the ball falls depends on the state of the first annular member 7421 .

88(a) and 88(b) are cross-sectional views of the first annular member 7421 along line LXXXVb-LXXXVb in FIG. 85(a). 88(a) shows a state at the same timing as the state shown in FIG. 87(b). In FIG. 88(b), the state shown in FIG. 88(a) is rotated 300 degrees counterclockwise The states are illustrated. That is, FIG. 88(b) shows the state after about 5 seconds have passed from the state shown in FIG. 88(a).

As described above, in this embodiment, the game ball moves from the center position of the second annular member 7422 to the center position of the first annular member 7421 in about 5 seconds. That is, the game ball passing through the second annular member 7422 in FIG. 87(b) reaches the center position of the first annular member 7421 in the state shown in FIG. 88(b). In the state shown in FIG. 88(b), since the opening 7421b is arranged below the game ball, the game ball passes through the opening 7421b and falls into the second specific area hole 7442. As shown in FIG.

With reference to FIGS. 89 and 90, the case where game balls flow into the rotation distribution device 7420 at another timing will be described.

89(a) and 89(b) are cross-sectional views of the second annular member 7422 taken along line LXXXVc-LXXXVc in FIG. 85(a). 89(a) shows the initial state, and FIG. 89(b) shows the state rotated counterclockwise by 60 degrees from the state shown in FIG. 89(a). That is, FIG. 89(b) shows the state after one second has elapsed from the state shown in FIG. 89(a).

In the state shown in FIG. 89(a), when the center position of the game ball is placed at the right end position IN (see FIG. 85(a)) of the main body portion 7422a of the second annular member 7422, the game is played after 1 second. By moving the ball 10 mm to the left, the center position of the game ball moves to the center position in the width direction of the second annular member 7422, so the center position in the width direction of the second annular member 7422 shown in FIG. The center position of the game ball is arranged at the position.

In this case, when the center position of the game ball is arranged at the center position in the width direction of the second annular member 7422, the end of the wall surface of the main body portion 7422a is arranged below the game ball, so the game ball is placed in the third specified position. It does not fall into the area hole 7443 and passes leftward in FIG. In addition, the opening 7422b is arranged below the game ball by rotating the second annular member 7422 counterclockwise 30 degrees (0.5 seconds) from the state shown in FIG. 89(b). , the center position of the game ball is moved 5 mm from the center position in the width direction of the second annular member 7422 (the game ball is pushed by the screw member 7453), and the gap between the game ball and the third specific area hole 7443 is Since the position is shifted, the game ball does not fall into the third specific area hole 7443 and moves to the left in FIG. 85(a).

At this time, the load that moves the game ball in the vertical direction of the traveling direction is not applied to the game ball from the second annular member 7422, so the game ball passes while positioned at the bottom of the second annular member 7422. do.

In this case, due to the driving force of the screw member 7453, it passes through the tilting floor 7412 while being positioned at the bottom of the upper surface of the tilting floor 7412, and reaches the first annular member 7421, so that the second specific area hole 7442 is reached. Whether or not the ball falls depends on the state of the first annular member 7421 .

90(a) and 90(b) are cross-sectional views of the first annular member 7421 along line LXXXVb-LXXXVb in FIG. 85(a). 90(a) shows a state at the same timing as the state shown in FIG. 89(b). In FIG. 90(b), the state shown in FIG. 90(a) is rotated 300 degrees counterclockwise The states are illustrated. That is, FIG. 90(b) shows the state after about 5 seconds have passed from the state shown in FIG. 90(a).

As described above, in this embodiment, the game ball moves from the center position of the second annular member 7422 to the center position of the first annular member 7421 in about 5 seconds. That is, the game ball passing through the second annular member 7422 in FIG. 89(b) reaches the center position of the first annular member 7421 in the state shown in FIG. 90(b). In the state shown in FIG. 90(b), the end portion of the main body portion 7421a is arranged below the game ball, so the game ball cannot fall into the second specific area hole 7442, and the left side of FIG. 90(b) inward direction, first specific area hole 7441 side).

In this way, the first annular member 7421 determines whether or not to fall into the second specific area hole 7442 . A slight difference (for example, a difference of 0.5 seconds) in the timing at which the game ball flows into the rotation sorting device 7420 can make the specific area holes 7441 to 7443 to which the game ball falls different. Thereby, the degree of attention of the game ball passing through the rotary distribution device 7420 can be improved.

So far, when the game ball passes through the second annular member 7422, the case where it flows down the lowest part of the second annular member 7422 has been described. Next, a case will be described in which the second annular member 7422 is lifted from the lowermost portion and passes through the second annular member 7422 .

91(a) and 91(b) are cross-sectional views of the second annular member 7422 taken along line LXXXVc-LXXXVc in FIG. 85, and FIG. 91(c) is a view in the direction of arrow XCIc in FIG. 91(a). is a partial internal view of the second annular member 7422 in FIG. In addition, FIG. 91(a) shows a state rotated 120 degrees counterclockwise from the initial state, and FIG. 91(b) shows a state rotated 120 degrees counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 91(a). is illustrated, and a game ball rolling on the inner surface of the second annular member 7422 is illustrated with a solid line and an imaginary line. Note that the state shown in FIG. 91(b) corresponds to a state in which about two seconds have elapsed from the state shown in I9(a).

As shown in FIG. 91, the game ball is placed at the right end position IN (see FIG. 85(a)) of the second annular member 7422 in the state shown in FIG. It is arranged at the left end position OUT (see FIG. 85(a)) of the second annular member 7422, and is moved to the position shown in FIG. The playing ball is lifted (to half the radius height). By pushing the game ball from here to the screw member 7453 (see FIG. 83), it is pushed out toward the tilting floor 7412 from the height position shown in FIG. 91(b). Therefore, when the game ball rolls on the tilting floor 7412, it flows down the tilting floor 7412 while swinging in the circumferential direction of the arc.

As shown in FIG. 91(c), the protruding portion 7422e is formed with an inclined surface facing the opposite side of the opening 7422b on the opposite side of the adjacent opening 7422b in the vicinity of the entrance. , When the game ball flows into the second annular member 7422 in contact with the end of the projecting portion 7422e, the game ball is placed on the opposite side of the opening 7422b (the side with the wall of the main body portion 7422a). It can be easier to guide you.

As a result, the second annular member at the timing at which the game ball contacts the end of the projecting portion 7422e (the game ball swings to the main body portion 7422a or swings to the opening 7422b, which cannot be immediately determined) When flowing into 7422, it is possible to make it easier for the player to roll the game ball in the direction in which the profit is large.

Therefore, the timing at which the game ball comes into contact with the end of the projecting portion 7422e is not simply a sorting timing of falling into the third specific area hole 7443 with a probability of 1/2, but the second annular member 7422 can be produced as the timing of a great chance for the game ball to easily pass to the second specific area hole 7442 side. As a result, it is possible to increase the timing at which the interest of the player is heightened.

FIG. 92 is a partial top view of the second flow-down device 7400 viewed in the direction of arrow XCII in FIG. 85(a). In addition, in FIG. 92, an example of the path of the game ball flowing down the tilting floor 7412 is illustrated by a curved line. Also, the period t until the game ball passes is illustrated with the end of the tilting floor 7412 on the side of the second annular member 7422 as a reference.

As shown in FIG. 92, when the game ball is pushed onto the tilting floor 7412 from the state shown in FIG. It flows down while swaying in a manner (illustrated by the arrow in the figure). Therefore, as shown at a position near period t=4, when the game ball passes through the first annular member 7421, the positions of the game ball and the second specific area hole 7442 are shifted. It is possible to prevent game balls from falling on 7442.

93(a) and 93(b) are cross-sectional views of the first annular member 7421 along line LXXXVb-LXXXVb in FIG. 85(a). 93(a) shows the state at the same timing as the state shown in FIG. 91(b). In FIG. 93(b), the state shown in FIG. 93(a) is rotated 240 degrees counterclockwise. The states are illustrated. That is, the state shown in FIG. 93(b) shows the state after about 4 seconds have passed since the state shown in FIG. 93(a), and the game ball shown in FIG. 7421 at the timing of being placed at the center position in the width direction.

As shown in FIG. 93(b), at the timing when the center of the game ball is placed at the center position in the width direction of the first annular member 7421, the second specific area hole 7442 is inside the area of the opening 7421b in top view. , the game ball can fall into the second specific area hole 7442 .

When the game ball passes through the lowest part of the inner surface of the first annular member 7421, the game ball almost falls into the second specific area hole 7442 in the state shown in FIG. 93(b). As described above with reference to FIG. 92, in this embodiment, the game ball can be swung in the circumferential direction of the arc of the tilting floor 7412 . As a result, while the game ball is not arranged at the bottom of the first annular member 7421, the game ball can flow down in such a manner that the game ball passes through the center position in the width direction of the first annular member 7421. Even if the first annular member 7421 is in the state of FIG. a) It is possible to construct a state in which it passes to the left (the direction toward the back in FIG. 93(b), the direction toward the side of the inclined flow path 7413 (see FIG. 83)) (illustrated by imaginary lines in FIG. 93(b)).

Therefore, if the game ball sways in the circumferential direction of the arc of the tilting floor 7412 (if the game ball flows differently than usual), it is possible to increase the probability that the player will benefit. can improve power.

Also, FIG. 92 shows an example of how the game ball flows down. The position of the second specific area hole 7442 may match.

Therefore, even if the game ball flows down from the same height of the second annular member 7422 to the tilting floor 7412 and sways in the circumferential direction of the arc of the tilting floor 7412, the flowing path of the game ball is not always the same. Therefore, while maintaining the degree of expectation when the game ball swings in the circumferential direction of the arc of the tilting floor 7412 (the degree of expectation that it may pass the first annular member 7421 to the left), the flow of the game ball It can be made to watch the aspect to the end. As a result, the attention of the game ball flowing down the second falling device 7400 can be improved, and based on this, the attention of the second falling device 7400 itself can be improved.

94(a) and 94(b) are cross-sectional views of the second annular member 7422 taken along line LXXXVc-LXXXVc in FIG. 85(a). In addition, FIG. 94(a) shows a state rotated 150 degrees counterclockwise from the initial state, and FIG. 94(b) shows a state rotated 120 degrees counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 94(a). is illustrated, and the game ball P75 rolling on the inner surface of the second annular member 7422 is illustrated by a solid line and an imaginary line. Note that the state shown in FIG. 94(b) corresponds to a state in which about two seconds have elapsed from the state shown in FIG. 94(a).

As shown in FIG. 94, the game ball is placed at the right end position IN (see FIG. 85(a)) of the second annular member 7422 in the state shown in FIG. It is placed at the left end position OUT (see FIG. 85(a)) of the second annular member 7422, and is moved to the position shown in FIG. The game ball P75 is lifted (to the height of the radius). From here, the game ball P75 is pushed toward the tilting floor 7412 from the height position shown in FIG. 94(b) by pushing the screw member 7453 (see FIG. 83). Therefore, when the game ball P75 rolls on the tilting floor 7412, it flows down the tilting floor 7412 while swinging in the circumferential direction of the arc.

FIG. 95 is a partial top view of the second flow-down device 7400 viewed in the direction of arrow XCII in FIG. 85(a). In addition, in FIG. 95, an example of the path of the game ball P75 flowing down the tilting floor 7412 is illustrated by a curved line. In addition, the period t until the game ball P75 passes is illustrated with the end of the tilting floor 7412 on the side of the second annular member 7422 as a reference.

As shown in FIG. 95, when the game ball is pushed onto the tilting floor 7412 from the state shown in FIG. (indicated by the arrow in the figure). It should be noted that the switching interval is longer because the swing width is greater than in the mode shown in FIG. 92 . Also in this example, when the game ball P75 passes through the first annular member 7421 as shown at a position near period t=4, the positions of the game ball P75 and the second specific area hole 7442 are shifted. It is possible to prevent the game ball from falling into the second specific area hole 7442 .

Here, in FIG. 92, the game ball P75 is placed at a position where the direction of swinging is switched (a position away from the second specific area hole 7442) at a position near period t=4, whereas in FIG. At the position of period t=4, the game ball P75 is arranged closer to the second specific area hole 7442 than the position where the swinging direction is switched.

That is, by changing the way the game ball P75 swings from the way the game ball P74 swings, it is possible to increase the types of effects produced by the movement of the game ball, and at the same time, the game ball and the second specific region at the position of period t=4. By changing the degree of positional deviation from the hole 7442, it is possible to change the probability of whether or not the game ball P75 falls into the second specific area hole 7442, so that the attention of the game ball can be improved. .

96(a) and 96(b) are cross-sectional views of the first annular member 7421 along line LXXXVb-LXXXVb in FIG. 85(a). 96(a) shows the state at the same timing as the state shown in FIG. 94(b). In FIG. 96(b), the state shown in FIG. 96(a) is rotated 240 degrees counterclockwise. The states are illustrated. That is, the state shown in FIG. 96(b) shows the state after about four seconds have passed from the state shown in FIG. 96(a), and the game ball P75 shown in FIG. The state at the timing when the member 7421 is arranged at the center position in the width direction is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 96(b), at the timing when the center of the game ball is placed at the center position in the width direction of the first annular member 7421, the second specific area hole 7442 is inside the area of the opening 7421b in top view. , the game ball P75 can fall into the second specific area hole 7442.

When the game ball P75 passes through the lowermost portion of the inner surface of the first annular member 7421, the game ball almost falls into the second specific area hole 7442 in the state shown in FIG. 96(b). As described above with reference to FIG. 95, in this embodiment, the game ball can be swung in the circumferential direction of the arc of the tilting floor 7412 . As a result, while the game ball is not arranged at the bottom of the first annular member 7421, the game ball can flow down in such a manner that the game ball passes through the center position in the width direction of the first annular member 7421. Even if the first annular member 7421 is in the state of FIG. 85(a) can be configured to pass leftward (FIG. 96(b) in the depth direction, inclined flow path 7413 side direction (see FIG. 83)) (illustrated by imaginary lines in FIG. 96(b)). .

Therefore, if the game ball P75 sways in the circumferential direction of the arc of the tilting floor 7412 (if the game ball flows differently from usual), the player can be more likely to benefit. It can improve attention.

Also, FIG. 95 shows an example of how the game ball P75 flows down. There may be a case where the sphere P75 and the second specific area hole 7442 are aligned.

Therefore, even if the game ball P75 flows down from the same height of the second annular member 7422 to the tilting floor 7412 and sways in the circumferential direction of the arc of the tilting floor 7412, the downward path of the game ball P75 is always the same. Since it is not limited, while maintaining the degree of expectation when the game ball P75 swings in the circumferential direction of the arc of the tilting floor 7412 (the degree of expectation that it may pass the first annular member 7421 to the left), the game ball It can be made to watch the flow of P75 to the end. As a result, the attention of the game ball P75 flowing down the second falling device 7400 can be improved, and based on this, the attention of the second falling device 7400 itself can be improved.

97(a) and 97(b) are cross-sectional views of the second annular member 7422 along line LXXXVc-LXXXVc in FIG. 85(a). 97(a) shows a state rotated 240 degrees counterclockwise from the initial state, and FIG. 97(b) shows a state rotated 120 degrees counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 97(a). is illustrated, and a game ball rolling on the inner surface of the second annular member 7422 is illustrated with a solid line and an imaginary line. The state shown in FIG. 97(b) corresponds to the state after about two seconds have passed from the state shown in I15(a).

As shown in FIG. 97, the game ball is placed at the right end position IN (see FIG. 85(a)) of the second annular member 7422 in the state shown in FIG. It is placed at the left end position OUT (see FIG. 85(a)) of the second annular member 7422, and is moved to the position shown in FIG. The playing ball is lifted (to half the radius height). By pushing the game ball from here to the screw member 7453 (see FIG. 83), it is pushed out toward the tilting floor 7412 from the height position shown in FIG. 97(b). Therefore, when the game ball rolls on the tilting floor 7412, it flows down the tilting floor 7412 while swinging in the circumferential direction of the arc.

98(a) and 98(b) are cross-sectional views of the first annular member 7421 along line LXXXVb-LXXXVb in FIG. 85(a). 98(a) shows the state at the same timing as the state shown in FIG. 97(b). In FIG. 98(b), the state shown in FIG. 98(a) is rotated 240 degrees counterclockwise The states are illustrated. That is, the state shown in FIG. 98(b) is the state after about 4 seconds have passed from the state shown in FIG. 98(a), and the game ball shown in FIG. 7421 at the timing of being placed at the center position in the width direction.

As shown in FIG. 98(b), at the timing when the center of the game ball is arranged at the center position in the width direction of the first annular member 7421, the wall portion of the main body portion 7421a covers above the second specific area hole 7442. Since it is arranged in a manner, the game ball cannot fall into the second specific area hole 7442.

97 and 98, since the game ball is pushed to the tilting floor 7412 from the height position shown in FIG. 97(b) (the same height position as the height position shown in FIG. The game ball flowing down mode is the same as the mode described in FIG. 92 .

On the other hand, unlike the case described with reference to FIG. It does not fall into the specific area hole 7442 and passes through the first annular member 7421 toward the inclined channel 7413 side.

That is, even if the game ball flowing down while swinging in the circumferential direction of the arc on the tilting floor 7412 flows in the same manner, there are cases where it can fall into the second specific area hole 7442 and cases where it cannot fall into the second specific area hole 7442. can be clearly separated from

Therefore, the game balls flowing down while swinging in the circumferential direction of the arc on the tilting floor 7412 have the same flowing state, and the swinging converges before reaching the first ring member 7421, and the first ring member 7421 reaches the maximum. Even if the game ball settles in the lower part, whether the game ball that has flowed into the first annular member 7421 falls into the second specific area hole 7442 or passes through the inclined flow path 7413 until the end ( Until the game ball passes through the first annular member 7421), it is possible to make it invisible, and the attention of the game ball can be improved.

In addition, the difference in posture of the first annular member 7421 at the timing when the center of the game ball is arranged at the center position in the width direction of the first annular member 7421 is caused by the difference in the projecting portion 7422e that lifts the game ball. .

Therefore, by making it difficult for the player to grasp which projecting portion 7422e of the second annular member 7422 the game ball is lifted up, the game ball moves down from the tilting floor 7412 to the first circle. It is possible to make it difficult to predict the attitude of the first annular member 7421 when the center of the game ball is arranged at the center position in the width direction of the annular member 7421 .

In this embodiment, the three openings 7422b are all of the same size, and the main body 7422a is not given a characteristic pattern (for example, it is painted in one color, or the same pattern is applied regardless of the phase). (formed by a striped pattern or the like that can be visually recognized in color), making it difficult to grasp which of the pair of projecting portions 7422e has lifted the game ball.

99(a) and 99(b) are cross-sectional views of the second annular member 7422 along line LXXXVc-LXXXVc in FIG. 85(a). In addition, FIG. 99(a) shows a state rotated 270 degrees counterclockwise from the initial state, and FIG. 99(b) shows a state rotated 120 degrees counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 99(a). is illustrated, and the game ball P76 rolling on the inner surface of the second annular member 7422 is illustrated with a solid line and an imaginary line. It should be noted that the state shown in FIG. 99(b) corresponds to a state in which about two seconds have elapsed from the state shown in FIG. 99(a).

As shown in FIG. 99, the game ball is placed at the right end position IN (see FIG. 85(a)) of the second annular member 7422 in the state shown in FIG. It is placed at the left end position OUT (see FIG. 85(a)) of the second annular member 7422, and is moved to the position shown in FIG. A game ball P76 is lifted (to the height of the radius). From here, the game ball P76 is pushed toward the tilting floor 7412 from the height position shown in FIG. 99(b) by pushing the screw member 7453 (see FIG. 83). Therefore, when the game ball P76 rolls on the tilting floor 7412, it flows down the tilting floor 7412 while swinging in the circumferential direction of the arc.

100(a) and 100(b) are cross-sectional views of the first annular member 7421 along line LXXXVb-LXXXVb in FIG. 85(a). 100(a) shows the state at the same timing as the state shown in FIG. 99(b), and in FIG. 100(b), the state shown in FIG. 100(a) is rotated 240 degrees counterclockwise. The states are illustrated. That is, the state shown in FIG. 100(b) is the state after about 4 seconds have passed from the state shown in FIG. 100(a), and the game ball shown in FIG. 7421 at the timing of being placed at the center position in the width direction.

As shown in FIG. 100(b), at the timing when the center of the game ball is arranged at the center position in the width direction of the first annular member 7421, the wall portion of the main body portion 7421a is above the second specific area hole 7442. Since it is arranged in a manner covering the target, the game ball cannot fall into the second specific area hole 7442 .

99 and 100, since the game ball is pushed to the tilting floor 7412 from the height position shown in FIG. 94(b) (the same height position as the height position shown in FIG. The game ball flowing down mode is the same as the mode described in FIG. 95 .

On the other hand, unlike the case described with reference to FIG. It does not fall into the specific area hole 7442 and passes through the first annular member 7421 toward the inclined channel 7413 side.

That is, even if the game ball flowing down while swinging in the circumferential direction of the arc on the tilting floor 7412 flows in the same manner, there are cases where it can fall into the second specific area hole 7442 and cases where it cannot fall into the second specific area hole 7442. can be clearly separated from

Therefore, the game balls flowing down while swinging in the circumferential direction of the arc on the tilting floor 7412 have the same flowing state, and the swinging converges before reaching the first ring member 7421, and the first ring member 7421 reaches the maximum. Even if the game ball settles in the lower part, whether the game ball that has flowed into the first annular member 7421 falls into the second specific area hole 7442 or passes through the inclined flow path 7413 until the end ( Until the game ball passes through the first annular member 7421), it is possible to make it invisible, and the attention of the game ball can be improved.

In addition, the difference in posture of the first annular member 7421 at the timing when the center of the game ball is arranged at the center position in the width direction of the first annular member 7421 is caused by the difference in the projecting portion 7422e that lifts the game ball. .

Therefore, by making it difficult for the player to grasp which projecting portion 7422e of the second annular member 7422 the game ball is lifted up, the game ball moves down from the tilting floor 7412 to the first circle. It is possible to make it difficult to predict the attitude of the first annular member 7421 when the center of the game ball is arranged at the center position in the width direction of the annular member 7421 .

In this embodiment, the three openings 7422b are all of the same size, and the main body 7422a is not given a characteristic pattern (for example, it is painted in one color, or the same pattern is applied regardless of the phase). (formed by a striped pattern or the like that can be visually recognized in color), making it difficult to grasp which of the pair of projecting portions 7422e has lifted the game ball.

As shown in FIGS. 91 to 100, when the game ball flowing down the tilting floor 7412 sways along the circumferential direction of the arc on the upper surface of the tilting floor 7412, the pattern of the game ball flowing down has a maximum amplitude of At least two different flow modes can be formed, and while each flow mode is maintained, the distribution probability of whether or not to pass the first annular member 7421 to the inclined flow path 7413 side can be greatly different. It can be configured in a manner that allows

That is, while maintaining the flow-down mode of the game ball swinging on the tilting floor 7412 after being lifted by the projecting portion 7422e, the game ball moves to the second annular member 7422 without changing the operation control of the rotation distribution device 7420. The state in which the game ball passes through the first annular member 7421 to the inclined flow path 7413 side can be configured depending on the timing of flowing into.

In this embodiment, the inflow sensor 7416 (see FIG. 84) detects the timing at which the game ball flows into the screw member 7453. Therefore, from the phase of the first annular member 7421 at that timing, the specific area hole where the game ball is It can be recognized whether it has flowed into the screw member 7453 at the timing of falling to 7441 to 7443, and it can be used for production control.

For example, when it is time for the game ball to fall into the first specific area hole 7441, a flashy effect indicating that the maximum profit has been obtained is displayed between the spiral plates of the screw member 7453. It can be performed as a look-ahead effect from within the . That is, by foreseeing the difference in the profit that will be obtained depending on the manner in which the game ball flows down by control, and giving a difference in the intensity of the effect when the game ball flows down the second flow-down device 7400, the effect is It is possible to give a role that is directly connected to the player's profit, not just a liveliness.

As a result, when the game ball flows in the same manner (for example, in the case of the flowing manner shown in FIG. 92), whether or not the game ball passes through the first annular member 7421 to the side of the inclined flow path 7413 from the player's line of sight. However, the control side can recognize that most of them pass through the inclined flow path 7413 (for example, see the explanation described above with reference to FIG. 98).

Therefore, from the player's point of view, it is possible to prevent a one-to-one link between the flow state of the game ball and the effect, and when the flow state of the game ball is the same as usual, a different effect is produced. However, it is possible to prevent it from being judged as a lively performance (so-called “fake performance”). As a result, it is possible to improve the attention to the flowing state of the game ball.

101(a) and 101(b) are cross-sectional views of the second flow-down device 7400 taken along line CIa--CIa of FIG. 85(b). 101(a), the tilting floor 7412 faces upward, and in FIG. 101(b), the tilting floor 7412 faces downward. 101(a) shows a game ball P78 positioned at the left end position OUT of the second annular member 7422 and a game ball P79 positioned at the right end position IN, and FIG. 101(b) shows The state shown is about 0.5 seconds after the state shown in FIG. 101(a).

As shown in FIG. 101(a), when the game ball P78 is not on the tilting floor 7412, the tilting floor 7412 faces upward, and the projecting member 7411h is arranged outside the inner surface of the third specific area hole 7443. be. In this state, the game ball P79 can fall into the third specific area hole 7443.

When 0.5 seconds have passed from the state shown in FIG. 101(a), the game ball is pushed by the screw member 7453 and moves about 5 mm to the left. P78 rides on the tilting floor 7412, and the tilting floor 7412 faces downward due to the weight of the game ball P78.

In this state, the projecting member 7411h protrudes inward from the inner surface of the third specific area hole 7443, so that the opening of the third specific area hole 7443 can be narrowed. 7443 can be prevented from falling.

Therefore, when the game ball P78 that has previously flowed into the screw member 7453 passes through the second annular member 7422 to the left (the second specific area hole 7442 side direction), the game ball P79 that has flowed into the screw member 7453 later However, it can be prevented from falling into the third specific area hole 7443 that provides a smaller profit than the profit obtained from the game ball P78 that has flowed in earlier. As a result, when two game balls P78 and P79 flow into the second flow-down device 7400, the game ball P79 that has flowed in later can obtain a profit greater than the profit that can be obtained from the game ball P78 that has flowed in earlier. Therefore, after the passage through which the previous game ball P78 passes is determined, it is possible to further improve the attention to the later game ball P79.

Also, since the game ball P78 stays on the upper surface of the tilting floor 7412 for about 3 seconds, the tilting floor 7412 returns to the upward state before the game ball P79 that has flowed into the screw member 7453 later passes through the second annular member 7422. can be prevented.

In this embodiment, in order to achieve the above effect, the interval between the plates of the spiral plate portion 7453b of the screw member 7453 is set to be 20 mm or more (in this embodiment, the interval is about 25 mm). ). Thereby, the later game ball P79 can be prevented from falling into the third specific area hole 7443 before the projecting operation of the projecting member 7411h.

In this embodiment, since the interval between the plates of the spiral plate portion 7453b is configured at an interval of about 25 mm, when two game balls reach the third specific area hole 7443, an interval of 2.5 seconds (second It passes through the center position of the second annular member 7422 at an interval at which the two annular members 7422 are rotated by 150 degrees. Therefore, due to the configuration of the second annular member 7422 (the configuration in which the opening of the opening 7422b is arranged on the opposite side of the wall of the main body 7422a by 180 degrees), when one game ball falls into the opening, the other game ball The ball is easy to ride on the wall.

Therefore, even if there is no time blocking plate 2411, at least one of the game balls can be easily sent to the left of the second annular member 7422.

Also, when two game balls ride on the wall portion of the main body portion 7422a of the second annular member 7422, from the arrangement of the projecting portion 7422e of the second annular member 7422 (arrangement every 120 degrees, one place ), at least one of the game balls can be easily swung in the circumferential direction of the second annular member 7422 . For example, behind the game ball P72 shown in FIG. ), the second ring member 7422 rotates 150 degrees (for 2.5 seconds) (see FIG. 91(a)), the later game ball flows into the second ring member 7422.

In this case, the game ball P72 shown in FIG. 87(a) does not come into contact with the projecting portion 7422e and does not swing in the circumferential direction of the second annular member 7422, but the game ball P72 shown in FIG. The ball P74 comes into contact with the projecting portion 7422e and moves between the second annular member 7422 and the first annular member 7421 while swinging in the circumferential direction (see FIG. 92(b)). Therefore, by continuously inflowing a plurality of game balls into the screw member 7453 (driven by the operation of the screw member 7453 while sandwiching one plate of the spiral plate portion 7453b), at least one game ball can be easily swayed in the circumferential direction of the second annular member 7422, and the expectation of the player can be improved.

Thus, in the present embodiment, two game balls enter the second flow-down device 7400 collectively, and the action of the rotation distribution device 7420 and the game ball driving device 7450 and the game balls passes through the second annular member 7421 to the left. In other words, it is possible for the player to win more profitable jackpots (7-round jackpot, 16-round jackpot).

In addition, in the present embodiment, in the process of obtaining a big hit, the case where the game ball is moved in the circumferential direction of the second annular member 7422 and the case where it is not moved are randomly formed. Since the distribution (probability) of the profit that can be obtained is changed, it is possible to improve the attention of the flow of the game ball.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, even if the game ball has the same flow path, it is possible to form a pattern that can be any jackpot (7-round jackpot, 16-round jackpot) in each of the flow-down trajectories. Therefore, it is possible to improve attention to the flow of the game ball regardless of the flow trajectory of the game ball that has passed through the second annular member 7422 to the left.

Next, a first control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 102 to 130. FIG. In addition, in the first control example, the electrical configuration is configured by the block diagram described above with reference to FIG. 4, so FIG. 4 will be referred to as appropriate.

FIG. 102 is a diagram showing the outline of various counters in the first control example, FIG. 103(a) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the main controller in the first control example, and 104(b) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the RAM in the main controller in the first control example, and FIG. 104(a) schematically shows the contents of the first winning random number table in the first control example. FIG. 104(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the first random number counter C1 and the small hit determination value in the first special symbol in the first control example, and FIG. 104 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the first random number counter C1 and the small hit determination value in the second special symbol in the first control example, FIG. 104 (d) is the first control It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence of the 2nd hit random number counter C4 in an example, and the hit in a normal design.

The main control unit 110 performs main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as special symbol lottery, normal symbol lottery, display setting in the first symbol display device 37 and display setting in the second symbol display device (not shown). Run. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 102, counters and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described. These counters, etc. are used to set the special symbol lottery, the normal symbol lottery, the setting of the display on the first symbol display device 37, and the setting of the display on the second symbol display device. used in

For setting the special symbol lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37, the first winning random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the first winning type used for selecting the special symbol winning type A counter C2, a stop type selection counter C3 used to select the stop type of the deviation in the special symbol, a first initial value random number counter CINI1 used to set the initial value of the first hit random number counter C1, and variation pattern selection. and a variation type counter CS1 used for . Also, the second winning random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of normal symbols, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 115), and some counters are updated irregularly during the main processing (see FIG. 119). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 . In the RAM 203, a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a corresponding to the winning in the left start winning prize port 26 and the right start prize winning port 27 consisting of one execution area and four reservation areas (reservation first to fourth areas) is stored. and a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b corresponding to the winning to the middle start winning opening 28 are provided, respectively, and each of these areas includes the left starting winning opening 26 and the right starting winning opening 27 or the middle starting winning opening Each value of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored in accordance with the timing of entering the ball into the mouth 28, respectively. In addition, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c consisting of one execution area and four reserved areas (first to fourth reserved areas). The value of the second hit random number counter C4 is stored in synchronization with the timing of passing through any of the normal starting ports (through gates) 67. FIG.

Each counter will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The first hit random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 399). It is configured to return to In particular, when the first winning random number counter C1 completes one cycle, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1.

The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated within the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, if the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take values from 0 to 399, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter that ranges from 0 to 399. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 115) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 119).

The value of the first winning random number counter C1 is, for example, periodically updated (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the ball enters the left starting winning opening 26, the right starting winning opening 27, or the middle starting winning opening 28. It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 at the winning timing. Then, the value of the random number that becomes the winning of the special symbol is set by a first winning random number table (not shown) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the first winning random number counter C1 If the value of the random number set as the winning per random number table matches, it is determined that the special symbol is winning. In addition, the first hit random number table 202a of the special symbol is provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. FIG.

Here, the first winning random number table 202a will be described. The first winning random number table 202a is a table in which a random number value (determination value) determined as a small winning in each game state is set in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Specifically, in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, it is determined whether the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is "0 to 399". If so, it is determined to be a small hit (probability of a small hit = 1/1).

The first winning type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a small winning of a special symbol occurs. It is incremented and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take values from 0 to 99). The value of the first winning type counter C2 is, for example, periodically updated (once per timer interrupt processing in this embodiment), and at the timing when the ball enters the left starting winning opening 26 and the right starting winning opening 27. It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM203.

Here, if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is not a random number that becomes a special symbol hit, that is, the special symbol If it is a random number that will result in a loss, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 will be the one when the special symbol is lost. However, in the present embodiment, since the small win probability is 1, it is not displayed in the display mode of being out.

On the other hand, if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is a random number for the small winning of the special symbol, the first symbol is displayed. The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the device 37 is the one at the time of the small hit of the special symbol. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the small hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a.

The fluctuation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). A rough display mode is determined by the variation type counter CS1. Determination of the display mode is, specifically, determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the main process (see FIG. 119) described later is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process. A variation pattern table storing a random value for determining one variation time of symbol variation from the value (random value) of the variation type counter CS1 is provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. FIG.

The second hit random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that increments by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 239, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). Further, when the second winning random number counter C4 completes one cycle, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. In this embodiment, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically at each timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 115), and the ball has passed through either the left or right normal start opening (through gate) 67. When this is detected, it is acquired and stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c of the RAM203.

Then, the value of the random number that is the normal winning pattern is set by the second winning random number table 202c (see FIG. 104(d)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the value of the second winning random number counter C4. is equal to the winning random number value set by the second winning random number table 202c, it is determined that the winning is a normal symbol (second symbol). In addition, this second per random number table 202c is for non-time saving time (period of normal state of normal design), time saving time (period of time saving state of normal design, period when value of counter 203t during time saving is greater than 0 ), and the number of random numbers that will be the jackpot included in each is set differently. In this way, by varying the number of random numbers to be a hit, the probability of being a hit is changed between the non-time saving time and the time saving time.

Returning to FIG. 102, the description continues. The RAM 203 stores various counters shown in FIG. 102, the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201, and the like. and a work area (work area) in which the value of is stored.

The RAM 203 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When power is interrupted due to power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of power interruption (including power failure; the same applies hereinafter). On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on due to the cancellation of the power failure; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203 . Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 119) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by the start-up process (see FIG. 118) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. , NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 117) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

Also, as shown in FIG. 103(b), the RAM 203 has a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d, Special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e, normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f, winning number counter 203j, operation counter 203k, retention counter 203l, notification counter 203m, remaining ball timer flag 203n, remaining ball timer 203o, discharge number counter 203s, It has a time saving middle counter 203t, a big hit start flag 203v1, a big hit middle flag 203v2, a small hit start flag 203w1, a small hit middle flag 203w2, a V entrance passage flag 203x1, a V flag 203x2, and a memory area 203z.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a has one execution area and four reserved areas (first reserved area to fourth reserved area) as shown in FIG. , the values of the first winning random number counter C1 and the first winning type counter C2 obtained based on the winning of the left starting winning opening 26 and the right starting winning opening 27 are respectively stored.

More specifically, each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired at the timing when the ball enters the left start winning port 26 and the right starting winning port 27 (start winning). Among the vacant areas of the reservation areas (first reservation area to fourth reservation area), the area numbers (first to fourth) are stored in ascending order. That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the oldest winning is stored, and the first reserved area stores the data corresponding to the oldest winning. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, in the main control device 110, when a special symbol lottery is performed, each value of each counter C1 to C3 stored in the first reserved area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is transferred to the execution area. Based on the values of the respective counters C1 to C3 which are shifted (moved) and stored in the execution area, determination such as lottery for special symbols is performed.

When data is shifted from the first reservation area to the execution area, the first reservation area becomes empty. Therefore, there is a shift process that packs the winning data stored in other reservation areas (second reservation area to fourth reservation area) to reservation areas (first reservation area to third reservation area) with an area number smaller by 1. done. In this embodiment, in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, data shift is performed only for the reserved areas (second reserved area to fourth reserved area) in which winning data is stored.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is different from the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a only in that the counter values acquired for winning the middle start winning opening 28 are respectively stored. are the same, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Like the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c has one execution area and four reserved areas (first reserved area to fourth reserved area ). Each of these areas stores a second winning random number counter C4.

More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through either the left or right normal starting port 67, and the acquired data is stored in the four holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area). Areas) are stored in ascending order of area number (first to fourth) among the vacant areas. That is, similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, in the main controller 110, when the normal symbol winning lottery is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( ), and based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, a determination such as a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed.

In addition, when the data is shifted from the first reserved area to the execution area, the first reserved area becomes vacant. is shifted to a reserved area with an area number smaller by one. Also, the data shift is performed only for the reserved areas in which the winning data are stored.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is the first special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the ball entering the left start winning port 26 and the right starting winning port 27 (start winning). It is a counter that counts the number of held balls (number of standby times) of the variable display up to 4 times. The initial value of this special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is set to zero. , is incremented by 1 up to a maximum value of 4 (see S404 in FIG. 112). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time a special symbol variable display is newly executed (see S210 in FIG. 110).

The value of this special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times N of holding the variable display in the special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the special symbol 1 reserved ball number command (S211 of FIG. 110, of FIG. 112 (see S405). The special symbol 1 reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp controller 113 every time the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is changed.

The voice lamp control device 113 changes the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d, and the variation reserved by the main controller 110 by the special symbol 1 reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110. It is possible to acquire the value of the number of held balls displayed. As a result, the number of variable display pending balls managed by the special symbol 1 pending ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 is changed to the actual variable display pending ball number that was held by the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it deviates from the number, the deviation can be corrected by the next pending ball number command received.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is different from the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d in that the number of reserved balls entered into the medium start winning opening 28 is stored. Therefore, detailed description thereof will be omitted. In addition, when the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is changed, the voice lamp control device 113 is notified by the special symbol 2 reserved ball number command.

The normal design reserved ball number counter 203f counts the number of reserved balls (number of standby times) of the variable display of the normal design (second design) performed by the second design display device based on the passage of the ball in the normal start port 67 up to 4 times. A counter that counts up to The initial value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is set to zero, and each time a ball passes through the normal starting port 67 and the number of reserved balls displayed in a variable display increases, 1 is added up to a maximum value of 4. (See S704 in FIG. 114). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S605 in FIG. 113).

When the ball passes through either the left or right normal starting port 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of times M of fluctuation display is reserved in normal symbols) is less than 4, the second hit random number counter C4. is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c (S705 in FIG. 114). On the other hand, when the ball passes through either the left or right normal starting port 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c ( S703 in FIG. 114: No).

The winning number counter 203j counts the number of game balls that have entered the big winning opening switch 190b of the movable ball-entering accessory device 190 in one round in the jackpot game (that is, the number of game balls that have entered the movable ball-entering accessory device 190). number). Specifically, when it is detected that the game ball has passed through the big winning opening switch 190b (see FIG. 2) provided in the movable ball entry accessory device 190, the value is updated by adding one at a time. On the other hand, when one round ends, it is determined whether or not the number of winning (the value of the winning number counter 203j) and the discharged number (the value of the discharge number counter 203s) of the movable ball entry accessory device 190 match. (S1267 in FIG. 123), it is reset to the initial value "0". The value of the winning number counter 203j is backed up when the power is turned off. It is set to 0 in the initialized state.

The operation counter 203k is a counter for measuring (counting) the time during which the large opening solenoid 209a is set to ON (excitation).

The residence counter 203l includes the residence solenoid 413 (see FIG. 23) described above in the first embodiment, the electromagnetic solenoid 2420 (see FIG. 40) described in the second, sixth, and seventh embodiments, and the seventh embodiment. It is a counter for timing (counting) the time during which the drive motor 7451 (see FIG. 83) described above in the form is set to ON (excitation). In the pachinko machine 10, the retention counter 203l has a predetermined period of time (5 seconds in the first embodiment, 2nd and 6th 12 seconds in the embodiment and 14 seconds in the seventh embodiment) is set (S724 in FIG. 116). On the other hand, in the processing of S1322 of the small winning end processing (FIG. 125, S1312) executed by the MPU 2011 of the main control device 110, the value is decremented by one and updated.

Further, based on the determination that the value of the retention counter 203l is 0 (S1323 in FIG. 125: Yes), the retention solenoid 413 (see FIG. 23) described above in the first embodiment, the second embodiment, and the sixth embodiment The electromagnetic solenoid 2420 (see FIG. 40) described above in the embodiment and the seventh embodiment and the drive motor 7451 described in the seventh embodiment are turned off (see FIG. 23). The residence counter 203l is backed up when the power is turned off, and is set to 0 as an initial value in the initialized state. In this way, by setting the stay counter 203l and controlling a device such as the stay solenoid 413 or the like that prevents the game balls from flowing down, winning of the specific area hole 440 is determined by the number of game balls that have entered the fixed area hole 340. can be controlled. That is, it is possible to prevent all game balls from passing through the third specific area hole 443 (the specific area hole having the specific area switch that gives the smallest profit to the player).

The notification counter 203m is a counter for determining the timing of outputting notification effects (sound and lighting effects in this embodiment) for attracting the player's attention. In this embodiment, one second corresponds to the timing at which the game ball passes through each of the start winning openings 26 to 28 and the end timing of the 15th round (10 balls have been won in the movable ball entry accessory device 190 or 30 seconds have passed). A notification counter 203m is set. This notification counter 203m is updated by being decremented by one by the notification processing of the main controller 110 . When the notification counter 203m becomes 0, the notification command to be output to the sound lamp control device 113 is set. Upon receipt of this command, the audio lamp controller 113 executes the processing for outputting the above-described sound and illumination.

By configuring in this way, the player is made to notice that the timing at which the game ball can be entered into the movable ball entry device 190 is approaching, or that the end of the jackpot game is approaching. Therefore, the game ball is not fired toward the movable ball-entering accessory device 190 at the timing when the movable ball-entering accessory device 190 is opened, or the movable ball-entering accessory device 190 is not fired even though the jackpot game has ended. It is possible to reduce wasted balls caused by continuing to fire to.

The remaining ball timer flag 203n is a flag indicating that the movable piece 190a of the movable ball entry device 190 is closed at the end of the round in one round. When the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to ON, it indicates that the movable piece 190a of the movable ball-entering accessory device 190 is set from the open state to the closed state at the timing of the end of one round. . By setting the remaining ball timer flag 203n to ON, the remaining ball timer 203o, which will be described later, is updated by being incremented by one (see S1264 in FIG. 123). The remaining ball timer 203o is a counter for determining the time after the movable piece 190a is closed, and determines whether the time required for the game balls in the movable ball entry accessory device 190 to be discharged has elapsed. This is a counter for determination.

The remaining ball timer 203o wins the movable ball-entering accessory device 190 when the preset 1 round is completed and the movable piece 190a of the movable ball-entering accessory device 190 is closed at the timing of the end of the round. It is a counter for determining whether or not the time required for the game balls to be discharged has passed. In the present embodiment, the time required for the winning game ball to be discharged from the movable ball entry device 190 is 4 seconds. is set as the upper limit of When the remaining ball timer 203o reaches the upper limit value (in this embodiment, 2 seconds), it is determined whether or not the number of prizes awarded to the movable ball entry device 190 and the number of discharged balls match. (S1267 in FIG. 123). If they do not match, an error command is set to notify you. Therefore, it is possible to notify early that game balls are clogged in the movable ball entry accessory device 190.例文帳に追加

The discharge number counter 203s is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed the discharge detection switch 190c (see FIG. 2) in one round. The discharged number counter 203s is reset to 0, which is the initial value, after the number of winning game balls and the number of discharged balls are determined (S1271 in FIG. 123).

The counter 203t during time saving is a counter for counting the number of fluctuations of the remaining special symbols in the time saving game state. During this time saving counter 203t, 100 is set by detecting that the game ball has passed through the time saving switch 190d (see FIG. 2). That is, in the present embodiment, when it is detected that the game ball has passed through the time-saving switch 190d, the game shifts to the time-saving game state of 100 times after the jackpot game ends.

The jackpot start flag 203v1 is a flag used for determining whether or not it is time to start a jackpot. This jackpot start flag 203v1 is set to ON (see S1327 in FIG. 125) when it is detected that the game ball has passed through one of the specific area switches 441a to 441c (see S1327 in FIG. 125), and the jackpot It is referred to in order to determine whether it is the start timing of the jackpot in the control processing (see S1101 in FIG. 120), and is set to OFF when it is determined that it is the start timing of the jackpot in the jackpot control processing ( See S1133 in FIG. 121). As a result, it is possible to execute a process according to the timing of the start of the jackpot.

The jackpot flag 203v2 is a flag used to determine whether or not a jackpot game is being executed. This jackpot middle flag 203v2 is set to ON when it is detected that the game ball has passed through one of the specific area switches 441a to 441c (see S1324 in FIG. 125) in the same manner as the jackpot start flag 203h described above. (see S1327 in FIG. 125), and in the jackpot control process, it is referred to determine whether or not the jackpot is in progress (see S1103 in FIG. 120), and in the jackpot control process, it is the timing of the jackpot end. is set to off (see S1114 in FIG. 120).

The small hit start flag 203w1 is a flag used for determining whether or not it is the start timing of the small hit. This small hit start flag 203w1 is set to ON in the small hit start setting process executed when it is determined that the lottery result is a small hit in the special symbol variation process (see S302 in FIG. 111). Then, it is referred to determine whether or not it is the start timing of the small hit in the small hit control process (see S1301 in FIG. 124), and when it is determined that it is the start timing of the small hit in the small hit control process is set to OFF (see S1302 in FIG. 124).

The small hit medium flag 203w2 is a flag used for determining whether or not the small hit is in progress, that is, whether or not the small hit game is being executed. This small hitting medium flag 203w2 is set to ON in the small hitting start setting process similarly to the small hitting start flag 203w1 described above (see S302 in FIG. 111). Then, in the small hit control process, it is referred to determine whether or not the small hit is in progress (S1305 in FIG. 124), and when it is determined that it is the end timing of the small hit in the small hit control process, it is turned off. It is set (S1330 in FIG. 125).

The other memory area 203z is set (stored) with other data necessary for the game, counters, flags, and the like.

Next, referring to FIG. 104, the contents of the first winning random number table 202a and the second winning random number table 202c will be described. 104(a) to (c) are schematic diagrams schematically showing the contents of the first winning random number table 202a, and FIG. 104(d) schematically shows the contents of the second winning random number table 202c. It is a schematic diagram schematically shown.

In the first winning random number table 202a, as shown in FIG. 104(a), the value of the first winning random number counter C1 obtained by entering the game ball into the left starting winning opening 26 or the right starting winning opening 27 is The value of the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 for determining whether or not it is a small hit, and the value of the first hit random number counter C1 acquired by entering the game ball into the middle start winning opening 28 are small hits. A special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 is provided for determining whether or not there is.

Specifically, the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1, as shown in FIG. It is a table in which random values (determined values) to be determined are set. In the lottery for the first special symbol, it is determined whether the value of the acquired first winning random number counter C1 is "0 to 399", and if it is "0 to 399", it is determined to be a small winning. Therefore, the small hit probability is 1.

On the other hand, the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 is, as shown in FIG. is a set table. In the lottery for the second special symbol, it is determined whether the value of the acquired first winning random number counter C1 is "0 to 399", and if it is "0 to 399", it is determined to be a small winning. Therefore, the small hit probability is 1.

Thus, the first hit random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0-399. In this first winning random number counter C1, when the first special symbol lottery based on the entry of the ball into the left starting winning opening 26 or the right starting winning opening 27 is performed, the total number of random numbers to be a small winning number is 400. The probability that the special symbol will be a small hit is "400/400 (=1)".

Further, when the second special symbol is selected based on the entry of the ball into the medium-start winning hole 28, the total number of random numbers for the small hit of the second special symbol is 400, so the probability of the small hit of the second special symbol. becomes "400/400 (=1)".

As shown in FIG. 104(d), in the second winning random number table 202c, there are 24 random numbers that are normally winning symbols in the non-time saving time, and the range is "5 to 28". These random numbers are stored in the second per random number table 202C for non-time saving. In this way, when the normal symbols are not time-saving, the total number of random numbers that will be a big hit is 24 out of the total number of random numbers of 240, so the probability of a normal symbol being a big hit is "1/10".

When the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal pattern non-time-saving mode, when the ball passes through the normal starting port 67, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is obtained, and the normal pattern variable display is performed on the second pattern display device. is run for 30 seconds. Then, if the value of the obtained second winning random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 28", it is determined that the winning is done, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) is displayed. , and the middle start winning opening 28 is opened only for "0.2 seconds x 1 time". In addition, in this embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is normal pattern non-time saving time, when the normal pattern wins, the middle start winning opening 28 is opened only "0.2 seconds × 1 time", The opening time and number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "0.5 sec x 2 times".

On the other hand, there are 200 random numbers for the jackpot of normal symbols in the time saving mode, and the range is "5 to 204". These random numbers are stored in the second winning random number table 202C for time saving. In this way, in the time saving mode, the total number of random numbers that will be a big hit is 200 out of the total number of random numbers of 240, so the probability of a big win with normal symbols is "5/6".

When the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving mode, when the ball passes through the normal starting port 67, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is acquired, and the variable display of normal patterns is executed for 3 seconds on the second pattern display device. be done. Then, if the value of the acquired second winning random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that the winning is done, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) is displayed. , the symbol "O" is lit and displayed, and the middle start winning opening 28 is opened "1 second x 2 times". In this way, in the time saving mode, compared with the low probability period of normal symbols, the variable display time becomes very short as "30 seconds→3 seconds", and furthermore, the release period of the middle starting winning opening 28 is "0. 2 seconds x 1 time → 1 second x 2 times”, so that the ball can easily enter the left start prize winning port 26 and the right start prize winning port 27.例文帳に追加

A table (not shown) is provided in the ROM 202, which stores random numbers for judging whether or not it is a normal symbol win from the value (random number) of the second winning random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving mode, the middle start winning opening 28 is opened only "1 second x 2 times" when the normal pattern is won, but the opening time and number of times are arbitrary. should be set to For example, it may be opened "3 seconds x 3 times".

In addition, when it is determined that the normal symbol hits, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is completed, the symbol "○" is lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol), and the electric accessory 28a. is opened for a specified period of time.

Here, the electric accessory 28a in this control example rotates in a double-opening manner with a pair of shafts facing the front-rear direction of the game board 13 as rotation axes by the operation of the electric accessory solenoid 209b. This electric accessary 28a functions to guide the game ball to enter the middle start winning opening 28 by performing a rotating operation (opening operation) in a double-opening manner. On the other hand, by performing a rotating operation (closing operation) in a mode of closing from both sides toward the center, it does not guide the game ball to the middle start winning opening 28 (does not enter).

Although the details will be described later, the electric accessory 28a in this control example is opened for 2 seconds when the time is being shortened, but is opened only for 0.2 seconds when the time is not being shortened. Also, the opening time of 0.2 seconds of the electric accessary 28a is shorter than the time required for the game ball to be guided to the middle start winning opening 28. Therefore, even if the value of the second winning random number counter C4 becomes a winning when the time is not shortened, the game ball cannot be made to enter the middle start winning opening 28.例文帳に追加As a result, it is possible to suppress a game in which a ball is entered into the middle start winning opening 28 in spite of the fact that the time saving is not in effect (the jackpot with the time saving is not appearing).

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once per timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 109). In addition, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 119).

In this way, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 sets the small winning lottery, the display in the first symbol display device 37, and the second symbol display according to the values of the counters and the like. Main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as lottery of display results on the device can be executed.

As shown in FIG. 105(a), the ROM 222 of the sound ramp control device 113 stores a variation pattern selection table 222a and other various data and programs necessary for game control.

In the fluctuation pattern selection table 222a, the fluctuation pattern of each fluctuation pattern type is set to the counter value for fluctuation pattern selection (not shown). The sound ramp control device 113 selects a detailed variation pattern based on the variation pattern type indicated by the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110, the result of the suitability determination, and the acquired counter value for selection. This allows the audio ramp control device 113 to select a wide variety of variation modes while strictly observing rough information such as the variation time and the type of variation pattern. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the same variable display mode from being displayed frequently, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored early.

The RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 105(b). As shown in FIG. 105(b), the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 includes a prize winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b, a special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c, a performance counter 223f, and a wing entrance. At least a passage counter 223i, a V entrance passage counter 223j, a round number accumulation counter 223k, and a memory area 223z are provided.

The winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), each of which stores winning information. Based on the information stored in the prize winning information storage area 223a, the sound lamp control device 113 can determine the lottery result of the reserved ball and the like before the change starts.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b, like the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110, is a variable effect (variable display) performed by the first symbol display device 37, and the main controller 110 It is a counter that counts up to 4 times the number of pending balls (number of standby times) of the variable effect that is being held in . That is, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the first special symbol is set based on the reserved ball number command output from main controller 110 .

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 and acquire the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the sound lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command (see S206 and S211 in FIG. 110) transmitted from the main controller 110, and the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b , manages the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol.

Specifically, in the main controller 110, when the ball entering the left start winning opening 26 or the right starting winning opening 27 adds the number of pending balls of the variable display, or the main controller 110 changes in the special symbol When the display is executed and the number of reserved balls is subtracted, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203 d after addition or after subtraction is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 .

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, it acquires the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110 from the reserved ball number command, It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b (see S1702 in FIG. 129). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b according to the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, so that the special symbol 1 reserved ball of the main controller 110 Its value can be updated in synchronization with the number counter 203d.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c stores the number of reserved balls corresponding to the second special symbol in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b based on the reserved ball number command output from the main controller 110. The only difference is that they are different, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The effect counter 223f is a counter used for advance notice effects and various lotteries. It is repeatedly updated in the range of 0-198. Although not shown, it is updated by one each time the main process (see FIG. 127) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed.

The RAM 223 also has a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing commands received from the main controller 110 until processing corresponding to the commands is performed. The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination processing (see FIG. 128) of the audio ramp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and by the command determination processing, The command is parsed and processing is performed according to the command.

The wing entrance passage counter 223i is a counter for counting game balls that have passed through the big winning opening switch 190b of the movable ball entrance accessory device 190. FIG. This wing entrance passing counter 223i is incremented by 1 when a wing entrance passing command transmitted when a game ball passes through the big winning opening switch 190b is received (S712 in FIG. 115). This wing entrance passage counter 223i is referred to when setting the effect command for display in the lamp editing process (S1606, S1609 in FIG. 128), and is set to 0 after the effect command for display is set in the lamp editing process. It is initialized (S1604 in FIG. 128).

The V entrance passage counter 223j is a counter for counting game balls that have passed through the fixed area switch 340a of the movable entrance accessory device 190. FIG. This V entrance passage counter 223j is incremented by 1 when it receives a V entrance passage command transmitted when a game ball passes through the defined area switch 340a (S1737 in FIG. 130). This V entrance passage counter 223j is referred to when a display effect command is set in the lamp editing process (S1621 in FIG. 128), and is initialized to 0 after the display effect command is set in the lamp editing process. (S1605 in FIG. 128).

The round number accumulation counter 223k is a counter for accumulating and counting the number of rounds in the big win game when the big win or the small win continues. This round number cumulative counter 223k is incremented by 1 when a round number command indicating the start of a new round is received (S1724 in FIG. 130), and is initialized when a jackpot end command is received ( S1728 in FIG. 130).

The other memory area 223z also has a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing commands received from the main controller 110 until processing corresponding to the commands is performed. The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 128) of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process The command is parsed and processing is performed according to the command.

FIG. 106 is a game flow diagram showing an example of a game flow by the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment. A normal game by the pachinko machine 10 is started by hitting (shooting) a game ball into the game area. The flow of the game will be described below on the premise that the game ball is launched. Note that FIG. 1 and FIG. 2 will be referred to as appropriate in the description of FIG. 106 .

When the game ball enters either the left start winning port 26, the middle starting winning port 28 or the right starting winning port 27 in the course of flowing down in the game area, the left starting winning port switch corresponding to each starting winning port is activated. 210a, the middle start winning opening switch 210c or the right starting winning opening switch 210b detects the passage of the game ball, and with this as a trigger, a special symbol lottery is performed.

The special symbol lottery is a lottery related to whether or not the movable ball entry accessory device 190 is operated. In the present embodiment, since it is set so that a small win is obtained even if any random number in the first winning random number table 202a is drawn (small winning probability = 1/1), the special symbol lottery has a confirmatory role. It is a lottery. If the game ball does not enter any of the start winning openings, the game flow is terminated for the time being, and the game flow is restarted with the aim of entering the starting winning opening (F01).

Further, although not particularly shown, when a special symbol lottery is performed, the special symbols are variably displayed for a predetermined variation time on the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, and then stop-displayed in a mode representing the lottery result. . The variation pattern of the special symbols by the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b may be randomly changed by lottery or may be fixed to a constant variation pattern.

Here, in the present embodiment, the first special symbol lottery (internal lottery) is performed with the entry of the ball into the left start winning opening 26 or the right starting winning opening 27, while the entry of the ball into the middle start winning opening 28 is performed. As a trigger, the second special symbol lottery (internal lottery) is performed.

And, since the winning probability (small winning probability) of the special symbol lottery is set to 1 (= 1/1), when the game ball enters one of the start winning openings, it corresponds to the small winning as it is. Become. Therefore, although it is not necessary for the main controller 110 to acquire the hit determination random number internally, it is acquired in the present embodiment.

In addition, in the present embodiment, there is no hit (so-called direct hit, direct hit) in which the jackpot game is directly executed triggered by the entry of the ball into each start winning opening, but it is not limited to this. , Direct hit determination may be performed using the hit determination random number obtained here as a direct hit is provided.

In addition, in the present embodiment, there is no display mode of "lost" in the special symbol, it corresponds to "small win 1" in the lottery by the first special symbol, and corresponds to "small win 2" in the lottery by the second special symbol. It is supposed to be. The difference between "small win 1" and "small win 2" is related to the number of times the movable ball entry accessory device 190 is operated. It operates twice, and when it corresponds to "small hit 2", the movable ball entry accessory device 190 operates twice.

In any case, when the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b stop and display the special symbol in the form of a small win, the movable entrance accessory device 190 operates (opening operation) (F02). The operation of the movable ball entry accessory device 190 changes the movable piece 190a to the open position as described above. 1”, the movable piece 190a is opened for a short period of time only once, and when it corresponds to the “small hit 2”, only twice.

Next, when the movable ball entry accessory device 190 is activated, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the big winning opening switch 190b (F03). Here, when the game ball enters the big winning hole switch 190b, the game flow further advances to the sorting operation in the movable ball entry accessory device 190. FIG. If the game ball does not enter the large winning opening switch 190b of the movable ball-entering accessory device 190, the game flow ends for the time being, and the game flow is restarted aiming at entering the starting winning opening (F01). going to start.

When the game flow progresses in the movable ball entry accessory device 190, it is determined whether or not the game ball has finally passed through any of the specific areas after various game ball distribution operations as described above. (F04). As a result, when the game ball is finally discharged from the movable ball entry accessory device 190 without passing through the specific area, unfortunately the game flow ends there, and the ball enters the start winning opening (F01) again. Aim to start the game flow.

On the other hand, when the game ball passes through the specific area within the movable ball-entering accessory device 190, the movable ball-entering accessory device 190 operates again. Specifically, for example, the big winning opening is opened a predetermined number of times (eg, once opened) for a predetermined opening time (eg, 30 seconds), or a specified number (eg, 10) of game balls wins. A special game (jackpot game) is executed in which one round is defined as the period until the above condition is satisfied, and this round is repeated for a predetermined number of consecutive operations.

In this embodiment, the number of continuous operations (number of rounds) is set to 16 times when the game ball passes through the first specific area switch 441a, and 7 times when the game ball passes through the second specific area switch 442a. , and when the game ball passes through the third specific area switch 443a, it is set to 3 times. During such a jackpot game (during the operation of the movable ball entry device 190), a large number of balls can be entered into the big prize opening switch 190b, which is normally closed, within a short period of time. Players can collectively win a large number of prize balls.

In addition, in this embodiment, the operation of the movable ball entry accessory device (F02) is defined as the first round. Therefore, the number of rounds in which a player can actually win a lot of prize balls is the number of times (15 times, 6 times , twice).

Also, during a special game (during a jackpot game), the game ball is made to flow directly from the introduction passage 310 to the back side of the game board 13, and an opening (see FIG. (not shown) is released, the game ball flows down from the middle of the introduction passage 310 to the back of the game board 13, and the game ball flows through the first flow-down device 300 and the second flow-down device 400 as in a small winning game. It prevents it from flowing down.

As a result, the game ball flows directly from the opening to the discharge detection switch 190c. Therefore, the special game can be played without requiring time to pass through the first flow-down device 300 and the second flow-down device 400, and the processing time for abnormality processing (see FIG. 123), which will be described later, can be shortened. In this embodiment, when the game ball that has passed through the big winning opening switch 190b passes through an open opening (not shown) disposed in the middle of the introduction passage 310, the discharge detection switch 190c is activated in four seconds at the maximum. configured to pass through.

Next, it is determined whether or not the game ball detected by passing through the specific area (F04) has passed through the time reduction switch 444a (F06). Here, when the game ball has passed through the time saving switch 444a, after the jackpot game ends, the game flow proceeds to the time saving game in which the electric accessory 28a operates a specified number of times (F07). During this time-saving game, the game ball is easily introduced into the middle start winning opening 28, so that the movable piece 190a is easily opened, and the sorting game in the movable ball entry accessory device 190 is frequently performed. Therefore, it is easy to continuously win big hits.

If the game ball has not passed through the time-saving switch 444a, the game flow ends for the time being, and the game flow is started again with the aim of entering the start winning hole (F01).

FIG. 107 is a time chart explaining the flow from winning to the left starting winning opening 26 or right starting winning opening 27 to occurrence of a jackpot game in this control example. Details of operation control of various devices will be described later.

Based on the winning of the game ball into the left starting winning opening 26 or the right starting winning opening 27, the main controller 110 performs variation control of the first special symbol. Then, when the fluctuation of the first special symbol stops and the main control device 110 starts the small winning control 1 (also referred to as the small winning game 1), the large opening solenoid 209a that operates the movable piece 190a turns on ( open state). In this state, the player aims at the big winning opening switch 190b of the movable ball-entering accessory device 190 and shoots the game ball. The game ball flows down to the back of the pachinko machine 10 through the fixed area hole 340 or the missing hole 350. - 特許庁

Next, the flow of the small prize control 1 by the main controller 110 will be described. Here, the time for the entire small hit control 1 is set to 7.5 seconds. First, when the set time t1 (for example, 2 seconds) elapses after the small hit control 1 is started, the large opening solenoid 209a opens for the set time t2 (for example, about 0.5 seconds). Then, when the set time t3 (for example, 5 seconds) has passed and it is not detected that the game ball has passed through the definite area switch 340, the small hit game is terminated. It should be noted that the set time t3 is set to a time sufficient for the game ball flowing down the movable ball entry device 190 to pass through the discharge detection switch 190c when the set time t2 has elapsed.

On the other hand, when the game ball passes through the definite area switch 340a, based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the definite area switch 340a, the main controller 110 ends the small hit control 1, set time t10 (first embodiment 5 seconds in the second and sixth embodiments, 12 seconds in the second and sixth embodiments, and 14 seconds in the seventh embodiment). The electromagnetic solenoid 2420 (see FIG. 40) described above in the form and the seventh embodiment or the drive motor 7451 described in the seventh embodiment is driven to allow the game ball to stay, and then, for example, the stay of the first embodiment By stopping the driving of the solenoid 413 and setting the flow prevention plate 412 to the retracted state, the jackpot game control of different number of rounds is performed based on which of the specific area switches 441a to 443a the flowing game ball has passed. Details of the jackpot game will be described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 108, points different from FIG. 107 will be described. FIG. 108 is a time chart explaining the flow from winning to the medium start winning opening 28 to occurrence of the jackpot game in this control example. Details of operation control of various devices will be described later.

Variation control of the second special symbol is performed by the main controller 110 based on the winning of the game ball to the middle start winning opening 28 . Then, when the fluctuation of the second special symbol stops and the main control device 110 starts the small hit control 2 (also referred to as the small hit game 2), the large opening solenoid 209a that operates the movable piece 190a turns on ( open state).

Next, the flow of the small prize control 2 by the main controller 110 will be described. Here, the time for the entire small hit control is set to 10 seconds. First, when the set time t4 (for example, 2 seconds) elapses after the small hit control 2 is started, the large opening solenoid 209a opens for the set time t5 (for example, about 0.5 seconds). After a set time t6 (for example, 2 seconds) has passed, the large opening solenoid 209a opens for a set time t7 (for example, about 0.5 seconds). After that, when the set time t8 (for example, 5 seconds) has passed and it is not detected that the game ball has passed through the definite area switch 340, the small hit game is terminated. The set time t8 is set to a time sufficient for the game ball flowing down the movable ball entry device 190 to pass through the discharge detection switch 190c when the set time t7 elapses.

On the other hand, when the game ball passes through the definite area switch 340a, based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the definite area switch 340a, the main control unit 110 ends the small hit game control, set time t10 (first embodiment 5 seconds in the second embodiment, 8 seconds in the second and sixth embodiments, and 10 seconds in the seventh embodiment). The electromagnetic solenoid 2420 (see FIG. 40) described above in the embodiment and the seventh embodiment, and the drive motor 7451 described in the seventh embodiment are driven, for example, to set the flow prevention plate 412 (see FIG. 23) in an overhanging state. By doing so, the game ball is retained, and then the energization of the retention solenoid 413 is canceled to put the flow-down prevention plate 412 in a retracted state. Then, the jackpot game control of different number of rounds is performed. Details of the jackpot game will be described later.

Next, each control process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to flowcharts of FIGS. 109 to 125. FIG. The processing of the MPU 201 can be broadly classified into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the start-up process, and a timer that is started periodically (at intervals of 2 milliseconds in this embodiment). There are interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing that is activated by input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. and main processing.

FIG. 109 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 . Timer interrupt processing is periodic processing that is executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, various winning switch reading processes are executed (S101). That is, it reads the states of various switches connected to the main controller 110, determines the states of the switches, and saves detection information (winning detection information).

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM203. Similarly, 1 is added to the second initial random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial random number counter CINI2 is cleared. is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203 .

Further, the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second winning random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second hit random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and their counter values are the maximum values (in this embodiment 399, 99, 239), respectively, are cleared to 0 respectively. Then, the updated values of the respective counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203. FIG.

Next, a special symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, is executed (S104). After that, the starting winning process associated with winning (starting winning) to the left starting winning opening 26, the right starting winning opening 27 or the middle starting winning opening 28 is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation processing and the start winning processing will be described later with reference to FIGS.

After executing the start winning process, the normal symbol variation process, which is the process for performing display on the second symbol display device, is executed (S106), and the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is followed by the passage of the ball. A gate passage process is executed (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation processing and the through gate passage processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 113 and 114. FIG. After executing the through-gate passage processing, the wing entrance passage processing is executed (S140) to produce an effect based on the fact that the game ball has entered the movable ball entrance accessory device 190, and the game ball passes through the defined area hole 340. Based on that, the V entrance passage processing for controlling the subsequent jackpot game is executed (S141), the launch control processing is executed (S108), and other processing that should be executed periodically is executed ( S109), the timer interrupt processing is terminated.

Note that the shooting control process is performed on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and that the shooting stop switch 51b for stopping shooting is not operated. This is the process of deciding on/off of firing. Main controller 110 gives a ball launch instruction to launch controller 112 when ball launch is on.

Next, with reference to FIG. 110, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 110 is a flow chart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 109), and is for controlling the variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. is the processing of

In this special symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not a big win is currently in progress (S201). During the big win includes the time when the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are displaying the big win (including during the big win game) and the time after the end of the big win game. As a result of the determination, if the jackpot is in progress (S201: Yes), this process is terminated.

If the jackpot is not in progress (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display modes of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are fluctuating (S202), and the display modes of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B fluctuate. If not (S202: No), the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (number of times N2 of suspension of variable display in special symbols) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is greater than 0 (S204).

If the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is subtracted by 1 (S205), and changed by calculation. A reserved ball number command (special figure 2 reserved ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is set (S206). The pending ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 119), which will be described later. , is sent to the audio ramp controller 113 .

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted values in the RAM 223. Stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c, respectively.

After setting the special figure 2 reserved ball number command by the processing of S206, the data stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, the data stored in the reservation first area to the reservation fourth area of the special symbol 2 reservation ball storage area 203b are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the first holding area → execution area, the second holding area → the first holding area, the third holding area → the second holding area, the fourth holding area → the third holding area, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, a special symbol variation start process is executed for starting the variation display in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B (S213). The special symbol variation start process is a process of determining a small hit variation pattern based on the value of the variation type counter.

On the other hand, in the process of S204, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is 0 (S204: No), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (N1) (S208). It is determined whether the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is greater than 0 (S209). When it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S209: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is not 0 (S209: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is subtracted (S210) and changed by calculation. Set a reserved ball number command (special figure 1 reserved ball number command) indicating the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (S211). After setting the special figure 1 reserved ball number command by the processing of S211, the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S212). After that, the process of S213 is executed.

In the processing of S202, if the display modes of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are fluctuating (S202: Yes), whether the variation time of the variation display being executed in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B has elapsed It is determined whether or not (S214). The variation time of the variation display executed in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and this If the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S214: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S214, if the variation time of the variable display being executed has passed (S214: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbols of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is set (S215). . The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by special symbol variation start processing (S213), which will be described later with reference to FIG. When this special symbol variation start process is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution areas of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. will be More specifically, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is a small hit according to the value of the first hit random number counter C1. In addition, in this embodiment, since the probability of a small hit in the special symbol lottery is 1 (1/1), this lottery has a meaning as confirmation work.

Incidentally, in this embodiment, when a small win is obtained, the blue LEDs are lit in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. The display of the LED is turned off when the next variable display is started, but it may be turned on only for several seconds after the stop of the variable display.

After the process of S215 is completed, when the variable display being executed in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is started, the special symbol lottery result (current lottery result) performed by the special symbol variation start process. is a special symbol small hit (S243). In the process of S243, when it is determined that the current lottery result is a small winning (S243: Yes), a small winning start setting process is executed (S244). On the other hand, in the process of S243, if it is determined that the current lottery result is not a small win, this process is terminated. Details of the small winning start setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

After the process of S244 is completed, it is determined whether the value of the counter 203t during time saving is 1 or more (S220). When it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203t is 0 (S220: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the time saving counter 203t is 1 or more (S220: Yes), the value of the time saving counter 203t is decremented by 1, and this process ends (S221).

In addition, in this embodiment, although the small hit probability of the lottery of the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 is set to 1, it is not necessary to be limited to this. For example, in the lottery of special symbols 1 and 2, the probability of winning a big hit may be set to 0.01, and the probability of winning a small prize may be set to 0.99.

Next, with reference to FIG. 111, small winning start setting processing will be described. FIG. 111 is a flow chart showing a small hit start setting process (S244) executed in the special symbol variation start process (S213).

In the small winning start setting process (S244), first, the opening scenario of the large opening solenoid 209a is set (S301). After that, the small winning start flag 203w1 and the small winning medium flag 203w2 are set to ON (S302), and the process is terminated.

In addition, as the opening scenario, a different mode of opening is set depending on which special symbol (special symbol 1 or special symbol 2) resulted in a small hit. That is, in the present embodiment, an opening scenario is set as shown in FIG. 107 (open once) or shown in FIG. 108 (open twice).

Next, the starting winning process (S105) will be described. First, the starting winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 112 is a flow chart showing this starting winning process (S105). This starting prize winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 109), and whether or not there is a prize (starting prize) in the left start prize opening 26, the right start prize opening 27, or the middle start prize opening 28. is determined, and when there is a starting prize, various random number counters are acquired and processing for holding the value is executed.

When the start winning process (FIG. 112, S105) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has entered the left start winning opening 26 or the right starting winning opening 27 (start winning) (S401). Here, the ball entering the left starting winning opening 26 or the right starting winning opening 27 is detected over three times of timer interrupt processing. Then, when it is determined that the ball has entered the left starting winning opening 26 or the right starting winning opening 27 (S401: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times of holding the variable display in the special symbol N1) (S402). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment) (S403).

Then, if there is no winning in the left starting winning opening 26 or the right starting winning opening 27 (S401: No), or even if there is winning in the left starting winning opening 26 or the right starting winning opening 27, the special symbol 1 reserved ball If the value (N1) of the number counter 203d is not less than 4 (S403: No), the process proceeds to S407. On the other hand, if there is a winning to the left starting winning opening 26 or the right starting winning opening 27 (S401: Yes), and if the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S403: Yes) , 1 is added to the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (S404). Then, a reserved ball number command (special figure 1 reserved ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S405).

The pending ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 119), which will be described later. , is sent to the audio ramp controller 113 . When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

After setting the pending ball number command by the process of S405, the values of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above are stored in the RAM 203. (S406) among the empty reservation areas (reservation first area to reservation fourth area) of the special symbol 1 reservation ball storage area 203a. In the process of S406, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the first reserved area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

Next, in the processing from S407 to S412, the same processing as in the processing from S401 to S406 is executed for the winning of the middle start winning opening 28 as well. The only difference is that the pending process for the second special symbol is executed for the winning of the middle start winning opening 28, and the other processes are the same, so detailed description thereof will be omitted. Then, when it is determined in the processing of S407 that the ball has not entered the middle start winning opening 28 (S407: No), this processing is terminated after the processing of S412.

Next, referring to FIG. 113, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 113 is a flow chart showing this normal symbol variation process (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 109), and the variable display of the second symbol performed in the second symbol display device and the electric role accompanying the middle start winning opening 28 This is a process for controlling the opening time of the object 28a.

In the normal symbol variation process (FIG. 113, S106), first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently hitting (S601). During the winning of the normal symbol (second symbol), the opening and closing control of the electric accessory 28a associated with the middle starting winning opening 28 is performed while the second symbol display device is displaying the winning. Including during. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is in the process of hitting (S601: Yes), this process is finished as it is.

On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S601: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device is fluctuating (S602), and the second symbol display device is displayed. If the display mode is not fluctuating (S602: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of times of suspension of variable display in normal symbols M) is acquired (S603). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203f is greater than 0 (S604), and if the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203f is 0 (S604: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203f is not 0 (S604: Yes), the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203f is subtracted by 1 (S605).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted (S606). In the process of S606, the data stored in the first reservation area to the fourth reservation area of the normal symbol reservation ball storage area 203c are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the first holding area → execution area, the second holding area → the first holding area, the third holding area → the second holding area, the fourth holding area → the third holding area, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is obtained (S607).

Next, it is determined whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state of normal symbols (S608).

When the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state of normal symbols (S608: Yes), it is determined whether or not the jackpot is currently in progress (S609). During the jackpot includes during the jackpot game and during a predetermined time after the jackpot game ends. As a result of the determination, if the jackpot is in progress (S609: Yes), the process proceeds to S611.

In the process of S609, if the jackpot is not in progress (S609: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the jackpot, and the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state with normal symbols, so the second hit random number counter acquired in the process of S607. Based on the value of C4 and the second symbol winning random number table 202c for time saving, the lottery result as to whether or not the normal symbol wins is obtained (S610). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second symbol random number table 202c for time saving. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that it is a hit of the normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4,205 to 239", It is determined that it is out of the normal pattern (see FIG. 104(d)).

In the process of S608, when the pachinko machine 10 is not in the time-saving state of normal symbols (S608: No), the process proceeds to S611. In the processing of S611, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal pattern, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 acquired in the processing of S607 and the value of the non-time saving time Based on the second winning random number table 202c, the lottery result as to whether or not the normal symbol wins is obtained (S611). Specifically, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second hit random number table 202c for non-time saving. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 28", it is determined that it is a hit of the normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4, 29 to 239", It is determined that it is out of the normal pattern (see FIG. 104(d)).

Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the normal symbol obtained by the process of S610 or S611 is a normal symbol win (S612), and when it is determined that the normal symbol win is determined (S612: Yes) , set the display mode at the time of winning (S613). In the process of S613, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is completed, the symbol "o" is lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol).

Then, it is determined whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state of normal symbols (S614), and if the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state of normal symbols (S614: Yes), whether or not the present is in the midst of a jackpot. is determined (S615). As a result of the determination, if the jackpot is in progress (S615: Yes), the process proceeds to S617. In the present embodiment, during the big win, in order to suppress the ball from entering the middle start winning hole 28 as much as possible, even if the win of the normal pattern is achieved, the number of times and the opening time of the electric accessory 28a are increased. It is set to a period (0.2 seconds) during which ball entry is impossible. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to obtain prize balls due to game balls entering the middle start prize opening 28 during the jackpot game, and to prevent a large change in the number of outgoing balls.

In the process of S615, if the jackpot is not in progress (S615: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the jackpot, and the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state with normal symbols, so the electric accessory attached to the second winning port 640. The open period of 640a is set to 1 second and the number of open times is set to 2 (S616), and the process proceeds to S619. In the process of S614, when the pachinko machine 10 is not in the time-saving state of normal symbols (S614: No), the process proceeds to S617. In the processing of S617, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal pattern, the opening period of the electric accessory 28a associated with the middle start winning opening 28 is set to 0.2 seconds. , and the number of opening times is set to 1 (S617), and the process proceeds to S619.

In the process of S612, when it is determined that the symbol is out of the normal pattern (S612: No), the display mode at the time of out is set (S618). In the process of S618, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is finished, the symbol "x" is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). After the setting of the display mode at the time of detachment is completed, the process proceeds to S619.

In the processing of S619, it is determined whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state of normal symbols (S619), and if the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state of normal symbols (S619: Yes), the variable display on the second symbol display device. is set to 3 seconds (S620), and the process ends. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is not in the time-saving state of normal symbols (S619: No), the variation time of the variation display on the second symbol display device is set to 30 seconds (S621), and this processing is terminated. In this way, except during the jackpot, during the time saving of the normal pattern, compared with the non-time saving time of the normal pattern, the time of the variable display is very short as "30 seconds → 3 seconds", and furthermore, the medium start winning opening Since the release period of 28 becomes very long as "0.2 seconds x 1 time -> 1 second x 2 times", the ball is easily entered into the middle start winning opening 28. - 特許庁

In the process of S602, if the display mode of the second pattern display device is fluctuating (S602: Yes), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed in the second pattern display device has elapsed ( S622). It should be noted that the variable time here is the time preset by the process of S620 or the process of S621 before the variable display is started on the second symbol display device.

In the process of S622, if the variable time has not elapsed (S622: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of S622, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has passed (S622: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device is set (S623). In the process of S623, if the normal symbol lottery is won and the display mode is set by the process of S613, the "○" symbol as the second symbol is displayed in a stop display (lighting display) on the second symbol display device. ). On the other hand, if the lottery for the normal symbol is lost and the display mode is set by the process of S618, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped (lighted up) on the second symbol display device. is set to

When the stop display is set by the process of S623, when the second symbol display update process (see S1007) of the main process (see FIG. 119) is executed next, the variable display on the second symbol display device ends. Then, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stop-displayed (lit display) on the second symbol display device in the display mode set in the process of S613 or the process of S618.

Next, when the variation display being executed in the second symbol display device is started, the normal symbol lottery result (this lottery result) performed by the normal symbol variation process (FIG. 113, S106) is the normal symbol. It is determined whether it is a hit (S624). If the result of the lottery this time is a hit of the normal symbol (S624: Yes), the opening/closing control start of the electric accessory 28a associated with the middle start winning opening 28 is set (S625), and this process is finished. When the opening/closing control start of the electric accessory 28a is set by the processing of S625, when the electric accessory opening/closing processing (see S1005) of the main processing (see FIG. 119) is executed next, the opening and closing of the electric accessory is performed. The control is started, and the opening/closing control of the electric accessary product is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S616 or S617 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S624, if the lottery result of this time is out of the normal symbol (S624: No), the process of S625 is skipped and this process is finished.

Next, the through gate passage processing (S107) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 114 is a flow chart showing this through gate passage processing (S107). This through-gate passage processing (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 109) to determine whether or not the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate 67), and the ball has passed. In this case, the value indicated by the second winning random number counter C4 is acquired and retained.

In the through gate passing process (FIG. 114, S107), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal symbol start opening (through gate 67) (S701). Here, passage of the ball in the normal symbol starting port (through gate 67) is detected over three times of timer interrupt processing. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal symbol start opening (through gate 67) (S701: Yes), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of times of suspension of variable display in normal symbols M) is acquired. (S702). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment) (S703).

Whether the ball has not passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 (S701: No), or even if the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f If the value (M) is not less than 4 (S703: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67 (S701: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (S703: Yes), the normal symbol 1 is added to the value (M) of the reserved ball number counter 203f (S704). Then, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above is the first among the free reservation areas (reservation first area to reservation fourth area) of the normal symbol reservation ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. area (S705), and the process ends. In the process of S705, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the first reserved area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

Next, the tuyere passing process (S140) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 115 is a flow chart showing the tuyere passing process (S140) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 109).

In the wing entrance passage process (S140), when it is detected that the game ball has passed through the big winning opening switch 190b, it is first determined whether or not a small win is in progress (S711). In the process of S711, when it is determined that the small winning is in progress (S711: Yes), the tuyere passing command is set (S712), and this process is terminated. If it is not during the small winning (S712: No), it is a case where the game ball enters the big winning opening switch 190b even though it is not a small winning game, so an error command is set (S713) and this processing is performed. exit.

The tuyere passing command set in the process of S712 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 119). , is sent to the audio ramp controller 113 . When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the wing entrance passage command, it counts the number of game balls that have passed through the big prize mouth switch 109b, and outputs to the voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 an effect based on the passage of the big prize mouth switch 190b. Send a command to run. As a result, it is possible to execute an effect during the small winning game based on the ball entering the movable ball entering accessory device 190 (see FIG. 106).

Next, the V entrance passage processing (S141) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 116 is a flow chart showing the V entrance passage processing (S141). This V entrance passage process (S141) is a process executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 109).

In the V entrance passage processing, first, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the defined area hole 340 (S721). In the process of S721, when it is determined that the game ball has passed through the defined area hole 340 (S721: Yes), the V entrance passage flag 203x is set to ON (S722), and the V entrance passage command is set (S723) , a counter value corresponding to a predetermined period (5 seconds in the first embodiment, 8 seconds in the second and sixth embodiments, and 10 seconds in the seventh embodiment) is set in the residence counter 203l (S724). End the process.

While the retention counter 203l maintains a value of 0 or more, the corresponding drive device (the retention solenoid 413 described in the first embodiment (see FIG. 23), the second embodiment, the sixth embodiment, and the seventh embodiment). The electromagnetic solenoid 2420 (see FIG. 40) described above in the embodiment and the drive motor 7451 (see FIG. 83) described in the seventh embodiment are turned on (excited).

The V entrance passage command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is output during the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 119) executed by the MPU 201. It is sent to the lamp control device 113 .

On the other hand, in the process of S721, if it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the defined area hole 340, then it is determined whether or not the V entrance passage flag 203x1 is set to ON (S725). In the processing of S725, if it is determined that the V entrance passage flag 203x is not set to ON (it is set to OFF) (S725: No), this processing ends.

In the processing of S725, if it is determined that the V entrance passage flag 203x is set to ON (S725: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the jackpot type value corresponds to jackpot C (S726). If it corresponds to the jackpot C (S726: Yes), the V flag 203x2 indicating the jackpot C is set to ON (S727), and the process proceeds to S4604. Note that the jackpot C corresponds to a 16-round jackpot.

On the other hand, in the process of S726, when it is determined that it does not correspond to the jackpot C (S726: No), it is then determined whether or not it corresponds to the jackpot D (S729). In the processing of S729, when it is determined that the jackpot D is applicable (S729: Yes), then the V flag 203x2 indicating the jackpot D is set to ON (S730), and the process proceeds to S4604. Note that the jackpot D corresponds to a 7-round jackpot.

On the other hand, in the process of S729, when it is determined that the jackpot D is not applicable (S729: No), it is then determined whether or not the jackpot E is applicable (S731). In the processing of S731, if it is determined that the jackpot E is applicable (S731: Yes), then the V flag 203x2 indicating the jackpot E is set to ON (S732), and the process proceeds to S4604. Note that the jackpot E corresponds to a 3-round jackpot.

In the processing of S731, when it is determined that the jackpot E is not applicable (S731: No), an error command is set (S733), and this processing ends. In this control example, after the game ball entering the movable ball entry accessory device 190 passes through the determined area hole 340, the obtainable jackpot is limited to jackpot C, jackpot D or jackpot E. Therefore, when the jackpot type value after passing V is not jackpot C, jackpot D and jackpot E, the V entrance passage processing (S141) executed based on the game ball passing through the defined area switch 340a is executed , is considered to be a case where a game ball is illegally entered into the fixed area switch 340a. In this case, by setting an error command in the process of S731, an error is output and fraud can be discovered. When the processing of S727, S730 or S732 is finished, the counter 203f during time saving is set to 0, and this processing is finished (S728).

By setting the time saving medium counter 203f to 0 in the process of S728, the time saving game is terminated when the jackpot game is started.

In the processing of S141, by setting one of the V flags 203x2 to ON, the V entrance passage flag 203x1 is set to OFF in the small winning end processing (see S1324 and S1328 in FIG. 125).

When the V entrance passage flag 203x1 is set to OFF, the type of jackpot is not determined in the process of S141. Therefore, in this control example, during the small hit game, the jackpot type is determined by which switch the game ball passes first among the specific area switches 441a to 443a and 2441a to 2443a, and then the game ball passes any of the specific area switches 441a to 443a and 2441a to 2443a, the passage is invalidated (not reflected in control).

FIG. 117 is a flow chart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 . The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 . That is, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 . Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed, starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power interruption occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power interruption occurrence information (S801), and ends the NMI interruption processing. do.

The above NMI interrupt processing is also executed in the payout launch control device 111 in the same manner, and information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 213 by such NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, NMI interrupt processing is started.

Next, referring to FIG. 118, startup processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 when main controller 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 118 is a flow chart showing this startup process. This start-up process is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process is executed upon power-on (S901). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, in order to wait for the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operable, a wait process (one second in this embodiment) is executed. (S902). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply 115 is turned on (S904), and if it is turned on (S904: Yes), the process proceeds to S912. On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), it is determined whether or not power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905), and if not stored (S905: No). , there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown did not end normally, so in this case as well, the process proceeds to S912.

If power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S906). If the judgment value does not match the RAM judgment value saved at the time of power-off, the backed-up data is destroyed. As will be described later in the processing of S1014 in FIG. 119, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the work area address of the RAM 203. FIG. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the processing of S912, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 which is a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S912). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets the initial value, and becomes ready to start the game ball payout control. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes the initialization process of RAM 203 (S913, S914).

In this pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized at the time of turning on the power, for example, when the hall starts operating, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed. Therefore, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S913, S914) is executed. Also, if power failure occurrence information is not set, or if a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.), the initialization processing of the RAM 203 (S913, S914) is similarly executed. . In the RAM initialization process (S913, S914), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S913), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S914). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S910.

On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), power failure occurrence information is stored (S905: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal ( S907: Yes), while retaining the data backed up in the RAM 203, clear the power failure occurrence information (S908). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the game state at the time of drive power shutdown is transmitted (S909), and the process proceeds to S910. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the game ball payout control can be started while retaining the data stored in the RAM 213 .

In the processing of S910, an effect permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 to permit the sound lamp control device 113 to execute various effects. Next, the interrupt is permitted (S911), and the process proceeds to main processing, which will be described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 119, main processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 after the start-up processing described above will be described. FIG. 119 is a flow chart showing this main process. Main processing of the game is executed in this main processing. As an outline, each process of S1001 to S1007 is executed as a periodical process with a period of 4 ms, and the counter update process of S1010 and S1011 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main process (see FIG. 119), first, output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 is transferred to the sub side during execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 109). External output processing for transmission to each control device (peripheral control device) is executed (S1001). Specifically, it determines whether or not there is winning detection information detected in the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 109). Send a prize ball command to In addition, it transmits to the sound lamp control device 113 the reserved ball number command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 110) and the start winning process (see FIG. 112). In addition, commands such as the number of rounds command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 120) are transmitted to the sound ramp control device 113 . In addition, a ball launch signal is sent to the launch control device 112 when the ball is to be launched.

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1002). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM203.

When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is finished, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1003). A jackpot control process for opening or closing the big winning opening switch 190b of the object device 190 is executed (S1004). In the jackpot control processing, the jackpot switch 190b is opened for each round in the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the jackpot switch 190b has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have won the jackpot switch 190b. . Then, when any one of these conditions is established, the big winning opening switch 190b is closed. The opening and closing of the big winning opening switch 190b are repeated for a predetermined number of rounds. Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 119), but may be executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 109).

Next, a small hit control process (S1041) for controlling the opening and closing of the electric accessary 28a associated with the middle start winning opening 28 is executed. In the small winning control process, when the opening/closing control start of the electric role object is set by the process of S625 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 113), the opening/closing control of the electric role object is started. The open/close control of the electric accessory is continued until the open time and the number of open times set in the process of S616 or S617 in the normal symbol variation process are completed.

Next, a first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is executed (S1006). In the first symbol display update process, when a variation pattern is set by the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 110), variation display corresponding to the variation pattern is started in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. In the present embodiment, among the LEDs of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, from the start of the variation until the variation time elapses, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off and the green LED is turned on. If the green LED is turned on, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is turned on. If the blue LED is turned on, the blue LED is turned on. is turned off and the red LED is turned on.

Note that the main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the lighting color of the LED is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED change the lighting color of That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

Further, the first symbol display update process is executed in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 110) ends. The variable display is ended, and the stop symbol (first symbol) is stopped (lighted up) on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B in the display mode set by the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 110).

Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device is executed (S1007). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S620 or the process of S621 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 113), the variation display is started on the second symbol display device. do. As a result, in the second pattern display device, a variable display is performed in which the second pattern "O" pattern and the "X" pattern are alternately lit. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device is set by the process of S623 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 113), the variation being executed in the second symbol display device The display is terminated, and in the display mode set by the processing of S613 or the processing of S618 of the normal design variation start processing (see FIG. 113), the stop design (second design) is stopped on the second design display device (lighting display )do.

After that, it is determined whether power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008). SG1 is not output and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main processing has come, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the main processing this time (S1009). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1009: Yes), the process proceeds to S1001, and the above-described processes after S1001 are repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet passed since the start of the main processing this time (S1009: No), the next main processing is executed until the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing. The first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1010, S1011).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1010). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1, and when the counter values reach the maximum values (399 and 239 in this embodiment), they are cleared to 0. . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the change type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the processing of S1002 (S1011).

Here, since the execution time of each process of S1001 to S1007 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1, and the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the fluctuation type counter CS1 can also be randomly updated.

In addition, in the process of S1008, if information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 117 is executed, so the power-off process from S1012 onwards is executed. First, to prohibit the occurrence of each interrupt processing (S1012), to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113) a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off and transmit (S1013). Then, a RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S1014), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1015), and the infinite loop continues until the power supply is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203 .

It should be noted that the process of S1008 is performed at the end of a series of processes corresponding to the game state change performed in S1001 to S1007, or at the time of the end of one cycle of the processes of S1010 and S1011 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main controller 110, information on the occurrence of power failure is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. It can start from the processing of S1001. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1001, as in the case of initialization in the start-up process. Therefore, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved in the process at power-off, the stack By setting the pointer to a predetermined value (initial value), the process of S1001 can be started. Therefore, the control load on the main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main controller 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, the jackpot control process (S1004) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 120 is a flow chart showing this jackpot control process (S1004). This jackpot control processing (S1004) is executed in the main interrupt processing (see FIG. 119), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in a special pattern jackpot state, execution of various effects according to the jackpot, This is processing for opening or closing the mouth switch 190b.

In the jackpot control process (FIG. 120, S1004), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot is started (S1101). Specifically, V entrance passage processing (see FIG. 116) is executed, and thereafter, if the start of the jackpot is set (see S1327 in FIG. 125), it is determined that the jackpot will start. In the processing of S1101, when the jackpot is started (S1101: Yes), the processing of jackpot time accessory device operation start processing (S1102) is executed, and this processing ends. Note that the processing of S1102 will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the process of S1101, when the big win is not started (S1101: No), it is determined whether the big win is in progress (S1103). During the big win includes the time when the big win (including during the big win game) is being displayed and the time during the predetermined time after the end of the big win game. In the process of S1103, if the special symbol jackpot is not in progress (S1103: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S1103, when it is determined that the jackpot is in progress (S1103: Yes), the jackpot time accessory device opening process (S1104) is executed, and then the process of S1105 is executed. Note that the processing of S1104 will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the processing of S1105, it is determined whether or not the value of the open number counter has reached the set number of times (for example, once) within the current round. In the process of S1105, when the value of the open number counter reaches the set number of times in the current round (S1105: Yes), the timer countdown process for closing time of the big winning opening is executed (S1106). On the other hand, in the process of S1105, if the value of the opening number counter has not reached the number of times set in the current round (S1105: No), an abnormality process is executed (S1118), and this process ends.

In the big winning opening closing time countdown process (S1106), the countdown of the jackpot time interval timer (S1149) set in S1104 is executed.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the closing time has elapsed (S1107). Then, if the closing time has not elapsed (S1107: No), an abnormality process is executed (S1118), and this process ends. On the other hand, if the closing time has passed (S1107: Yes), the round number counter is incremented (S1108). The value of the round number counter is stored in the count area of the RAM 203 with an initial value of 0, for example.

After the processing of S1108, it is determined whether or not the value of the round number counter has reached the number of execution rounds set in S1102 (S1132). At this time, if the value of the round number counter has not yet reached the number of execution rounds (S1109: No), the process proceeds to S1115, and a round number command is set (S1115).

The land number command set in S1115 is sent to the sound lamp controller 113 in the external output processing S1101 (see FIG. 119). The sound ramp control device 113 can recognize the current round number based on the received round number command, and reflect the result in the effect control during the big win.

Next, a normal round special winning opening closing designation command is set (S1116). This command is for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 of the closing of the movable ball entry accessory device 190 after each round at the time of a big hit. It should be noted that the normal round special winning opening closing designation command is a command indicating closing of the movable ball entry accessory device 190 in a round other than the final round. The command set here is transmitted to the sound lamp controller 113 in the external output processing S1101 (see FIG. 119).

Next, the process of S1117 is performed, and the winning ball number counter counted in the current round is reset (S1117), and at the same time, the value of the opening number counter is also reset, and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S1109, if the value of the round number counter has reached the number of rounds to be executed (S1109: Yes), this means that this round is the final round, and the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to off. It is determined whether or not it is set (S1110). In the processing of S1110, if it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203n is not set to OFF (that is, the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to ON) (S1110: No), then an abnormality process is executed. (S1118), and the process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1110, if it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to OFF (S1110: Yes), This is when the number of balls matches, and then the round number counter is reset (S1111).

Next, a final round special winning opening closing designation command is set (S1112). This command is for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 of the closing of the movable ball entry device 190 in the final round at the time of the big hit. Here, the final round corresponds to 3 rounds for a 3-round big win, 7 rounds for a 7-round big win, and 16 rounds for a 16-round big win.

Next, a jackpot end command is set (S1113), the jackpot middle flag is turned off (S1114), the process proceeds to S1117, and the process ends. The final round big winning opening closing designation command and the jackpot end command are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in the external output process S1101 (see FIG. 119).

With reference to the flowchart of FIG. 121, the jackpot accessory device activation start process S1102 will be described. FIG. 121 is a flow chart showing this jackpot accessory device activation start process S1102.

First, a jackpot start waiting time timer countdown process is executed (S1130). In this process, main controller 110 sets an initial value to the jackpot start waiting time timer, and then counts down the timer (each time this module is called) as time elapses. The initial value of the jackpot start waiting time timer is set as a waiting time (for example, about several seconds) from the end of the operation of the movable ball-entering accessory device 190 at the time of the small win until the movable ball-entering accessory device 190 is operated again. . In addition, in the sound ramp control device 113, using this "big hit start waiting time", for example, an effect before the start of the big hit game is performed.

Next, it is determined whether or not the jackpot start waiting time has elapsed (S1131). If the value of the jackpot start waiting time timer has not yet reached 0 (S1131: No), it is determined that the jackpot start waiting time has not passed, and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, when the value of the jackpot start waiting time timer becomes 0 (S1131: Yes), the process proceeds to S1132 and subsequent steps.

Next, the number of execution rounds is set (S1132). In this embodiment, the number of execution rounds (the number of consecutive operations) to be set is three types of "3 rounds", "7 rounds", and "16 rounds". The number of execution rounds can be set by checking the type status (checking the type of the V flag 203x2).

However, as described above, the first opening of the movable ball-entering accessory device 190 (movement of a small win) corresponds to the first round. Therefore, here, the remaining number of rounds to be executed is set to either "2 rounds", "6 rounds" or "15 rounds". The number of execution rounds set here is stored in the buffer area of the RAM 203 as a corresponding value on the program.

Next, the jackpot flag is turned off (S1133), a jackpot start command is set (S1134), and this process is terminated.

The jackpot start command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 119). It is transmitted toward the control device 113 . When the audio lamp control device 113 receives the jackpot start command, it executes effect control for starting the jackpot.

With reference to the flowchart of FIG. 122, the jackpot time accessory device opening process S1104 will be described. FIG. 122 is a flowchart showing the jackpot time accessory device opening process S1104. This processing is mainly for controlling the opening/closing operation of the movable ball-entering accessory device 190 as an operation during a big hit game (special game).

First, main controller 110 determines whether or not it is time to open the big winning opening switch 190b (S1141). In the process of S1141, when it is determined that it is time to open the big winning opening switch 190b (S1141: Yes), the big winning opening switch 190b is opened (S1142). Specifically, it outputs a drive signal to be applied to the large opening solenoid 209a. As a result, the movable piece 190a of the movable ball entry accessory device 190 is activated, and the big winning opening switch 190b shifts from the closed state to the open state.

Next, a timer for opening when a big hit is set (S1143). The value of the timer set here is the opening time per operation when the movable ball entry accessory device 190 is operated. In this embodiment, a total open time for one round (for example, about 30 seconds) is set as the value of the open timer at the time of the big hit. With this degree of open time, a sufficient number (for example, about 10) of game balls can enter the big winning opening during that time.

Next, a big win interval timer (big win opening closing time timer) is set (S1144). The value of the timer set here is the standby time between rounds during the big win or the standby time at the end of the final round. Note that the value of the timer is set to, for example, about 3 seconds (a numerical value longer than the set value of the remaining ball timer).

On the other hand, in the process of S1141, if it is determined that it is not the time to open the large winning opening switch 190b (S1141: No), then it is determined whether or not the large winning opening switch 190b is open (S1145).

In the process of S1145, when it is determined that the big winning opening switch 190b is open (S1145: Yes), an open timer countdown process is executed (S1146). In this process, the countdown of the open timer set in the previous process of S1102 is executed. Next, it is checked whether or not the open time has ended. Specifically, it is checked whether the value of the open timer after the countdown process is 0 or less, and if the value of the open timer is not 0 or less (S1147: No), then the number of winning balls Count processing is executed (S1149). In this process, the number of game balls that have entered the movable ball entry accessory device 190 within the open time is counted. Specifically, the value of the count number is incremented based on the winning detection signal input from the big winning opening switch 190b during the open time.

Next, it is confirmed whether or not the current count number is less than a predetermined number (10). This predetermined number defines the upper limit of the number of winning balls (upper limit of the number of winning balls) allowed per opening (one round during a big win, one time during a small win) as described above. If the count number has not yet reached the predetermined number (S1150: Yes), this process ends.

If it is determined in S1147 that the open time has ended (S1147: Yes), or if it is determined in S1150 that the count number has reached a predetermined number (S1150: No), then S1148 is executed.

At S1148, main controller 110 closes big winning opening switch 190b. Specifically, the output of the drive signal applied to the large opening solenoid 209a is stopped. As a result, the movable ball entry accessory device 190 returns from the open state to the closed state.

Next, the remaining ball timer flag 203n is turned on (S1151). Next, interval standby processing (S1152) is executed. In this process, the interval timer set in the process of S1102 counts down. Then, when the value of the interval timer becomes 0 or less, the value of the opening number counter is incremented (S1153), and this processing is terminated. The value of the opening number counter is stored in the count area of the RAM 203 with an initial value of 0, for example.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1145, if it is determined that the big winning opening 190b is not open (S1145: No), this processing ends.

FIG. 123 is a flow chart showing the content of this abnormality processing (S1118). In the abnormality process (S1118), a process of monitoring whether or not the player has illegally passed through the big winning opening switch 190b is executed.

In the abnormality processing (FIG. 123, S1118), first, it is determined whether or not it is the round effective period (S1261). If it is outside the round valid period (S1261: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is within the round effective period (S1261: Yes), it is determined whether the game ball has passed through the discharge detection switch 190c (S1262). When it is determined that the game ball has passed through the ejection detection switch 190c (S1262: Yes), the value of the ball ejection number counter 203s is updated by adding 1 (S1263). After that, the process of S1264 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the discharge detection switch 190c (S1262: No), the process of S1264 is executed.

In the processing of S1264, it is determined whether or not the remaining ball timer flag 203n is ON (S1264). If it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203n is off (S1264: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203n is ON (S1264: Yes), it is during the ball sweeping time period, so the remaining ball timer 203o is updated by adding 1 (S1265). The remaining ball timer 203o determines whether the upper limit (2 seconds in this embodiment) has passed (S1266). If it is determined that it is not the upper limit value (S1266: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined to be the upper limit value (S1266: Yes), it is determined whether or not the number of discharges (total value of the discharge number counter 203s) and the winning number (value of the winning number counter 203j) match (S1267). .

If it is determined that they match (S1267: Yes), the process of S1269 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that they do not match (S1267: No), an error command is set (S1268). After that, the process of S1269 is executed. When the error command is received by the audio lamp control device 113, an error is displayed (for example, characters indicating a winning number mismatch error are displayed), and an error signal is output to the hall computer. Therefore, it is possible to prevent illegally leaving a game ball in the movable ball entrance accessory device 190 and allowing the game ball to pass through the fixed area hole 340 after the jackpot game ends.

In the processing of S1269, the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to OFF (S1269), and the remaining ball timer 203o is reset to 0, which is the initial value (S1270). After that, the winning number counter 203j and the discharge number counter 203s are reset to their initial values (S1271), and then this process ends.

The small hit control process (S1040) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 124 is a flow chart showing the small hit control process (S1040) executed in the main process (see FIG. 119). This small hit control process (S1040) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 119), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in a special pattern big win state, execution of various effects according to the big win, movable ball entry, etc. This is a process for opening or closing the big winning opening switch 190b of the accessory device 190. FIG.

In the small hit control process, first, it is determined whether or not the small hit is started (S1301). Specifically, if the small hit start flag 203w1 is set to ON by the processing of S4308 of the small hit start setting process (see FIG. 111), it is determined that the small hit is started. In the process of S1301, when the small winning is started (S1301: Yes), the small winning start flag 203w1 is set to OFF (S1302), the opening scenario is set (S1303), and the small winning start command is set. (S1304), and the process ends.

The small hit start command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 119). It is sent to the lamp control device 113 . When the audio lamp control device 113 receives the jackpot start command, it executes an effect to start the jackpot.

On the other hand, in the process of S1301, when the small winning is not started (S1301: No), it is determined whether or not the small winning is in progress (S1305). Judgment of the small hit is specifically determined by whether or not the small hit medium flag 203w2 is ON. In the process of S1305, if it is not during the small hit (S1305: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1305, if it is during the small hit (4704: Yes), it is determined whether it is the timing of the next opening (S1306). If it is the timing of the next opening (S1306: Yes), the big winning opening switch 190b of the movable ball entry accessory device 190 is opened (S1307), and a command indicating the number of times of opening to newly start is set (S1308), End this process. The command indicating the number of times of opening set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 119). It is sent to the audio lamp controller 113 . When the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command indicating the number of times of opening, it starts an effect according to the number of times of opening.

On the other hand, in the process of S1306, if it is not the timing of the next opening (S1306: No), it is determined whether it is the timing of closing the big winning opening switch 190b of the movable ball entry accessory device 190 (S1309). Specifically, when a predetermined time (0.5 seconds in this embodiment) elapses after the big winning opening switch 190b of the movable ball entry accessory device 190 is opened, it is determined that it is time to close.

In the process of S1309, if it is determined that it is time to close the large winning opening switch 190b of the movable ball entering accessory device 190 (S1309: Yes), the large winning opening switch 190b of the movable ball entering accessory device 190 is closed (S1310), and the process ends. On the other hand, if the condition for closing the big winning opening switch 190b of the movable ball entry device 190 is not satisfied (S1309: No), it is determined whether or not the small winning period has elapsed (S1311).

Specifically, when a predetermined period of time has passed since the start of the small winning, it is determined that the period of the small winning has passed, depending on the opening scenario of the small winning. That is, in the small hit control 1, when 7.5 seconds have passed since the start of the small hit (see FIG. 107), in the small hit control 2, when 10 seconds have passed since the small hit (see FIG. 108), the small hit period has elapsed.

In the process of S1311, when it is determined that the period of the small hit has passed (S1311: Yes), the small win end process is executed (S1312), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S1311, when it is determined that the small winning period has not elapsed (S1311: No), this processing is terminated.

Here, with reference to FIG. 125, the details of the small winning ending process (S1312) will be described. FIG. 125 is a flow chart showing the small winning ending process (S1312). This small hit end process (S1312) is a process executed when it is determined that it is the timing of the small hit end in the small hit control process.

In the small hit end process (S1312), first, it is determined whether or not the V entrance passage flag 203x1 is ON (S1321). In the process of S1321, if it is determined that the V entrance passage flag 203x1 is on (S1321: Yes), it means that the game ball passes through the defined area hole 340 during the small hit game (the specific area hole 440 It is a case where any one of the specific area switches 441a, 442a, 443a is passed), so a process for starting the execution of the jackpot game is performed. First, the residence counter 203l is updated (S1322).

In the process of S1322, the retention counter 203l is updated by being decremented by one. Also, when it is determined that the value of the residence counter 203l is 0 or less (S1323: Yes), the process proceeds to S1324.

Next, it is determined whether or not the V flag 203x2 is set to ON (S1324). In the processing of S1324, when it is determined that the V flag 203x2 is set to ON (S1324: Yes), the opening scenario of the big winning opening switch 190b is set based on the jackpot type corresponding to the V flag 203x2 (S1325 ), the start of the jackpot is set based on the jackpot type corresponding to the V flag 203x2 (S1326). Next, the jackpot start flag 203v1 and the jackpot middle flag 203v2 are set to ON (S1327), the V entrance passage flag 203x1 is set to OFF (S1328), the V flag 203x2 is set to OFF (S1329), and S1330 Go to processing.

On the other hand, in the process of S1323, if it is determined that the retention counter 203l is greater than 0 (S1323: No), or in the process of S1324, the V flag 203x2 is not set to ON (that is, the V flag 203x2 is OFF). is set) (S1324: No), this process is terminated.

In the process of S1321, when it is determined that the V entrance passage flag 203x1 is not ON (S1321: No), since it is a case where the game ball does not pass through the fixed area switch 340a during the small hit game, a big hit is given. In order to end without doing so, a small hit end command is set (S1331), and the process proceeds to S1330.

The small hit end command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 119). It is sent to the lamp control device 113 . When receiving the small winning end command, the sound lamp control device 113 selects the display mode of the small winning ending production based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a of the RAM 223, and performs the small winning ending production. to start.

After shifting to the process of S1330, the small hit medium flag 203w2 is set to OFF (S1330), the open scenario is cleared (S1332), and this process ends.

Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 126 to 130. FIG. The processing of the MPU 221 can be broadly classified into startup processing that is started upon power-on and main processing that is executed after the startup processing.

First, referring to FIG. 126, start-up processing executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 126 is a flow chart showing this startup process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process is executed upon power-on (S1401). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is ON, the power-off processing in S1512 (see FIG. 127) is caused by a momentary voltage drop (instantaneous power failure, so-called "instantaneous power failure"). ) is started during execution (S1402). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 127, when the audio lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main controller 110 (see S1511 in FIG. 127), it executes power-off processing in S1512. Before the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing flag is turned on, and after the power-off processing is completed, the power-off processing flag is turned off. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing of S1512 is being executed can be determined by the state of the power-off processing in-progress flag.

If the power-off processing flag is off (S1402: No), the startup process this time was started after the power was completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure occurred and the power was shut off in S1512. Either it was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started when only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise (without receiving a power off command from the main controller 110). be. Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1403).

Destruction of data in the RAM 223 is confirmed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of "55AAh" is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S1406. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if it is not "55AAh", it can be confirmed that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed. If data destruction of RAM223 is confirmed (S1403: Yes), it will transfer to S1404 and will start initialization of RAM223. On the other hand, if destruction of data in the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1403: No), the process proceeds to S1408.

It should be noted that if the startup process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power cut). ), it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1403: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1404. On the other hand, whether the current start-up processing was started after a momentary power failure occurred and after the execution of the power-off processing in S1514 was completed, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like. If the operation is started with the above, the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1403: No), and the process proceeds to S1408.

If the power-off processing flag is on (S1402: Yes), the startup process this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and during execution of the power-off process of S1514, the sound lamp control device 113 It is started by resetting the MPU 221 of . In such a case, the memory state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct because the power-off process is in progress. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process moves to S1404 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the processing of S1404, the storage area of the entire range of RAM 223 is checked (S1404). As a checking method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, read for each byte to confirm whether it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined that the data is normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". All storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to 0 by this read/write check of the RAM 223 .

If it is determined that the read/write check is normal for all storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1405: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set RAM destruction check data (S1406). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not the RAM 223 has data destruction. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read/write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S1405: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1407), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. Abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34 . It should be noted that the abnormality of the RAM 223 may be notified by outputting a sound from the sound output device 226 .

In the process of S1408, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S1408). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S1514 is executed (see S1513 in FIG. 127). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off processing of S1514 is executed, the process of S1408 is reached with the power-off flag turned on because the startup processing this time is instantaneous. This is the case where the process is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S1514 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1408: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113 (S1409), and after setting the initial value of the RAM 223 (S1410), an interrupt Permission is set (S1411), and the process proceeds to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110 .

On the other hand, the process of S1408 is reached with the power-off flag turned off because the current start-up process was started after the power supply was completely shut off, for example. This is the case where the processing has been reached, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 has been reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S1408: No), S1409, which is the processing for clearing the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process proceeds to S1410, and after setting the initial value of the RAM 223 (S1410), interrupt permission is set. Then (S1411), the process proceeds to the main process.

The reason why the clearing process of S1409 is skipped is that when the process of S1408 is reached from S1404 via the process of S1406, all storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S1404, When only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and start-up processing is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the audio lamp control device 113 This is because the control of can be continued.

Next, referring to FIG. 127, main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 after startup processing of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 127 is a flow chart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 ms or more has passed since the main process was started or the current process of S1501 was executed (S1501), and 1 ms or more has passed. If not (S1501: No), the process proceeds to S1510 without performing the processes of S1502 to S1509. In the process of S1501, it is determined whether or not 1 msec has passed because S1502 to S1509 are mainly processes related to display (effect), and there is no need to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). , and S1510 at short intervals. By executing the process of S1510 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent failure to receive commands transmitted from main controller 110 .

If 1 millisecond or more has elapsed in the processing of S1501 (S1501: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processing of S1503 to S1510 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1502 ). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1508 described later (S1503), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1504). In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, it is notified that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). will be Note that if the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S1505 without notifying by the power-on notification process.

In the process of S1505, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and then the pending number display update process is executed (S1506). In the customer waiting effect process, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by a player for a predetermined period of time, the output of the display lamp 34 is switched to a low power setting. In the reserved number display update process, a process of lighting a reserved lamp (not shown) according to the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is performed.

After that, frame button input monitoring/effect processing is executed (S1507). This frame button input monitoring/performance processing monitors input as to whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed in order to enhance the performance effect, and corresponds to the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is the process of setting to perform production.

When the frame button input monitoring/effect processing is completed, the lamp editing processing is executed (S1508), and then the sound editing/output processing is executed (S1509). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination parts 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the game state. In the sound editing/output process, the output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the game state, and the sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to the setting. The details of this lamp editing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

After the process of S1509, a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the main controller 110 is performed (S1510). The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Then, when the command determination process is finished, it is determined whether or not the work RAM 233 stores power failure occurrence information (S1511). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110 . If power-off occurrence information is stored in the processing of S1511 (S1511: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S1513), and the power-off processing is executed (S1514). After the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing flag is turned off (S1515), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power-off processing, interrupt processing is prohibited, each output port is turned off, and outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. In addition, the memory of information on occurrence of power failure is also erased.

On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1511 (S1511: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1512), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1512: No), the process returns to S1501, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1512: Yes), the process is looped infinitely to stop execution of subsequent processes. Here, since the main processing is not executed when the RAM is determined to be destroyed and the game loops infinitely, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 do not change according to the game state. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, the player can call the hall clerk or the like and ask them to repair the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the RAM destruction may be notified by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 .

Here, referring to FIG. 128, the ramp editing process (S1508) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing lamp editing processing (S1508). This lamp editing process (S1508) is a process executed at intervals of 1 ms in the main process (see FIG. 127).

In the lamp editing process, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot is in progress (S1601). In the processing of S1601, if it is determined that the jackpot is not in progress (S1601: No), then it is determined whether or not the small hit is in progress (S1602).

In the processing of S1602, if it is determined that it is not during the small hit (S1602: No), the current game state is the normal game state in which the game ball is shot aiming to advance to the small hit game state. be. Therefore, the output of the lamps of the illumination parts 29 to 33 is set to the production pattern for normal game (S1603), the wing entrance passage counter 223i is set to 0 (S1604), and the V entrance passage counter 223j is set to 0. (S1605), this processing ends.

In the processing of S1602, when it is determined that the small winning is in progress (S1602: Yes), the game ball has won in one of the starting winning openings 26, 27, 28, and the big winning opening switch 190b is opened. As a result, a game ball can flow into the inside of the movable ball entry accessory device 190a, so that the player can grasp this, the output of the lamps of the illumination parts 29 to 33 is set to the A1 pattern. (S1606). In this embodiment, in the A1 pattern, the electrical decorations 29 to 33 emit blue light.

It should be noted that the A1 pattern is one pattern of the output of the lamp for the small winning game. In the present embodiment, output patterns A1 to A3 can be configured as different production patterns of the lamps of the illumination parts 29 to 33. FIG.

For example, in the A1 pattern, the lamps of the illumination parts 29 to 33 emit blue light, in the A2 pattern, the lamps in the illumination parts 29 to 33 emit green light, and in the A3 pattern, the lamps of the illumination parts 29 to 33 emit red light. By emitting light, it is possible for the player to grasp the degree of expectation for a big win. Note that the number of output patterns is not limited to three, but may be any number of patterns, and is not limited to different colors. The difference may be constituted by a change in the orientation of the .

Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the tuyere passing counter 223j is 1 or more (S1607). In the process of S1607, if it is determined that the value of the tuyere passing counter 223j is 1 or more (S1607: Yes), the output of the lamps of the illumination units 29 to 33 is set to the A2 pattern (S1608). In the present embodiment, in the A2 pattern, the illumination parts 29 to 33 emit green light, which is more likely to be a big win than blue light.

Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the tuyere passage counter 223i is 2 or more (S1609). If it is determined that the value of the tuyere passage counter 223i is 2 or more (S1609: Yes), the output of the lamps of the illumination units 29 to 33 is set to the A3 pattern (S1610), and the process proceeds to S1611. In this embodiment, in the A3 pattern, the illumination parts 29 to 33 emit light in red, which is more likely to be a big win than in green.

That is, the color of light emitted from the lamps of the illumination parts 29 to 33 during the small winning game can be changed according to how many game balls have passed through the big winning opening switch 190b. As described above in the first embodiment, when a plurality of game balls pass through the big winning opening switch 190b, it becomes easier for the game balls to enter the special route hole 323 that easily flows down to the fixed area hole 340. Therefore, since the number of game balls that have passed through the big winning opening switch 190b can be directly associated with the change in the degree of expectation for the big win, the change in the light of the illumination parts 29 to 33 is not merely a change in liveliness, but a change in the excitement of the player. It can be done as a function of interest. As a result, the interest of the player can be improved.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1607 that the value of the tuyere passing counter 223j is not 1 or more (S1607: No), or if the value of the tuyere passing counter 223j is smaller than 2 in the process of S1609, If determined (S1609: No), the process proceeds to S1611.

Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the V entrance passage counter 223j is 1 or more (S1611). In the process of S1611, when it is determined that the value of the V entrance passage counter 223j is 1 or more (S1611: Yes), the current state is the state in which the transition to the jackpot game is confirmed and the jackpot type is determined from this. is. Therefore, the output of the lamps of the illumination parts 29 to 33 is set to the winning effect pattern (S1612), and the process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S1611, if it is determined that the value of the V entrance passage counter 223j is smaller than 1 (is 0) (S1611: No), the transition to the jackpot game is in an undetermined state. The output state of the lamps of the decorative portions 29 to 33 is maintained, and this processing is terminated.

In the processing of S1601, if it is determined that the jackpot is in progress (S1601: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the value of the round number cumulative counter 223k is 1 (S1620).

In the processing of S1620, when it is determined that the value of the round number cumulative counter 223k is 1 (S1620: Yes), the number of rounds for the big win is in an undetermined state.

Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the V entrance passage counter 223j is 1 (S1621). In the process of S1621, when it is determined that the value of the V entrance passage counter 223j is 1 (S1621: Yes), the current state is that one game ball passes through any of the specific area holes 440. The number of rounds for the jackpot is determined based on the number of rounds of the jackpot, and the possibility of winning the jackpot of three rounds remains. In this case, the output of the lamps of the illumination units 29 to 33 is set to the B1 pattern, and this processing ends (S1622). In this embodiment, in the B1 pattern, the electrical decorations 29 to 33 emit gold light.

Incidentally, the B1 pattern is one pattern of the output for effecting the first round among the outputs of the lamps for effecting the jackpot game. In this embodiment, output patterns of B1 and B2 can be configured as different effect patterns of the lamps of the illumination parts 29-33.

For example, in the B1 pattern, the lamps of the illumination parts 29 to 33 emit gold light, and in the B2 pattern, the lamps of the illumination parts 29 to 33 emit rainbow colors, thereby increasing the profit of the jackpot for the player. It is possible to grasp the degree of expectation of Note that the number of output patterns is not limited to two, but can be any number of patterns, and is not limited to different colors. The difference may be constituted by a change in the orientation of the .

On the other hand, in the processing of S1621, if it is determined that the value of the V entrance passing counter 223j is not 1 (S1621: No), the current state is that two or more game balls pass through any of the specific area holes 440. This is the state in which the number of rounds for the jackpot is determined based on passing. For example, in the first embodiment, in the process in which two or more game balls pass through the defined area hole 340 and flow down the inside of the second flow-down device 400, at least one game ball goes to the third branch guide flow path R3 It is configured to go.

The game ball flowing down the third branch guide channel R3 passes through either the first specific area hole 441 (16 round jackpot is given) or the second specific area hole 442 (7 round jackpot is given), The passing timing is configured to be earlier than the passing timing when another game ball passes through the third specific area hole 443 (granting a 3-round jackpot).

Therefore, even if the game ball passes through the third specific area hole 443, it is confirmed that the passage will be invalidated, so in the current state, there is no possibility of winning the three-round jackpot. Excluded state. In this case, the output of the lamps of the illumination units 29 to 33 is set to the B2 pattern, and this processing ends (S1623). In this embodiment, in the B2 pattern, the lamps of the illumination parts 29 to 33 emit light in a rainbow color, which has a higher expectation of profit that can be obtained than in gold.

In the process of S1620, when it is determined that the value of the round number cumulative counter 223k is not 1 (S1620: No), the current state is that the number of rounds for the big win is determined, and the game advances to the big win game with the transition to the second round. is in a state of Therefore, the outputs of the lamps of the illumination units 29 to 33 are set to the big win game effect pattern (S1624), and the process is terminated.

In addition, in the present embodiment, as described above, in the normal game state before proceeding to the small winning game, the output of the lamps of the illumination units 29 to 33 is set to the normal game effect pattern, and the small winning game state to the jackpot game state, the output of the lamps of the illumination parts 29 to 33 is set to the win acquisition performance pattern, the number of rounds of the jackpot game is determined, and the remaining jackpot game is executed. The outputs of the lamps of the parts 29 to 33 are set to the jackpot game effect pattern.

In the state explained here, since the profit given to the player is determined, even if the difference in color is provided, the interest of the player is not improved, but rather the change in the emitted light color stimulates the eyes. This leads to player fatigue. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in order to prevent the player from being meaninglessly tired, light of the same color (for example, white light) is used in the normal game effect pattern, the winning win effect pattern, and the big win game effect pattern. The lamps of the illumination parts 29 to 33 are made to emit light. This makes it easier for the player to grasp the timing of fixing the profit.

Since the moment of winning a big win is the moment when the player's interest is most enhanced, the light emission intensity of the lamps of the illumination parts 29 to 33 according to the win winning production pattern is changed to correspond to the normal game production. It is configured to be stronger than the light emission intensity of the lamps of the illumination parts 29 to 33 according to the pattern or the performance pattern for the jackpot game.

In FIG. 128, controlling the light emission of the lamps of the decorative parts 29 to 33 has been described. be done. That is, the sound changes based on the degree of expectation of the profit given to the player. For example, when the output of the lamps of the illumination units 29 to 33 is set to the A2 pattern (S1608), it is better than when the output of the lamps of the illumination units 29 to 33 is set to the A1 pattern (S1606). , is controlled in such a manner that the tempo of the music to be output is increased, or the volume is increased.

Next, the command determination process (S1510) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 129 is a flow chart showing this command determination process (S1510). This command determination process (S1510) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 127) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp controller 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main controller 110. .

In the command determination process (FIG. 129, S1510), first, among the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main controller 110 is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and It is determined whether or not a pending ball count command has been received (S1701). Then, when the pending ball number command is received (S1701: Yes), it is determined whether the received pending ball number command is a special figure 1 pending ball number command or a special figure 2 pending ball number command. , the value contained in the command, that is, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110 (the number of times N1 of holding the variable display in the special symbol) is extracted, and the special symbol 2 of the main controller 110 The value of the reserved ball number counter 203e (number of times N2 of holding variable display in the special symbol) is extracted and stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c of the sound lamp control device 113 (S1702).

Here, the special figure 1 reserved ball number command or the special figure 2 reserved ball number command is when the ball wins the left and right start winning openings 26, 27 or the middle starting winning opening 28 (start winning), or a lottery of special symbols is transmitted from the main control device 110 when the is performed, every time the starting winning prize is detected, or every time the special symbol lottery is performed, the special symbol 1 of the sound lamp control device 113 is processed by the processing of S1702. The values of the reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c can be matched with the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110. Therefore, due to the influence of noise or the like, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 is changed to the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d or the special symbol Even if it deviates from the value of the 2 reserved ball number counter 203e, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 when the start winning is detected or the special symbol lottery is selected. can be modified to match the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110. When the process of S1702 is executed, the values of the updated special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c are arranged so as to be visible to the player as substitutes for the liquid crystal display device. A display pending ball number command for notification to a 7-segment display (not shown) is set. As a result, the reserved ball number pattern corresponding to the reserved ball number is displayed on the 7-segment display.

On the other hand, if the command for the number of pending balls has not been received (S1701: No), it is determined whether or not a hit-related command has been received (S1703). When a hit-related command is received (S1703: Yes), a hit-related process is executed (S1704), and then this process ends.

In the processing of S1703, if it is determined that a win-related command has not been received (S1703: No), then it is determined whether or not a notification command has been received from main controller 110 (S1705). If it is determined that the notification command has been received (S1705: Yes), the notification voice corresponding to the received command (for example, "hit the ball to the top") is selected, and the command for notification is set (S1706). .

Next, in the process of S1705, if it is determined that the notification command has not been received (S1705: No), it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and the process corresponding to the received command is executed. (S1707), and the process ends. If the other command is a command used in the sound lamp control device 113, the processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used in the 7-segment display, the command is sent to the 7-segment display. It sets the command so that it will be sent to

Here, with reference to FIG. 130, the hit-related processing (S1704) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 130 is a flow chart showing the win-related processing (S1704). This hit-related process (S1704) is a process that is executed when it is determined that a hit-related command has been received in the command determination process (see FIG. 129).

In the hit related process, it is first determined whether or not the jackpot start command is received (S1721). When it is determined that the jackpot start command has been received (S1721: Yes), a display jackpot start command is set (S1722), and this process ends. The display jackpot start command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is executed by the MPU 221 in the command output process (S1502) of the main process (see FIG. 127). It is transmitted toward the display control device 114 . When the display controller 114 receives the display jackpot start command, it displays an effect suggesting the start of the jackpot on a 7-segment display (not shown).

On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot start command has not been received (S1721: No), then it is determined whether or not the round number command has been received (S1723). In the process of S1723, if it is determined that the round number command has been received (S1723: Yes), 1 is added to the round number cumulative counter 223k (S1724). After that, a round number command for display is set based on the round number cumulative counter 223k (S1725), and this processing ends.

In the process of S1723, when it is determined that the round number command has not been received (S1723: No), it is determined whether or not the jackpot end command has been received (S1726). In the process of S1726, when it is determined that the jackpot end command is received (S1726: Yes), the display jackpot end command is set (S1727), the round cumulative counter 223k is set to 0 (S1728), and this process is executed. finish.

In the process of S1726, when it is determined that the big hit end command is not received (S1726: No), it is determined whether or not the small hit start command is received (S1729).

In the processing of S1729, when it is determined that the small winning start command is received (S1729: Yes), the small winning start command for display is set (S1730), and this processing ends.

In the process of S1729, when it is determined that the small hit start command is not received (S1729: No), it is determined whether or not the small hit end command is received (S1731).

In the processing of S1731, when it is determined that the small winning end command is received (S1731: Yes), in order to execute the effect suggesting the end of the small winning game, the small winning end command for display is set (S1732). , the process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S1731, when it is determined that the small winning end command has not been received (S1731: No), it is determined whether or not the wing entrance passing command has been received (S1733).

In the process of S1733, if it is determined that the tuyere passage command has been received (S1733: Yes), 1 is added to the tuyere passage counter 223i (S1734). The wing entrance passage counter 223i incremented here is referred to for determining the number of game balls entering the movable ball entry accessory device 190 during the small winning game in the lamp editing process described in FIG. be.

When the process of S1734 is finished, a display wing passage command is set (S1735) in order to execute an effect based on the ball entering the movable ball entry accessory device 190 during the small winning game (see, for example, FIG. 128). ), the process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1733 that the tuyere passage command has not been received (S1733: No), it is determined whether or not the V entrance passage command has been received (S1736).

In the process of S1736, if it is determined that the V entrance passage command has been received (S1736: Yes), 1 is added to the V entrance passage counter 223j (S1737). The V entrance passage counter 223j added here is referred to in order to determine the number of balls entering the defined area switch 340a during the jackpot game (first round) in the ramp editing process described with reference to FIG.

When the processing of S1737 is finished, a command for passing through the V entrance for display is set (S1738) in order to execute an effect suggesting the start of the jackpot game, and this processing is finished. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1736 that the V entrance passage command has not been received (S1736: No), this process ends.

Thus, in this embodiment, how many game balls have passed through the large winning opening switch 190b of the movable ball entrance accessory device 190, and how many game balls have passed through the fixed area switch 340a, production is changed (see FIG. 128). As a result, even when the player does not pay attention to the game ball, it is possible to inform the player that the state is advantageous to the player due to the presentation mode, thereby preventing the player from missing the moment of the big win. can be prevented.

Further, this makes it possible to link the characteristics of the movable ball-entering accessory device 190 (characteristics in which the magnitude of profit that can be expected to be obtained changes depending on how many game balls are entered) and the performance. That is, the change in performance can be configured as a change in performance based on a change in profit that can be expected to be obtained, rather than a change in liveliness. As a result, it is possible to improve the player's degree of attention to the performance.

Next, an eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 131 to 165. FIG. In the first embodiment, the case where the change in the flow of the ball into the movable ball-entering device 190 occurs randomly due to the collision between the ball and the nail has been described. , is arranged on the upstream side of the movable ball entry accessory device 190, and is configured to be able to control changes in the flow-down mode of the ball by causing the ball to collide with the protruding/retracting member 8520 inside. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

131 is a front view of the game board 8013 in the eighth embodiment, FIG. 132 is a partial front perspective view of the game board 8013, and FIG. 133 is a partial front exploded perspective view of the game board 8013. FIG. It should be noted that FIG. 131 illustrates an arrangement example of a nail that collides with the ball above the top opening 8512, and the illustration of the nail is omitted in FIGS. Further, in FIG. 133, since the base plate 60 is transparent, the first flow-down device 300 arranged behind it can be seen through. As will be described later, the front device 8510 is made of a light transmissive material, but the illustration of the internal structure is omitted for easy understanding.

As shown in FIGS. 131 to 133, in the present embodiment, an opening 8013a is formed in the game board 8013 above the movable ball-entering accessory device 190, and the pre-winning falling-down device 8500 is played in a mode that fills the opening 8013a. It is fastened and fixed to the board 8013 .

It is possible to enter the ball from the top opening 8512 in the pre-winning falling down device 8500, but after the ball is shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 4), the ball enters the top opening 8512. However, the arrangement of nails planted in the vicinity of the top opening 8512 and the shape of the inclined flow path 8513 of the pre-winning downstream device 8500 are set so that at least one second elapses before the ball enters the internal flow path INR8. be done.

Among the balls flowing down the game area, the balls that enter the top opening 8512 of the pre-winning falling device 8500 approach the movable piece 190a of the movable ball entry accessory device 190 through the internal flow path INR8 of the pre-winning falling device 8500. It flows down in a manner. When the movable piece 190a is in the open state, the configuration of the pre-winning falling device 8500 and the position of the opening 8013a are such that the ball discharged from the pre-winning falling device 8500 can enter the movable ball-entering device 190. is set. In this embodiment, the structure of the pre-winning downstream device 8500 and the position of the opening 8013a are changed in such a manner that one second elapses from when the ball is discharged from the internal flow path INR8 to when it reaches the movable piece 190a in the open state. set.

The pre-winning falling-down device 8500 includes a front side device 8510 which is formed of a light-transmissive material, is arranged on the front side of the game board 8013 in such a manner as to close the opening 8013a, and is fastened and fixed to the game board 8013, and the front side device 8510. A back side device 8540 that is fitted in the opening 8013a of the game board 8013 on the back side of the game board 8013 and projects to the rear of the game board 8013 and is fastened and fixed to the game board 8013, and the back side device 8540 A transmission device 8600, which is a device for transmitting driving force to the retractable member 8520 that moves in and out of the internal flow path INR8, and is disposed in the back side device 8540, and a driving motor KM1 that generates the driving force transmitted by the transmission device 8600. , KM2.

According to the pre-winning device 8500 of the present embodiment, the front side device 8510 and the back side device 8540 can be individually fastened and fixed to the game board 8013, so it is not necessary to replace all of them when a part of them is desired to be changed. For example, when it is desired to change the decoration on the front side surface of the body plate portion 8511 of the front side device 8510, only the front side device 8510 can be removed from the game board 8013 and replaced. At this time, as will be described later, the transmission rod 8530 of the front side device 8510 and the second transmission rod 8550 of the back side device 8540 are moved from the direction in which the front side device 8510 and the back side device 8540 move toward each other during assembly (the front-rear direction). They can be connected (the connecting pieces 8534 and 8555 can be connected together, see FIG. 152). Thereby, the front side device 8510 and the back side device 8540 can be easily replaced individually.

Details of the front device 8510 will be described with reference to FIG. 134(a) is a rear view of the front side device 8510, and FIG. 134(b) is a cross-sectional view of the front side device 8510 along line CXXXIb-CXXXIb of FIG. 134(a).

As shown in FIG. 134, the front side device 8510 includes a main body plate portion 8511, which is a plate-like member serving as a frame and has an opening 8514 that opens toward the back side, and a main body plate portion 8511 that is loosely fitted in the opening 8514 and protrudes and disappears in the front-rear direction. It mainly comprises a retractable member 8520 and a transmission rod 8530 housed in an opening 8514 below the retractable member 8520 .

The body plate portion 8511 will be described with reference to FIG. 135(a) is a rear view of the body plate portion 8511, FIG. 135(b) is a side view of the body plate portion 8511 viewed in the direction of arrow CXXXVb in FIG. 135(a), and FIG. 135(c). 135(a) is a partial cross-sectional view of the main body plate portion 8511 taken along line CXXXVc-CXXXVc of FIG. 135(a), and FIG. 135(d) is a partial cross-sectional view of main body plate portion 8511 taken along line CXXXVd-CXXXVd of FIG. 135(c). is.

As shown in FIG. 135, the main body plate portion 8511 includes a top opening 8512 that opens so as to receive the falling ball on the front side of the game board 8013, and a ball that enters the top opening 8512 obliquely downward and backward. A half-pipe-shaped inclined flow path 8513 for flowing down, an opening 8514 formed as an opening that is recessed from the back surface of the main body plate portion 8511 toward the front side and opens toward the back side, and from the opening portion 8514 in the vertical direction A plurality of loose fitting recessed portions 8515 recessed upward along (slightly inclined) are mainly provided.

The body plate portion 8511 is formed of a thin plate member having an opening 8514 and a thick plate member fixed to the rear of the thin plate member. The main body plate portion 8511 is manufactured by recessing the loose fitting recessed portion 8515 in advance in the thick plate member and then fixing the thin plate member and the thick plate member.

The front side surface of the main body plate portion 8511 is arranged to face the glass surface of the pachinko machine 10, and the player visually recognizes an internal flow path INR8, which will be described later, through the front side surface of the main body plate portion 8511. Various decorations can be applied to the front side surface of the main body plate portion 8511, and the mode thereof is not limited. In this embodiment, for example, a portion where the movement range of each transmission rod 8530, 8550 is not visible from the front side (a portion overlapping each transmission rod 8530, 8550 in the front-rear direction, that is, the upper end of the transmission rod 8530 shown in FIG. 153) 154 to the lower end position of the transmission rod 8530 shown in FIG. There is no impermeable decoration, and the internal flow path INR8 is visible. This makes it difficult for the player to visually recognize the movements of the transmission rods 8530 and 8550, and ensures the visibility of the internal flow path INR8. The non-transmissive decoration may be applied in the left-right direction, or may be provided in positions projected from the transmission rods 8530 and 8550 in the front-rear direction (positions spaced apart in the left-right direction).

The loose fitting recessed portion 8515 is provided with a retaining portion 8515a that reduces the width of the opening on the back side in both the left and right directions at the portion of the back surface and the surface position. If the lateral width of the member inserted into the loose fitting recessed portion 8515 from below is smaller than the lateral width of the loosely fitting recessed portion 8515 and larger than the lateral distance of the retaining portion 8515a, the retaining portion 8515a Therefore, the member can be held in a state in which it cannot be pulled out from behind.

136(a) is a top view of the retractable member 8520, FIG. 136(b) is a side view of the retractable member 8520 as viewed in the direction of arrow CXXXVIb in FIG. 136(a), and FIG. 136(a) is a front view of the retractable member 8520 viewed in the direction of arrow CXXXVIc of FIG. 136(a). FIG.

As shown in FIG. 136, the protrusion/retraction member 8520 has a collision part 8521 that tapers in a manner that the left and right sides are inclined on the projecting tip side (the right side in FIG. 136(a)), and the base side (the left side in FIG. 136(a)) on the bottom surface. It mainly includes an inclined surface 8522 that inclines upward, and a pair of protruding portions 8523 that protrude in the left-right direction at the root side end portion.

The projecting portion 8523 is set such that the width between the projecting ends thereof is smaller than the left-right width of the loose fitting recessed portion 8515 and larger than the left-right interval of the retainer portion 8515a. That is, in the assembled state (see FIG. 134), the projecting portion 8523 is caught by the retainer portion 8515a, so that the retractable member 8520 cannot be pulled out from the main body plate portion 8511 in the front-rear direction. held (loosely fitted).

137(a) is a top view of the transmission rod 8530, FIG. 137(b) is a side view of the transmission rod 8530 as viewed in the direction of arrow CXXXVIIb in FIG. 137(a), and FIG. 137(a) is a front view of the transmission rod 8530 viewed in the direction of arrow CXXXVIIc of FIG. 137(a). FIG.

As shown in FIG. 137, the transmission rod 8530 includes a main body rod portion 8531 which is composed of a rod member extending along the vertical direction, and a bulging portion 8532 which bulges at the upper end of the main body rod portion 8531. , an inclined surface 8533 inclined in one direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 137(b) right) and a connecting piece 8534 extending to the right.

The inclined surface 8533 is aligned with the inclined surface 8522 of the projecting member 8520 when the projecting direction of the projecting member 8520 ( FIG. 134(a)). Therefore, as the transmission rod 8530 moves up and down, the retractable member 8520 moves while rubbing the inclined surfaces 8522 and 8533 .

In this embodiment, the inclination of the inclined surface 8533 is different from the width in the longitudinal direction of the main body rod portion 8531 (vertical direction in FIG. 137(b)). ) in the front-rear direction) is longer. As an example, as shown in FIG. 137, the inclination angle of the inclined surface 8533 from the front-rear direction (left-right direction in FIG. 137(b)) is about 20 degrees.

A method of assembling the front device 8510 will be described with reference to FIG. Figures 138(a), 138(b) and 138(c) are cross-sectional views of the front device 8510 taken along line CXXXIb-CXXXIb of Figure 134(a).

FIG. 138(a) shows a state immediately before the projecting/withdrawing member 8520 is assembled to the body plate portion 8511. FIG. As shown in FIG. 138(a), by moving upward the retractable member 8520 accommodated in the opening 8514, the root side portion can be accommodated in the loose fitting concave portion 8515 (see FIG. 138(b)). ).

FIG. 138(b) shows a state immediately before the transmission rod 8530 is assembled to the body plate portion 8511. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 138(b), by holding the retractable member 8520 above the opening 8514, a space below the retractable member 8520 is opened, and the transmission rod 8530 is slid into the opened space, thereby opening the opening. Body rod portion 8531 of transmission rod 8530 can be accommodated in 8514 . Since the opening 8514 does not penetrate, the transmission rod 8530 is positioned at a position where it abuts against the body plate portion 8511 .

FIG. 138(c) shows a state after the projecting/withdrawing member 8520 and the transmission rod 8530 are assembled to the main body plate portion 8511 . As shown in FIG. 138(c), when the load applied to the retractable member 8520 is released after the transmission rod 8530 is housed, the retractable member 8520 moves downward (downward in FIG. 138(c)) under its own weight. The retractable member 8520 descends to a position where it abuts against the transmission rod 8530 and applies a load to the transmission rod 8530 through the inclined surfaces 8522 and 8533 in the contact state. In this embodiment, the inclined surfaces 8522 and 8533 are inclined upward toward the bottom surface of the opening 8514 (left side in FIG. It is oriented to press 8530 against the bottom surface of opening 8514 . That is, the transmission rod 8530 is prevented from dropping out of the opening 8514 due to the load applied through the inclined surfaces 8522 and 8533 .

Furthermore, since the retractable member 8520 receives the reverse load of the transmission rod 8530, the transmission rod 8530 prevents the retractable member 8520 from moving to the opening 8514 when the transmission rod 8530 is accommodated in the opening 8514. . As a result, the protruding member 8520 moves toward the rear side in the loose fitting recessed portion 8515, but the projecting portion 8523 is caught by the retaining portion 8515a, and further movement is restricted. This can prevent the projecting/withdrawing member 8520 from falling off from the loose fitting recessed portion 8515 .

Therefore, the retractable member 8520 and the transmission rod 8530 can be temporarily fixed to the body plate portion 8511 by lowering the retractable member 8520 by its own weight. As a result, in the state before the front device 85100 is fixed to the game board 8013, it is unnecessary to hold the retractable member 8520 and the transmission rod 8530 so as not to fall. Furthermore, since the front side device 8510 can be assembled without fastening members such as fastening screws, the manufacturing efficiency of the front side device 8510 can be increased.

139(a) is a front view of the back side device 8540 and the transmission device 8600, and FIG. 139(b) is a side view of the back side device 8540 and the transmission device 8600. FIG. The back side device 8540 includes a main body plate portion 8541 which is a plate-shaped member serving as a frame, a ceiling plate portion 8542 arranged on the upper portion of the main body plate portion 8541, and a position below the lower end of the inclined flow path 8513. A distribution device 8543 that distributes balls to the left and right by a rotating operation, an extended floor portion 8544 that extends to the front side in the lower part of the main body plate portion 8541 and constitutes the bottom surface of the internal flow path INR8, and the main body plate portion 8541 A rear lid member 8545 that is fixed from the rear side and accommodates members in a space formed between them. , and the second transmission rod 8550 that operates the retractable member 8520 thereof. The transmission device 8600 is disposed on the rear lid member 8545, and details thereof will be described later.

The pair of ceiling plate portions 8541 are formed so that the inner space is slightly larger than the lateral width of the inclined flow passage 8513, and in the assembled state, the guide flow guides the balls discharged from the inclined flow passage 8513 in the vertical direction. function as a road.

The extension floor portion 8544 has an upper surface 8544a that slopes downward in both left and right directions from directly below the sorting device 8543 . That is, although the details will be described later, the balls that flow down the front side of the ceiling plate portion 8542 and are distributed to the distribution device 8543 roll along the slope of the extension floor portion 8544, and move to the left and right of the extension floor portion 8544. discharged from the end.

140 is a rear view of the back device 8540, and FIG. 141 is a rear view of the main body plate portion 8541. FIG. 140, illustration of the rear lid member 8545 and the transmission device 8600 is omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 140 and 141, the retractable member 8520 and the second transmission rod 8550 are accommodated in the space on the back side of the main body plate portion 8541 . That is, the main body plate portion 8541 includes a support hole 8541a drilled in the front-rear direction with a size that allows the retractable member 8520 to be inserted therein, and a retainer that reduces the width of the opening at the front end of the support hole 8541a in both the left and right directions. Mainly includes a portion 8541b and a protruding support portion 8541c protruding from the rear surface of the main body plate portion 8541, which is a portion that guides the second transmission rod 8550 so as to be movable in one direction in a manner that intersects with the retractable member 8520. .

The interval between the retaining portions 8541b is set smaller than the interval between the projecting tips of the projecting portions 8523 . This can prevent the retractable member 8520 from falling off from the front side.

The protruding support portion 8541c is disposed in a portion other than a gap V81 that extends by the same length in a direction orthogonal to the straight line L81 that passes through the center of the support hole 8541a and that is orthogonal to the base. A second transmission rod 8550, which will be described later, can move through the gap V81.

142(a) is a top view of the second transmission rod 8550, and FIG. 142(b) is a side view of the second transmission rod 8550 as viewed in the direction of arrow CXLIIb in FIG. 142(a). c) is a front view of the second transmission rod 8550 viewed in the direction of arrow CXLIIc in FIG. 142(b).

The second transmission rod 8550 includes a main body rod portion 8551 composed of a rod member extending along the vertical direction, a bulging portion 8552 that bulges at the upper end of the main body rod portion 8551, and a bulging portion of the main rod portion 8552. An inclined surface 8553 that is inclined in one direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 142(b)) on the upper surface of 8552 and a direction (right in FIG. 142(b) a connecting piece 8555 extending from the extending tip of the intermediate piece 8554 in a direction perpendicular to the plane formed by the main body rod portion 8551 and the intermediate piece 8554; Mainly provide

The main body rod portion 8551 has a dimension in the width direction that is slightly shorter than the width of the gap V81 between the projecting support portions 8541c. This allows the body rod portion 8551 to be slidably arranged between the projecting support portions 8541 .

The bulging portion 8552 is formed so that the lateral width (the width in the lateral direction in FIG. 142(c)) is longer than the width of the gap V81. This prevents the bulging portion 8552 from being caught by the projecting support portion 8541c and the second transmission rod 8550 from falling from between the projecting support portions 8541c.

The inclined surface 8553 of the projecting member 8520 is formed when the projecting direction of the projecting member 8520 (horizontal direction in FIG. 136(b)) and the extending direction of the main body rod portion 8551 of the second transmission rod 8550 are perpendicular to each other. 155). Therefore, as the second transmission rod 8550 moves up and down, the retractable member 8520 moves while rubbing the inclined surfaces 8522 and 8553 .

In this embodiment, the inclination of the inclined surface 8553 is greater than the width in the longitudinal direction of the main body rod portion 8551 (vertical direction in FIG. direction) is longer. As an example, as shown in FIG. 142, the inclination angle of the inclined surface 8553 from the front-rear direction (left-right direction in FIG. 142(b)) is about 20 degrees. In this embodiment, the inclination angle of the inclined surface 8533 is the same as the inclination angle of the inclined surface 8553, but these may be different values.

The connecting piece 8555 is a portion that engages with the connecting piece 8534 of the transmission rod 8530 in the assembled state (see FIG. 131). can be made

The assembly of the retractable member 8520 and the second transmission rod 8550 to the back side device 8540 will be described. The retractable member 8520 is inserted into the support hole 8541a from the back side of the main body plate portion 8541, then the second transmission rod 8550 is moved close to the main body plate portion 8541 from the back side of the main body plate portion 8541, and the main body rod portion 8551 is moved. The second transmission rod 8550 is fitted into the body plate portion 8541 so as to be fitted into the gap V81. After that, by fastening and fixing the rear lid member 8545 to the main body plate portion 8541, the retractable member 8520 and the second transmission rod 8550 can be held between the main body plate portion 8541 and the rear lid member 8545 so as not to fall off. .

143 is a front perspective view of transmission device 8600, and FIG. 144 is a front exploded perspective view of transmission device 8600. FIG. 143 and 144, the left transmission device 8600 of the left and right transmission devices 8600 arranged as a pair of symmetrical transmission devices 8600 is illustrated. Also, to facilitate understanding, illustration of the connecting piece 8555 of the second transmission rod 8550 is omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 143 and 144, the transmission device 8600 is a device arranged on the rear lid member 8545 of the back side device 8540, and is rotatably supported on the rear lid member 8545 in front of the rear lid member 8545. a first transmission member 8610 connected to the first transmission member 8610 and supported by the rear lid member 8545 so as to be slidable in a linear direction; and a driving motor KM1 that is provided to generate a driving force for driving the first transmission member 8610 . The first transmission member 8610 and the second transmission member 8620 are members for transmitting the driving force of the drive motors KM1 and KM2 to the transmission rod 8530 and the second transmission rod 8550 described above.

As shown in FIGS. 143 and 144, the rear lid member 8545 is formed of a through hole 8545a through which the drive shaft of the drive motor KM1 is inserted, and a pair of flat plates extending parallel to each other on the front side. and a retaining protrusion 8545c extending from the front end of the support plate portion 8545b in the direction facing each other.

The retainer protrusion 8545c is provided on the front side of the rear lid member 8545 so as to match the thickness dimension of the first transmission member 8610 in the front-rear direction (the direction in which the drive shaft extends) and the thickness dimension of the second transmission member 8620 in the front-rear direction. , and the distance between the retaining protrusions 8545c is set shorter than the length of the second transmission member 8620 in the longitudinal direction. As a result, the first transmission member 8610 and the second transmission member 8620 can be overlapped between the front surface of the rear lid member 8545 and the retaining projection 8545c, and the second transmission member 8620 can be disengaged in the front-rear direction. can be prevented.

In this embodiment, the first transmission member 8610 and the second transmission member 8620 can be fixed to the rear lid member 8545 without fastening members. Here, a method for attaching the first transmission member 8610 and the second transmission member 8620 to the rear lid member 8545 will be described.

First, the drive motor KM1 is fixed to the back side of the rear cover member 8545. As shown in FIG. In this state, the drive shaft of the drive motor KM1 protrudes toward the front side of the rear lid member 8545 through the through hole 8545a.

Next, the first transmission member 8610 is brought close to the rear lid member 8545 from the front side of the rear lid member 8545 so that the drive shaft of the drive motor KM1 is inserted into the center hole 8612 of the first transmission member 8610. 8610 is connected with the drive motor KM1. In this state, there is no retaining member that prevents the first transmission member 8610 from being pulled out from the drive shaft. Therefore, the first transmission member 8610 can be easily removed.

Next, the second transmission member 8620 is moved in the longitudinal direction of the support plate portion 8545b (the second transmission member 8620 in such a manner that the transmission protrusion 8613 of the first transmission member 8610 passes between the lower notches 8624 of the second transmission member 8620). ), the second transmission member 8620 can be inserted (accommodated) between the first transmission member 8610 and the retaining protrusion 8545c. By sliding the second transmission member 8620 until the transmission protrusion 8613 passes through the upper end of the lower notch 8624, the transmission protrusion 8613 can be accommodated in the incomplete arc hole 8625 of the second transmission member 8620.

The incomplete arc hole 8625 is configured as a closed hole that does not communicate with the outside except for the lower notch 8624 . Therefore, the transmission projection 8613 does not come off the incomplete arc hole 8625 unless it passes through the lower notch 8624 . Here, as shown in FIGS. 143 and 144, the lower notch 8624 is connected to the incomplete circular arc hole 8625 in such a manner as to extend downward from the incomplete circular arc hole 8625, so that the second transmission member 8620 is The transmission protrusion 8613 does not pass through the lower notch 8624 as much as it moves under its own weight. In other words, unless an external force is applied (for example, an operator lifts the second transmission member 8620), the second transmission member 8620 can be prevented from coming off the rear lid member 8545, and the first transmission member can be prevented from coming off. 8610 and the second transmission member 8620 can be interlocked.

In addition, since the second transmission member 8620 is prevented from coming off in the front-rear direction, the first transmission member 8610 sandwiched between the rear cover member 8545 and the rear cover member 8545 on the back side of the second transmission member 8620 can move in the front-rear direction. You can prevent it from coming off.

Therefore, a separate member such as a cover member that covers the second transmission member 8620 from the front can be dispensed with, and a fastening member associated therewith can be dispensed with. and can be configured to be interlockable.

Here, although the details will be described later, an outline of interlocking between the first transmission member 8610 and the second transmission member 8620 will be described. Due to this interlocking, the driving force of the drive motors KM1 and KM2 is transmitted to the second transmission rod 8550.

First, when the drive motors KM1 and KM2 are driven to rotate, the first transmission member 8610 rotates accordingly. Due to this rotation, the transmission protrusion 8613 of the first transmission member 8610 is displaced along a circular orbit coaxial with the rotation locus of the first transmission member 8610 . The transmission projection 8613 is inserted through the incomplete arc hole 8625 of the second transmission member 8620, and when the traveling direction of the transmission projection 8613 and the extending direction of the incomplete arc hole 8625 intersect, the transmission projection 8613 to the second transmission member 8620.

Although the second transmission member 8620 can be displaced by the driving force transmitted from the transmission protrusion 8613 , the movement of the second transmission member 8620 is restricted by the support plate portion 8545 b of the rear lid member 8545 . Therefore, the moving direction of the second transmission member 8620 is limited to the extending direction (linear direction) of the support plate portion 8545b. Therefore, the second transmission member 8620 performs linear reciprocating motion as the first transmission member 8610 rotates.

145(a) is a front view of the first transmission member 8610, and FIG. 145(b) is a side view of the first transmission member 8610 as seen in the direction of arrow CXLVb in FIG. 145(a). The first transmission member 8610 includes a disk-shaped body plate portion 8611, a center hole 8612 drilled at the center position of the body plate portion 8611 and through which the drive shafts of the drive motors KM1 and KM2 are inserted and fixed, and an eccentric position. A transmission projection 8613 projecting in the plate thickness direction from the transmission projection 8613, and the outer diameter is continuously reduced clockwise (clockwise in FIG. 145(a)) from the outer shape position near the transmission projection 8613. and a reduced diameter portion 8614 formed therein.

The dimensional difference between the reduced diameter portion 8614 and the outer diameter of the main body plate portion 8611 is set to be equal to or larger than the movement width of the transmission rod 8530 and the second transmission rod 8550, which will be described later. As a result, as the first transmission member 8610 is rotated, the transmission rod 8530 and the second transmission rod 8550 are switched between contact with the body plate portion 8611 and contact with the reduced diameter portion 8614. Transmission rod 8530 and second transmission rod 8550 can be operated.

146(a) is a front view of the second transmission member 8620, and FIG. 146(b) is a side view of the second transmission member 8620 viewed in the direction of arrow CXLVIb in FIG. 146(a). The second transmission member 8620 includes a body plate portion 8621 formed on a horizontally long rectangular plate, an arc bulging portion 8622 that bulges upward in an arc shape from the body plate portion 8621, and left and right ends of the body plate portion 8621. a guided arm portion 8623 extending laterally outward from the main body plate portion 8621; It mainly includes an incomplete circular arc hole 8625 which is cut into a hollow circular arc shape, and end holes 8626 linearly extending in the horizontal direction from the left and right outer ends of the incomplete circular arc hole 8625 . In addition, in FIG. 146(a), the center hole 8612 of the first transmission member 8610, the movement locus of the transmission projection 8613, and the outer shape of the main body plate portion 8611 when the second transmission member 8620 is arranged at the upper end position of the movement range is illustrated by imaginary lines.

As shown in FIG. 146, the outer shape of the arcuate bulging portion 8622 is a circle formed by the outer shape of the main body plate portion 8611 of the first transmission member 8610 when the second transmission member 8620 is arranged at the upper end of the movement range. It is assumed that the shape matches in the front-rear direction.

In addition, the incomplete arc hole 8625 is formed in a shape that includes the locus of movement of the transmission protrusion 8613 of the first transmission member 8610 in the front-rear direction view when the second transmission member 8620 is arranged at the upper end position of the movement range. , the gap width is designed to be slightly longer than the diameter of the transmission protrusion 8613 of the first transmission member 8610 . That is, when the transmission projection 8613 is moved (the first transmission member 8610 is rotated) in a state where the second transmission member 8620 is arranged at the upper end position of the movement range, the second transmission member 8620 is maintained at the upper end position. can be interlocked in a manner that

The guided arm portion 8623 is arranged to face the support plate portion 8545b and is a portion whose movement is restricted by the support plate portion 8545b. The length between the left and right outer ends of the guided arm portions 8623 is set to be slightly smaller than the gap between the support plate portions 8545b.

The lower cutout 8624 is set such that the width of the cutout is longer than the diameter of the transmission protrusion 8613 . The end hole 8626 is set such that the distance between the laterally outer ends thereof is equal to or greater than the diameter of the movement locus of the transmission protrusion 8613 .

As described above, the lower notch 8624 functions not only as a notch for allowing the transmission protrusion 8613 to pass during assembly, but also as a function of reducing the operational resistance of the second transmission member 8620 .

That is, the second transmission member 8620 performs a linear motion in accordance with the rotational motion of the first transmission member 8610, and its motion direction is regulated by the pair of support plate portions 8545b. Here, if the gap between the second transmission member 8620 and the support plate portion 8545b becomes too small due to dimensional errors of the second transmission member 8620 and the support plate portion 8545b, the operating resistance increases, and the drive motors NM1 and KM2 On the other hand, if the gap between the second transmission member 8620 and the support plate portion 8545b is too large, it will be difficult to maintain the posture of the second transmission member 8620. , precision is required for dimensional control, and it becomes difficult to suppress the manufacturing cost.

On the other hand, in the second transmission member 8620, the lower cutout 8624 is arranged in the direction of creating a gap between the second transmission member 8620 and the support plate portion 8545b. ), the main body plate portion 8621 of the second transmission member 8620 can be deflected by the amount of the lower notch 8624 being vacant, and the pressing force generated between the second transmission member 8620 and the support plate portion 8545b can be reduced. can be reduced (can be absorbed by flexural deformation).

Therefore, in the design value, the gap between the second transmission member 8620 and the support plate portion 8545b is set to a small side, and even if the dimensional error increases to the maximum (even if the gap increases), the posture of the second transmission member 8620 remains unchanged. If the dimensions are controlled within a range where the ) can be prevented. Accordingly, it is possible to increase the permissible dimensional error between the dimension of the second transmission member 8620 and the dimension of the support plate portion 8545b, thereby suppressing the manufacturing cost.

Next, with reference to FIG. 147, the mode of transmission of driving force between transmission device 8600 and second transmission rod 8550 will be described. As described above, since the second transmission rod 8550 operates integrally with the transmission rod 8530, the operation of the second transmission rod 8550 illustrated in FIG. 147 may be recognized as the operation of the transmission rod 8530. .

Figures 147(a) to 147(f) are front views of the transmission device 8600 and the second transmission rod 8550 for explaining the operation of the transmission device 8600 in chronological order. For ease of understanding, the first transmission member 8610 is shown in phantom lines and the upper portion of the second transmission rod 8550 is omitted. Note that FIG. 147 illustrates the operation when the first transmission member 8610 rotates counterclockwise. 147, the second transmission rods 8550 are also referred to as second transmission rods 8550A, 8550B, and 8550C in order from the right side of FIG. 147 (from the side where the ball enters).

FIG. 147( a ) shows a state in which the transmission protrusion 8613 is arranged in the end hole 8626 immediately before entering the incomplete circular arc hole 8625 . In this state, as shown in FIG. 147(a), the second transmission member 8620 is arranged below the upper end position, and each second transmission rod 8550 contacts the reduced diameter portion 8614 of the first transmission member 8610. touch.

FIG. 147(b) shows the state after the first transmission member 8610 rotates counterclockwise from FIG. In this state, the second transmission member 8620 is arranged at the upper end position and each second transmission rod 8550 abuts on the upper surface of the second transmission member 8620 . Since the movement of the second transmission member 8620 until it is arranged at the upper end position is a movement in the vertical direction, the second transmission rods 8550 simultaneously move upward from the position shown in FIG. 147(a).

FIG. 147(c) shows a state in which the first transmission member 8610 has rotated counterclockwise from FIG. In this state, the second transmission member 8620 is moved from the position shown in FIG. stays at the top position.

FIG. 147(d) illustrates a state in which the first transmission member 8610 rotates counterclockwise from FIG. In this state, as the transmission protrusion 8613 moves downward, the second transmission member 8620 also moves downward. Since the radial surface (outer peripheral surface) abuts, the second transmission rod 8550 is restrained from descending by the body plate portion 8611 and stays at the position shown in FIG. 147(c).

FIG. 147(e) illustrates a state in which the first transmission member 8610 rotates counterclockwise from FIG. 147(d) and the reduced diameter portion 8614 is arranged to face the second transmission rod 8550A. In this state, the second transmission rod 8550A moves downward by the difference between the reduced diameter portion 8614 and the main body plate portion 8611 compared to the state shown in FIG. 147(d). On the other hand, the remaining second transmission rods 8550B and 8550C remain at the positions shown in FIG. 147(d).

FIG. 147(f) illustrates a state in which the first transmission member 8610 is rotated counterclockwise from FIG. 147(e) and the reduced diameter portion 8614 is arranged to face the second transmission rod 8550B. In this state, the second transmission rod 8550B moves downward by the difference between the reduced diameter portion 8614 and the main body plate portion 8611 compared to the state shown in FIG. 147(e). On the other hand, the remaining second transmission rod 8550C remains at the position shown in FIG. 147(e).

When the first transmission member 8610 continues to rotate in the same direction from the state shown in FIG. 147(f), it returns to the state shown in FIG. 147(a). It moves down from the indicated position.

Therefore, when the second transmission rods 8550A to 8550C are raised by the transmission device 8600, the second transmission rods 8550A to 8550C are raised at the same time, and when the second transmission rods 8550A to 8550C are lowered, the second transmission is performed from the entrance side. Rods 8550A-8550C can be moved downward in sequence. That is, the operation mode (operation order) can be switched according to the operation direction of the second transmission rods 8550A to 8550C.

According to this embodiment, the arrangement of the second transmission member 8620 corresponds to the arrangement of the transmission protrusions 8613 on a one-to-one basis. Therefore, for example, when the members are displaced due to the presence or absence of rubbing between members, it is possible to eliminate the need for measures to keep the degree of rubbing within a desired range. In addition, when the second transmission member 8620 is interlocked with the first transmission member 8610, it can be interlocked with high precision regardless of whether the operating speed is high or low.

Next, the internal flow path INR8 will be described. FIG. 148 is a cross-sectional view of the pre-winning falling-down device 8500 along line CXLVIII-CXLVIII in FIG. In FIG. 148, the retracted retractable member 8520 arranged on the outer side of the internal flow path INR8 is illustrated by a solid line, and the extended retractable member 8520 arranged on the inner side of the internal flow channel INR8 is shown by a solid line. is illustrated by imaginary lines. Also, the state illustrated by the solid line corresponds to the state of FIG. 147(a). In addition, the internal flow path INR8 refers to a pair of flow paths in which the balls distributed to the distribution device 8543 (see FIG. 133) flow down, but in FIG. do.

As shown in FIG. 148, the internal flow path INR8 has a lower surface on the upper surface 8544a of the extended floor portion 8544, a front side surface on the main body plate portion 8511 of the front side device 8510, and a rear side surface on the main body plate portion 8541 of the back side device 8540. , respectively. Although not shown in FIG. 148, the upper surface is formed by the ceiling plate portion 8542 to form the flow path.

The internal flow path INR8 is configured as a section extending in the left-right direction in FIG. That is, the internal flow path INR8 is formed by a first region Rt facing the projecting member 8520A, a second region Rm facing the projecting member 8520B, and a third region Rb facing the projecting member 8520C. The description that it is constructed and discharged from the internal flow path INR8 means that it is discharged from the third region Rb.

As shown in FIG. 148, the upper surface 8544a of the extension floor portion 8544 is wide in the front-rear direction (so wide that a plurality of balls can be arranged). A recessed groove 8544b extending in a recessed cross-section along the installation direction is provided.

At the lower end of the extension floor portion 8544 (the left end in FIG. 148), a long hole 8544c having a length such that two balls are arranged in the front-rear direction is formed. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball clogging even when a plurality of .

The ball that has passed through the long hole 8544c is discharged to the front side of the game board 8013 (see FIG. 131) from the flow path below it, rolls on the upper surface of the movable piece 190a in the open state, and moves to the movable ball entry accessory device 190. It is possible to enter the ball.

A description will be given of the flow-down mode of the balls rolling in the internal flow path INR8. First, when the projecting/retracting member 8520 is in the retracted state (solid line state in FIG. 148), the ball guided by the recessed groove 8544b and rolling does not come into contact with the projecting/retracting member 8520, so the ball moves through the recessed groove 8544b. 148 along the first route RF in the internal flow path INR8.

Even in the retracted state of the projecting/withdrawing member 8520, the tip of the projecting/withdrawing member 8520 protrudes from the front side device 8510 and the rear side device 8540 toward the internal flow path INR8. A ball that rolls away from the recessed groove 8544b contacts the overhanging portion of the projecting member 8520 and is bounced back toward the recessed groove 8544b. That is, the protruding/retracting member 8520 in the retracted state allows the ball flowing out of the recessed groove 8544b to move toward the recessed groove 8544b. That is, in the retracted state of the retractable member 8520, it is possible to prevent the ball from falling out of the concave groove 8544b and flowing down.

On the other hand, when the projecting/retracting member 8520 is in the overhanging state (imaginary line state in FIG. 148), the ball is likely to be guided to the recessed groove 8544b each time it reaches the recessed groove 8544b, but the projecting/retracting member 8520 and the ball contacts the first path RF, avoids the retractable member 8520, and rolls along the second path RS that bends back and forth.

As shown in FIG. 148, the downward path of the ball is composed of a first path RF and a second path RS. In the present embodiment, the first route RF and the second route RS intersect on the recessed groove 8544b, and the triangle formed by the first route RF and the second route RS with the intersecting position as the vertex is positive. The arrangement of the retractable member 8520 and the shape of the internal flow path INR8 are set so as to form a triangle. Therefore, for example, assuming that the ball rolls without decelerating, when the ball rolls to the intersection of the first route RF and the second route RS, the time taken to flow down the second route RS is This is twice the time for flowing down the first route RF. This is the difference between flowing down along two sides of an equilateral triangle and flowing down along one side. That is, in this embodiment, the time required for the ball to flow down can be changed depending on whether the projecting/withdrawing member 8520 is in the retracted state or in the extended state.

FIG. 149 is a cross-sectional view of the pre-winning falling-down device 8500 along line CXLVIII-CXLVIII in FIG. Note that FIG. 149 illustrates a case where all the projecting/retracting members 8520 are in the projecting state. Also, the state shown in FIG. 149 corresponds to the state shown in FIG. 147(b).

In the state shown in FIG. 149, the ball entering the internal flow path INR8 has its flow path defined by the projecting/retracting member 8520, and flows down the internal flow path INR8 along the second path RS. That is, while bending in the front-rear direction, it flows down in the extending direction of the internal flow path INR8 due to the velocity of the left-right component perpendicular to the front-rear direction.

Therefore, even if the flow velocity of the ball does not change, the direction in which the ball flows is switched. it takes longer.

In other words, when the sphere flows down the second route RS, the direction of flow of the sphere also has a front-back direction component, and the left-right direction component is half of that in the case of flowing down the first route RF. , it takes twice as long as the sphere to flow down the first path RF.

In this embodiment, even when the retractable member 8520 is in the overhanging state, the ball is not stopped, and the left-right speed of the ball is reduced (the ball is delayed). Therefore, compared to the case where the balls are stopped, even if a plurality of balls enter the top opening 8512 (see FIG. 132) in succession, the ball that enters first makes it difficult for the ball to enter later. Possibility of obstruction of ball entry can be reduced.

As a result, while the top opening 8512 is always in a state where the ball can enter, it is possible to prevent the next ball from entering due to the action of the ball, and to prevent the ball from entering the top opening 8512. It is possible to eliminate the need for a stopper device that regulates at predetermined time intervals.

FIG. 150 is a cross-sectional view of the pre-winning falling-down device 8500 along line CXLVIII-CXLVIII in FIG. In FIG. 150, only the retractable member 8520A on the top opening 8512 side is retracted, and the remaining retractable members 8520B and 8520C are extended. Also, the state shown in FIG. 150 corresponds to the state shown in FIG. 147(e).

In the state shown in FIG. 150, a ball entering the internal flow path INR8 flows down the first route RF in the first region Rt arranged to face the projecting member 8520A, while it flows down the first route RF to face the projecting member 8520B. In the second region Rm and the third region Rb arranged to face the projecting/withdrawing member 8520C, the flow path is defined by the projecting/withdrawing member 8520, and flows down the internal flow path INR8 along the second path RS.

That is, immediately after entering the internal flow path INR8, the ball flows down in the horizontal direction at the shortest distance, while the ball slows down midway (the velocity component of the ball in the horizontal direction decreases due to bending). The ball flows down.

FIG. 151 is a cross-sectional view of the pre-winning falling-down device 8500 along line CXLVIII-CXLVIII in FIG. In FIG. 151, the retractable members 8520A and 8520B on the top opening 8512 side are retracted, and the remaining retractable member 8520C is extended. Also, the state shown in FIG. 151 corresponds to the state shown in FIG. 147(f).

In the state shown in FIG. 151, a ball entering the internal flow path INR8 flows down the first route RF in the first region Rt arranged opposite to the projecting member 8520A and the second region Rm arranged opposite to the projecting member 8520B. On the other hand, in the third region Rb arranged to face the projecting/withdrawing member 8520C, the flow path is defined by the projecting/withdrawing member 8520, and flows down the internal flow path INR8 along the second path RS.

That is, immediately after entering the internal flow path INR8, the ball flows down in the horizontal direction at the shortest distance, while the ball slows down midway (the velocity component of the ball in the horizontal direction decreases due to bending). The ball flows down.

In this embodiment, the state changes illustrated in order from FIG. 148 to FIG. 151 occur at intervals shorter than the time required for the sphere to completely pass through the internal flow path INR8. Therefore, the state of the retractable member 8520 changes while the ball is flowing down the internal flow path INR8, and the flow path of the ball is switched in real time. As a result, the distance between balls can be shortened, and continuous balls (balls flowing down in a row) can be formed. The details will be described later.

FIG. 152 is a partial cross-sectional view of the pre-winning streaming device 8500 taken along line CLII-CLII in FIG. 152, illustration of the transmission device 8600 is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 152, in the assembled state, the retractable member 8520 and the transmission rod 8530 are arranged in the space between the main body plate portion 8511 and the back side device 8540 .

The extended floor portion 8544 of the back side device 8540 is arranged downward in FIG. and a projecting member 8544e that is vertically movably supported inside the support slot 8544d and supported by the second transmission rod 8550 from below.

The overhanging member 8544e moves up and down as the second transmission rod 8550 moves up and down. It consists of shapes that can be formed both when and when.

FIG. 153 is a partial cross-sectional view of the pre-winning streaming device 8500 taken along line CLII-CLII in FIG. Note that FIG. 153 illustrates a state in which the transmission rod 8530 and the second transmission rod 8550 are arranged at the upper end position of the movement range (see FIG. 147(b)).

As shown in FIG. 153, when the transmission rod 8530 and the second transmission rod 8550 are positioned at the upper end of the movement range, the protruding/retracting member 8520 is in a protruding state, and the protruding member 8544e is positioned below the recessed groove 8544b. A protruding state that protrudes upward from the side surface is formed.

The protruding member 8544e protrudes to a position where it interferes with the lower end of the rolling ball guided by the recessed groove 8544b. As a result, the ball can be pushed out of the recessed groove 8544b, and the guiding effect of the recessed groove 8544b can be eliminated (the load required to push out the ball in the direction intersecting the recessed groove 8544b can be reduced). can).

In addition, the projecting member 8544e is arranged below the upper surface 8544a in the projecting state. Therefore, it is possible to avoid collisions with balls flowing down in a direction intersecting the recessed groove 8544b as much as possible.

As shown in FIGS. 152 and 153, the movement of the retractable member 8520 from the retracted state to the extended state is performed in the horizontal direction (front-rear direction, left-right direction in FIG. 153). Therefore, when the retractable member 8520 moves, the resistance caused by gravity can be reduced.

In this embodiment, as described above, the inclination angles of the inclined surfaces 8533 and 8553 are set loosely with respect to the front-rear direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 152). , the distance (vertical distance in FIG. 152) that the transmission rods 8530 and 8550 move can be shorter than the distance (vertical distance) that the retractable member 8520 moves. This makes it more difficult to grasp the state change of each of the transmission rods 8530 and 8550 visually than it is to visually grasp the state change of the retractable member 8520 .

FIG. 154 is a partial cross-sectional view of the pre-winning streaming device 8500 taken along line CLII-CLII in FIG. 154 shows the state after the transmission rod 8530 and the second transmission rod 8550 have moved from the state shown in FIG. 153 to the lower end position of the movement range (see FIG. 147(a)).

As shown in FIG. 154, when the transmission rod 8530 and the second transmission rod 8550 move to the lower end position of the movement range, the retractable member 8520 whose movement direction is limited to the horizontal direction is maintained in an overhanging state, and the movement direction is The protruding member 8544e, which extends in the vertical direction, forms a retracted state in which it sinks below the lower surface of the recessed groove 8544b as the second transmission rod 8550 that supports it descends.

The state shown in FIG. 153 and the state shown in FIG. 154 are the same in arrangement of the projecting/withdrawing member 8520, but differ in the effect of the projecting/withdrawing member 8520 on the ball. That is, in FIG. 153, after the ball flowing down the internal flow path INR8 collides with the projecting/retracting member 8520, the projecting/retracting member 8520 maintains the protruding state and is fixed in position, but in FIG. When the falling ball collides with the projecting member 8520, since there is no member supporting the projecting member 8520 from behind, the projecting member 8520 is displaced toward the retracted position by the load from the ball.

Also, as described above, in this embodiment, the opaque decoration applied to the front side surface of the main body plate portion 8511 prevents the player from grasping the positions of the transmission rods 8530 and 8550 . Therefore, the player cannot distinguish between the state shown in FIG. 153 and the state shown in FIG.

Therefore, even if the projection/retraction member 8520 is in the overhanging state and visually recognized as the same state by the player, in the state shown in FIG. In the state shown in FIG. 154, the ball flows down the internal flow path INR8 along the first route RF. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to predict how the ball will flow down the internal flow path INR8. As a result, it is difficult for the player to visually check the state of the projecting/retracting member 8520, shoot the ball using it as a mark, and determine the timing of the ball entering the internal flow path INR8. can do.

Since each set of retractable members 8520 operates at different timings (see FIG. 147), the difference between FIG. 153 and FIG. 154 occurs at different timings for each set of retractable members 8520 . Therefore, it becomes more difficult for the player to determine the launch timing by visually recognizing the state of the haunt member 8520 .

In the state shown in FIG. 154, the projecting member 8544e does not interfere with the lower end of the ball rolling while being guided by the recessed groove 8544b. Therefore, the effect of guiding the ball by the recessed groove 8544b (the effect of ensuring a sufficient pressing force required when moving the ball guided by the recessed groove 8544b in the direction intersecting with the extending direction of the recessed groove 8544b) can be maintained. Therefore, when the retractable member 8520 collides with the ball and the retracted member 8520 is being pushed into the retracted state, the load applied to the ball from the retractable member 8520 can reduce the possibility that the ball will come off the recessed groove 8544b. , the ball can be stably flowed down along the first route RF.

FIG. 155 is a partial cross-sectional view of the pre-winning falling-down device 8500 along the CLV-CLV line in FIG. 148. FIG. 155, illustration of the transmission device 8600 is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 155, in the assembled state, the retractable member 8520 and the second transmission rod 8550 are arranged in the space between the main body plate portion 8541 of the back side device 8540 and the rear cover member 8545 . Note that the action given to the retractable member 8520 when the second transmission rod 8550 moves up and down is the same as the action described with reference to FIGS.

Next, with reference to FIG. 156, the operation of the projecting/retracting member 8520 in the first operation pattern in this embodiment and the length of time required for the ball to pass through the internal flow path INR8 that changes accordingly will be described. In the following, the retractable member 8520 that contacts the second transmission rod 8550A will be referred to as the retractable member 8520A, the retractable member 8520 that will contact the second transmission rod 8550B will be referred to as the retractable member 8520B, and the second transmission rod 8550C. The retractable member 8520 that makes contact is also referred to as a retractable member 8520C.

FIG. 156(a) is a diagram showing changes over time of the retractable member 8520A in the first operation pattern, and FIG. 156(b) is a diagram showing changes over time of the retractable member 8520B in the first operation pattern. FIG. 156(c) is a diagram showing changes over time of the retractable member 8520C in the first operation pattern.

156(a) to 156(c), the horizontal axis represents the phase change of the first transmission member 8610. FIG. 156(a) to 156(c). corresponds to the numerical values on the horizontal axis of In this embodiment, since the first transmission member 8610 is controlled by the drive motor KM1 at a speed of one rotation in 8 seconds (a speed of 45 degrees in 1 second), FIGS. ) divided by the corresponding angle (45 degrees) represents the number of seconds required for the state change.

The MPU 201 (see FIG. 4) can control the operation of the retractable member 8520 in a first operation pattern described below as a constant operation after power-on. Operation control of the retractable member 8520 performed after the power is turned on will be described below.

<When operating with the first operation pattern>
As shown in FIGS. 156(a) to 156(c), each retractable member 8520A to 8520C is in tension until the rotation angle of the first transmission member 8610 changes from 0 degrees to 180 degrees (for 4 seconds). stay out.

Next, as shown in FIG. 156(a), when the rotation angle of the first transmission member 8610 reaches 225 degrees, the projecting/withdrawing member 8520A changes state from the projecting state to the retracted state. Next, as shown in FIG. 156(b), when the rotation angle of the first transmission member 8610 reaches 270 degrees, the projecting/withdrawing member 8520B changes state from the projecting state to the retracted state. Next, as shown in FIG. 156(c), when the rotation angle of the first transmission member 8610 reaches 315 degrees, the retractable member 8520C changes state from the protruding state to the retracted state. Next, when the rotation angle of the first transmission member 8610 reaches 355 degrees, each of the retractable members 8520A to 8520C changes state from the retracted state to the extended state. The protruding/withdrawing member 8520 repeats the above-described state change every 8 seconds.

Next, with reference to FIG. 157, the manner in which the ball flows down the internal flow path INR8 will be described. FIGS. 157(a) to 157(g) are schematic diagrams schematically showing an internal flow path INR8 and a sphere passing through the internal flow path INR8. FIG. 157(a) illustrates a state where the rotation angle of the first transmission member 8610 is 180 degrees, and FIGS. 157(b) to 157(g) following FIG. The timing state is shown in which the rotation angles of are sequentially shifted at intervals of 22.5 degrees (0.5 seconds).

That is, in FIG. 157(b), the state in which the rotation angle of the first transmission member 8610 is 202.5 degrees, and in FIG. 157(d) shows the state where the rotation angle of the first transmission member 8610 is 247.5 degrees, FIG. 157(e) shows the state where the rotation angle of the first transmission member 8610 is 270 degrees, and FIG. , a state where the rotation angle of the first transmission member 8610 is 292.5 degrees, and FIG. 157(g) shows a state where the rotation angle of the first transmission member 8610 is 315 degrees.

Figures 157(a) to 157(g) are described in chronological order, and each ball newly entering the internal flow path INR8 is added in order. That is, as a pattern of entering the internal flow path INR8 without leaving a gap, the balls entering the internal flow path INR8 every 0.5 seconds will be referred to as balls P1 to P7.

In FIG. 157, the state of the second transmission rod 8550 corresponding to each position of the internal flow path INR8 is schematically illustrated by rectangles partitioned into 6 squares. That is, the second transmission rod 8550 arranged oppositely is illustrated in three sections in the left-right direction below the internal flow path INR8, and in each section, if the upper mass is shaded, the second transmission rod 8550 at that position is shown. If the rod 8550 is positioned at the upper end of the movement range and the lower mass is shaded, the second transmission rod 8550 at that position is positioned at the lower end of the movement range.

In this embodiment, the time required for the ball to pass through the internal flow path INR8 is 1.5 seconds when flowing down the first route RF, and 3.0 seconds when flowing down the second route RS. is set to In other words, in FIGS. 157(a) to 157(g), the time required for the sphere to pass through one side of an equilateral triangle formed with the vertex at the intersection of the first route RF and the second route RS is 0.25 seconds, passing through 6 sides (0.25 × 6 = 1.5) when flowing down the first route RF, and 12 sides when flowing down the second route RS (0.25×12=3.0). For ease of understanding, the description will be made assuming that the bounce coefficient of the ball passing through the internal flow path INR8 is 1 (assuming that the flow velocity of the ball does not change due to bounce).

In addition, when the rebound coefficient of the sphere is considered to be less than 1 in actual studies, the velocity of the sphere flowing down while bouncing in the second flow path RS decreases due to the rebound. , it is possible to make continuous balls easier to form. That is, by assuming that the rebound coefficient is 1, it is possible to conduct a study under the conditions in which continuous balls are most difficult to form.

FIG. 157(a) illustrates a ball P1 entering the internal flow path INR8 when the first transmission member 8610 has a rotation angle of 180 degrees. Since each projecting/retracting member 8520 is in a projecting state on the downstream side of the sphere P1, the sphere P1 starts flowing down the second route RS.

FIG. 157(b) shows the ball P2 entering the internal flow path INR8 0.5 seconds after the ball P1 enters. At this time, the rotation angle of the first transmission member 8610 is 202.5 degrees. Ball P2, which enters after ball P1, is sorted to the opposite side of ball P1 by a sorting device 8543 (see FIG. 139(a)), and enters the internal flow path INR8 on the opposite side (right side in FIG. 157). . Since each projecting/retracting member 8520 is in a protruding state on the downstream side of the ball P2, the ball P2 starts flowing down the second route RS.

FIG. 157(c) shows the ball P3 entering the internal flow path INR8 0.5 seconds after the ball P2 enters. At this time, the rotation angle of the first transmission member 8610 is 225 degrees. Since the projecting/retracting member 8520A is in the retracted state on the downstream side of the sphere P3, the sphere P3 flows down at least the first region Rt along the first route RF. Further, since the projecting/retracting member 8520A is in the retracted state on the downstream side of the sphere P2, the sphere P2 flows down at least the first region Rt along the first route RF.

FIG. 157(d) shows the ball P4 entering the internal flow path INR8 0.5 seconds after the ball P3 enters. At this time, the rotation angle of the first transmission member 8610 is 247.5 degrees. Since the retractable member 8520A is in the retracted state on the downstream side of the sphere P4, the sphere P4 flows down at least the first region Rt along the first route RF.

In addition, the sphere P2 flows down the first region Rt along the first route RF and enters the second region Rm. As a result of flowing down along the second route RS, it moved to the position shown in FIG. 157(d). 157(c) to 157(d), the first region Rt is completely passed in the first 0.25 seconds, and the second region Rm is flown in the last 0.25 seconds. The result is shown in the figure.

At the time of FIG. 157(d), the interval between the spheres P1 and P3 has been reduced from the interval of 1 second to the interval of 0.5 seconds.

FIG. 157(e) shows the ball P5 entering the internal flow path INR8 0.5 seconds after the ball P4 enters. At this time, the rotation angle of the first transmission member 8610 is 270 degrees. Since the retractable members 8520A and 8520B are retracted on the downstream side of the sphere P5, the sphere P5 flows down at least the first region Rt and the second region Rm along the first route RF.

At the time of FIG. 157(e), the interval between the spheres P1 and P3 has been reduced from the interval of 0.5 seconds to the interval of 0.25 seconds. Also, the interval between the spheres P2 and P4 was reduced from the interval of 1 second to the interval of 0.5 seconds.

FIG. 157(f) shows the ball P6 entering the internal flow path INR8 0.5 seconds after the ball P5 enters. At this time, the first transmission member 8610 has a rotation angle of 292.5 degrees. Since the retractable members 8520A and 8520B are retracted on the downstream side of the sphere P6, the sphere P6 flows down at least the first region Rt and the second region Rm along the first route RF.

In addition, the sphere P3 flows down the second region Rm along the first route RF and enters the third region Rb. As a result of flowing down along the second route RS, it moved to the position shown in FIG. 157(f). 157(e) to FIG. 157(f), the flow passes through the second region Rm in the first 0.25 seconds, and flows down the third region Rb in the latter 0.25 seconds. The result is shown in the figure.

It should be noted that, at the time of FIG. 157(f), the interval between the spheres P2 and P4 has been reduced from the interval of 0.5 seconds to the interval of 0.25 seconds.

FIG. 157(g) shows the ball P7 entering the internal flow path INR8 0.5 seconds after the ball P6 enters. At this time, the first transmission member 8610 has a rotation angle of 315 degrees. Since the retractable members 8520A, 8520B, and 8520C are retracted on the downstream side of the sphere P7, the sphere P7 starts to flow down along the first route RF.

At the time of FIG. 157(g), the interval between the spheres P3 and P5 was reduced from the interval of 1 second to the interval of 0.5 seconds.

At the time of FIG. 157(g), the ball P1 is ejected from the internal flow path INR8. Balls P2, P3, and P4 are discharged from the internal flow path INR8 in 0.25 seconds after ball P1 is discharged, and ball P5 is discharged in 0.25 seconds (ball P1 is discharged) after balls P2, P3, and P4 are discharged. for 0.5 seconds) from the internal flow path INR8.

That is, four balls can be collectively discharged in 0.25 seconds (five balls collectively in 0.5 seconds) from the internal flow path INR8. As described above in the first embodiment, the opening time of the movable piece 190a is about 0.5 seconds. While the piece 190a is opened once, a plurality of balls (maximum five according to FIG. 157) can be entered into the movable ball entry accessory device 190. FIG. As a result, simultaneous winning to the movable ball-entering accessory device 190 can be generated not by chance but by using the control of the pre-winning streaming device 8500, and the possibility of simultaneous winning can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to increase the expectation of the simultaneous winning, and to improve the attention of the pre-winning streaming device 8500 deeply involved in the simultaneous winning.

As shown in FIG. 157, the balls that have entered the internal flow path INR8 are arranged in the order of their entry. In other words, the ball that hits later is held on the upstream side of the ball that hits earlier. This prevents the order in which the ball enters the top opening 8512 and the order in which the ball is discharged from the internal flow path INR8 to be changed.

On top of that, the retractable members 8520A to 8520C extend all at once when the retracted state changes to the extended state, and when the retracted state changes from the extended state, they operate sequentially from the side where the ball enters, so that the internal In the interior of the flow path INR8, at the same time, the internal flow path INR8 extending direction component of the velocity of the ball that hits earlier is set to be equal to or less than the internal flow path INR8 extending direction component of the velocity of the ball that hits later. be able to.

In other words, inside the internal flow path INR8, on the upstream side of the ball flowing down the second route RS, the ball can flow down through either the first route RF or the second route RS. On the upstream side of the sphere that flows down with RF, a structure can be provided that prevents the sphere from flowing down along the second route RS.

As a result, in the relationship between the spheres flowing down the internal flow path INR8, it is possible to prevent the interval between the spheres from widening and to gradually shorten the interval between the spheres. As a result, it is possible to heighten expectations for the continuation of the spheres flowing down the internal flow path INR8.

Hereinafter, the case where the ball is discharged from the internal flow path INR8 within 0.5 second will be referred to as "a continuous ball is formed" (excluding the case of exactly 0.5 second). As described above, the balls P1 to P4 or the balls P2 to P5 are ejected from the internal flow path INR8 in 0.25 seconds. Can form spheres.

FIG. 158 is a diagram showing the relationship between the timing at which the ball enters the internal flow path INR8 and the length of time required for the ball to completely pass through the internal flow path INR8 in the first operation pattern. In FIG. 158 the horizontal axis is shown as the phase change of the first transmission member 8610 . That is, as in FIG. 156, the state rotated counterclockwise by about 5 degrees from FIG. corresponds to In this embodiment, since the first transmission member 8610 is controlled by the drive motor KM1 at a speed of one rotation in eight seconds (a speed of 45 degrees in one second), the numerical values on the horizontal axis in FIG. The number divided by the angle (45 degrees) represents the number of seconds required for the state change.

In FIG. 158, the vertical axis indicates the time until the ball entering the internal flow path INR8 is discharged from the internal flow path INR8 at the timing of each horizontal axis at intervals of 22.5 degrees on the horizontal axis. For example, when the ball enters the internal flow path INR8 from 0 degrees to 180 degrees on the horizontal axis, the projecting/retracting member 8520 facing the internal flow path INR8 is projected when flowing down (see FIG. 156). 3 seconds required for the second route RS to flow down is the numerical value on the vertical axis.

On the other hand, for example, a ball entering the internal flow path INR8 from 180 degrees to 360 degrees not only has a region in which the opposing retractable member 8520 protrudes when flowing down, but also has a region in which it is in a retracted state. have. In that area, the ball flows down along the first route RF, so the required time is shortened compared to the case where the ball flows down through the second route RS.

More specifically, referring to FIG. 157, it takes 3 seconds for the ball P1, which entered the internal flow path INR8 at the numerical value of 180 degrees on the horizontal axis, to flow down the internal flow path INR8. It took 2.75 seconds for the ball P2, which entered the internal flow path INR8 at a numerical value of 202.5 degrees, to completely flow down the internal flow path INR8, and the ball entered the internal flow path INR8 at a numerical value of 225 degrees on the horizontal axis. It took 2.25 seconds for P3 to flow down the internal flow path INR8. It took 75 seconds, and the ball P5 that entered the internal flow path INR8 at the numerical value of 270 degrees on the horizontal axis and the ball P6 that entered the internal flow path INR8 at the numerical value of 292.5 degrees on the horizontal axis passed the internal flow path INR8. It takes 1.5 seconds to completely flow down, and it takes 2.0 seconds for the ball P7, which entered the internal flow path INR8 at the numerical value of 315 degrees on the horizontal axis, to flow down the internal flow path INR8. Then, it takes 2.5 seconds for the ball entering the internal flow path INR8 at the numerical value of 337.5 degrees on the horizontal axis to completely flow down the internal flow path INR8.

As shown in FIG. 158, depending on when the ball enters the internal flow path INR8, the time required for the ball to flow down the internal flow path INR8 can be changed, and the degree of change can be adjusted for a short period of time ( 4 seconds in this embodiment), the ease of forming consecutive balls when balls entering the internal flow path INR 8 at different timings form a consecutive ball. can be changed by

For example, if the first ball is the above-described ball P1, the last ball ejected from the internal flow path INR8 within 0.5 seconds after the ball P1 is the ball P4. time = 3.0 seconds, time from entry of ball P1 to ejection of ball P4 = difference in entry timing between ball P1 and ball P4: 1.5 seconds + time for ball P4 to flow down internal flow path INR8. 75 seconds = 3.25 seconds, time from ball P1 entry to ball P5 discharge = 2 seconds difference in entry timing between ball P1 and ball P5 + time for ball P5 to flow down internal flow path INR8 1.5 seconds = 3.5 seconds), so if the ball enters the internal flow path INR8 during the 1.5 seconds until the ball P4 enters, a continuous ball can be formed. In addition, if the balls P2 and P3 can also be entered, the four balls can be consecutive balls.

On the other hand, if the first ball is the above-described ball P4, the last ball ejected from the internal flow path INR8 within 0.5 seconds after the ball P4 is the ball P5 (ejected from the ball P4 entering time to = 1.75 seconds, time from entry of ball P4 to ejection of ball P5 = difference in entry timing between ball P4 and ball P5: 0.5 seconds + time for ball P5 to flow down internal flow path INR8: 1 .5 seconds = 2.0 seconds, time from ball P4 entry to ball P6 ejection = 1 second difference in entry timing between ball P4 and ball P6 + time for ball P6 to flow down internal flow path INR8 1.5 second = 2.5 seconds), so the next ball must enter the internal flow path INR8 during 0.5 seconds until the ball P5 enters the ball. As the number of consecutive balls becomes a limit, the difficulty of forming consecutive balls increases.

Therefore, the difficulty of forming continuous balls depends on at what timing in the first operation pattern (at what timing in the pattern of extension and retraction of the retractable members 8520A to 8520C) the first ball enters the internal flow path INR8. Since the degree changes, a player who wants to form consecutive balls can be induced to play a game of shooting balls by determining the timing of shooting based on the operation timing of the retractable member 8520 . As a result, attention of the projecting/withdrawing member 8520 can be improved.

For example, by shooting a ball after visually confirming that all the projecting members 8520 are in a protruding state, it is possible to make it easier to enter the first ball as the sphere P1, so that all the projecting members 8520 are The player can select a game method of confirming the overhanging state and shooting the ball toward the pre-winning falling-down device 8500 .

On the other hand, since it is difficult to form a continuous ball if the first ball is hit after the retraction of the hive member 8520A starts, the time from when the ball is shot until the ball reaches the pre-winning falling device 8500 is taken into consideration. A game method is adopted in which, even if the second ball is entered, the launching is temporarily stopped when the timing at which it is difficult to form consecutive balls is reached, and the launching is resumed at the timing when the projecting/retracting member 8520 is fully protruded. can be selected by the

That is, by confirming the operation mode of the projecting/withdrawing member 8520, the player can grasp the launching timing at which consecutive balls are likely to be formed, so that the player can select the launching mode of the ball. , it is possible to improve the attention of the player who wants to form consecutive balls using the pre-winning falling-down device 8520 to the haunting member 8520 .

As shown in FIG. 158, the slope of the graph shown in FIG. 158 is maximum when the rotation angle of first transmission member 8610 is in the range of 202.5 degrees to 247.5 degrees. In this range, the slope of the graph is such that the time required for the ball to be ejected during a 45 degree rotation (1 second) is shortened by 1 second. That is, the shortened amount of time until the ball that entered the internal flow path INR8 is ejected is equal to the time difference between the ball entering the internal flow path INR8. , a ball (for example, ball P3) that enters the internal flow path INR8 later can catch up.

According to this embodiment, even if the sphere P2 catches up with the sphere P3, the spheres P2 and P3 are sorted into separate flow paths by the sorting device 8543 (see FIG. 133). P2 and P3 can be simultaneously discharged from the left and right end outlets of the pair of internal flow paths INR8 without colliding with each other. This is the same when the ball is not entered at the timing of the ball P3 but entered at the timing of the balls P2 and P4. Unlike the mode shown in FIG. 157, the spheres P2 and P4 are distributed to separate flow paths, thereby avoiding collision with each other.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 157, even when all the balls P2, P3, and P4 enter, the long hole 8544c is formed from a shape that allows the balls P2 and P4 to enter at the same time. It is possible to prevent ball clogging from occurring near the exit of the path INR8.

Next, with reference to FIG. 159, the operation of the projecting/retracting member 8520 of the second actuation pattern in this embodiment and the length of time required for the ball to pass through the internal flow path INR8 that changes accordingly will be described.

In the second operation pattern, the retractable member 8520 operates in the same manner as in the first operation pattern in the internal flow path INR8 on the left side in front view, while the retractable member 8520 operates in the internal flow path INR8 on the right side in front view. is fixed in the retracted state.

The MPU 201 (see FIG. 4) can also control the operation of the retractable member 8520 by inserting a second operation pattern described below between the first operation patterns described above as a constant operation after power-on. be. That is, the motion control in the first actuation pattern or the second actuation pattern proceeds in a preset order. Operation control of the retractable member 8520 performed after the power is turned on will be described below.

<When operating with the second operation pattern>
FIGS. 159(a) to 159(g) are schematic diagrams schematically showing an internal flow path INR8 and a sphere passing through the internal flow path INR8. FIG. 159(a) shows a state in which the rotation angle of the first transmission member 8610 acting on the internal flow path INR8 on the left side in front view is 180 degrees. (g) shows a timing state in which the rotation angle of the first transmission member 8610 is sequentially shifted at intervals of 22.5 degrees (0.5 seconds). 159(a) to 159(g), the rotation angle of the first transmission member 8610 acting on the internal flow path INR8 on the right side in front view is maintained at an angle between 315 degrees and 355 degrees. be.

Figures 159(a) to 159(g) are listed in chronological order, and the balls newly entering the internal flow path INR8 are added in order. That is, the explanation will be made assuming that the ball enters the internal flow path INR8 every 0.5 seconds as a pattern in which the ball enters the internal flow path INR8 without any interval.

In FIG. 159, the state of the second transmission rod 8550 corresponding to each position of the internal flow path INR8 is schematically illustrated by rectangles partitioned into 6 squares. That is, the second transmission rod 8550 arranged oppositely is illustrated in three sections in the left-right direction below the internal flow path INR8, and in each section, if the upper mass is shaded, the second transmission rod 8550 at that position is shown. If the rod 8550 is positioned at the upper end of the movement range and the lower mass is shaded, the second transmission rod 8550 at that position is positioned at the lower end of the movement range.

FIG. 159(a) illustrates a ball P1 entering the internal flow path INR8 on the left side in front view when the first transmission member 8610 has a rotation angle of 180 degrees. Since each projecting/retracting member 8520 is in a projecting state on the downstream side of the sphere P1, the sphere P1 starts flowing down the second route RS.

FIG. 159(b) shows the ball P2 entering the internal flow path INR8 on the right side in front view 0.5 seconds after the ball P1 enters. At this time, the first transmission member 8610 has a rotation angle of 202.5 degrees. The ball P2, which enters after the ball P1, is sorted to the opposite side of the ball P1 by the sorting device 8543 (see FIG. 139(a)), and enters the internal flow path INR8 on the opposite side (the right side in FIG. 159). . In addition, since each retractable member 8520 is in a retracted state on the downstream side of the sphere P2, the sphere P2 starts flowing down along the first route RF.

FIG. 159(c) shows the ball P3 entering the internal flow path INR8 on the left side in front view 0.5 seconds after the ball P2 enters. At this time, the first transmission member 8610 has a rotation angle of 225 degrees. Since the projecting/retracting member 8520A is in the retracted state on the downstream side of the sphere P3, the sphere P3 flows down at least the first region Rt along the first route RF.

FIG. 159(d) shows the ball P4 entering the internal flow path INR8 on the right side in the front view 0.5 seconds after the ball P3 enters. At this time, the rotation angle of the first transmission member 8610 is 247.5 degrees. Since the retractable member 8520A is retracted on the downstream side of the sphere P4, the sphere P4 flows down along the first route RF.

At the time of FIG. 159(d), the interval between the spheres P1 and P3 has been reduced from the interval of 1 second to the interval of 0.5 seconds.

FIG. 159(e) shows the ball P5 entering the internal flow path INR8 on the left side in front view 0.5 seconds after the ball P4 enters. At this time, the rotation angle of the first transmission member 8610 is 270 degrees. Since the retractable members 8520A and 8520B are retracted on the downstream side of the sphere P5, the sphere P5 flows down at least the first region Rt and the second region Rm along the first route RF.

At the time of FIG. 159(e), the interval between the spheres P1 and P3 has been reduced from the interval of 0.5 seconds to the interval of 0.25 seconds. On the other hand, the distance between the spheres P2 and P4 remains unchanged for one second.

FIG. 159(f) shows the ball P6 entering the internal flow path INR8 on the right side in the front view 0.5 seconds after the ball P5 enters. At this time, the first transmission member 8610 has a rotation angle of 292.5 degrees. Since the projecting/retracting member 8520 is retracted on the downstream side of the sphere P6, the sphere P6 flows down along the first route RF.

In addition, the sphere P3 flows down the second region Rm along the first route RF and enters the third region Rb. As a result of flowing down along the second route RS, it moved to the position shown in FIG. 159(f). 159(e) to FIG. 159(f), in the first 0.25 seconds it completely passes through the second region Rm, and in the latter 0.25 seconds it flows down the third region Rb. The result is shown in the figure.

FIG. 159(g) shows the ball P7 entering the internal flow path INR8 on the left side in front view 0.5 seconds after the ball P6 enters. At this time, the first transmission member 8610 has a rotation angle of 315 degrees. Since the retractable members 8520A, 8520B, and 8520C are retracted on the downstream side of the sphere P7, the sphere P7 starts to flow down along the first route RF.

At the time of FIG. 159(g), the interval between the spheres P3 and P5 was reduced from the interval of 1 second to the interval of 0.5 seconds.

At the time of FIG. 159(g), the ball P1 is ejected from the internal flow path INR8. The ball P4 is discharged from the internal flow path INR8 on the right side in front view at the same time as the ball P1, and the ball P3 is discharged from the internal flow path INR8 0.25 seconds after the ball P1 is discharged. Also, the ball P5 is ejected from the internal flow path INR8 in 0.25 seconds after the ejection of the ball P3 (0.5 seconds after ejection of the balls P1 and P4).

That is, 3 balls can be discharged collectively in 0.25 seconds (4 balls collectively in 0.5 seconds) from the internal flow path INR8. As described above in the first embodiment, the opening time of the movable piece 190a is about 0.5 seconds. A plurality of balls (up to three according to FIG. 159) can be entered into the movable ball entry accessory device 190 while the piece 190a is opened once. As a result, simultaneous winning to the movable ball-entering accessory device 190 can be generated not by chance but by using the control of the pre-winning streaming device 8500, and the possibility of simultaneous winning can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to increase the expectation of the simultaneous winning, and to improve the attention of the pre-winning streaming device 8500 deeply involved in the simultaneous winning.

Here, the maximum number of balls that can be entered by the movable ball entry device 190 is higher in the second operation pattern (3) than in the first operation pattern (4). less. On the other hand, the operation mode of the left retractable member 8520 is similar to the first operation pattern. Therefore, in addition to confirming the operation mode of the left haunting member 8520, if the player does not check the operation mode of the right haunting member 8520, the timing at which the first ball enters the pre-winning falling device 8500 , it is difficult to accurately grasp the relationship between the maximum number of balls that can form consecutive balls. As a result, attention to both the pair of left and right retractable members 8520 can be improved.

In addition, by making it practically difficult to confirm both operation modes, it is possible to make it difficult to reliably grasp the best timing for entering the first ball into the pre-winning falling-down device 8500, and the pachinko machine 10 It is possible to reduce the possibility of being attacked (for example, entering the movable ball-entering accessory device 190 with a series of balls at a high probability).

Next, with reference to FIG. 160, the case where the first ball P1 enters the internal flow path INR8 on the right side in top view when the retractable member 8520 operates in the second operation pattern will be described.

FIGS. 160(a) to 160(g) are schematic diagrams schematically showing an internal flow path INR8 and a sphere passing through the internal flow path INR8. FIG. 160(a) shows a state where the rotation angle of the first transmission member 8610 acting on the internal flow path INR8 on the left side in front view is 180 degrees. (g) shows a timing state in which the rotation angle of the first transmission member 8610 is sequentially shifted at intervals of 22.5 degrees (0.5 seconds). 160(a) to 160(g), the rotation angle of the first transmission member 8610 acting on the internal flow path INR8 on the right side in front view is maintained at an angle between 315 degrees and 355 degrees. be.

Figures 160(a) to 160(g) are described in chronological order, and the balls newly entering the internal flow path INR8 are added in order. That is, the explanation will be made assuming that the ball enters the internal flow path INR8 every 0.5 seconds as a pattern in which the ball enters the internal flow path INR8 without any interval.

In FIG. 160, the state of the second transmission rod 8550 corresponding to each position of the internal flow path INR8 is schematically illustrated by rectangles partitioned into 6 squares. That is, the second transmission rod 8550 arranged oppositely is illustrated in three sections in the left-right direction below the internal flow path INR8, and in each section, if the upper mass is shaded, the second transmission rod 8550 at that position is shown. If the rod 8550 is positioned at the upper end of the movement range and the lower mass is shaded, the second transmission rod 8550 at that position is positioned at the lower end of the movement range.

FIG. 160(a) illustrates a ball P1 entering the internal flow path INR8 on the right side in front view when the first transmission member 8610 is at a rotation angle of 180 degrees. In addition, since each retractable member 8520 is in a retracted state on the downstream side of the sphere P1, the sphere P1 starts flowing down along the first route RF.

FIG. 160(b) shows the ball P2 entering the internal flow path INR8 on the left side in the front view 0.5 seconds after the ball P1 enters. At this time, the first transmission member 8610 has a rotation angle of 202.5 degrees. The ball P2, which enters after the ball P1, is sorted to the opposite side of the ball P1 by the sorting device 8543 (see FIG. 139(a)), and enters the internal flow path INR8 on the opposite side (left side in FIG. 160). . Since each projecting/retracting member 8520 is in a protruding state on the downstream side of the ball P2, the ball P2 starts flowing down the second route RS.

FIG. 160(c) shows the ball P3 entering the internal flow path INR8 on the right side in the front view 0.5 seconds after the ball P2 enters. At this time, the first transmission member 8610 has a rotation angle of 225 degrees. Since the projecting/retracting member 8520 is retracted on the downstream side of the sphere P3, the sphere P3 flows down along the first route RF.

FIG. 160(d) shows the ball P4 entering the internal flow path INR8 on the left side in the front view 0.5 seconds after the ball P3 enters. At this time, the rotation angle of the first transmission member 8610 is 247.5 degrees. Since the retractable member 8520A is retracted on the downstream side of the sphere P4, the sphere P4 flows down along the first route RF at least in the first region Rt.

FIG. 160(e) shows the ball P5 entering the internal flow path INR8 on the right side in the front view 0.5 seconds after the ball P4 enters. At this time, the rotation angle of the first transmission member 8610 is 270 degrees. Since the projecting/retracting member 8520 is retracted on the downstream side of the sphere P5, the sphere P5 flows down along the first route RF.

At the time of FIG. 159(e), the interval between the spheres P1 and P3 remains unchanged at 1 second, and the interval between the spheres P2 and P4 changes from 1.0 seconds to 0.75 seconds. reduced to the interval of

FIG. 160(f) shows the ball P6 entering the internal flow path INR8 on the left side in front view 0.5 seconds after the ball P5 enters. At this time, the first transmission member 8610 has a rotation angle of 292.5 degrees. Since the projecting/retracting member 8520 is retracted on the downstream side of the sphere P6, the sphere P6 flows down along the first route RF.

FIG. 160(g) shows the ball P7 entering the internal flow path INR8 on the right side in the front view 0.5 seconds after the ball P6 enters. At this time, the first transmission member 8610 has a rotation angle of 315 degrees. Since the projecting/retracting member 8520 is retracted on the downstream side of the sphere P7, the sphere P7 flows down along the first route RF.

After 0.25 seconds in FIG. 160(g), the ball P2 is ejected from the internal flow path INR8. The ball P4 is discharged from the internal flow path INR8 on the left side in front view at the same time as the ball P2, and the ball P5 is discharged from the internal flow path INR8 0.25 seconds after the balls P2 and P4 are discharged.

That is, three balls can be collectively discharged from the internal flow path INR8 in 0.25 seconds (three balls collectively in 0.5 seconds). As described above in the first embodiment, the opening time of the movable piece 190a is about 0.5 seconds. A plurality of balls (up to three according to FIG. 160) can be entered into the movable ball entry accessory device 190 while the piece 190a is opened once. As a result, simultaneous winning to the movable ball-entering accessory device 190 can be generated not by chance but by using the control of the pre-winning streaming device 8500, and the possibility of simultaneous winning can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to increase the expectation of the simultaneous winning, and to improve the attention of the pre-winning streaming device 8500 deeply involved in the simultaneous winning.

Here, in the case shown in FIG. 159, the timing at which continuous balls start to form (the timing at which the first transmission member 8610 rotates at a rotation angle of 315 degrees), and in the case shown in FIG. Since the member 8610 has a different angle of rotation (326.25 degrees), the continuous ball enters the movable ball entry accessory device 190 depending on whether the ball entering the internal flow path INR8 as the ball P1 is distributed to the left or right. The opening timing of the easy movable piece 190a can be varied (can be varied by 0.25 seconds). As a result, the possibility that the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is attacked (for example, the movable ball-entering accessory device 190 is hit with a series of balls at a high probability) can be reduced.

On the other hand, regardless of which way the ball P1 is distributed, it is possible to leave room for forming consecutive balls. It is possible to prevent people from suffering excessive losses.

Further, according to this operation pattern, the balls themselves forming the consecutive balls can be changed depending on which way the ball P1 is distributed. That is, when the ball P1 enters the internal flow path INR8 on the left side when viewed from the front, the balls P1, P3, and P4 form a continuous ball (see FIG. 159), and the ball P1 enters the internal flow path INR8 on the right side when viewed from the front. When entering the ball, a continuous ball can be formed by the balls P2, P4 and P5 (see FIG. 160).

Therefore, even if the ball is entered into the pre-winning falling-down device 8500 at exactly the same plural timings (for example, the timings of the balls P1 and P4) as the rotation angle of the first transmission member 8610 on the left side in the front view, Depending on whether the ball P1 enters the left or right internal flow path INR8, it is possible to change whether or not it is possible to form a continuous ball with the ball P4 (in this case, if the ball P1 enters the left side in front view, can only form reams). As a result, it is possible to prevent the timing of entering the ball into the pre-winning falling-down device 8500 that can form consecutive balls from being fixed, and the pachinko machine 10 captures (for example, the movable ball entering accessory device 190 with a high probability). It is possible to reduce the possibility that the ball will be entered in a row.

Next, with reference to FIG. 161, the operation of the projecting/retracting member 8520 of the third operation pattern in this embodiment and the length of time required for the ball to pass through the internal flow path INR8 that changes accordingly will be described.

The third operation pattern is similar to the first operation pattern in that the left and right retractable members 8520 similarly move in and out. The operation is controlled in such a manner that the operation pattern and the operation at the same speed are repeated in order.

That is, the first transmission member 8610 rotates at the same speed as in the first operation pattern until the rotation angle reaches 0 degrees to 225 degrees, and then the rotation angle changes from 225 degrees to 270 degrees until just before two seconds elapse. At the time when 2 seconds have elapsed since the rotation was performed at a low speed operation (operation at a speed of about 0.5 times the speed of the first operation pattern), and then the rotation angle was 225 degrees. High-speed operation is performed at a speed at which the rotation angle reaches 315 degrees, and thereafter, rotation operation is performed at the same speed as in the first operation pattern until the rotation angle reaches 360 degrees (one rotation lasts 8 seconds).

The MPU 201 (see FIG. 4) can also control the operation of the retractable member 8520 by inserting a third operation pattern described below between the first operation patterns described above as a constant operation after the power is turned on. be. That is, the first operation pattern, the second operation pattern, or the third operation pattern are sequentially selected in a preset order, and the operation control proceeds. Operation control of the retractable member 8520 performed after the power is turned on will be described below.

<When operating with the third operation pattern>
FIGS. 161(a) to 161(g) are schematic diagrams schematically showing an internal flow path INR8 and a sphere passing through the internal flow path INR8. FIG. 161(a) illustrates a state in which the rotation angle of the first transmission member 8610 acting on the internal flow path INR8 is 180 degrees, and FIGS. 161(b) to 161(g) following FIG. , in this operation pattern, the state of the timing shifted in sequence at intervals of 0.5 seconds is illustrated.

Figures 161(a) to 161(g) are listed in chronological order, and the balls newly entering the internal flow path INR8 are added in order. That is, the explanation will be made assuming that the ball enters the internal flow path INR8 every 0.5 seconds as a pattern in which the ball enters the internal flow path INR8 without any interval.

In FIG. 161, the state of the second transmission rod 8550 corresponding to each position of the internal flow path INR8 is schematically illustrated by rectangles partitioned into 6 squares. That is, the second transmission rod 8550 arranged oppositely is illustrated in three sections in the left-right direction below the internal flow path INR8, and in each section, if the upper mass is shaded, the second transmission rod 8550 at that position is shown. If the rod 8550 is positioned at the upper end of the movement range and the lower mass is shaded, the second transmission rod 8550 at that position is positioned at the lower end of the movement range.

FIG. 161(a) shows a ball P1 entering the internal flow path INR8 when the first transmission member 8610 is at a rotation angle of 180 degrees. Since each projecting/retracting member 8520 is in a projecting state on the downstream side of the sphere P1, the sphere P1 starts flowing down the second route RS.

FIG. 161(b) shows the ball P2 entering the internal flow path INR8 0.5 seconds after the ball P1 enters. At this time, the first transmission member 8610 has a rotation angle of 202.5 degrees. The ball P2, which enters after the ball P1, is sorted to the opposite side of the ball P1 by the sorting device 8543 (see FIG. 139(a)), and enters the internal flow path INR8 on the opposite side (the right side in FIG. 161). . Since each projecting/retracting member 8520 is in a protruding state on the downstream side of the ball P2, the ball P1 starts flowing down along the second route RS.

FIG. 161(c) shows the ball P3 entering the internal flow path INR8 0.5 seconds after the ball P2 enters. At this time, the first transmission member 8610 has a rotation angle of 225 degrees. Since the projecting/retracting member 8520A is in the retracted state on the downstream side of the sphere P3, the sphere P3 flows down at least the first region Rt along the first route RF.

FIG. 161(d) shows the ball P4 entering the internal flow path INR8 0.5 seconds after the ball P3 enters. At this time, 0.5 seconds have passed since the first transmission member 8610 reached the rotation angle of 225 degrees. Since the retractable member 8520A is in the retracted state on the downstream side of the sphere P4, the sphere P4 flows down at least the first region Rt along the first route RF. At the time of FIG. 161(d), the interval between the spheres P1 and P3 has been reduced from the interval of 1 second to the interval of 0.5 seconds.

FIG. 161(e) shows the ball P5 entering the internal flow path INR8 0.5 seconds after the ball P4 enters. At this time, 1.0 second has passed since the first transmission member 8610 reached the rotation angle of 225 degrees. Since the projecting/retracting member 8520A is in the retracted state on the downstream side of the sphere P5, the sphere P5 flows down at least the first region Rt along the first route RF. At the time of FIG. 161(e), the interval between the spheres P2 and P4 was reduced from the interval of 1.0 seconds to the interval of 0.75 seconds.

FIG. 161(f) shows the ball P6 entering the internal flow path INR8 0.5 seconds after the ball P5 enters. At this time, 1.5 seconds have passed since the first transmission member 8610 reached the rotation angle of 225 degrees. Since the projecting/retracting member 8520A is in the retracted state on the downstream side of the sphere P6, the sphere P6 flows down at least the first region Rt along the first route RF.

FIG. 161(g) shows the ball P7 entering the internal flow path INR8 0.5 seconds after the ball P6 enters. At this time, the first transmission member 8610 has a rotation angle of 315 degrees. Since the retractable members 8520A, 8520B, and 8520C are retracted on the downstream side of the sphere P7, the sphere P7 starts to flow down along the first route RF. At the time of FIG. 161(g), the interval between the spheres P4 and P6 was reduced from the interval of 1 second to the interval of 0.5 seconds.

At the time of FIG. 161(g), the ball P1 is ejected from the internal flow path INR8. Balls P2 and P3 are ejected from internal flow path INR8 in 0.25 seconds after ball P1 is ejected. The ball P4 is discharged from the internal flow path INR8 in 0.25 seconds after the discharge of the balls P2 and P3 and in 0.5 seconds after the discharge of the ball P1. The ball P5 is discharged from the internal flow path INR8 in 0.25 seconds after the discharge of the ball P4 and in 0.5 seconds after discharge of the balls P2 and P3. The ball P6 is discharged from the internal flow path INR8 in 0.25 seconds after the ball P5 is discharged and in 0.5 seconds after the ball P4 is discharged.

That is, 3 balls can be discharged collectively in 0.25 seconds (4 balls collectively in 0.5 seconds) from the internal flow path INR8. As described above in the first embodiment, the opening time of the movable piece 190a is about 0.5 seconds. A plurality of balls (up to three according to FIG. 161) can be entered into the movable ball entry device 190 while the piece 190a is opened once. As a result, simultaneous winning to the movable ball-entering accessory device 190 can be generated not by chance but by using the control of the pre-winning streaming device 8500, and the possibility of simultaneous winning can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to increase the expectation of the simultaneous winning, and to improve the attention of the pre-winning streaming device 8500 deeply involved in the simultaneous winning.

Here, the maximum number of balls that can be entered by the movable ball entry accessory device 190 is higher in the third operation pattern (four) than in the first operation pattern (five). less. On the other hand, since the operation mode of the retractable member 8520 is halfway similar to the first operation pattern, the player can determine whether the operation mode of the retractable member 8520 is the first operation pattern or the third operation pattern. It becomes difficult to grasp. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to predict in advance the manner in which the ball flows down from the operation manner of the projecting/withdrawing member 8520, and it is possible to improve the ability to pay attention to the ball flowing down the internal flow path INR8.

In addition, by making it practically difficult to confirm whether the retractable member 8520 is operating in the first operation pattern or in the third operation pattern before hitting the ball, It is difficult to reliably grasp the best timing to enter the first ball into the flow-down device 8500, and the pachinko machine 10 captures (for example, the movable ball entry accessory device 190 with a high probability of entering the ball. ) can be reduced.

The characteristics of the continuous ball formation between the first operation pattern and the third operation pattern will be described. In particular, attention is focused on the case where at least two balls can be connected, and FIG. 157 will be referred to as needed in this description.

In the first operation pattern, consecutive balls can be formed with balls P1 and P4, or balls P2 and P5. .5 seconds) can be secured.

As a result, for example, when balls are shot toward the pre-prize running-down device 8500, not only balls shot at two consecutive intervals (0.6 second intervals) (balls shot at short intervals), but three shots in succession are shot. The leading and trailing balls (balls fired at long intervals (1.2 second intervals), the first and third balls) can also form consecutive balls. This makes it possible to lower the degree of difficulty in forming consecutive balls.

On the other hand, in the third operation pattern, in order to stay in a continuous ball with balls P1 and P3, or balls P2 and P4, two consecutive balls (0.6 second interval) were fired (balls fired at short intervals). ), but unlike the first operation pattern, even if the ball P5 becomes the first ball, it is possible to form a continuous ball with the ball P6. In other words, the balls P5 and P6 cannot form a continuous ball in the first actuation pattern, but the balls P5 and P6 can form a continuous ball in the third actuation pattern. That is, compared to the case of the first operation pattern, the third operation pattern is more effective when the ball is entered into the pre-winning falling-down device 8500 two consecutive times (0.6 second intervals). It is possible to secure a longer allowable period for allowing the formation of

Therefore, in comparison between the first operation pattern and the third operation pattern, the first operation pattern has the disadvantage that the allowable period for allowing the formation of reams is short, and the interval between shots of reams that can be reamed is short. On the other hand, the third operation pattern has the advantage that the allowable period for allowing the formation of consecutive balls is long, and the disadvantage that the interval between shots that can be consecutive balls is short. .

Since these advantages and disadvantages are contradictory, by appropriately controlling the switching between the first operation pattern and the third operation pattern, the pachinko machine 10 can be used by the player to capture (for example, movable ball entry) It is possible to reduce the possibility of being hit by a series of balls into the accessory device 190 with a high probability.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 162 and 163, the operation of the projecting/retracting member 8520 of the fourth operation pattern in this embodiment and the length of time required for the ball to pass through the internal flow path INR8 that changes accordingly will be described. do. The fourth actuation pattern corresponds to the case where the first transmission member 8610 rotates in the opposite direction to the case of the first actuation pattern.

FIG. 162(a) is a diagram showing changes over time of the retractable member 8520A in the fourth operation pattern, and FIG. 162(b) is a diagram showing changes over time of the retractable member 8520B in the fourth operation pattern. FIG. 162(c) is a diagram showing changes over time of the retractable member 8520C in the fourth operation pattern.

162(a) to 162(c), the horizontal axis represents the phase change of the first transmission member 8610. FIG. That is, the state rotated counterclockwise by about 5 degrees from FIG. 162(a) to 162(c) correspond to the numerical values on the horizontal axis. In order to indicate the opposite direction, the angle is given a minus sign in FIG. 162 .

In this embodiment, since the first transmission member 8610 is controlled by the drive motor KM1 at a speed of one rotation in 8 seconds (a speed of 45 degrees in 1 second), FIGS. ) divided by the corresponding angle (45 degrees) represents the number of seconds required for the state change.

The MPU 201 (see FIG. 4) can also control the operation of the retractable member 8520 by inserting a fourth operation pattern described below between the first operation patterns described above as a constant operation after power-on. be. That is, the first operation pattern, the second operation pattern, the third operation pattern, or the fourth operation pattern are sequentially selected in a preset order, and the operation control proceeds. Operation control of the retractable member 8520 performed after the power is turned on will be described below.

<When operating with the fourth operation pattern>
As shown in FIGS. 162(a) to 162(c), each retractable member 8520A to 8520C is in tension until the rotation angle of the first transmission member 8610 reaches 5 degrees (about 0.1 seconds). stay out.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 162(a) to 162(c), when the rotation angle of the first transmission member 8610 reaches 5 degrees, the projecting/withdrawing members 8520A to 8520C change state from the extended state to the retracted state. Next, as shown in FIG. 162(c), when the rotation angle of the first transmission member 8610 reaches 45 degrees, the retractable member 8520C changes state from the retracted state to the extended state. Next, as shown in FIG. 162(b), when the rotation angle of the first transmission member 8610 reaches 90 degrees, the retractable member 8520B changes state from the retracted state to the extended state. Next, as shown in FIG. 162(a), when the rotation angle of the first transmission member 8610 reaches 135 degrees, the retractable member 8520A changes state from the retracted state to the extended state. Each projecting/withdrawing member 8520A to 8520C is maintained in the projecting state until the rotation angle of the first transmission member 8610 reaches 360 degrees. The protruding/withdrawing member 8520 repeats the above-described state change every 8 seconds.

FIG. 163 is a diagram showing the relationship between the timing at which the ball enters the internal flow path INR8 and the length of time required for the ball to completely pass through the internal flow path INR8 in the fourth operation pattern. In FIG. 163 the horizontal axis is shown as the phase change of the first transmission member 8610 . That is, as in FIG. 162, the state rotated counterclockwise by about 5 degrees from FIG. corresponds to

In this embodiment, the first transmission member 8610 is controlled by the drive motor KM1 at a speed of one rotation in 8 seconds (a speed of 45 degrees in 1 second). The number divided by the angle (45 degrees) represents the number of seconds required for the state change.

In FIG. 163, the vertical axis indicates the time until the ball entering the internal flow path INR8 is discharged from the internal flow path INR8 at the timing of each horizontal axis at intervals of 22.5 degrees on the horizontal axis. For example, when the ball enters the internal flow path INR8 from 135 degrees to 225 degrees on the horizontal axis, the projecting/retracting member 8520 facing the internal flow path INR8 protrudes when flowing down (see FIG. 156). 3 seconds required for the second route RS to flow down is the numerical value on the vertical axis.

This is half the angular range (from 0 degrees to 180 degrees, see FIG. 158) at the time of ball entry that forms the case where the internal flow path INR8 is completely flowed down by the second route RS in the above-described first operation pattern. is. That is, according to this operation pattern, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the ball will flow down the internal flow path INR8 along the second path RS as compared with the first operation pattern.

On the other hand, for example, a ball that enters the internal flow path INR8 from 0 degrees to 135 degrees and from 225 degrees to 360 degrees is not limited to the area where the opposing retractable member 8520 protrudes when flowing down, It also has an area to be saved. In that region, the ball flows down along the first route RF, so the time required for the ball to flow down through the internal flow path INR8 is shortened compared to the case where the ball flows down through the second route RS.

Specifically, it takes 2 seconds for a ball entering the internal flow path INR8 to flow down the internal flow path INR8 from 0 degrees to 45 degrees on the horizontal axis, and from 67.5 degrees to 112 degrees on the horizontal axis. It takes 2.5 seconds for a ball that enters the internal flow path INR8 at 5 degrees to flow down the internal flow path INR8. It took 3.0 seconds to flow down the internal flow path INR8, and the ball that entered the internal flow path INR8 at the numerical value of 247.5 degrees on the horizontal axis took 2.75 seconds to flow down the internal flow path INR8. In short, it takes 2.5 seconds for the ball entering the internal flow path INR8 to flow down the internal flow path INR8 at the numerical value of 270 degrees on the horizontal axis, and the internal flow path INR8 at the numerical value of 292.5 degrees on the horizontal axis. It takes 2.25 seconds for the entering ball to flow down the internal flow path INR8, and the ball entering the internal flow path INR8 flows down the internal flow path INR8 at the numerical values of 315 degrees to 360 degrees on the horizontal axis. takes 2.0 seconds.

As shown in FIG. 163, in this operation pattern, the degree of change in the time required for the ball to flow down the internal flow path INR8 is gentler than that in the first operation pattern.

As shown in FIG. 163, depending on when the ball enters the internal flow path INR8, the time required for the ball to flow down the internal flow path INR8 can be changed, and the degree of change can be adjusted in a short period of time. By continuously changing the pitch, the ease with which balls entering the internal flow path INR8 at different timings form consecutive balls can be changed depending on the timing of entering the ball.

According to this operation pattern, the first transmission member 8610 is set as the timing for easily shortening the interval between the balls (timing for shortening the time required for the successively entering balls to completely pass through the internal flow path INR8). is 225 degrees. From that timing, if a ball enters the internal flow path INR8 at intervals of 0.5 seconds within 2.0 seconds, the time required for the subsequent ball to pass through the internal flow path INR8 is reduced by 0.25 seconds. As a result, the distance between the pair of balls is within 0.5 seconds, and a continuous ball can be formed.

According to this operation pattern, in comparison with the first operation pattern, it is difficult to determine the timing of hitting the ball into the internal flow path INR8 with the state of the projecting/retracting member 8520 as a mark, and to reliably form a continuous ball. can be

For example, in the first operation pattern, about 4 seconds after the timing at which each retractable member 8520 changes from the retracted state to the extended state (when the rotation angle of the first transmission member 8610 reaches 180 degrees, see FIG. 158), By entering the first ball into the internal flow path INR8, consecutive balls can be formed by continuously hitting the ball into the pre-winning falling-down device 8500 thereafter.

On the other hand, in the fourth operation pattern, about 4 seconds after the timing when the projecting/retractable member 8520C, which is the projecting member 8520 that first changes from the retracted state to the projecting state, enters the projecting state (the first transmission member 8610 is If the rotation angle is 225 degrees, see FIG. 163), it is still the most advisable to enter the first ball (for example, ball P1) into the internal flow path INR8. When a ball is continuously entered on path INR8, a continuous ball can be formed with a ball entered at an interval of 0.5 seconds (for example, ball P2), while a ball entered at an interval of 1 second is possible. (For example, ball P3) cannot form a continuous ball. Therefore, during the operation with the fourth operation pattern, it is possible to suppress the formation of reams compared to the case of operation with the first operation pattern. space can be narrowed).

According to this operation pattern, in relation to the first operation pattern, the time required for the ball entering the internal flow path INR8 to flow down the internal flow path INR8 when the retractable member 8520 is in the same state is changed. be able to.

For example, when only the retractable member 8520C is in the overhanging state in the first operation pattern, the time required for the ball entering the internal flow path INR8 to flow down the internal flow path INR8 is 1.5 to 2.0. seconds, but the time required for the ball entering the internal flow path INR8 to completely flow down the internal flow path INR8 when only the retractable member 8520C is in the overhanging state in this operation pattern is 2.0 to 2.0 seconds. 5 seconds.

For example, in the first operation pattern, when the projecting member 8520A is in the retracted state and the projecting members 8520B and 8520C are in the projecting state, it takes a ball that has entered the internal flow path INR8 to completely flow down the internal flow path INR8. The time is 1.5 to 2.25 seconds. In this operation pattern, when the projecting/retracting member 8520A is retracted and the projecting/retracting members 8520B and 8520C are extended, the ball entering the internal flow path INR8 is It takes 2.5 to 3.0 seconds to finish flowing down the internal flow path INR8.

By applying this change, a ball is entered into the internal flow path INR8 using the state of the retractable member 8520 as a mark, and the ball flows down the outside of the pre-winning falling device 8500 and moves toward the movable piece 190a. It is possible to reduce the success rate of the game method in which consecutive balls are formed.

That is, when the relationship between the state of the retractable member 8520 and the time required for the ball entering the internal flow path INR8 to pass through the internal flow path INR8 is always maintained (the retractable member 8520 is maintained stopped ), it is possible to easily grasp when the ball entering the internal flow path INR8 is discharged from the internal flow path INR8 to the movable piece 190a.

Therefore, by hitting the ball so that the ball reaches the vicinity of the movable piece 190a in accordance with the ejection timing, continuous balls can be easily formed without continuously entering the internal flow path INR8, and the movable ball entering accessory. A plurality of balls can be entered into the device 190, and the pachinko machine 10 is likely to be attacked (for example, balls are entered into the movable ball entry accessory device 190 with a high probability).

On the other hand, between the first operation pattern and the main operation pattern, the time required for the ball entered into the internal flow path INR8 when the retractable member 8520 is in the same state to flow down the internal flow path INR8 differs. . Therefore, the launch timing of the ball discharged near the movable piece 190a to form a continuous ball with the ball discharged from the internal flow path INR8 is determined according to the first operation pattern and the present operation pattern. can be shifted. As a result, the possibility that the pachinko machine 10 is attacked (for example, the movable ball-entering accessory device 190 is hit with a series of balls at a high probability) can be reduced.

Next, an example of the relationship between the rotation operation of the first transmission member 8610 and the operation of the large opening solenoid 209a that operates the movable piece 190a will be described. FIG. 164 is a time chart explaining the flow from winning to the left starting winning opening 26 or right starting winning opening 27 to the end of the small winning game in the first control example described above. Details of operation control of various devices will be described later. Also, in the time chart shown in FIG. 164, the first transmission member 8610 is controlled in operation according to the first operation pattern (see FIGS. 156 and 158).

Based on the winning of the game ball into the left starting winning opening 26 or the right starting winning opening 27, the main controller 110 performs variation control of the first special symbol. Then, when the fluctuation of the first special symbol stops and the main control device 110 starts the small winning control 1 (also referred to as the small winning game 1), the large opening solenoid 209a that operates the movable piece 190a turns on ( open state). In this state, the player aims at the big winning opening switch 190b of the movable ball-entering accessory device 190 and shoots the game ball. The game ball flows down to the back of the pachinko machine 10 through the fixed area hole 340 or the missing hole 350. - 特許庁

As described above, in the small hit control 1, the total time is set to 7.5 seconds, the set time t1 is set to 2 seconds, the set time t2 is set to about 0.5 seconds, and the set time t3 is Set in about 5 seconds.

Here, as shown in FIG. 164, the timing at which the ball enters the left start prize winning port 26 or the right start prize winning port 27 and the variation time depend on the start point of the set time t2 and the angle of the first transmission member 8610. 0 degrees, the timing at which the sphere P1 reaches the movable piece 190a after flowing down the internal flow path INR8 (3 seconds flowing down the internal flow path INR8 + the movable piece The time to reach 190a (1 second=4 seconds after the ball P1 enters the internal flow path INR8) coincides with the timing at which the movable piece 190a changes to the open state. That is, continuous balls that can be formed by the balls P1 to P5 described above can reach the movable piece 190a when the movable piece 190a is in the open state.

When the relationship shown in FIG. 164 is established, the possibility of consecutive balls entering the movable ball-entering device 190 increases dramatically. By using voice or liquid crystal display, it is possible to make the player aware that it is a period in which it is easy to enter consecutive balls into the movable ball entry device 190, thereby preventing the player from playing the game carelessly.

That is, in the normal game, a ball is entered into each of the start winning openings 26 to 28 to open the movable piece 190a, and the ball is made to reach the upper surface of the movable piece 190a in the open state, and the ball enters the movable ball entry accessory device 190. Therefore, the preferable range for the player to hit the ball spreads widely between the pair of movable pieces 190a, and the player does not need to be nervous about adjusting the shooting strength of the ball. None.

In the range between the movable pieces 190a, if a ball is shot in a direction that causes the ball to collide with the center frame 86, the ball will flow down near the movable piece 190a in the process of flowing down, and further below each of the start winning openings 26-28. Since it is possible to enter the ball, there is no big difference in the profit obtained by the player, and the player does not need to precisely adjust the shooting intensity, and plays the game aimlessly.

On the other hand, the top opening 8512, which is the entrance to the pre-prize running-down device 8500, has an opening width to the extent that two balls are lined up on the left and right, and the range is significantly narrower than the range between the pair of movable pieces 190a. Become. Therefore, in order to repeatedly enter the ball into the top opening 8512, precise adjustment of the firing intensity is essential. Such precise adjustments can be made for a short period of time, but if the player tries to make such adjustments over a long period of time, fatigue accumulates in the player, which hinders long-term play.

Therefore, by performing the above-described notification during the period in which the consecutive balls formed in the internal flow path INR8 are allowed to enter the movable ball entry accessory device 190, the top opening 8512 is aimed only when the notification is performed. It is possible to prompt the player to play a game (a game with a high degree of fatigue). As a result, the player can shoot balls by aiming to form consecutive balls when necessary, and by shooting balls toward between the pair of movable pieces 190a at other times (a game with low fatigue). Switching modes can be done intentionally (due to differences in benefits to be obtained).

Assuming that the variation time of the first special symbol is 0.5 seconds, the timing of entry of the ball P1 is before the entry of the ball P1 into either the left start winning opening 26 or the right starting winning opening 27. It is difficult to make the above notification at the timing of the ball and to reliably open the movable piece 190a at the timing when the ball P1 reaches the movable piece 190a.

When the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is 0.5 seconds, the entry of the ball into each of the start winning openings 26 to 28 is the same as the entry timing of the ball P4 (at 5.5 seconds of the rotation cycle (Fig. 158)), there remains a period of 0.5 seconds until the timing of the ball P5 entering the ball, in which consecutive balls can be formed by entering the ball into the pre-winning falling-down device 8500 .

Therefore, during this 0.5 second period, the above-described notification is given to prompt the player to enter the ball into the internal flow path INR8, thereby promoting the formation of consecutive balls. On the other hand, it takes at least one second from the time of launch until the ball enters the internal flow path INR. That is, the above-mentioned notification serves as a performance notification that enhances the interest of the player by causing the ball that has already flowed down the game area to enter the internal flow path INR8 while the above-mentioned notification is being given. have implications.

Next, with reference to FIG. 165, points different from FIG. 164 will be described. FIG. 165 is a time chart explaining the flow from the winning to the middle start winning opening 28 to the end of the small winning game in the first control example described above. It is a time chart explaining the flow up to the occurrence of a jackpot game. Details of operation control of various devices will be described later. Also, in the time chart shown in FIG. 165, the first transmission member 8610 is controlled in operation according to the first operation pattern (see FIGS. 156 and 158).

Variation control of the second special symbol is performed by the main controller 110 based on the winning of the game ball to the middle start winning opening 28 . Then, when the fluctuation of the second special symbol stops and the main control device 110 starts the small hit control 2 (also referred to as the small hit game 2), the large opening solenoid 209a that operates the movable piece 190a turns on ( open state). In this state, the player aims at the big winning opening switch 190b of the movable ball-entering accessory device 190 and shoots the game ball. The game ball flows down to the back of the pachinko machine 10 through the fixed area hole 340 or the missing hole 350. - 特許庁

As described above, in the small hit control 2, the total time is set to 10 seconds, the set time t4 is set to 2 seconds, the set time t5 is set to about 0.5 seconds, and the set time t6 is set to 2 seconds , the set time t7 is set at approximately 0.5 seconds, and the set time t8 is set at 5 seconds.

Here, as shown in FIG. 165, depending on the timing at which the ball enters the middle starting prize opening 28 and the variation time, the start point of the set time t7 and the point at which the angle of the first transmission member 8610 becomes 0 degrees. , the timing at which the sphere P1 flows down through the internal flow path INR8 and reaches the movable piece 190a (3 sec. Time 1 second (timing four seconds after the ball P1 enters the internal flow path INR8) coincides with the timing at which the movable piece 190a changes to the open state. That is, continuous balls that can be formed by the balls P1 to P5 described above can reach the movable piece 190a when the movable piece 190a is in the open state.

When the relationship shown in FIG. 165 is established, the possibility of consecutive balls entering the movable ball-entering accessory device 190 increases dramatically. By using voice or liquid crystal display, it is possible to make the player aware that it is a period in which it is easy to enter consecutive balls into the movable ball entry device 190, thereby preventing the player from playing the game carelessly.

In FIG. 165, the timing of entry of the ball P1 is later than the entry of the ball P1 into the middle start prize opening 28, so the above notification is made at the entry timing of the ball P1, and the ball P1 reaches the movable piece 190a. The movable piece 190a can be reliably brought into the open state at the appropriate timing.

When the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is 0.5 seconds, the ball hits at the timing when the ball enters the middle start winning opening 28 (timing at 3.0 seconds of the rotation cycle (see FIG. 158)). can enter the internal flow path INR8 one second later (can enter the internal flow path INR8 as the ball P1).

In the case of the state shown in FIG. 165, control is performed in such a manner that the above-described notification is continued for about 2 to 3 seconds from the time the ball enters the medium start winning opening . As a result, a ball shot while the notification is being made or a ball that has already started to flow down the game area enters the pre-winning falling-down device 8500, and continuous balls are formed in the internal flow path INR8. , the formed consecutive balls can be entered into the pre-winning falling-down device 8500 .

In this case, even if the player starts hitting toward the top opening 8512 after confirming the notification, the player can enter the ball into the internal flow path INR8 within the period in which consecutive balls can be formed. As described above, the movable ball-entering accessory device 190 of the present embodiment is configured to dramatically increase the probability of winning a big prize when a plurality of balls enter the game. Therefore, since this notification has not only a meaning of performance, but also a meaning of affecting the profit that the player can obtain, it is possible to increase the player's attention to this notification.

According to the present embodiment, the small winning game 1 and the small winning game 2 have a big difference in addition to the number of opening operations of the movable piece 190a.

Here, if the number of opening operations of the movable piece 190a is different, the possibility of the ball entering the movable ball-entering accessory device 190 is different. However, the difference (difference in possibility) is the sum of the possibilities that the player will enter the ball in one opening action. Therefore, the expected value of the expected profit (possibility of winning a big hit by entering the ball) is twice that of the small winning game 2 of the small winning game 1.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, in the small hit game 1, it is not possible to form a continuous ball between the balls that are fired after confirming the above-mentioned notification and entered the internal flow path INR 8, but the small hit game In 2, it is possible to form a continuous ball between the balls that are launched after confirming the above-mentioned notification and entered into the internal flow path INR8.

Therefore, when the above-mentioned notification occurs during the small winning game 2, after confirming the notification, a plurality of balls are fired toward the top opening 8512 and entered into the internal flow path INR8. , and the consecutive balls can be entered into the movable ball entry device 190 . In other words, after the player recognizes the period during which the player can win a big win with a high probability by entering a plurality of balls into the top opening 8512, the ball shot during the period is recognized by the top opening 8512. A big win can be obtained by entering a plurality of balls into the opening 8512 .

In this case, if a plurality of balls can be entered into the top opening 8512 according to the notification, it is possible to obtain a big hit. Remarkably larger than the winning game 1. Therefore, it is possible to dramatically improve the attention of the small winning game 2 (entering the ball into the middle start winning opening 28) (the attention to the notification that occurs during the small winning game 2).

Next, a ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 166 to 170. FIG. In the eighth embodiment, the case where the arrangement of the second transmission member 8620 with respect to the arrangement of the transmission protrusions 8613 of the first transmission member 8610 is determined in a general way has been described. A plurality of arrangements of the second transmission member 8620 with respect to the arrangement of the protrusion 8613 can be realized. The configuration of the pre-winning downstream device in the ninth embodiment is common except that the second transmission member 9620 is used instead of the second transmission member 8620 in the eighth embodiment. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

166(a) is a front view of the second transmission member 9620 in the ninth embodiment, and FIG. 166(b) is a cross-sectional view of the second transmission member 9620 taken along line CLXVIb-CLXVIb in FIG. 166(a). be. Note that FIG. 166 shows the second transmission member 9620 on the left side in the front view, of the pair of symmetrical second transmission members 9620 arranged in a left and right pair.

As shown in FIGS. 166(a) and 166(b), the second transmission member 9620 includes a body plate portion 8621 similar to the second transmission member 9620 of the eighth embodiment, an arc bulging portion 8622, and a cover. In addition to providing a guide arm portion 8623 and a lower notch 8624, an incomplete circular arc formed by shifting the upper surface of the incomplete circular arc hole 8625 of the eighth embodiment toward the outside of the circular arc diameter. A hole 9625, an end hole 8626 extending linearly in the horizontal direction from the left and right outer ends of the incomplete circular arc hole 9625, and a part of the incomplete circular arc hole 9625 are fastened to the main body plate portion 8621. A switching plate 9627 that is fixed and switches the passing path of the transmission protrusion 8613 (see FIG. 167), and a one-way valve 9628 that is disposed in front of the main body plate portion 8621 and functions as a one-way valve for the transmission protrusion 8613 are main components. Prepare for.

The switching plate 9627 is superimposed on the front side of the main body plate portion 8621 in the assembled state and fastened and fixed. A partition plate portion 9627b extending in a curved plate shape from the inner peripheral portion of the plate portion 9627a toward the back side is mainly provided.

The partition plate portion 9627b is arranged approximately at the center position of the incomplete circular arc hole 9625 in the width direction and is formed in an arc shape coaxial with the central axis of the incomplete circular arc hole 9625 . In addition, the incomplete arc hole 9625 is formed with a width that allows the transmission protrusion 8613 to pass through both the upper side and the lower side of the partition plate portion 9627b. That is, the width of the incomplete arc hole 9625 is slightly longer than the sum of the thickness of the partition plate portion 9627b and twice the diameter of the transmission projection 9613. As a result, the transmission protrusion 8613 can pass above the partition plate portion 9627b, and can also pass below the partition plate portion 9627b.

The one-way valve 9628 has a recessed support portion 9628a which is horizontally long rectangular recessed in the upper portion of the end hole 8626 on the right side when viewed from the front, and is housed in the recessed support portion 9628a so as to be slidable in the left-right direction. It mainly comprises a supported slide member 9628b and a spring member 9628c that generates a biasing force to move the slide member 9628b toward the incomplete circular arc hole 9625 .

The recessed support portion 9628a merges with the incomplete arc hole 9625 at the left end. Therefore, the slide member 9628b protrudes inside the incomplete arc hole 9625 due to the biasing force of the spring member 9628c.

The slide member 9628b has a lower surface that extends in the left-right direction, and an upper surface that slopes upward toward the spring member 9628c (rightward in front view). Therefore, the action of the slide member 9628b changes depending on the direction in which the transmission protrusion 8613 contacts the slide member 9628b.

For example, when the transmission protrusion 8613 abuts against the slide member 9628b from above, a load that pushes the slide member 9628b to the right is generated at the point of contact. It becomes possible to pass through the position where is placed.

On the other hand, for example, when the transmission protrusion 8613 abuts against the slide member 9628b from below, there is no load that pushes the slide member 9628b to the right at the abutment point, so the slide member 9628b protrudes due to the biasing force of the spring member 9628c. This state is maintained, and the transmission protrusion 8613 cannot pass through the position where the slide member 9628b is arranged.

Next, with reference to FIG. 167, a mode of transmission of driving force between transmission device 9600 and second transmission rod 8550 will be described. As described above, since the second transmission rod 8550 operates integrally with the transmission rod 8530, the operation of the second transmission rod 8550 illustrated in FIG. 167 may be recognized as the operation of the transmission rod 8530. .

167(a) to 167(f) are front views of the transmission device 9600 and the second transmission rod 8550 for explaining the operation of the transmission device 9600 in chronological order. For ease of understanding, the first transmission member 8610 is shown in phantom lines and the upper portion of the second transmission rod 8550 is omitted. Note that FIG. 167 illustrates the operation when the first transmission member 8610 rotates counterclockwise and then rotates clockwise. 167, the second transmission rods 8550 are also referred to as second transmission rods 8550A, 8550B, and 8550C in order from the right side of FIG. 167 (from the side where the ball enters).

FIG. 167( a ) shows the state after the transmission projection 8613 enters the incomplete arc hole 9625 from the end hole 8626 . In this state, the second transmission member 9620 is arranged at the upper end position and each second transmission rod 8550 contacts the upper surface of the second transmission member 9620 . Since the movement of the second transmission member 9620 until it is arranged at the upper end position is a vertical movement, each of the second transmission rods 8550 simultaneously moves upward as the second transmission member 9620 rises.

FIG. 167(b) shows a state in which the first transmission member 8610 has rotated counterclockwise from FIG. In this state, the second transmission member 9620 moves from the upper end position shown in FIG. stays at the top position.

FIG. 167(c) illustrates a state in which the first transmission member 8610 rotates counterclockwise from FIG. In this state, as the transmission protrusion 8613 moves downward, the second transmission member 9620 also moves downward. Since the radial surface (outer peripheral surface) abuts, the second transmission rod 8550 is restrained from descending by the body plate portion 8611 and stays at the position shown in FIG. 167(b).

FIG. 167(d) shows a state in which the first transmission member 8610 rotates in the opposite direction (clockwise when viewed from the front) from FIG. be. In this state, since the transmission projection 8613 passes above the partition plate portion 9627b, the vertical position of the second transmission member 9620 is greatly changed while the arrangement of the transmission projection 8613 is substantially the same as in FIG. 167(b). be able to.

In this state, the second transmission rod 8550C moves downward by the difference between the reduced diameter portion 8614 and the main body plate portion 8611 compared to the state shown in FIG. 167(c). On the other hand, the remaining second transmission rods 8550A, 8550B remain at the positions shown in FIG. 167(c).

FIG. 167(e) illustrates a state in which the first transmission member 8610 rotates clockwise in front view from FIG. 167(d) and the reduced diameter portion 8614 is arranged to face the second transmission rod 8550B. In this state, the second transmission rod 8550B moves downward by the difference between the reduced diameter portion 8614 and the main body plate portion 8611 compared to the state shown in FIG. 167(d). On the other hand, the remaining second transmission rod 8550A remains at the position shown in FIG. 167(d).

FIG. 167(f) illustrates a state in which the first transmission member 8610 rotates clockwise in front view from FIG. 167(e) and the reduced diameter portion 8614 is arranged to face the second transmission rod 8550A. In this state, the second transmission rod 8550A moves downward by the difference between the reduced diameter portion 8614 and the main body plate portion 8611 compared to the state shown in FIG. 167(e).

By further rotating the first transmission member 8610 clockwise from the state shown in FIG. The portion 8613 moves below the partition plate portion 9627b.

When the first transmission member 8610 is reversed and rotates counterclockwise in front view, the transmission projection 8613 avoids the slide member 9628b and moves under the partition plate portion 9627b. Since it returns to the state shown, each of the second transmission rods 8550A-8550C rises all at once.

Therefore, when the transmission device 8600 raises the second transmission rods 8550A to 8550C, the second transmission rods 8550A to 8550C are raised simultaneously, and when the second transmission rods 8550A to 8550C are lowered, the second transmission rods 8550A-8550C can be operated downward in sequence. That is, the operation mode (operation order) can be switched according to the operation direction of the second transmission rods 8550A to 8550C.

Further, by continuously rotating the first transmission member 8610 counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 167( a ), the second transmission member 9620 can be moved up and down in the same manner as in FIG. 147 .

In order to facilitate the realization of this, in the present embodiment, an elastic spring (not shown) is provided to apply an upward biasing force to the second transmission member 9620 from below the second transmission member 9620 in the operation direction. be. The method of disposing this elastic spring is not particularly limited.

Due to the biasing force of the elastic spring, the second transmission member 9620 is biased by gravity without receiving the biasing force of the elastic spring above the intermediate position in the operation direction shown in FIG. 167(c). , and under the intermediate position, it receives the biasing force of the elastic spring against the gravity. Therefore, in the state shown in FIG. 167, the biasing force of the elastic spring is not applied to the second transmission member 9620, and only the biasing force due to gravity is generated.

Here, when the first transmission member 8610 further rotates counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. occurs in a manner that moves upward. Therefore, the transmission projection 8613 of the first transmission member 8610 moves while contacting the lower surface of the incomplete arc hole 9625, and the transmission projection 8613 moves inside the incomplete arc hole 9625 under the partition plate portion 9627b. pass through the side.

This prevents the transmission protrusion 8613 from passing over the partition plate portion 9627b inside the incomplete circular arc hole 9625. Therefore, when the first transmission member 8610 continues to rotate counterclockwise, the transmission projection 8613 (see FIG. 167 ( It is possible to prevent passing through the state shown in e). Therefore, the configuration of this embodiment can be used to realize the operation mode described with reference to FIG.

In this embodiment, the operation mode of the second transmission rod 8550 can be switched by sequentially switching between the operation mode shown in FIG. 167 and the operation mode described above with reference to FIG. Next, the operation of the retractable member 8520 that retracts into the internal flow path INR8 when the first transmission member 8610 operates in the pattern described with reference to FIG.

Next, with reference to FIG. 168, the operation of the projecting/retracting member 8520 of the fifth actuation pattern in this embodiment and the length of time required for the ball to pass through the internal flow path INR8 that changes accordingly will be described.

FIG. 168(a) is a diagram showing changes over time in the rotational direction of the first transmission member 8610 in the fifth operation pattern, and FIG. 168(b) is a change over time in the retractable member 8520A in the fifth operation pattern. FIG. 168(c) is a diagram showing the time-measurement change of the retractable member 8520B in the fifth operation pattern, and FIG. It is the figure which showed the chronological change.

168( a ) to 168 ( d ), the horizontal axis represents the phase change of the first transmission member 8610 . 167(a) counterclockwise by about 5 degrees is assumed to be 0 degrees, and then counterclockwise (indicated as forward rotation in FIG. 168(a)) the angular position is , correspond to the numerical values on the horizontal axis in FIGS. 168(a) to 168(d). In addition, in this embodiment, the first transmission member 8610 is controlled by the drive motor KM1 at a speed of 45 degrees per second except when it is stopped. The value obtained by dividing the actual rotation angle calculated from the axis value by the corresponding angle (45 degrees) represents the number of seconds required for the state change.

The MPU 201 (see FIG. 4) can also control the operation of the retractable member 8520 by inserting a fifth operation pattern described below between the first operation patterns described above as a constant operation after power-on. be. That is, the first operation pattern, the second operation pattern, the third operation pattern, the fourth operation pattern, or the fifth operation pattern are sequentially selected in the preset order, and the operation control proceeds. Operation control of the retractable member 8520 performed after the power is turned on will be described below.

<When operating with the fifth operation pattern>
As shown in FIGS. 168(a) to 168(d), each retractable member 8520A to 8520C is in tension until the rotation angle of the first transmission member 8610 changes from 0 degrees to 180 degrees (for 4 seconds). stay out.

As shown in FIG. 168(a), when the rotation angle of the first transmission member 8610 is 150 degrees, the first transmission member 8610 rotates in the opposite direction (the first transmission member 8610 on the left side in front view is clockwise in front view). The rotation is started, and the direction of rotation is reversed again when 7 seconds have elapsed from the start of rotation from 0 degrees.

When the rotation angle of the first transmission member 8610 reaches 75 degrees along with this rotating operation, the projecting/retracting member 8520C changes state from the extended state to the retracted state (see FIG. 168(d)).

Next, as shown in FIG. 168(c), when the rotation angle of the first transmission member 8610 reaches 20 degrees, the projecting/withdrawing member 8520B changes state from the projecting state to the retracted state. Next, as shown in FIG. 168(b), when the rotation angle of the first transmission member 8610 reaches 25 degrees in the opposite direction, the retractable member 8520A changes state from the protruding state to the retracted state.

Then, just before 8 seconds have passed since the rotation from 0 degrees, each of the projecting/withdrawing members 8520A to 8520C changes state from the retracted state to the extended state. The protruding/withdrawing member 8520 repeats the above-described state change every 8 seconds.

Here, the difference between the fifth operation pattern and the first operation pattern will be explained. Comparing FIG. 156 and FIG. 168, it is the same that the retractable members 8520A to 8520C are in the extended state all at once, and the period until the retracted state of the retractable member 8520 is the same. be. Therefore, when the retractable members 8520 are projected all at once, it is difficult for the player to predict whether the first operation pattern or the fifth operation pattern will be used. can. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the operation mode of the hive member 8520, shoot the balls at the right timing, and form consecutive balls. It is possible to reduce the possibility of being hit by a series of balls at 190 with a high probability.

In addition, since the rotation speed of the drive motor KM1 and the timing of stopping the drive are the same between the first operation pattern and the fifth operation pattern, the difference between the operation patterns is due to the driving sound and vibration of the drive motor KM1. can be difficult to grasp.

In addition, in the fifth operation pattern, the driving direction is reversed unlike the first operation pattern. Therefore, there is a risk that the difference in operation patterns will be recognized by changes in drive sound and vibration that occur during reversal. On the other hand, in the first operation pattern, when the rotation direction of the drive motor KM1 is reversed in the fifth operation pattern, the driving direction is intentionally rotated twice to return the rotation direction to the same direction. It is possible to continue the operation in the first operation pattern while causing changes in the driving sound and vibration that occur in the first operation pattern. This makes it difficult to distinguish between the first operation pattern and the fifth operation pattern from the drive sound and vibration of the drive motor KM1.

FIG. 169 is a diagram showing the relationship between the timing at which the ball enters the internal flow path INR8 and the length of time required for the ball to completely pass through the internal flow path INR8 in the fifth operation pattern. In FIG. 169 the horizontal axis is shown as the phase change of the first transmission member 8610 . 168, the horizontal axis of FIG. corresponds to the numerical value of In this embodiment, the first transmission member 8610 is controlled by the drive motor KM1 at a speed of 45 degrees per second, so the actual rotation angle calculated from the numerical values on the horizontal axis in FIG. The number divided by (45 degrees) represents the number of seconds required for the state change.

In FIG. 169, the vertical axis indicates the time until the ball entering the internal flow path INR8 is discharged from the internal flow path INR8 at the timing of each horizontal axis at intervals of 22.5 degrees on the horizontal axis. For example, when the ball enters the internal flow path INR8 between 0 degrees and 90 degrees on the horizontal axis (for 2 seconds from the start of rotation), the opposing protruding/retracting member 8520 protrudes when flowing down (see FIG. 156 ), and the 3 seconds required to flow down the internal flow path INR8 by the second route RS are the numerical values on the vertical axis.

On the other hand, for example, the ball entering the internal flow path INR8 from 2 seconds after the start of rotation to 8 seconds after the start of rotation is not only in the area where the opposing projecting/retracting member 8520 protrudes when flowing down, but also retreats. It also has a region that is state. In that area, the ball flows down along the first route RF, so the required time is shortened compared to the case where the ball flows down through the second route RS.

Specifically, it takes 2.75 seconds for a ball that enters the internal flow path INR8 at the numerical value of 112.5 degrees on the horizontal axis (2.5 seconds after the start of rotation from 0 degrees) to flow down the internal flow path INR8. From 135 degrees on the horizontal axis (3.0 seconds after the start of rotation from 0 degrees) to 120 degrees on the horizontal axis (4.0 seconds after the start of rotation from 0 degrees) It takes 2.5 seconds for the ball that enters the internal flow path INR8 to flow down the internal flow path INR8, and the value on the horizontal axis is 97.5 degrees (4.5 seconds after the start of rotation from 0 degrees). It takes 2.25 seconds for the ball that enters the internal flow path INR8 to flow down the internal flow path INR8, and the value on the horizontal axis is 75 degrees (5.0 seconds after the start of rotation from 0 degrees). It takes 2.0 seconds for a ball that enters the internal flow path INR8 to flow down the internal flow path INR8 by minus 25 degrees (7.0 seconds after the start of rotation from 0 degrees), and the horizontal axis 22.5 degrees (7.5 seconds after the start of rotation from 0 degrees), it takes 2.5 seconds for the ball entering the internal flow path INR8 to flow down the internal flow path INR8.

As shown in FIG. 169, depending on when the ball enters the internal flow path INR8, the time required for the ball to flow down the internal flow path INR8 can be changed, and the degree of change can be adjusted for a short period of time ( In this embodiment, it can be changed continuously for 6 seconds). It can be changed according to the timing.

In this operation pattern, the degree of reduction in the time required for the ball to flow down the internal flow path INR8 (slope of the part that slopes downward toward the right side of the line graph in FIG. 169) is small compared to the ball entry interval. , the time interval in which consecutive balls are allowed to enter the internal flow path INR8 after the first ball is entered is short.

For example, if the first ball enters the internal flow path INR8 two seconds after the first transmission member 8610 starts rotating from 0 degrees, then it takes three seconds for the ball to flow down the internal flow path INR8. The time is gradually shortened. However, if the second ball hits after 1 second, the interval between the first and second pitches will be 0.5 seconds (boundary of continuous ball formation). , it is necessary to enter the second ball into the internal flow path INR8 within one second from the entry of the first ball. Therefore, it is possible to limit the interval between balls entering the internal flow path INR8 at which consecutive balls can be formed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 169, the time required for the ball to completely flow down the internal flow path INR8 from 2 seconds to 5 seconds after the first transmission member 8610 starts rotating from 0 degrees is the initial Tokh (rotation start 2 seconds to 3 seconds) and terminal Tokb (4 seconds to 5 seconds after the start of rotation), while being constant in the middle Tnom (3 seconds to 4 seconds after the start of rotation). maintained at Therefore, for example, even if two balls similarly enter the internal flow path INR8 at intervals of 0.5 seconds, it is possible to hit consecutive balls depending on when those balls enter the internal flow path INR8. It can be changed whether it can be formed or not.

For example, when two balls enter the internal flow path INR8 at an interval of 0.5 seconds in the initial Tokh or the terminal Tokb, compare the time required for the previous ball to flow down the internal flow path INR8 Then, the time required for the subsequent balls to flow down the internal flow path INR8 is shortened by 0.25 seconds, so the interval between the two balls is 0.25 seconds, and when discharging from the internal flow path INR8 can form a continuous ball.

On the other hand, when two balls enter the internal flow path INR8 at an interval of 0.5 seconds in the middle Tnom, the time required for the first ball to flow down the internal flow path INR8 and the subsequent ball are Since the time required to flow down the internal flow path INR8 is the same, the interval between the two spheres remains unchanged at 0.5 seconds. Therefore, continuous balls cannot be formed when discharged from the internal flow path INR8.

In this operation pattern, the middle stage Tnom, which cannot form a continuous ball even if a ball enters the ball at intervals of 0.5 seconds, can form a continuous ball if the ball is entered at intervals of 0.5 seconds. Since it is sandwiched between the two, it is possible to change whether or not a ream can be formed every short period of time (for example, 1 second, which is the time of the intermediate Tnom). This makes it possible to improve attention to the timing at which the ball enters the internal flow path INR8.

Here, by confirming the operation mode of the protruding/withdrawing member 8520, the player can grasp the launching timing that facilitates the formation of continuous balls, thereby allowing the player to select the launching mode of the ball. Therefore, it is possible to improve the attention to the haunting member 8520 of the player who wants to form consecutive balls using the pre-winning falling-down device 8520 .

On the other hand, in the present operation pattern and the first operation pattern, the operation mode of the retractable member 8520 is very similar except that the order in which the retractable members 8520A to 8520C are set to the retracted state is reversed. It is difficult to know in which actuation pattern the 8520 is operating. In addition, the present operation pattern and the first operation pattern differ at least partially in the timing at which it is easy to form a continuous ball by making the ball enter the internal flow path INR8. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to adjust the shooting timing of the ball and make it easier to form consecutive balls. As a result, the possibility of the pachinko machine 10 being attacked (for example, the ball is entered into the movable ball entry accessory device 190 with a high probability) can be reduced.

In addition, in this operation pattern and the first operation pattern, there is a period of 4 seconds to 5 seconds after the first transmission member 8610 starts rotating from 0 degrees, during which continuous balls are easily formed. It is formed. Therefore, regardless of whether the operation is performed in this operation pattern or in the first operation pattern, the internal flow path INR8 is driven within 4 seconds to 5 seconds after the first transmission member 8610 starts rotating from 0 degrees. A player can form consecutive balls with a high probability by hitting balls so as to enter a plurality of balls.

Thus, as a game method capable of forming continuous balls with a high probability, the player is encouraged to play a game in which balls are hit intensively during 4 to 5 seconds after the first transmission member 8610 starts rotating from 0 degrees. be able to.

With reference to FIG. 170, the difference between the operation patterns described above will be described. FIG. 170 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the operation pattern and each parameter in formation of the ream.

In FIG. 170, as each parameter in the continuous ball formation, the maximum number of continuous ball formation Nmax, which is the maximum number of balls that can be put together (a ball can be entered into the movable ball entry device 190 by opening the movable piece 190a once). , the maximum permissible period Tmax as the maximum value of the difference in the timing of entering the two balls forming the continuous ball, and the entering ball at intervals of 0.5 seconds while the first transmission member 8610 performs one cycle operation. A continuous ball formation period Tcha as a period during which a ball can be formed is shown. It should be noted that the case where the ball can enter the internal flow path INR8 at intervals of 0.5 seconds at the shortest and the interval between the balls is reduced to within 0.5 seconds will be described as the case where consecutive balls are formed. .

Specifically, when the operation is controlled by the first operation pattern, the expected maximum number of continuous balls Nmax is 4, the maximum allowable period Tmax is 1.5 seconds, and the continuous continuous ball formation period Tcha is 2.0. seconds.

When the operation is controlled by the second operation pattern, the expected maximum number of continuous balls Nmax is 3, the maximum allowable period Tmax is 1.5 seconds, and the continuous continuous ball formation period Tcha is 0.5 seconds.

In the second operation pattern, unlike the first operation pattern, there is a period during which no consecutive balls are formed even if a ball is entered at intervals of 0.5 seconds during the maximum allowable period Tmax.

That is, when the ball P1 enters the internal flow path INR8 as the first ball, even if the ball P2 (with a 0.5 second interval from the ball P1) enters, a continuous ball is not formed (see FIG. 159). On the other hand, when the ball P1 enters the internal flow path INR8 as the first ball, after the ball P2 enters, the ball P3 (1.0 seconds apart from the ball P1) enters, or the ball P2 enters Regardless of whether or not the ball is entered, the ball P4 (1.5 seconds apart from the ball P1) enters the ball, forming a continuous ball between the ball P1 and the ball P3 or between the ball P1 and the ball P4.

Therefore, when the ball P1 enters the internal flow path INR8 as the first ball, the case where the ball P3 or the ball P4 enters with a gap is more favorable than the case where the ball P2 enters immediately after. The profit that the player can obtain in terms of formation of consecutive balls is increased.

On the other hand, when the ball P3 enters the internal flow path INR8 as the first ball, a continuous ball is formed only when the ball P4 (0.5 seconds apart from the ball P3) enters. Therefore, when the ball P3 enters the internal flow path INR8 as the first ball, it is better to enter the ball P4 immediately after it than to enter the other balls. The profit that the player can obtain in terms of surface is increased.

Thus, in the second operation pattern, the difference in whether the first ball is the ball P1 or the ball P3 causes the time difference until the second ball enters the internal flow path INR8. The best number in varies. Since the difference in entry timing between the ball P1 and the ball P3 is only 1 second, the ball entered the internal flow path INR8 at the timing of the ball P1 during the game, or entered the internal flow path INR8 at the timing of the ball P3. Since it is difficult to recognize whether the ball is hit, it is difficult to determine whether a continuous ball is formed when the next ball is hit immediately after (ball P4 against ball P3). It can be difficult for the player to recognize whether consecutive balls are formed in the case (ball P4 for ball P1).

As a result, when a plurality of balls enter the internal flow path INR8, it is difficult to determine whether continuous balls are formed until they are actually discharged from the internal flow path INR8. It is possible to improve attention to the ball flowing down INR8.

When the operation is controlled by the third operation pattern, the expected maximum number of continuous balls Nmax is 3, the maximum allowable period Tmax is 1.0 seconds, and the continuous continuous ball formation period Tcha is 2.5 seconds.

That is, in the third operation pattern, compared to the first operation pattern, there is a longer period of time from when the first ball enters the internal flow path INR8 to when the second ball enters and it is possible to form a continuous ball. While this is narrowed, the period during which the first ball enters the internal flow path INR8 (at intervals of 0.5 seconds) and a consecutive ball can be formed is widened. Therefore, it is possible to increase the probability of forming consecutive balls when two balls enter the top opening 8512 in succession.

When the operation is controlled by the fourth operation pattern, the expected maximum number of continuous balls Nmax is 2, the maximum allowable period Tmax is 0.5 seconds, and the continuous continuous ball formation period Tcha is 2.0 seconds.

That is, in the fourth actuation pattern, compared to the first actuation pattern, there is a longer period of time from when the first ball enters the internal flow path INR8 to when the second ball enters and it is possible to form consecutive balls. be narrowed. Therefore, when a ball enters the internal flow path INR8 at the timing (for example, at intervals of 1 second) at which continuous balls could be formed in the first operation pattern, continuous balls are not formed in this operation pattern. can be

When the operation is controlled by the fifth operation pattern, the expected maximum number of continuous balls Nmax is 2, the maximum allowable period Tmax is 0.5 seconds, and the continuous continuous ball formation period Tcha is 2.0 seconds (divided 1.0 seconds + 1.0 seconds).

That is, in the fifth operation pattern, compared to the first operation pattern, there is a longer period of time from when the first ball enters the internal flow path INR8 to when the second ball enters and it is possible to form consecutive balls. It is narrowed to 0.5 seconds and the period of forming consecutive balls when such two balls enter is divided by two every second. That is, the period during which the balls entering the internal flow path INR8 at intervals of 0.5 seconds can form continuous balls, and the period during which the balls entering the internal flow path INR8 at intervals of 0.5 seconds cannot form continuous balls. , and the switching interval between the period in which continuous balls can be formed and the period in which continuous balls cannot be formed can be shortened.

In this case, the timing of two balls entering the internal flow path INR8 can be prevented from being formed either when the timing of forming a continuous ball is one second behind or one second earlier than the timing of forming a continuous ball. . Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's attention to the timing when two balls enter the internal flow path INR8.

Thus, each operation pattern has its own characteristics. By sequentially switching these operation patterns and controlling the operation, for example, when the retracting member 8520 is in the same state, even if the ball enters the internal flow path INR8 at the same interval, a continuous ball is formed and a continuous ball is formed. Since it is possible to create a case where it is not formed, it is possible to prevent boredom when playing for a long time, and the pachinko machine 10 can capture (for example, enter a ball by connecting balls to the movable ball entry accessory device 190 with a high probability). ) can be reduced.

Next, a tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 171 to 174. FIG. In the eighth embodiment, the case where the flow mode of the ball flowing down the internal flow path INR8 is switched by changing the state of the hive member 8520 has been described. has a removal device 10560 that overhangs the internal flow path INR8 and acts on the sphere in a different manner of operation. The structure of the pre-winning streaming device 10500 in the tenth embodiment is the same as that of the pre-winning streaming device 8500 in the eighth embodiment except that the removal device 10560 is provided. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

171 and 172 are partial cross-sectional views of the pre-winning streaming device 10500 in the tenth embodiment along the line corresponding to the CLIII-CLII line in FIG. 148, and FIG. FIG. 10 is a partial cross-sectional view of the flow-down device 10500; 171 shows the retracted state of the removing device 10560, and FIGS. 172 and 173 show the extended state of the removing device 10560. FIG.

The removing device 10560 includes a plate-like main body plate portion 10561 arranged in the inner space of the ceiling plate portion 8542 of the back side device 8540 and movable in the vertical direction on the lower surface of the ceiling plate portion 8542, and the body plate portion 10561. A plurality of protruding portions 10562 projecting downward from the lower surface at positions corresponding to the retractable member 8520, a spring member 10563 for generating an urging force to move the main body plate portion 10561 to the retracted position, and the spring member 10563. and a solenoid 10564 that generates a driving force for pushing down and displacing the main body plate portion 10561 to the position of the overhanging state against the urging force of the solenoid 10564 .

When viewed from the moving direction of the main body plate portion 10561 (perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 173), the projecting portion 10562 defines a range in which the projecting/retracting member 8520 protrudes into the internal flow path INR8 when the projecting/retracting member 8520 protrudes to the inner side of the outer shape. , and the removal device 10560 protrudes up to a position where it can contact the ball when it is in an extended state (half the diameter in the height direction of the ball (vertical direction in FIG. 172)).

One end of the spring member 10563 is supported by the ceiling plate portion 8542 and the other end supports the body plate portion 10561 . A side surface of the body plate portion 10561 facing the solenoid 10564 is inclined upward as the distance from the solenoid 10564 increases.

Accordingly, as the solenoid 10564 expands and contracts in the horizontal direction, the main body plate portion 10561 moves up and down by the vertical change in the contact position between the main body plate portion 10561 and the solenoid 10564 due to the inclination of the main body plate portion 10561 . . That is, from the retracted state shown in FIG. 171, the solenoid 10564 is energized to expand and contract, and the state changes to the expanded state shown in FIGS. On the other hand, when the excitation of the solenoid 10564 is released, the main body plate portion 10561 rises due to the biasing force of the spring member 10563 and changes its state to the retracted state.

Here, the movement of the retractable member 8520 is in the front-rear direction, while the movement of the protrusion 10562 is in the vertical direction (perpendicular to the front-rear direction). The projecting portion 10562 can be operated regardless of the operation mode of the retractable member 8520 . Thereby, the degree of freedom of motion control can be improved.

In the extended state, as shown in FIGS. 172 and 173, the protruding portion 10562 protrudes up to a position where it can contact the ball (half the diameter in the height direction of the ball (vertical direction in FIG. 172)). Therefore, regardless of whether the projecting/withdrawing member 8520 is in the retracted state or the overhanging state, the ball flowing down the internal flow path INR8 comes into contact with the projecting portion 10562 and flows down along the second route RS.

Therefore, by setting the removing device 10560 in the overhanging state, regardless of the operation pattern of the projecting/retracting member 8520, the time required for the ball to completely flow down the internal flow path INR8 can be made unchanged, and the formation of the continuous ball can be made unchanged. can be suppressed.

In other words, when the removing device 10560 is in the retracted state, there is a possibility that continuous balls can be formed by the operation mode of the retractable member 8520, but when the removing device 10560 is in the extended state, Regardless of how the retractable member 8520 operates, it is possible to suppress the formation of continuous balls. That is, the removing device 10560 can eliminate the ream-forming effect of the retractable member 8520 .

Examples of operation patterns (sixth operation pattern, seventh operation pattern) in this embodiment will be described below.

FIG. 174(a) is a time chart for explaining the state change flow of the removal device 10560 in the sixth operation pattern, and FIG. 174(b) is the state change flow of the removal device 10560 in the seventh operation pattern. It is a time chart explaining. In addition, in the sixth operation pattern and the seventh operation pattern, the projecting/withdrawing member 8520 is controlled to be operable in any one of the above-described operation patterns (first to fifth operation patterns).

First, the sixth operation pattern will be explained. The MPU 201 (see FIG. 4) can control the operation of the removal device 10560 in a sixth operation pattern described below as an operation triggered by the opening operation of the movable piece 190a. Operation control of the removal device 10560 will be described below.

<When operating with the sixth operation pattern>
As shown in FIG. 174(a), in the sixth operation pattern, when the game state is the normal game state or the small winning game state, the removing device 10560 is in the retracted state, while the game state is , In the case of the jackpot game state, the removal device 10560 is in the overhanging state.

Thus, in the sixth operating pattern, in the normal game state or the small win game state, the action of the protruding/retracting member 8520 changes the flow of the ball flowing down the internal flow path INR8 to maintain the action of forming continuous balls. On the other hand, in the jackpot gaming state, it is possible to suppress the formation of consecutive balls flowing down the internal flow path INR8.

Therefore, according to this operation pattern, until the state of the big win game is entered, the possibility of winning the big win is increased by increasing the possibility that the balls enter the movable ball-entering accessory device 190 in a row. In this state, by suppressing the formation of consecutive balls, balls enter the movable ball entry accessory device 190 in a row just before the end of the round game, so that more balls than the round prescribed number (so-called count number) win a prize. This (so-called over-winning) can be suppressed.

Further, the internal flow path INR8 can be a flow path having different effects on the falling balls in the case of the normal game state or the small winning game state and in the case of the big winning game state. As a result, the flow paths are arranged in comparison with the case where the ball flow path is switched to change the ball flow mode between the normal game state or the small win game state and the big win game state. The space can be reduced, and the flow-down mode of the ball can be efficiently changed in a game area with a limited area.

Next, the seventh operation pattern will be explained. The MPU 201 (see FIG. 4) can control the operation of the removing device 10560 in a seventh operation pattern described below as an operation triggered by the opening operation of the movable piece 190a. Operation control of the removal device 10560 will be described below.

<When operating with the seventh operation pattern>
As shown in FIG. 174(b), in the seventh operation pattern, when the game state is the normal game state or the small winning game state, the removing device 10560 is in the retracted state, while the game state is , In the case of a jackpot game state, the removal device 10560 is put into a protruded state at the same time as the round game of each round is started, and is in a retracted state within a prescribed time of the round game (for example, 10 seconds after the start of the round game). can be switched to

Thus, in the seventh operation pattern, in the normal game state or the small win game state, the action of the projection/retraction member 8520 changes the flow of the ball flowing down the internal flow path INR8 to maintain the action of forming continuous balls. On the other hand, in the jackpot game state, for a predetermined period from the start of the round game of each round, the balls flowing down the internal flow path INR8 are inhibited from forming continuous balls, and the internal flow is performed at the same intervals as the balls enter the internal flow path INR8. On the other hand, the balls flowing down the internal flow path INR8 after the lapse of a predetermined period of time while being ejected from the path INR8 (the balls are ejected while maintaining the distance between the balls), there is a possibility of continuous ball formation due to the action of the projecting/retracting member 8520. To rise.

Therefore, according to this operation pattern, the possibility of winning a big win can be increased by increasing the possibility of balls entering the movable ball-entering accessory device 190 in a row until entering the big win game state. In the jackpot game state, the number of prizes won can be easily managed by making the big winning port switch 190b win at intervals before a predetermined period of time elapses from the start of the round game of each round, and after the elapse of the predetermined period of time, consecutive balls can be managed. is formed, and the consecutive balls are made to enter the big winning opening switch 190b.

As a result, it is highly possible to win a prize until just before the specified number of the round game and stop the launching of the balls (maintain just before the end of the round game), and then to win consecutive balls to the big prize opening switch 190b. This can be realized, and the possibility of over-winning can be increased.

Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiments, the present invention is by no means limited to the above embodiments, and it will be easily understood that various modifications and improvements are possible without departing from the scope of the present invention. It can be inferred.

In each of the above embodiments, part or all of the configuration in one embodiment may be combined with or replaced with part or all of the configuration in another embodiment to form another embodiment.

In each of the above-described embodiments, a case has been described in which the game ball that enters the second branch area 420 of the second flow-down device 400 falls immediately after reaching the first delay preparation hole 423, but it is not necessarily limited to this. No. For example, by the driving force of a driving device such as a solenoid, it is provided with a blocking member that protrudes inside the first delay preparation hole 423 for a predetermined period to prevent the game ball from falling. The game ball may be prevented from falling until another game ball that is headed passes through the specific area hole 440.例文帳に追加In this case, the length of the second delay guiding channel R6 can be shortened, and the space occupied by the channel formed by the second flow-down device 400 can be saved.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the sorting body 322 is arranged separately from the driving means has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a locking member that protrudes toward the sorting body 322 every predetermined period may be provided, and the sorting body 322 may be fixed every predetermined period by the action of the locking member. In this case, when the distribution body 322 is fixed in the equilibrium state, if only one game ball reaches and contacts the distribution body 322, the distribution body 322 is not rotated, and the game ball enters the special route hole 323. flow down That is, even when only one game ball enters the first flow-down device 300, a period can be generated in which the game ball enters the special route hole 323 for each predetermined period.

In each of the embodiments described above, the case where the sorting body 322 rotates has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the distribution body 322 may slide left and right.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the frictional resistance generated between the shaft support rod 322f and the resistance extending portion 322d of the sorting body 322 changes according to the rotation angle has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. . For example, it rotates coaxially with the sorting body 322, does not engage until the sorting body 322 changes from the equilibrium state to the first angle state, and does not engage until the sorting body 322 changes from the first angle state to the second angle state. may comprise an engaging member that engages and rotates in synchronism with the sorting body 322 . In this case, only the rotational resistance of the sorting body 322 is applied from the equilibrium state to the first angle state, while from the first angle state to the second angle state, in addition to the rotational resistance of the sorting body 322, the engaging member Since the resistance of the engaging member due to the weight of the weight of the distribution member 322 is applied to the distribution member 322, the easiness of rotation of the distribution member 322 can be changed. The manner of engagement is not particularly limited, and for example, engagement may be performed from the inside of the fan-shaped portion 322a or from the outside of the fan-shaped portion 322a.

In each of the above embodiments, when a plurality of game balls pass through the defined area hole 340, which specific area switch 441a to 443a the game ball passing through the specific area later passes is determined by which game ball Although the case of random selection regardless of passing through the specific area switches 441a to 443a has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the later game ball may pass through specific area switches 442a and 443a that give a greater profit to the player than the specific area switches 441a to 443a through which the previous game ball passed. In this case, the player can continue to improve his/her interest while watching the flow of the game ball.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the big winning opening switch 190b is normally closed has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the big winning opening switch 190b may be open all the time. In this case, since the state is such that the player can always aim to win a big win, the player's interest can be improved.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the determination values of the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 are all set as the same small hit determination value, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be set as a different small hit determination value. In this case, for example, half of the determination values may correspond to determination values with time reduction after the big win, and the remaining determination values may correspond to determination values without time reduction after the big win. As a result, it is possible to sort whether or not the time saving will be added after the big hit without using the time saving switch 209d.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the corresponding drive device (for example, the retention solenoid 413) operates for a predetermined period after passing through the defined area switch 340a has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be configured to perform a certain operation based on the operation timing of the movable piece 190a of the movable ball-entering accessory device 190. FIG. In this case, the drive maintenance period of the drive device (for example, retention solenoid 413 ) is set to be longer than the longest period required for the game ball to pass through the first flow-down device 300 and reach the flow-down prevention plate 412 .

In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where each retractable member 8520 is driven by the single drive motor KM1 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, each retractable member 8520A to 8520C may be driven by a separate driving device (eg, solenoid). In this case, it is possible to easily set both the projecting/withdrawing members 8520A and 8520C in a common state and only the middle projecting/withdrawing member 8520B in a different state.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the front and rear wall surfaces of the internal flow path INR8 have parallel planar shapes, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, between the projecting members 8520 adjacent to each other on the left and right, a rail-shaped curved wall surface that is a member that guides the ball flowing down along the second route RS at the bent position of the second route RS and that is curved and extended is arranged. may be set. In this case, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball clogging due to collision in the front-rear direction between the ball rebounding back and forth between the retractable members 8520 and the ball coming later. On the other hand, ball clogging can make it easier to form consecutive balls.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where each projecting member 8520 projects horizontally has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may appear and disappear in such a manner as to protrude upward from the bottom surface of the internal flow path INR8. In this case, the flow path of the spheres flowing down the internal flow path INR8 can be switched between a straight path extending in the horizontal direction and a curved path bending in the vertical direction, thereby suppressing the width of the internal flow path INR8 in the front-rear direction. can do. As a result, the ball that flows down the internal flow path INR8 can always be arranged at a position (front side) that is easy for the player to see.

Also, the floor itself on which the ball rolls may perform an operation to change the vertical inclination angle. In this case, the ball does not decelerate due to contact with the member, but the falling speed of the rolling ball can be adjusted by adjusting the inclination angle, so that the ball can flow smoothly.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the case in which the retractable member 8520 moves in translation has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the projecting/withdrawing member 8520 may protrude by axial rotation.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the projecting/withdrawing member 8520 is maintained in the projecting state even after the second transmission rod 8550 descends has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, by disposing an elastic member that biases the retractable member 8520 toward the retracted position, the retractable member 8520 may be changed to the retracted state when the second transmission rod 8550 descends. In this case, the state of the retractable member 8520 corresponds to the state of the second transmission rod 8550 on a one-to-one basis.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the projecting member 8520 is caused to project and retract into the interior of the internal flow path INR8, and the ball and the projecting member 8520 come into contact with each other, thereby changing the flow-down manner of the ball. It is not something that can be done. For example, instead of the second transmission rod 8550, a magnet may be moved closer and farther outside the internal flow path INR8, and the ball may be decelerated by the action of the magnetic force. In this case, while the ball flows down the same path, it is possible to change the flow pattern of the ball (change pattern of the flow speed) depending on the timing of the flow.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the internal flow path INR8, in which the retractable member 8520 appears and retracts, is arranged on the upstream side of the movable piece 190a of the movable ball-entering accessory device 190 has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the retractable member 8510 may be configured to appear and retract in the introduction passage 310 arranged downstream of the movable piece 190a. In this case, since it is possible to change the positional deviation of the balls that enter the movable ball-entering accessory device 190 at different timings by the action of the retractable member 8520, when entering the movable ball-entering accessory device 190, the positional deviation can be changed. With respect to the timing deviation, it is possible to change the timing deviation when the ball enters the route distribution section 320 . As a result, even when a plurality of balls enter the movable ball-entering accessory device 190 at the same timing, it is possible to change the flow-down manner of the balls after the introduction passage 310, thereby changing the flow-down manner of the balls. You can diversify.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the switching of the operation order according to the operation direction of the second transmission rod 8550 is performed by the first transmission member 8610 that rotates and the second transmission member 8620 that translates, but this is not necessarily the case. It is not limited. For example, the operation sequence of the second transmission rod 8550 is switched by a cylindrical music box member that rotates around an axis (rotational axis) that intersects the translational axis of the second transmission rod 8550 and whose outer peripheral surface abuts the second transmission rod 8550. may be performed.

That is, the cylindrical music box member has a bulge that bulges radially outward by a predetermined angle in an arc shape centered on the rotation axis on a plane that is perpendicular to the rotation axis and includes the translation direction axis of the second transmission rod 8550. have a department. When this bulging portion faces the second transmission rod 8550 side, the second transmission rod 8550 moves upward by the amount of the bulging portion, and when the bulging portion does not face the second transmission rod 8550 side, the second transmission rod 8550 moves upward. A bar 8550 is positioned at the lower end of its range of motion.

The cylindrical music box member is formed by arranging the bulging portions at positions corresponding to the second transmission rods 8550A to 8550C such that the circumferential length and arrangement thereof produce the desired movement of the second transmission rod 8550. is rotated, the operation order can be switched according to the operation direction of the second transmission rod 8550 by driving force transmission similar to a music box. This allows switching of the operation order of the second transmission expansion 8550 with a single cylindrical music box member.

In addition, the bulging portion may change the degree of expansion in a plurality of stages as it moves in the circumferential direction. In this case, the movement width of the retractable member 8520 can be changed in a plurality of steps, making it difficult to target the firing timing from the state of the retractable member 8520 .

In each of the above-described embodiments, a case has been described in which a ball entering the top opening 8512 is distributed to the left and right by the distribution device 8543, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, on the downstream side of the top opening 8512 and on the upstream side of the sorting device 8543, the ball is moved downward to the sorting device 8543 in the retracted state, and the ball is restricted from going to the sorting device 8543 in the out state. However, an electric guide means may be provided to allow the ball to enter either the left or right internal flow path INR8. In this case, when the electric guide means is in the extended state, the ball that has entered the top opening 8512 can be flowed down exclusively to one of the internal flow paths INR8 without being sorted. As a result, even if a plurality of balls enter the top opening 8512 in the same way, the balls can be distributed to a plurality of flow paths to shorten the length of the group of balls, and the balls can flow down to a single flow path. A change can be produced when the length of the group of spheres becomes longer.

In addition, as a mode of appearance and retraction of the electric guide means, for example, a fixed action mode that is performed when the power is turned on, a fixed action mode that is performed based on the timing of the opening operation of the movable piece 190a in the jackpot game state, etc. exemplified. For example, in the normal state, the electric guide means is in the recessed state, and in the jackpot game state, the electric guide means is in the out state. While it is possible to enter a ball as a ball (a ball can be entered from the left and right movable pieces 190a), in the jackpot game state, the row of the group of balls is long, so let's make four balls enter as a continuous ball with a single opening operation. However, it is possible to cause a change such that it is too late for the opening period (the limit is about 3). As a result, the number of continuous balls formed can be changed while the operation mode of the retractable member 8520 remains the same.

In each of the above-described embodiments, a case has been described in which the group of the pair of left and right retractable members 8520 perform left-right symmetrical operations except that one drive motor KM2 is stopped, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, groups of left and right retractable members 8520 may simultaneously operate in different operation patterns, or control may be performed such that the operation start timings of the groups of left and right retractable members 8520 are shifted.

In each of the above-described embodiments, by making the transmission rods 8520 and 8550 invisible from the front side, it is difficult to grasp the load applied to the ball by the projecting/retracting member 8520 from the appearance of the projecting/retracting member 8520. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the internal flow path INR8 may be arranged rearward from the glass surface to make it difficult to visually recognize the state, the lighting around the internal flow path INR8 may be dimmed to make it difficult to visually recognize, or it may be arranged on the front side of the liquid crystal device. It may be possible to make it difficult to grasp the state of the internal flow path INR8 by blinding the user with a light emitting effect by a provided light guide plate or the like.

In each of the above-described embodiments, when the movable piece 190a operates immediately after the ball has entered each of the starting prize-winning openings 26 to 28, a case has been described in which it is notified that the ball is continuously entering the top opening 8512. It is not necessarily limited to this. For example, each starting winning port 26 to 28 is formed to be able to store (hold) the number of winnings, and the consecutive balls can be moved in relation to the subsequent opening operation (withheld opening operation), not the latest opening operation. If the ball can be entered into the entering ball accessory device 190, the above notification may be made. In this case, compared to the case where the movable piece 190a opens immediately after winning a prize, the period until the movable piece 190a operates can be longer, so the period during which the notification can be made can be taken longer. can. Therefore, it is possible to increase the flexibility of the notification mode. For example, it is possible to provide notification in a form of counting down toward the best firing timing in terms of continuous ball formation.

In each of the above-described embodiments, a case has been described where various notifications are mainly given by voice/lamp, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a known liquid crystal device may be used to give various notifications. In this case, since the player's attention can be focused on the liquid crystal device at the time of notification, it is possible to divert the player's line of sight from the falling state of the ball.

In the above-described third embodiment, the case where the pair of guide rails 3321 on which the game ball rolls is formed in a downwardly convex curved shape has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, a pair of guide rails 3321 are formed from linear shapes that intersect at one point, and a large special route hole 3323 configured to allow game balls to fall is formed outside the intersecting position, and the guide rails 3321 are formed. When the falling game ball collides at the intersection position, the game ball is blown outward by the collision, reaches the special route hole 3323, and falls, while if it does not collide, the end of the guide rail 3321 The game ball may roll to the end and drop into a normal route hole 3324 provided near the end of the guide rail 3321 . In this case, since the game ball falls into the special route hole 3323 after being thrown outward by the collision of the game ball, the game ball can be dropped into the special route hole 3323 without waiting for the game ball to decelerate. can. Therefore, when the game ball falls into the special route hole 3323, the falling speed of the game ball can be improved.

In the above-described third embodiment, the case where the central rail portion 3321a is shared by a pair of guide rails 3321 has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, a central rail portion 3321a may be separately provided for each pair of guide rails 3321, and the distance between the central rail portions 3321a may be the distance at which rolling game balls interfere with each other. In this case, for example, one central rail portion 3321a is formed in a meandering rail shape, and the other central rail portion 3321a is formed in a straight rail shape. The degree of interference between game balls (the projected area in the direction of travel of the game balls) is different, and it is possible to change the flow-down mode of the game balls after collision.

As a result, it is possible to change the period until the ball falls into the special route hole 3323 after collision for each collision position. The period until the ball is entered can be changed), and the state of the movable plate 421a that automatically operates in the second flow-down device 400 can be seen to suppress the timing shot of shooting the game ball.

In the sixth embodiment, the entrance opening 6440i of the specific area hole 6440 is configured with a shape corresponding to the three specific area holes 6441 to 6443, and the profit increasing device 6450 is configured with two rotating members. has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the specific area hole is composed of 4 holes with different benefits (for example, the specific area hole with different numbers of rounds of 16 rounds, 12 rounds, 7 rounds, and 3 rounds of the jackpot), and the entrance opening 6440i corresponds to it. shape (four-pronged hole shape) so that the profit augmentation device 6450 consists of three rotating members placed at the entrances of the three specific area holes excluding the maximum profit specific area hole. Also good. In this case, it is possible to make the game more complicated when a plurality of game balls flow into the timed branch area 6410 .

Here, each of the three rotating members has a lower profit than the specific area hole directly below (the position where the game ball that rotates the rotating member flows down as it is). It is configured in such a manner that it is closed depending on the state after operation. In this case, for example, on the premise that only one game ball is accommodated in each specific area hole, if four or more game balls flow into the timed branch area 6410, the game balls will fill all the specific areas. Since the game ball passes through the hole, the maximum profit can be obtained. Since the game ball passed through the hole, the player can obtain the maximum profit. It is difficult to let

Here, for example, when two game balls flow into the timed branch area 6410 in a row, the first game ball is guided to a specific area hole that gives the second highest profit (one level below the maximum profit). By arranging the guide device on the upstream side of the specific area hole, the rotating member operated by the action of the game ball closes the specific area hole that gives the third and fourth benefits. Playing balls can be directed to specific area holes that provide maximum profit.

Also, for example, when two game balls flow into the timed branch area 6410 in a row, the first game ball flows into a specific area hole that gives the third highest profit (two points below the maximum profit). A slide delay device that projects for a short period of time and causes a game ball that is about to flow down to a specific area hole that gives the second highest profit (one level below the maximum profit) to flow down to a higher profit specific area hole side. may be provided. In this case, two game balls flow into the timed branch area 6410, and on the premise that the previous game ball flows into the specific area hole that gives the third highest profit, the previous game ball When the later game ball flows down the specific area hole that gives the second highest profit within a short time after flowing into the game ball, the slide delay device acts on the later game ball, and the later game ball It can be made to flow down to the specific area hole side with the highest profit.

For example, when a game ball flows into a specific area hole that gives the fourth highest profit, the slide delay device projects for a short period of time to give the second highest profit (one level below the maximum profit). A game ball that is about to flow down to a specific area hole or a specific area hole that gives the third highest profit (two profits below the maximum profit) may flow down to a higher profit specific area hole side. In this case, when the first game ball flows into the specific area hole that gives the fourth highest profit, and the later game ball reaches the entrance opening of the specific area hole within a short time after that, the slide delay occurs. Due to the action of the device, later game balls can be made to flow down to the specific area side with higher profit.

Also, when three game balls flow into the timed branch area 6410, the profit obtained by entering the specific area hole with the third highest profit of the first game ball and operating the rotating member is Since the lowest specified area hole is blocked, one of the remaining two game balls will pass through the specified area hole that maximizes the profit to be obtained.

Therefore, for example, when three game balls flow into the timed branch area 6410 in a row, the first game ball is guided to a specific area hole that gives the third highest profit (two points below the maximum profit). By arranging the guide device on the upstream side of the specific area hole, it is possible to guide either one of the subsequent game balls to the specific area hole that gives the maximum profit.

The same thing can be said when the number of game balls flowing into the timed branch area 6410 is two. This is also true when the number of specific area holes is five or more. That is, when the specific area hole 6440 is composed of n (n is a natural number) holes that provide different benefits, and m (m is a natural number, m<n) game balls flow into the time branch area 6410, If the first game ball flows down into the specific area hole that gives the m-th highest profit from the top, the subsequent game ball is prevented from flowing into the specific area hole that gives the profit below it. of the playing balls will flow down the most profitable specific area hole. Therefore, the player can win the maximum profit (16 round jackpot).

Therefore, the number (m) of game balls flowing into the timed branch area 6410 and the profit order (n1) of the specific area hole containing the first game ball are detected, and a predetermined relationship (m≧ If n1) is satisfied, any of the subsequent game balls will pass through the specific area hole to which the maximum profit is awarded, so when the relationship is satisfied, the maximum profit acquisition effect is performed. Also good. As a result, the player can watch the game ball flowing down the timed branch area 6410 with peace of mind.

In the seventh embodiment, the case where the screw member 7453 is constantly driven has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be driven for several seconds (for example, 1 second) every time it is driven for several seconds (for example, 10 seconds). In this case, it is possible to check the posture of the screw member 7453 and suppress the timing strike for shooting the game ball.

In the above-described eighth embodiment, the case where the pre-winning flowing-down device 8500 moves closer in the front-rear direction at the time of assembly has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, in the configuration in which the components are moved close to each other from the top and bottom to assemble, after assembling in the previous process, the assembly may be fitted into the opening 8013a and fastened and fixed to the game board 8013 . In this case, since the front side device 8510 or the back side device 8540 can be replaced only after the assembly is removed, it is possible to lengthen the process up to the replacement, thereby preventing fraudulent member replacement. can be done.

In the eighth embodiment, the case where the angle formed by the facing surface of the collision part 8521 that contacts the ball and the front and rear wall surfaces of the internal flow path INR8 is greater than 45 degrees has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. . For example, the angle may be smaller than 45 degrees. In this case, when the ball collides with the collision part 8521, the component of the load applied from the ball to the projecting/withdrawn member 8520 in the movement direction of the projecting/withdrawn member 8520 becomes large. , the load required for its movement can be reduced. Therefore, even if the momentum of the ball is weakened, the projecting/withdrawing member 8520 can be moved by the load from the ball.

In the tenth embodiment described above, the retractable member 8520 operates under constant operation control from the time the power is turned on, and the removing device 10560 is operated under control based on the opening operation of the movable piece 190a in the jackpot game state. It is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the removal device 10560 may be operated under constant operation control from the time the power is turned on, or the retractable member 8520 may be operated and controlled based on the opening operation of the movable piece 190a in the jackpot game state.

In the tenth embodiment described above, the retractable member 8520 operates under constant operation control from the time the power is turned on, and the removing device 10560 is operated under control based on the opening operation of the movable piece 190a in the jackpot game state. It is not necessarily limited to this. For example, at least one of the retractable member 8520 or the removal device 10560 may operate in response to the ball entering each of the start winning openings 26-28. In this case, for example, it is possible to change the operation mode of the retractable member 8520 according to the difference in the type of small win obtained by winning, so that the formation mode of the continuous ball can be changed for each opening operation of the movable piece 190a. Therefore, with respect to a pair of different occurrences in which the timing at which a plurality of balls enter the internal flow path INR8 is the same based on the opening timing of the movable piece 190a, a continuous ball is formed at one time and at another time. can cause changes such as the inability to form a continuous ball. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game.

In the tenth embodiment described above, the retractable member 8520 operates under constant operation control from the time the power is turned on, and the removing device 10560 is operated under control based on the opening operation of the movable piece 190a in the jackpot game state. It is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the haunting member 8520 or the removal device 10560 may be controlled to start operating based on the fact that the number of winning prizes to the big winning opening switch 190b in the round game of each round in the jackpot game state reaches a predetermined number. .

For example, similar to the above-described seventh operation pattern, the removing device 10560 is in a protruding state at the start of the round game of each round, and unlike the seventh operation pattern, the number of winnings to the winning opening switch 190b is a predetermined number (for example, 9 The evacuation state may be set based on reaching the number/count number 10C). In this case, it is possible to increase the possibility of forming consecutive balls just before the end of the round game of each round. This change in possibility occurs regardless of the manner in which the ball is shot (whether or not the ball is stopped, or whether or not the timing of the start of shooting is shifted). .

Further, for example, contrary to the above-described mode, the removal device 10560 is in a retracted state at the start of the round game of each round, and the number of winnings to the winning opening switch 190b reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9/count number 10C). The protruding state may also be established based on the fact that the In this case, it is possible to reduce the possibility of forming consecutive balls just before the end of the round game of each round, thereby suppressing over-winning, and forming consecutive balls except just before the end of the round game of each round. It is possible to eliminate the monotony of winning by separating balls one by one.

In the tenth embodiment described above, the removal device 10560 operates after a predetermined period of time from the start of the round game of each round in the jackpot game state, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, different periods of time until removal device 10560 operates may be preset for each jackpot type. In this case, since the operation timing of the removing device 10560 is different for each big win type, it is possible to prevent the timing at which consecutive balls are easily formed from becoming the same in every big win game. As a result, the player can be made to think about the ball launch timing during the jackpot game, so that the player can be prevented from playing the game carelessly.

In the tenth embodiment described above, a case has been described in which a notification is given to suggest that the consecutive balls formed by the pre-winning falling-down device 10500 can enter the movable ball-entering accessory device 190, but this is not necessarily the case. It is not limited. For example, considering the state after the second flow-down device 400, it is possible to notify about the change in profit that can be obtained according to the number of hits, such as "If you can hit two balls, 16R is guaranteed". good. As a result, the interest of the player can be improved, and the player's attention to the entry of the ball into the pre-winning-downstream device 10500 can be improved.

The notification method is not particularly limited. For example, notification by sound or lamp, notification by a 7-segment display, or notification by a liquid crystal device may be used. As an example of the effect, three balloons with the numbers "3", "7", and "16" each indicating the number of rounds to be distributed are displayed on the liquid crystal screen, and are detected in the top opening 8512. A sensor may be provided, and each time a ball entering the pre-winning falling-down device 10500 is detected by the detection sensor, notification may be given in a manner that the balloon is broken. That is, when the first ball enters the pre-winning falling-down device 10500, "7" is broken, and balloons with the numbers "3" and "16" remain, and it is possible to form a continuous ball with the first ball. As the second ball hits the pre-winning falling-down device 10500 at the right timing, "3" may be broken and the balloon with the number "16" left may be notified. As a result, it is possible to perform an effect that raises the expectations of the player while suppressing the number of obtainable rounds until the second half.

In the tenth embodiment, in the round game of each round in the jackpot game state, the removal device 10560 is in the overhanging state for a predetermined period from the start of the round game, and after the predetermined period has passed, it is in the retracted state. , but not necessarily limited to this. For example, on the contrary, the removing device 10560 may be in the retracted state for a predetermined period from the start of the round game, and may be in the protruding state after the predetermined period.

In this case, for a predetermined period of time (while the removing device 10560 is in the retracted state) from the start of the round game, it becomes easier for balls flowing down the internal flow path INR8 to form consecutive balls, so just before the end of the round game of each round (regulation Immediately before the number of winnings is completed), consecutive balls reach the movable piece 190a, and a specified number (so-called count number) or more balls enter the big winning opening switch 190b (so-called over-winning). can.

On the other hand, when a predetermined period of time elapses and the removal device 10560 is in a protruded state, the balls entering the internal flow path INR8 are discharged at the same interval as the entering interval (continuous balls are not formed). By ending the round game of each round before the removal device 10560 is in the overhanging state (before the predetermined period of time elapses), it is possible to construct a game feature in which the player can receive a greater profit.

Therefore, the player is instructed to finish the round game of each round (to win as many balls as possible) within a predetermined period of time. The player can be urged to play a game to win a ball).

Further, for example, by setting a plurality of types of the above-described predetermined period for each round game of each round for each jackpot type, it is possible to prevent the player from knowing when the removing device 10560 will be in the overhanging state. , attention to the operation of the removing device 10560 and attention to the internal flow path INR8 in which the removing device 10560 appears and appears, and the tension of the player playing each round can be increased. can.

This is different from the tension felt by the player at the time of the round allocation notification effect after winning the big win, and it is the tension that is currently occurring during the round game of each round. be. That is, according to the present embodiment, after the player is notified of the result of the round distribution, each round has a tension directly linked to a change in the profit that the player can obtain (a change in the possibility of over-winning). It is possible to draw attention to the manner in which balls flow down the internal flow path INR8 (balls that can form consecutive balls) and the manner in which the balls enter the big winning opening switch 190b during the round game. As a result, even after the result of allocating the big win is reported, it is possible to give the player a sense of tension and prevent the player from playing the game carelessly.

For example, even if the same 7-round jackpot is won as the round allocation, the round game in one case is a jackpot game with a very short predetermined period and no over-winning can be expected, while other rounds are distributed. The round game of the round in the case can be a jackpot game in which the predetermined period is sufficiently long and over winning can be expected. In this case, even after the result of the round distribution is notified, it is not possible to expect over-winning in the round game of each round of the jackpot game currently being performed. It is possible to proceed through each round of play while keeping the player's attention on the state of the removal device 10560. As a result, it is possible to heighten the player's sense of tension during the jackpot game, and to heighten the player's interest.

The present invention may be applied to a different type of pachinko machine or the like from the above embodiments. For example, once the jackpot hits, the expected value of the jackpot is increased until the jackpot state occurs multiple times (for example, 2 times, 3 times) including the pachinko machine (commonly known as 2 times rights product, 3 times rights product) may be implemented as Further, after the big winning pattern is displayed, the pachinko machine may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the ball enters a predetermined area. Also, a pachinko machine having a prize winning device having a special area such as a V-zone and entering a special game state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area may be implemented. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, various game machines such as arepachi, mammoth, slot machines, and so-called game machines combining a pachinko machine and a slot machine may be implemented.

In the slot machine, for example, the pattern is changed by operating the control lever in a state where the pattern effective line is determined by inserting a coin, and the pattern is stopped and fixed by operating the stop button. It is. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is "provided with a display device that confirms and displays identification information after variably displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stopping (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed, and the stop is displayed. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value under the condition that the combination of time identification information is a specific one. In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Examples include:

Further, as a specific example of a game machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine, it is equipped with a display device for displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then confirming and displaying the symbols, and is equipped with a ball launching handle. There are things that are not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the pattern starts to change due to the operation of the control lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or a predetermined As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped, and a special game is generated in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the determined symbols at the time of the stop are so-called jackpot symbols, and the player is given a special game. A lot of balls are paid out to the tray at the bottom. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the balls can be treated as game value in the game hall. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on the equipment due to the separate handling of the medals and the balls and the restrictions on the installation location of the game machine.

In the following, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention are shown.

<Points where two balls enter the distribution means and both balls go to an advantageous route>
A movable ball entry means for forming an open state in which a game ball can enter a winning opening, and a game ball entering the winning opening of the movable ball entering means passes through a specific area provided in the movable ball entering means. A game machine comprising a sorting means for sorting whether the ball is discharged after being released or discharged without passing through the specific area, wherein a game in which a ball enters the movable ball entering means at an interval shorter than a predetermined interval A gaming machine A1 characterized by comprising a multi-ball guiding means constructed in a manner that facilitates guiding all balls to a specific area.

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when an activation trigger occurs, the movable ball-entering device changes to an open state for a predetermined opening time, and a game ball entering the movable ball-entering device in the open state passes through a specific area. There is a game machine that becomes a big hit by doing (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-61177). In this gaming machine, the predetermined opening time is set to be short (approximately 0.5 seconds). Although the number of game balls held is one, rarely, two game balls may be accommodated in the movable ball entry device. Due to the low occurrence frequency, when two game balls are accommodated in the movable ball entry device, the player's sense of expectation is remarkably improved. However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, there is a route through which a game ball can pass when one game ball flows down to the movable ball-entering device, and a route through which a game ball can pass when two game balls flow down to the movable ball-entering device. Since the route to be obtained is the same, even if two game balls are collectively flowed down to the movable ball-entering device, when the game balls are divided into two times at different timings and flow down to the movable ball-entering device one by one. In comparison, the probability of the game ball passing through the specific area was not improved. In this case, there is a problem that the actual game result is not accompanied by the improvement of the player's expectation, and the player is disappointed.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, the movable ball entry means is provided with the double ball guide means configured to easily guide all the game balls entered at intervals shorter than the predetermined interval to the specific area. When a plurality of game balls flow down to the ball entering means, the probability that the game balls pass through the specific area can be remarkably improved as compared with the case where the game balls are accommodated one by one in the movable ball entering means. . As a result, the degree of improvement in the player's expectation can be balanced with the actual game result, and the player's interest can be improved.

In the game machine A1, the multiple-ball guiding means is configured so that the movable means performs an action that affects the progress of the game ball by coming into contact with the game ball, and the game ball in contact with the movable means can flow down. and a plurality of distribution channels, and the plurality of distribution channels are an advantageous side channel that guides the game ball to the specific area, and a game ball to the specific area compared to the advantageous side channel. and a disadvantageous side flow path with a low probability of passage, wherein the advantageous side flow path is configured as a flow path through which a game ball is thrown when the movable means is in a throwing state that can be configured by an operation. The game machine A2 is characterized in that the ball-throwing state is constituted when one game ball is in contact with the movable means while another game ball is in contact with the movable means.

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A1, when a plurality of game balls come into contact with the movable means of the double-ball guiding means at the same time, the movable means operates to form a ball-throwing state, and the plurality of game balls A game ball can be thrown to the advantageous side channel. Therefore, it becomes unnecessary to dispose a drive means for sorting the case where the game ball passes through the advantageous side channel and the case where the game ball passes through the disadvantageous side channel, and the product cost can be reduced.

In the game machine A2, the operation mode of the movable means is composed of reciprocating motion, and one game ball contacts the movable means from one of the operating directions of the reciprocating motion, and the other game ball is moved to the reciprocating motion. The gaming machine A3 is characterized in that the movable means constitutes the ball-throwing state by contacting the movable means from a direction other than the movement direction of the action.

According to the game machine A3, in addition to the effects of the game machine A2, the game balls apply loads to the movable means from both directions of the reciprocating motion of the movable means, and the loads are balanced so that the movable means constitutes a ball-throwing state. Thus, it is possible to prevent a malfunction in which the movable means is put into a ball-throwing state when only one game ball is in contact with the movable means.

In addition, the mode of the reciprocating motion of the movable means is not limited. For example, it may be a rotating motion or a sliding motion.

In the game machine A3, the movable means constitutes the throwing state in an initial state in which the game ball is not in contact and the force is balanced, and in the initial state, the game ball moves from one direction of the reciprocating motion. A first state and a second state having a movement resistance different from that of the first state are formed in order after the game ball comes into contact with the means and before the game ball leaves the movable means, and the second state is established. A gaming machine A4 characterized in that movement resistance is greater in the second state than in the first state, and in the second state, the game ball abuts against the movable means, whereby the movable means constitutes the ball-throwing state. .

According to the game machine A4, in addition to the effects of the game machine A3, while the ball-throwing state can be configured as an initial state in which the force applied to the movable means is balanced, when the game ball starts contacting the movable means. Since the first state has a lower resistance than the second state, by immediately moving the movable means when one game ball comes into contact with the movable means in the initial state, the game ball is erroneously transferred to the advantageous side flow path. It is possible to prevent the ball from being thrown to the second state, and after that, the movable means changes to a second state with higher resistance than the first state, thereby gaining a period until the second game ball contacts the movable means. can be done. As a result, even when two game balls reach the movable means with a gap between them, it is possible to easily construct a state in which the second game ball abuts the movable means in the second state of the movable means, When the second game ball comes into contact with the movable means, the movable means constitutes a ball-throwing state, so that the game ball can be thrown to the advantageous side flow path.

In the game machine A3 or A4, bridging means that operates in accordance with the movement of the movable means is provided, and the bridging means allows one game ball to hit the movable means from one direction of the reciprocating motion. A game machine A5 characterized in that it is configured such that another game ball that contacts the movable means after contact is made to flow down to a position that contacts the movable means from another direction.

According to the game machine A5, in addition to the effects of the game machine A3 or A4, the bridging means moves the other game ball that contacts the movable means after one game ball contacts the movable means from one direction, Since one game ball and another game ball flow down from the other direction toward the movable means, even if one game ball and another game ball flow down toward the movable means from the same direction, the one game ball and the other game ball It is possible to direct the balls one by one in both directions in the reciprocating direction of the movable means, instead of pulling the balls to one side.

In the game machine A1, the multiple-ball guiding means is configured so that the movable means performs an action that affects the progress of the game ball by coming into contact with the game ball, and the game ball in contact with the movable means can flow down. A plurality of distribution channels are provided, and when the preceding game ball and the subsequent game ball abut against the movable means, after the abutted game ball flows into the distribution channel A gaming machine A6 characterized in that the movable means constitutes the ball-throwing state when a subsequent game ball comes into contact with the movable means within a predetermined period.

According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A1, after the previous game ball has flowed into the distribution flow path, the subsequent game ball comes into contact with the movable means within a predetermined period, so that the movable means Since the ball-throwing state is constituted, the movable means can be put into the ball-throwing state not only when a plurality of balls are brought into contact with the movable means together, but also only the later game balls are allowed to flow into the advantageous side channel. be able to.

As a result, for example, when the movable ball-entering means is in the open state twice with one actuation opportunity, one game ball enters the movable ball-entering means each time the movable ball-entering means is opened, resulting in a movable ball-entering. When two game balls are accommodated in the means (when the timing at which the game ball comes into contact with the movable means becomes longer), and when the movable ball-entering means is in an open state once, two game balls are stored in the movable ball-entering means. It is possible to change the number of game balls flowing into the advantageous side flow path in the case where two game balls are stored in the movable ball entry means by entering one ball, and to adjust the profit obtained by the player. can be planned.

In the gaming machine A1, the multiple-ball guiding means includes a driving means having an action section that applies a driving force to the game ball to eject it, a stopping means that stops the game ball on the front side of the action section in the direction of action, and a driving means. a plurality of distribution channels configured to allow game balls ejected by the driving force applied from the means to flow down, the plurality of distribution channels being advantageous side streams for guiding the game balls to the specific region. and a disadvantageous side channel having a lower probability of allowing game balls to pass through the specific area compared to the advantageous side channel, and the advantageous side channel holds a plurality of game balls in the stopping means. The unfavorable side channel is configured as a channel through which the game ball is thrown when one game ball is held by the retaining means. Characterized game machine A7.

According to the game machine A7, in addition to the effects of the game machine A1, the game ball held by the stopping means is ejected by the operation of the operation part of the drive means, and is applied to the operation part depending on whether one or a plurality of game balls are ejected. By utilizing the difference in resistance, it is possible to change whether the game ball flows down the advantageous side flow path or the disadvantageous side flow path while causing the operating portion of the driving means to perform the same operation.

It should be noted that the mode of the driving means is not limited to a specific mode. For example, it may be composed of a solenoid member that operates electromagnetically when energized, or it may be composed of a spring member that gives a driving force by a return operation after being elastically deformed.

In the game machine A7, the operation of the operating part by the driving means is performed after waiting for the game ball entering the movable ball entering means to reach the stopping means.

According to the game machine A8, in addition to the effects of the game machine A7, the operation of the operation part of the driving means is performed after waiting for the game ball entering the movable ball entering means to reach the stopping means. In a state in which two game balls enter the movable ball entering means, it is possible to avoid the collision between the game ball ejected by the driving force of the driving means and the game ball on the way to the stopping means.

As a result, when two game balls enter the movable ball entering means, the mode in which the two game balls are ejected by the driving means can be changed to the operation part of the driving means for both the two game balls. It can be limited to one way of injecting in a state arranged on the near side.

Therefore, when two game balls enter the movable ball entering means, the operation mode of the game balls can be made uniform.

In the game machine A1, the multi-ball guiding means includes a plurality of distribution channels configured to allow game balls to flow down, and the plurality of distribution channels are advantageous side channels for guiding game balls to the specific area. and an unfavorable side flow path that has a lower probability of allowing a game ball to pass through the specific area compared to the advantageous side flow path, and a plurality of game balls accommodated in the movable ball entering means collide with each other. , A game machine A9 characterized in that it is constructed in such a manner that a game ball can easily pass through the advantageous side passage.

According to the game machine A9, in addition to the effects of the game machine A1, whether or not the game ball collides in the distribution channel changes whether the game ball easily passes through the advantageous side channel. Even after the game ball enters the ball entering means, the player's attention can be kept on the game ball. In addition, the probability of the game balls passing through the advantageous side flow path is changed by utilizing the fact that the flow of the game balls changes due to the collision between the game balls. Since no moving body is required, the product cost can be reduced.

In the game machine A9, the multi-ball guide means includes a guide area for guiding game balls to each of the plurality of distribution channels, and the guide area is formed in a shape in which a bottom plate tapers downward. A game ball is guided to the distribution channel through an opening provided in the bottom plate, and the advantageous side opening that guides the game ball to the advantageous side channel guides the game ball to the disadvantageous side channel. A gaming machine A10 characterized in that it is arranged at a lower position compared to the disadvantageous side opening to be guided.

According to the gaming machine A10, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A9, the advantageous side opening that guides the game ball from the guidance area to the advantageous side flow path is located at a lower position than the disadvantageous side opening that guides the game ball to the disadvantageous side flow path. , it is possible to easily introduce the game ball whose speed has decreased due to the collision into the advantageous side flow path.

<If there are two in V, at least one will be chosen by lottery. ＞
a movable ball entry means that changes from a closed state in which a game ball cannot enter a prize winning opening to an open state in which a game ball can enter the prize winning opening for a predetermined opening time when an actuation opportunity occurs during a game; , a determination area for determining that a game ball that has entered the winning opening of the movable ball entering means is guided to a specific area provided within the movable ball entering means; A comparison between a first specific area that provides a player with a predetermined profit when a game ball passes through the specific area and a profit that is given to a player when a game ball passes through the first specific area and a second specific area in which the profit given to the player is small when the game ball passes through, and when a plurality of game balls pass through the fixed area within a predetermined period, the first A gaming machine B1 comprising a first means for making it easier to obtain a profit from passing a game ball through a specific area than a profit from passing a game ball through the second specific area.

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when an activation trigger occurs, the movable ball-entering device changes to an open state for a predetermined opening time, and a game ball entering the movable ball-entering device in the open state passes through a specific area. There is a gaming machine that allows a player to obtain a profit by playing (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2014-61177). In this gaming machine, the predetermined opening time is set to be short (approximately 0.5 seconds), so in most cases when a game ball enters the movable ball-entering device during a game, the ball enters the movable ball-entering device. Although the number of game balls is one, rarely, two game balls may enter the movable ball entry device. Due to the low occurrence frequency, when two game balls enter the movable ball entering device, the player's sense of expectation is remarkably improved. However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, when two game balls enter the movable ball entry device and both of these two game balls pass through the fixed area, one of the game balls is the second specific area , even if other game balls pass through the first specific area after that, the player cannot obtain the profit due to the game ball passing through the first specific area. In this case, there is a problem that the actual game result is not accompanied by the improvement of the player's expectation, and the player is disappointed.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, the first means, when a plurality of game balls pass through the fixed area within a predetermined period, the profit due to the game ball passing through the first specific area, the above-mentioned 2 Since it is easier for the player to obtain a profit compared to the profit due to the game ball passing through the specific area, the degree of improvement in the player's expectation when a plurality of game balls pass through the fixed area within a predetermined period, It is possible to balance with the actual game result. Therefore, the interest of the player can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine B1, the first means includes a first passage channel that connects the defined area and the first specific area so that the game ball can pass through, and the defined area and the second specific area. a second passing channel connecting between the second passing channel so that the game ball can pass therethrough, wherein the period during which the game ball passes through the second passing channel is compared with the period during which the game ball passes through the first passing channel. A gaming machine B2 characterized in that it is constructed so as to be longer than it is.

According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B1, the period during which the game ball passes through the first passage is shorter than the period during which the game ball passes through the second passage. When a plurality of game balls pass through the definite area approximately at the same time and the plurality of game balls are separated into the first passage channel and the second passage channel, the game balls preferentially pass through the first specific channel. It is possible to give the player a profit for doing so.

In addition, the method for differentiating the period during which the game ball passes through the first passage and the period during which the game ball passes through the second passage is not particularly limited. For example, the length of the second passage is adjusted to the length of the first passage so that the speed of the game ball is the same when passing through the first passage and when flowing down the second passage. The length of the first passage channel and the length of the second passage channel may be the same, and the speed at which the game ball flows down the first passage channel will be It may be made larger than the flowing speed (for example, the descending inclination angle of the first passage channel may be made larger than the descending inclination angle of the second passage channel), or the second passage passage may be made larger. A game ball may be stopped for a predetermined period of time inside the second passage channel by providing passage prevention means for preventing the passage of the game ball by protruding inside the second passage for a predetermined period of time.

In the game machine B2, the first passage channel and the second passage channel are configured from the same channel in a predetermined section from the defined area, and the first passage channel or the second passage channel The flow path is branched by bending at a predetermined branch area, and the branch area is configured to decelerate the game balls that have reached the branch area, and the first means is configured such that a plurality of game balls are gathered in the branch area. A gaming machine B3 characterized by comprising abutment inflow means for causing at least one game ball to flow into the first passage channel by reaching the first passage.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B2, when a plurality of game balls pass through the fixed area, the previous game ball is decelerated in the branch area, so that the subsequent game ball and the previous game ball can reach the branch area collectively, and in that case, the contact inflow means causes at least one game ball to flow into the first passage channel, so the profit by the game ball passing through the first specific area can be made easier for the player to obtain.

In addition, the mode of the contact inflow means is not particularly limited. For example, it may be configured as a wall portion that can block the progress of the game ball, or it may be configured as an action portion that operates when the game ball reaches the branch area, or it may be configured as a fixed portion from the time the power is turned on. It may be configured as an electric part that electrically operates in an operation mode.

In the gaming machine B3, the specific area includes an advantageous specific area that provides a greater profit to the player than the first specific area, and the first means moves from the second passage to the first passage. a bridging channel capable of bridging between and a channel connected to the advantageous specified area, which is configured so that a game ball passing through the first passing channel can flow in and is connected to the advantageous specified area a game ball passing through the bridging channel and a game ball passing through the first passing channel join together, thereby making it easier for the game ball to flow into the advantageous passing channel. A game machine B4, characterized in that it is configured in the following manner.

According to the game machine B4, in addition to the effects of the game machine B3, the game balls flowing into the bridging channel from the second passage channel join the game balls flowing down the first passage channel. becomes easier to flow into the advantageous passage channel connected to the advantageous specific area, so that after a plurality of game balls pass through the fixed area, the game balls are directed to the first passage channel and the second passage channel respectively. In this case, it is possible to leave the possibility that the game ball flowing down the second passage channel assists the game ball passing through the first passage channel toward the advantageous passage channel, and the second passage channel It is possible to increase the presence of the game balls that have flowed in.

In addition, the method for making it easier for the game ball flowing down the first passage channel to flow into the advantageous side channel is not particularly limited. For example, it may be performed by changing the direction of the flow of the game balls by contacting the game balls, or by having a plurality of game balls reach (stay) at the entrance of the advantageous passage channel. This may be done by arranging introduction means for facilitating the introduction of the ball.

In the gaming machine B4, the first means includes a flow mode changing means for affecting the flow mode of the passing game ball depending on the operating state, and the flow mode changing means has an effect on the flow mode of the passing game ball. The state is changed every predetermined period between a passage state in which the passage state is reduced and a resistance state in which the influence on the flow state of the passing game ball is increased more than the passage state, and the game ball is in the flow state. A gaming machine B5 characterized in that whether or not a game ball is likely to flow into the advantageous passage flow path is changed depending on the state of the flow mode changing means when passing through the changing means.

According to the game machine B5, in addition to the effects of the game machine B4, the flow mode changing means changes state between the passing state and the resistance state at each predetermined period, and depending on the timing at which the flow mode changing means is passed Since whether or not the game ball is likely to flow into the advantageous passage channel changes, in the state in which the game ball flows down the first passage channel, another game ball flows into the first passage channel from the bridging channel. It is possible to generate a plurality of patterns to play, so that the player can play a fresh game every time.

In game machines B3 to B5, the contact inflow means is configured to be able to change states between a normal state and a special state different from the normal state, and in the normal state, a plurality of game balls that have reached the branch area. Among them, one game ball is made to flow into the first passage channel, and in the special state, all of the plurality of game balls that have reached the branch area are made to flow into the first passage channel. Game machine B6.

According to the game machine B6, in addition to the effects of the game machines B3 to B5, the profit obtained by the player can be changed depending on the state of the contact inflow means, and the attention of the contact inflow means can be improved. can.

In any one of the gaming machines B2 to B6, the first means includes a protruding state in which at least the game ball protruding inwardly of the second passing channel and flowing down the second passing channel is stopped; The overhanging state is maintained at least when the game ball flowing down the movable ball entering means reaches the passage preventing means. A gaming machine B7 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines B2 to B6, the passage prevention means maintains the overhanging state at least when the game ball reaches the passage prevention means, and stops the game ball. The period until the game ball passing through the second passing channel reaches the second specific area can be lengthened by the period during which the passage preventing means maintains the overhanging state.

In addition, as an operation mode of the passage prevention means, for example, a predetermined period (a period sufficiently longer than the period required for the game ball to reach the passage prevention means) occurs after an activation trigger for opening the movable ball entry means occurs. ) An operation mode is exemplified in which the passage preventing means is maintained in the extended state and then changed to the retracted state.

The game machine B2 or B3 comprises a blocking member movably arranged in the inflow part of the second specific area so as to constitute a state in which the game ball cannot flow in, and the game ball is prevented from flowing into the second specific area. and the blocking member prevents at least one of the plurality of game balls from flowing down to the second specific region. Game machine B8.

According to the game machine B8, in addition to the effects of the game machine B2 or B3, when the game ball is placed in a position where it can flow down to the second specific area, by adopting a configuration that prevents the flow down by the blocking member, It is possible to eliminate the premise that it is determined that the game balls flow into the second specific area because the game balls are in a fixed arrangement, and the player's attention to the game balls can be improved.

In the game machine B8, the blocking member comprises a first state in which the game ball is loaded to affect the flow of the game ball and a second state in which the game ball does not flow down. Depending on whether the game ball is in the first state or the second state, the game ball flows down in the first specific area or the profit given to the player is greater than in the first specific area. The game machine B9 is characterized in that the probability of whether or not a game ball flows down to an advantageous specific area is changed.

According to the game machine B9, in addition to the effects of the game machine B8, after the game ball has passed through the blocking member, the flow of the game ball can be made different between the first state and the second state. Differences can be tied to benefits that players can expect. Therefore, even after passing through the blocking member, it is possible to improve the attention of the game ball.

<If two balls enter the V, the round distribution of the later game balls will be greater than or equal to the first game ball>
A first specific area through which a game ball can pass and which provides a predetermined profit to the player by passing the game ball; A complex specific area having a plurality of specific areas including a second specific area that gives a profit less than the profit obtained by passing, and a definite area that it is definite to guide the game ball to the composite specific area. In the gaming machine, when a plurality of game balls pass through the fixed area within a predetermined period, the profit given to the player by the subsequent game ball passing through the composite specific area is The gaming machine C1 is characterized by comprising a second means for setting a profit equal to or greater than that given to the player when the player passes through the composite specific area alone.

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when an activation trigger occurs, the movable ball-entering device changes to an open state for a predetermined opening time, and a game ball entering the movable ball-entering device in the open state passes through a specific area. There is a gaming machine that allows a player to obtain a profit by playing (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2014-61177). In this gaming machine, the predetermined opening time is set to be short (approximately 0.5 seconds), so in most cases when a game ball enters the movable ball-entering device during a game, the ball enters the movable ball-entering device. Although the number of game balls is one, rarely, two game balls may enter the movable ball entering device. Due to the low occurrence frequency, when two game balls enter the movable ball entering device, the player's sense of expectation is remarkably improved. However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, when two game balls enter the movable ball entry device and both of them pass through the fixed area, each game ball passes through the specific area There is a problem that whether or not to play is left to randomness, and it cannot be said that the player's interest can be sufficiently improved.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, when a plurality of game balls pass through the fixed area within a predetermined period, the profit given to the player by the subsequent game ball passing through one specific area is Since the second means is provided, the profit given to the player by the game ball that passed through the other specific area first is more than the profit given to the player, so that when watching the state of the game ball passing through the specific area, the previous ball will pass. Benefits are promised that are greater than those provided by a particular area. Therefore, it is possible to keep the player's attention until the next ball passes, and the player's interest can be improved.

Incidentally, the form of the profit given to the player by the later game ball passing through the composite specific area is not particularly limited, and various forms are exemplified. For example, it may be a profit given to the player when the later game ball passes through the specific area, or the specific area through which the previous game ball passes as a result of the later game ball passing through the specific area. It is also possible to change (increase profit) from the second specific area to the first specific area, and the profit given to the player when the preceding game ball passes through the first specific area (after the change) may be used.

In the gaming machine C1, the second means comprises a movable means operated by a game ball, and the profit given by the movement of the movable means causes the game ball that has moved the movable means to pass through the specific area. A gaming machine C2 characterized in that it is impossible for a game ball to pass through another specific area that imparts a profit less than that.

According to the game machine C2, in addition to the effects of the game machine C1, the limitation of the specific area through which the game ball passes is performed by the movable means operated by the game ball. However, it is possible to limit the specific area through which the game ball passes.

In addition, the manner in which the game ball cannot pass through the specific area is not particularly limited, and various manners are exemplified. For example, the downflow path along which the game ball flows down toward the specific area may be blocked, or the opening through which the game ball is guided to the specific area may be closed.

Moreover, the mode of operating with a game ball is not particularly limited, and various modes are exemplified. For example, it may be a means operated by an actuator triggered by the passage of a game ball through a detection sensor, or a means operated by being pushed by a game ball when the game ball comes into contact with the game ball.

In the game machine C2, the movable means operates after the specific area through which the preceding game ball passes is determined.

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C2, after the specific area through which the game ball passes has passed the changeable state (after the specific area through which the game ball passes is determined, that is, the specific area Since the movable means operates after passing a state where there is a possibility of rebounding from the opening, it is possible to prevent inadvertent limitation of the specific area through which the game ball passes, and the profits obtained by the player are disturbed. can be prevented.

For example, if the movable means operates before the specific area through which it passes is determined, the game ball itself bounces back from the specific area after the action of the movable means, gains the benefit of the movable means, and moves to the specific area with greater profit. A passing situation occurs. In this case, the profit of the movable means can be obtained even when there is only one game ball, and there is a possibility that the profit given to the player may become too large.

On the other hand, according to the game machine C3, in addition to the effects of the game machine C2, the movable means is operated after the specific area through which the game ball passes is determined, so that two game balls reach the specific area. On the condition that the movable means exerts its effect, it is possible to secure the playability.

In the game machine C2 or C3, the movable means operates in such a manner as to narrow the entrance opening, which is the entrance to each of the specific areas and is arranged in the vicinity of each of the specific areas, so that game balls cannot pass through. Characterized game machine C4.

According to the game machine C4, in addition to the effects of the game machine C2 or C3, the movable means is arranged in the vicinity of each specific area and operates in such a manner as to narrow the entrance opening that is the entrance to each specific area. It is possible to make it easier to operate the movable means before the subsequent game ball enters the specific area.

As a result, even if the gap between the preceding game ball and the subsequent game ball is narrow, it is possible to make it easier to operate the movable means before the subsequent game ball enters the specific area. It is possible to improve the degree of freedom in designing the flow path along which the game ball flows.

In any one of the game machines C2 to C4, the movable means is configured so that a game ball can flow down along one surface in a state after operation, and the game ball can flow down along one surface of the movable means to the specified position. A game machine C5 characterized in that it is configured in a manner to direct the player to an area.

According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C4, in the state after the operation of the movable means, the game ball is configured to travel along one surface of the movable means toward the other entrance opening. Furthermore, in addition to the role of preventing game balls from passing through the specific area, it is possible to have the role of preventing later game balls from staying.

In addition, the manner in which the game ball is directed to the entrance opening is not particularly limited, and various manners are exemplified. For example, a board protrudes from one surface of the flow-down path, and the surface of the board facing the game ball is inclined with respect to the extension direction of the flow-down path, thereby guiding the game ball in a predetermined direction. Alternatively, the movable member operates in such a manner as to close the hole with respect to the entrance opening which is the entrance to the specific area and is an opening directed in the vertical direction, and the upper surface thereof is formed to be inclined. It may be configured such that the game ball on the upper surface of the member flows along the slope.

In any one of the game machines C2 to C5, the game machine C6 is characterized in that the movable means narrows the entrance of the specific area through which the game ball is determined to pass by an action so that the game ball cannot pass through.

According to the game machine C6, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines C2 to C5, the movable means is configured in such a manner that only one game ball can pass before passing through the specific area. When two balls pass through the fixed area, the respective game balls can be passed through separate specific areas, and the second means can be easily operated.

In any one of the game machines C2 to C6, each entrance opening which is an entrance to each of the specific areas and which is arranged in the vicinity of each of the specific areas, and a stage where the previous game ball starts entering the one entrance opening. and delay movable means for extending the period required for the subsequent game ball to enter the other entrance opening in the state after the operation.

According to the game machine C7, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines C2 to C6, the delay movable means is operated at the stage when the previous game ball starts entering the entrance opening of 1, and in the state after the operation Since the period required for the game ball to enter another entrance opening is extended, it is possible to prevent later game balls from passing through the entrance opening early due to the operation of the delay movable means.

As a result, when the preceding game ball and the subsequent game ball reach each entrance opening at a short interval, even if the subsequent game ball is likely to pass through a specific area with little profit, it can enter another entrance opening. It is possible to extend the period of time to make it easier to change (increase profit) the specific area through which the subsequent game ball passes by the movable means.

<If two balls enter the V, the round distribution of the subsequent game balls will be greater than or equal to the previous game balls. Part 2>
A first specific area that provides a predetermined profit to the player by passing the game ball, and a second specific area that provides the player with a profit less than the profit obtained by passing the first specific area by passing the game ball. and a definite area in which it is determined that a game ball is guided to the composite specific area, in which a game ball that has passed through the definite area passes through a flow path, a first distributing section disposed in the passage flow path for distributing whether or not to guide the game ball to the first specific area, and a game ball disposed in the passage flow path to the second specific area; A second distribution section that distributes whether or not to guide to the area, and the first distribution section and the second distribution section reach the first distribution section when the game ball has passed through the defined area When a plurality of game balls pass through the defined area within a predetermined period, due to the action of the previous game ball, the later game ball The game machine D1 is characterized in that the profit obtained by the player is equal to or greater than the profit obtained by the player from the previous game ball.

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when an activation trigger occurs, the movable ball-entering device changes to an open state for a predetermined opening time, and a game ball entering the movable ball-entering device in the open state passes through a specific area. There is a gaming machine that allows a player to obtain a profit by playing (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2014-61177). In this gaming machine, the predetermined opening time is set to be short (approximately 0.5 seconds), so in most cases when a game ball enters the movable ball-entering device during a game, the ball enters the movable ball-entering device. Although the number of game balls is one, rarely, two game balls may enter the movable ball entering device. Due to the low occurrence frequency, when two game balls enter the movable ball entering device, the player's sense of expectation is remarkably improved. However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, when two game balls enter the movable ball entry device and both of them pass through the fixed area, each game ball passes through the specific area There is a problem that whether or not to play is left to randomness, and it cannot be said that the player's interest can be sufficiently improved.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, the game ball that has passed through the fixed area is guided through the passage channel, and is configured to pass through the first distribution section after passing through the second distribution section. Therefore, low-profit sorting is performed before high-profit sorting, and the interest of the player can be continuously increased. Since the profit obtained by the player from the later game ball due to the action of the previous game ball is greater than the profit obtained by the player from the previous game ball, the attention to the later game ball is maintained. can continue to increase the interest of the player.

In the gaming machine D1, the game balls distributed to the second specific region side by the second distribution section narrow the distribution passage to the second specific region side of the second distribution section, thereby reducing the number of game balls to the second specific region side. A game machine D2 is characterized by guiding other game balls that have reached the second distribution section to the opposite side of the second specific area side.

According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D1, the game ball itself distributed to the second specific area side serves as a prevention means for preventing other game balls from flowing down to the second specific area side. Since it functions, the member cost can be reduced compared to the case where the distributing means represented by the movable member is arranged in the second distributing portion.

Here, the term "opposite side" does not mean the opposite side as the direction in which the game balls flow down, but means one direction and the other direction when the game balls are distributed in two directions. That is, the side opposite to the second specific area side means a side that does not face the second specific area side and includes all of the directions in which the game balls are distributed.

In the gaming machine D1 or D2, the second distribution section and the first distribution section are connected, and the game balls distributed to the side opposite to the second specific area side in the second distribution section are guided. and displacing means for displacing a game ball when it is arranged in the connecting flow path, and by displacing the displacing means, another game ball that reaches the second distribution section to the side opposite to the second specific area side.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D1 or D2, by arranging the previous game ball in the connection flow path, the subsequent game ball is moved to the second specific area side at the second distribution part. It is possible to prevent the game balls from being sorted, and to guide the subsequent game balls to the connection flow path. Thus, before determining which specific area the previous game ball passes through, the subsequent game ball is guided to a specific area with a smaller profit than the specific area through which the previous game ball may pass. can be prevented.

The gaming machine D3 is provided with a flow-down means for causing a game ball to flow down at a constant speed. A game machine D4 characterized in that a game ball is made to flow down at a speed at which the previous game ball reaches the first distribution part after passing through the part.

Here, when the game ball flows down by its own weight, the game ball flows down at an individual falling speed due to the randomness of the game ball flowing down. Therefore, for example, if the flow speed of the preceding game ball is high and the flow speed of the subsequent game ball is low, the preceding game ball is arranged in the connection flow path, and after passing through the first distribution section , the later game ball may reach the second distribution section. In this case, the displacement of the displacing means returns when the later game ball reaches the second distribution portion, and it is not possible to prevent the later game ball from flowing down to the second specific area side.

On the other hand, according to the game machine D4, in addition to the effects of the game machine D3, the flow-down speed of the game ball can be controlled by the flow-down means, and the previous game ball placed in the connecting flow path is the first swing. Since the game ball can be caused to flow down in such a manner that the subsequent game ball passes through the second distribution portion before passing through the division portion, the displacement of the displacement means can be effectively utilized.

In the gaming machine D4, the flow-down means prevents the previous game ball and the next game ball from flowing into at least one of the first distribution section and the second distribution section in a row. The game machine D5 is characterized by causing game balls and later game balls to flow down.

According to the gaming machine D5, the preceding game ball and the subsequent game ball are prevented from continuously flowing into at least one of the first distribution section and the second distribution section by the flow-down means. After the distribution of the game balls is confirmed, it is possible to configure an idle period until the distribution of the subsequent game balls is started, and the player who pays attention to the flow of the game balls can experience joy and sorrow (emotional empathy) It is possible to secure a period to As a result, the interest of the player can be improved. In addition, flowing down in a row means a state in which a plurality of game balls flow closer to each other as they come into contact with each other.

<Consecutive ball formation: change in ease of consequent ball formation depending on ball entry timing>
A game area formed so that game balls can flow down, a prize winning opening arranged in the game area and capable of winning the game balls, and a ball arranged upstream of the winning opening and capable of guiding the game balls to the winning opening. A game machine comprising a flow-down means, wherein the ball-flow-down means includes a receiving port for receiving game balls from the game area, and a discharge port for discharging the game balls that have entered the receiving port toward the winning port. a connection channel for connecting the receiving port and the discharge port so that the game ball can flow down, and a first period required until the ball entering the receiving port at a first time point is discharged from the discharge port. is equal to or longer than a second period necessary for the ball entering the receiving port at a second time point after the first time point to be ejected from the ejection port. A gaming machine E1 characterized by:

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine equipped with a ball entrance through which game balls are guided to an advantageous route with a high profit that can be given to the player when a series of game balls enter the game ( For example, see JP-A-2014-161397). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, the entry of a series of game balls occurs when the falling balls hit by a nail accidentally gather (occurs completely by accident), so the consecutive balls are intentionally thrown. There was a problem that it was difficult to make.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, during the specified shortened period, by repeatedly entering the ball into the receiving port, the game ball entered at the first point in time is discharged from the discharging port. Since the period is equal to or longer than the second period until the game ball entered at the second time point after the first time point is discharged from the discharge port, the preceding game ball and the subsequent game ball in the connection flow path can be shortened.

In this case, it is possible to intentionally form a state in which a plurality of game balls are connected during the designated shortened period. To improve the profit that a player can obtain in a gaming machine that can improve the profit that the player can obtain when a ball is ejected.

In addition, the means for causing the action of the spherical flow down means is not limited at all. For example, it may be possible to decelerate the game ball that entered first, or to accelerate the game ball that entered later. Also, for example, while the aspect of the connection channel through which the game ball that enters earlier flows down is a meandering aspect, the aspect of the connection channel through which the game ball that enters later flows down is the shortest route (straight route). may be switched to.

In addition, the form of the spherical flow downward means is not limited at all. For example, the game ball may be guided by nails planted on the game board surface, or the game ball may be guided by rolling the upper surface of a long plate extending from the game board surface.

In the gaming machine E1, the connection channel is arranged such that the game ball that entered the receiving port at the second time point is arranged upstream of the game ball that entered the receiving port at the first time point. A gaming machine E2 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E1, it is possible to prevent the later game ball from overtaking the earlier game ball, so that it is easy to intentionally form a state in which a plurality of game balls are connected. can do.

That is, for example, when the flow path along which the previous game ball flows down and the flow path along which the later game ball flows down branch off, depending on the relationship between the first period and the second period, the later game ball may be the earlier game ball. There is a possibility that the game ball may overtake the game ball, and there is a fear that the period in which a plurality of game balls can be connected will be shortened.

On the other hand, when the later game ball is arranged upstream of the first game ball, after the later game ball catches up with the first game ball, the state in which they are connected to each other (the later game ball is first Since it flows down to the discharge port in a state where it is blocked by the game ball, the latter game ball does not overtake the former game ball. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier to connect a plurality of game balls.

In the gaming machine E1 or E2, the connection flow path is such that, at the same point in time, the speed component toward the discharge port of the game ball that entered the receiving port at the first time point reaches the receiving port at the second time point. A gaming machine E3 characterized in that the gaming machine E3 is formed in such a manner that the velocity component toward the ejection port of the game ball that has entered the ball is equal to or less than the speed component.

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E1 or E2, it is possible to prevent the interval between the game balls flowing down in the connecting channel from increasing with the lapse of time. As a result, the interval between the game balls flowing down the connecting channel is shortened, and the expectation for the formation of consecutive balls can be maintained at all times.

Therefore, even if the ball is always allowed to enter the receiving port, the interval between the game balls is not extended. It is possible to eliminate the need for a switching valve for switching between and.

In addition, this game machine does not prevent the period until the later game ball reaches the discharge port longer than the earlier game ball, and it is only possible that the game ball flows down the connecting flow path at the same time. It is limited to comparison between game balls that are in the same position.

In any one of the game machines E1 to E3, the ball flowing-down means includes an operation means that operates in a fixed operation mode and applies a load to the game balls flowing down the connecting channel, and the operation means operates in a fixed operation mode. The gaming machine E4 is characterized in that the length of the designated shortening period varies depending on which point in time is the first point in time.

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the first game ball is entered into the receiving port according to the timing of entering the first game ball into the receiving port. After that, it is possible to change the period in which the game balls are connected by further entering the game balls into the receiving port, so that the player can judge the timing of launching the game balls based on the ease of forming consecutive balls. Can be selected based on criteria. In addition, since the launch timing of the game ball is related to the operation mode of the operation means arranged in the ball flow-down means, it is possible to improve the attention of the operation means.

Further, according to this, it is possible to suppress the game method of repeatedly shooting the game balls toward the receiving opening until the timing at which the consecutive balls are not formed. In other words, by making it possible to grasp the timing at which it is easy to form continuous balls, it is possible to switch between the timing of repeatedly firing the ball toward the receiving port and the timing of freely firing the ball by aiming at a place other than the receiving port. You can, and you can slow down the game.

Therefore, it is possible to suppress unnecessary useless balls (wasteful balls caused by repeatedly shooting in a hurry to form continuous balls), thereby partially resolving the player's dissatisfaction.

On the other hand, it is possible to encourage the player to repeatedly shoot the game ball by creating a timing that suggests the possibility that the player will receive a greater profit by repeatedly entering the ball into the receiving slot. The number of balls consumed (the number of game balls to be shot) can be increased. As a result, the dissatisfaction of the game hall that the time efficiency of digestion of game balls is deteriorated by adopting a game method such as one-time shooting of game balls by the player can be partially resolved.

In the game machine E4, by reversing the operation mode of the operating means, the period until the game ball entering the receiving opening is discharged from the discharging opening when the operating means is in the same state. A gaming machine E5 characterized in that it is configured to be changeable.

According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E4, compared to the case where the degree of deceleration is defined by a constant pattern, the game ball flowing down inside the ball flowing down means and the outside of the ball flowing down means To make it difficult to play such a game by frequently using the hitting timing when playing a game in which the falling game balls are collectively put into a winning hole. In other words, the effect is limited to facilitating the connection of game balls that have entered the receiving port, and the intentional formation of consecutive balls between the game balls that have entered the receiving port and the game balls that have spilled from the receiving port is suppressed. can do.

A gaming machine E6 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine E4, by reversing the operation mode of the operating means, the corresponding relationship between the operating means and the designated shortening period can be changed.

According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine E4, the operation of the operating means is used as a mark, and the player who plays the game of making consecutive balls with the game balls that have entered the receiving slot is given a shot. You can shift the timing. As a result, even if the technique of shooting with the motion of the motion means as a mark is improved, it is possible to provide a game feature that does not always result in a profit.

In any one of the game machines E4 to E6, the operating means switches between a first state in which a load is applied to the game ball and a second state in which the load is not applied to the game ball, thereby changing the state of the game as viewed from the outlet. The gaming machine E7 is characterized by switching the direction of flow of balls.

According to the game machine E7, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines E4 to E6, by switching the state of the operation means, the speed component toward the discharge port is changed without reducing the flow speed of the game ball. be able to.

In the game machine E7, the connecting channel has a recessed groove extending along the direction from the receiving port toward the discharging port at the bottom, and when no load is applied from the operating means, The gaming machine E8 is characterized in that the recessed groove restricts a game ball from flowing down.

According to the game machine E8, in addition to the effects of the game machine E7, the recessed grooves can make the game balls flowing down evenly when no load is applied from the operating means.

In the gaming machine E7 or E8, the operation means includes a plurality of members that appear and disappear in and out of the connection channel, the plurality of members that appear and disappear are arranged along the extending direction of the connection channel, and the plurality of is characterized in that switching from the second state to the first state occurs simultaneously, and switching from the first state to the second state occurs sequentially from the receiving port side.

According to the gaming machine E9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E7 or E8, the state where the velocity component toward the ejection port of the game ball flowing down is smaller on the ejection port side than on the receiving port side is mechanically controlled. can be generated.

In the gaming machine E9, the switching operation of the projecting member from the first state to the second state is performed in a period equivalent to the period required for the game ball to completely pass after the game ball starts colliding with the projecting member. A gaming machine E10 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine E10, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E9, the first game ball among the pair of game balls entering the receiving port in order continues to receive the action from the haunting member in the first state, and enters immediately after. It is possible to easily form a situation in which the hit game ball is not affected by the haunting member. As a result, it is possible to easily provide a difference in speed between the game balls flowing down the connecting channel.

<Consecutive ball formation: Same initial movement, switch to a different movement of consecutive ball formation>
A game area formed so that game balls can flow down, a prize winning opening arranged in the game area and capable of winning the game balls, and a ball arranged upstream of the winning opening and capable of guiding the game balls to the winning opening. A game machine comprising a flow-down means, wherein the ball-flow-down means includes a receiving port for receiving game balls from the game area, and a discharge port for discharging the game balls that have entered the receiving port toward the winning port. A connecting channel that connects the receiving port and the discharging port so that the game ball can flow down, and an action of forming a switching period that can switch the deceleration effect generated on the game ball flowing down the corresponding position of the connecting channel in a plurality of modes. A gaming machine F1 characterized by comprising switching means.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine equipped with a ball entrance through which game balls are guided to an advantageous route with a high profit that can be given to the player when a series of game balls enter the game ( For example, see JP-A-2014-161397). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, there is a sense of security that the game ball should enter the ball entrance at a predetermined interval, so the attention to the flow of the game ball after entering the ball entrance is reduced. There was a problem that there was a risk of

On the other hand, according to the game machine F1, the effect switching means can switch the deceleration effect generated on the game ball flowing down the corresponding position of the connection channel during the switching period in a plurality of modes. Even if the game balls enter the ball continuously at intervals, in one case, they are discharged from the discharge port in a row, while in the other case, they are still discharged at intervals. It is possible to create a situation where it is discharged from the exit. As a result, it is possible to maintain attention to the subsequent flow-down manner of the game ball that has entered the receiving slot.

Note that the method of distinguishing between one case and another case is not limited at all. For example, in two types of gaming machines, one case is when the wing member that switches whether or not the game ball enters the winning opening is opened once, and the other case is when the wing member is opened twice in succession. It's fine in some cases. Further, for example, one case and another case may be distinguished from each other by the difference in the small hit type obtained when winning the starting prize opening, although the number of times the feather member is opened is the same. Further, for example, in the case where the action switching means includes an operation member, one case and another case may be distinguished in correspondence with the operation mode of the action switching means.

In addition, the mode of the deceleration action is not limited at all. For example, the space between the previous game ball and the next game ball may be shortened, the space between the previous game ball and the next game ball may be maintained, or the previous game ball and the next game ball may be maintained. It may be possible to extend the interval between the two, or it may be possible to switch them in chronological order.

In the game machine F1, the action switching means includes an action means that operates in a fixed action mode and applies a load to the game balls flowing down the connection flow path, and the action switching means is activated immediately after the action means performs the same action. A gaming machine F2 characterized in that periods are arranged.

According to the game machine F2, in addition to the effects of the game machine F1, the player adjusts the shooting timing of the game ball by using the operation of the operation means as a mark, so that the game ball can be made to flow down as intended. can be difficult. That is, since the deceleration effect that occurs on the game ball can be switched after the predetermined same action, for example, the game ball launched at the timing of entering the connecting channel immediately after the predetermined same action will It is possible to form a case where the water flows down in an intended manner and a case where it flows down in a different manner. As a result, the attention to the game ball flowing down the flow-down path can be improved compared to the attention to the operation mode of the operation means.

In the gaming machine F2, the driving means for driving the operating means is formed from a single driving device and switches the deceleration action while maintaining the same operating speed during the switching period. .

According to the game machine F3, in addition to the effects of the game machine F2, the operation means is driven by a single driving device, and the deceleration action is switched while maintaining the same operation speed. In addition, the product cost can be reduced, and it is possible to prevent the player from sensing that the deceleration action has been switched due to the operation sound or vibration of the driving means.

In the gaming machine F3, the operating means is configured to maintain a first drive state in which the operating direction of the driving means is maintained in the forward direction immediately after the same action, and to reverse the operating direction of the driving means immediately after the same action. and a reversed second driving state, wherein the driving means is stopped immediately after the same operation in the first driving state and the second driving state.

According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F3, the driving means stops immediately after the same operation in both the first driving state and the second driving state, so that the player hears the operation sound of the driving means. It is possible to prevent the driving state from being grasped by using the vibration and vibration as a clue. As a result, attention to the game ball flowing down the connecting flow path can be maintained.

In the game machine F3, the operation means shifts from the same operation to the switching period while maintaining the operation mode of the driving means.

According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F3, the transition from the same operation of the operation means marked by the player to the switching period is performed while maintaining the operation mode of the drive means, so that the same operation can be performed. It is possible to reduce the amount of materials for grasping (predicting) the operation mode of the operation means after the operation. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the flow state of the game ball flowing down inside the ball flow-down means based on the operation state of the operation means.

It should be noted that, for example, if a plurality of operation means are provided with individual drive means, even if the operation modes of the operation means are different in the switching period, when the same operation is switched to the switching period, the driving noise and the driving noise are generated. It is possible to prevent the vibration from changing.

In the game machine F4, depending on whether the operating means is in the first drive state or in the second drive state, the game to the receiving port necessary for discharging the game balls from the discharge port in a row The game machine F6 is characterized in that the manner of ball entry changes.

According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F4, the manner in which the game ball enters the receiving opening for forming consecutive balls changes depending on the operating mode of the operating means, so that the ball enters the receiving opening. Since it can be made difficult to grasp that consecutive balls are discharged from the discharge port at the timing of ball entry, it is possible to improve attention to the game balls flowing down toward the discharge port.

<Consecutive ball formation: change the maximum number of consecutive balls by the movement of the appearing and retracting members>
A game area formed so that game balls can flow down, a prize winning opening arranged in the game area and capable of winning the game balls, and a ball arranged upstream of the winning opening and capable of guiding the game balls to the winning opening. A gaming machine comprising a flow-down means, wherein the ball-flow-down means comprises a change means capable of changing the maximum number of consecutive balls, which is the maximum number of game balls that can be guided to the winning opening during a predetermined period. Gaming machine G1.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine in which, when game balls are entered in a row, the intervals between the falling balls are maintained by ribs provided in the flow path (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-181923). ). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, while the period until the game ball is discharged from the flow path (the period in which the game ball can be visually recognized) can be lengthened, the interval between the game balls after being discharged from the flow path can be increased. is the same as the interval between game balls when they enter the flow path, so when multiple game balls that were separated when entering the ball are discharged, the interval shrinks and they may be discharged together (for example, , when the game ball flows down while colliding with a group of nails), there is a problem that attention to the game ball discharged from the flow path cannot be maintained.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G1, the changing means can change the maximum number of consecutive balls, which is the maximum number of game balls that can be guided to the winning opening for a predetermined period. After three game balls enter at the same interval, in one case, they are discharged one by one in a prescribed period, and in other cases, three balls are discharged collectively in a prescribed period. be able to. As a result, it is difficult to grasp the manner in which the game ball is discharged from the ball-flow-down means at the time when the game ball enters the ball-flow-down means. You can keep your attention.

In a mode in which the changing means guides only one ball at a time to the prize winning opening during a predetermined period, when the player intentionally changes the firing intensity of two game balls that are continuously fired to form a continuous ball (so-called continuous ball). , "twisting"), the consecutive balls can be divided into one ball each. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player who performs twisting from receiving extra profits, so that the profit difference between a beginner (a player who does not perform twisting) and an experienced player (a player who performs twisting) can be reduced. can be suppressed.

The gaming machine G2 in the gaming machine G1 is characterized in that the changing means keeps the game balls flowing down in the ball flowing-down means and changes the intervals of the plurality of game balls in the course of the flowing down.

According to the game machine G2, in addition to the effects of the game machine G1, unlike the case where the game balls flowing down in the ball flow-down means stop, too many game balls enter the ball flow-down means and the ball flow-down means is full. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball from entering the ball. Therefore, it is possible to maintain a state in which a game ball can enter the ball flow-down means at all times.

In the game machine G1 or G2, the change means includes a flow path for causing game balls to flow down, and an operation means configured to appear in and out of the flow path and apply a load to the game balls flowing down the flow path. The game machine G3 is characterized in that the maximum number of game balls that can be guided to the winning opening during the predetermined period is changed by switching the operation mode of the operation means.

According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G1 or G2, the maximum number of game balls that can be guided to the prize winning opening during a predetermined period can be switched according to the operation mode of the operating means. The maximum number of game balls that can be guided to the winning opening can be electrically controlled.

In the gaming machine G3, the flow-down path is formed of a plurality of forked flow paths, and the operation means are arranged in the flow paths branched into the plurality of forks. The game machine G4 is characterized in that the maximum number of game balls that can be guided to the winning opening during a predetermined period is changed.

According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G3, the operating means are arranged at a plurality of locations, and the maximum number of game balls that can be guided to the winning opening during a predetermined period is determined by combining the operating modes of the operating means. Therefore, by grasping the operation mode of each operation means compared to the case where the operation means are arranged at one place, the maximum number of game balls guided to the winning opening in a predetermined period can be aimed at. It can be difficult to shoot a game ball with

As a result, it is possible to prevent a game in which an unexpected profit is obtained by utilizing a change in the maximum number of game balls that can be guided to a winning opening during a predetermined period.

In the game machine G4, the flow-down path includes distribution means for distributing game balls to the plurality of forked flow paths, and the distribution means distributes game balls to some of the plurality of forked flow paths. A gaming machine G5 characterized by being capable of switching between a first state in which game balls are distributed to a plurality of channels and a second state in which game balls are distributed to a single channel among the plurality of forked channels.

According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G4, the sorting means changes how the game balls are sorted into the plurality of forked flow paths, so that the series of game balls in the plurality of forked flow paths is reduced. Since the direction changes, it is possible to change the number of game balls that can be guided to the prize winning opening in a predetermined period.

In any one of the gaming machines G1 to G5, the changing means sets the maximum number of consecutive balls in the normal game state before shifting to the special game state to be equal to or greater than the maximum number of consecutive balls in the special game state. A gaming machine G6 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine G6, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines G1 to G5, the frequency of shifting from the normal game state to the special game state can be increased, and the profit that the player can obtain in the special game state can be increased. Fluctuation can be suppressed (ball output can be uniformed). As a result, it is possible to increase the accuracy in calculating the profit that the player can obtain from the number of special game states, so that the game parlor can easily manage the ball output and shift to the special game state. Since the frequency of . Therefore, the game machine can be profitable for both the player and the game parlor.

In any one of the gaming machines G1 to G6, the changing means compares the maximum number of consecutive balls until a predetermined period elapses from the start of the round game of each round in the special game state, and after the elapse of the predetermined period. A gaming machine G7 characterized in that the maximum number of consecutive balls of is increased.

According to the gaming machine G7, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines G1 to G6, it is possible to easily manage the number of game balls that enter the winning openings until a predetermined period elapses from the start of the round game of each round. , it is possible to increase the probability that the game balls will win consecutively in the prize winning opening after a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the round game of each round. As a result, it is possible to easily suspend the winning of prizes to the prize-winning openings immediately before the end of the round game of each round, and to make it easier to make consecutive balls enter the prize-winning openings in that state, and as a result, the probability of occurrence of over winnings is reduced. can be raised.

Conversely, the number of consecutive balls after the lapse of the predetermined period may be made smaller than the number of consecutive balls before the lapse of the predetermined period. In this case, it is possible to increase the tension of the game during the predetermined period, and to prevent the player from playing the game aimlessly. That is, after the start of the round game of each round, it is better to play the game so that the prescribed number (count number) of balls is put into the winning opening (large winning opening) as soon as possible, so that the player can get a larger profit. It is possible to concentrate on the game after the start.

<Ren-ball formation: Recognize whether it is possible to form a re-ball or not, and make it difficult>
A game area formed so that game balls can flow down, a prize winning opening arranged in the game area and capable of winning the game balls, and a ball arranged upstream of the winning opening and capable of guiding the game balls to the winning opening. A gaming machine comprising a flow-down means, wherein the ball-flow-down means has a flow-down path for the game ball to flow down, and an operation configured to be able to apply a load to the game ball that appears and disappears in the flow-down path and that flows down the flow-down path. means, wherein the operation means is capable of switching the magnitude of the load applied to the game ball when it protrudes into the flow-down path.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine equipped with a ball entrance through which game balls are guided to an advantageous route with a high profit that can be given to the player when a series of game balls enter the game ( For example, see JP-A-2014-161397). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, the game ball is guided to an advantageous route when the game ball is entered in a row into the ball entrance due to the attitude of the movable role disposed in the path along which the game ball flows down. Since the player can grasp whether or not it is the timing to be played, when the game ball is entered into the ball entrance in a row, by aiming at the timing when the game ball is guided to the advantageous route, the assumed There is a problem that there is a risk of giving extra profits to the player.

On the other hand, according to the game machine H1, it is not possible to grasp the magnitude of the load applied to the game ball by the action means only by grasping that the action means protrudes on the flow-down route. It is possible to make it difficult to grasp the extent to which the falling game ball is decelerated. As a result, it is possible to prevent a game mode in which the arrangement and posture of the operating means are used as a mark, and the profits can be equalized.

In addition, by notifying the player that it is time to form consecutive balls by means of lighting or sound, it is possible to direct the player's attention not only to the game balls but also to the relevant lighting and sound.

In the game machine H1, the operating means has a fixed state in which the state is maintained after colliding with the game ball when protruded on the flow-down path, and a fixed state in which the state is maintained after colliding with the game ball when it protrudes on the flow-down path, and it protrudes by colliding with the game ball when it protrudes on the flow-down path. A game machine H2 characterized in that it can be switched between a released state in which it is sunk rather than a closed position.

According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H1, the state can be maintained by colliding with the game ball flowing down the flow path, and the game ball can be sufficiently decelerated, or the game ball can be sunk by colliding with the game ball. It is possible to make it difficult to grasp the ball in a state where the ball cannot be sufficiently decelerated or the game ball is not allowed to flow down (individual operation means). As a result, it is possible to prevent a game mode in which the arrangement and posture of the operating means are used as a mark, and the profits can be equalized. Further, when the game ball is flowing down, it is possible to visually confirm whether or not the game ball is decelerated by the operating means, so that attention to the falling game ball can be improved.

In the game machine H1 or H2, the game machine H3 is characterized in that the movement means moves in and out in a first direction perpendicular to the board surface of the game board forming the game area.

According to the game machine H3, in addition to the effects of the game machine H1 or H2, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the haunting and disappearing motion of the action means. This makes it difficult for the player to recognize the action even if the action means appears and disappears when the game ball passes through the flow-down path. In addition, since the outer shape position of the operating means does not change before and after the action, it is possible to prevent the position where the game ball is shielded from the player from changing before and after the action, thereby preventing the player from losing sight of the falling game ball. can do.

That is, it is possible to achieve both the seemingly contradictory effect of making it difficult for the player to grasp the mode of the appearing and disappearing action of the operating means and the effect of making it easier for the player to see the game ball.

In any one of the game boards H1 to H3, the operating means includes a retractable member that collides with the game ball, a driving means that generates a driving force for operating the retractable member, and a contact from the driving means to the retractable member. and transmission means for transmitting a driving force, wherein the moving direction of the retractable member is a horizontal direction.

According to the game machine H4, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines H1 to H3, since the degree of urging in the moving direction by gravity is small, the retractable member can be easily maintained without separately holding it along the moving direction. The position of the retractable member can be maintained by static friction with the member that guides the movement of the retractable member.

The action mode of the hive member is visible to the player, and the transmission means is shielded from the player to make it invisible, so that the player can recognize when the haunt member protrudes, and the fixed state or the released state. It can be difficult to grasp whether

In any one of the gaming machines H1 to H4, the operating means includes a plurality of haunting members that collide with the game balls, and in each of the haunting members, the plurality of haunting members protrude into the flow-down path, A fixed state in which the state is maintained after colliding with the ball, and a released state in which, when the game ball protrudes into the flow-down path, the game ball collides with the game ball and sinks below the protruding position. Gaming machine H5.

According to the game machine H5, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines H1 to H4, it is difficult to distinguish from the appearance of the operation means which projecting member is in the fixed state and which is in the released state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the attention to the game ball flowing down the flow-down path in which the operation means is arranged.

In the gaming machine H4 or H5, the projection/retraction member has an angle formed between the opposing surface facing the flowing direction of the game ball and the flow-down path not greater than the angle formed between the opposing surface and the projection/retracting direction of the projecting/retracting member. A gaming machine H6 characterized by:

According to the game machine H6, in addition to the effects of the game machine H4 or the game machine H5, the appearance direction component of the appearance member of the load applied from the game ball to the opposing surface is changed to the direction component along the extension direction of the flow-down path. Since it can be made relatively large, it is possible to make it easier to retract the retractable member when the operating means is in the released state.

In any one of game machines H1 to H6, the flow-down path has a recessed groove extending as a recessed groove along the extension direction in the bottom, and the recessed groove has a game ball rolling on the upper part. and the operating means is formed so as to be capable of colliding with the game ball flowing downward under the control of the recessed groove when protruding onto the flow-down path, and when protruding onto the flow-down path , a fixed state in which the state is maintained after colliding with the game ball, and a released state in which, when protruding to the flow-down path, the game ball collides with the protruding position to sink below the protruding position, and the operating means. is provided with an auxiliary operation means that acts to separate the game ball from the recessed groove in the fixed state, and separates from the recessed groove and does not act on the game ball in the released state. H7.

According to the game machine H7, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines H1 to H6, the auxiliary operation means actively separates the game ball from the recessed groove in the fixed state, thereby reducing the load applied to the hive member. On the other hand, by facilitating the maintenance of the regulation of the game ball by the recessed groove in the released state, the game ball leaves the recessed groove before the retracting member sinks, and the load applied to the retracting member is reduced. can be suppressed.

That is, it is possible to achieve both seemingly contradictory effects, such that when the load of the game ball is not desired to cause the movement, the movement can be assisted, and when the load of the game ball is desired to cause the movement, the movement can be assisted. . Thereby, the operation of the retractable member can be stabilized.

In the gaming machine H7, the auxiliary action means is configured to contact a game ball that has left the recessed groove when the retractable member is retracted, and direct the flowing direction of the game ball toward the recessed groove. A gaming machine H8 characterized by:

According to the game machine H8, in addition to the effects of the game machine H7, the auxiliary action means can return the game ball to the recessed groove. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball from flowing down the flow-down path while being separated from the recessed groove when the projecting member is retracted without adding a member.

In any one of gaming machines A1 to A10, B1 to B9, C1 to C7, D1 to D5, E1 to E10, F1 to F6, G1 to G7, H1 to H8, the gaming machine is a slot machine. Game machine Z1 to play. Above all, as a basic configuration of a slot machine, it is provided with variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, and then displaying the identification information in a fixed manner, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has passed, and the stop time and a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the definite identification information of is the specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

In any one of game machines A1 to A10, B1 to B9, C1 to C7, D1 to D5, E1 to E10, F1 to F6, G1 to G7, H1 to H8, the game machine is a pachinko game machine. Gaming machine Z2. Above all, the basic structure of a pachinko game machine is provided with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, balls are shot into a predetermined game area, and the balls are ejected into actuating openings arranged at predetermined positions in the game area. For example, the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined period of time, on the condition that winning a prize (or passing through an activation opening) is a necessary condition. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable prize winning device (specific prize winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to allow the balls to win, and a value corresponding to the number of winning balls is provided. Values (including not only prize balls but also data written to magnetic cards, etc.) can be given.

In any one of gaming machines A1 to A10, B1 to B9, C1 to C7, D1 to D5, E1 to E10, F1 to F6, G1 to G7, H1 to H8, the gaming machine comprises a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. A gaming machine Z3 characterized by being a fusion. Among them, the basic configuration of the integrated game machine is "provided with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, and an operation means for starting (such as an operation lever) The identification information starts to change due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed. a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information; the ball is used as a game medium; A gaming machine configured to require a predetermined number of balls at the start of dynamic display, and to pay out a large number of balls at the occurrence of a special game state.
<Others>
Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine equipped with a ball entrance through which game balls are guided to an advantageous route with a high profit that can be given to the player when a series of game balls enter the game ( For example, Patent Document 1: JP-A-2014-161397).
However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, the entry of a series of game balls occurs when the falling balls hit by a nail accidentally gather (occurs completely by accident), so the consecutive balls are intentionally thrown. There was a problem that it was difficult to make.
The present technical idea was made to solve the problems exemplified above, and an object thereof is to provide a game machine capable of intentionally making consecutive balls.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of Technical Concept 1 has a game area formed so that game balls can flow down, a prize winning opening arranged in the game area and allowing game balls to win, and a prize winning opening. A game machine comprising a ball flow-down means arranged on the upstream side and capable of guiding a game ball to the winning opening, wherein the ball flow-down means includes a receiving port for receiving a game ball from the game area and a ball entering the receiving port. A discharge port for discharging a game ball that has been played toward the prize winning port, and a connection channel for connecting the receiving port and the discharge port so that the game ball can flow down, and a ball enters the receiving port at a first point of time. A first period necessary for the ball to be discharged from the discharge port is defined as a period necessary for the ball entering the receiving port at a second time point after the first time point to be discharged from the discharge port. A designated shortened period, which is a period equal to or longer than the second period, is formed.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 2 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 1, wherein the connection flow path allows a game ball entered into the receiving port at the second time point to enter the receiving port at the first time point. It is formed in a manner arranged on the upstream side of the entered game ball.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 3 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 1 or 2, wherein the connection flow path is the discharge port for the game ball entering the receiving port at the first time point at the same time point. It is formed in such a manner that the downward velocity component is less than or equal to the velocity component directed toward the discharge port of the game ball entering the receiving port at the second time point.
<effect>
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Idea 1, it is possible to form a period in which the interval between game balls can be shortened, and to intentionally create consecutive balls.
According to the gaming machine described in technical idea 2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in technical idea 1, since the later game ball does not overtake the earlier game ball, it is easy to make consecutive balls. can.
According to the gaming machine described in technical idea 3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in technical idea 1 or 2, consecutive balls can be made without stopping the game balls.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
190 Movable ball entry accessory device (movable ball entry means)
190b Big prize mouth switch (prize mouth)
320, 3320, 4320 route distribution unit (part of distribution means)
322b Plate-shaped part (bridging means)
330 distribution slope (part of distribution means)
322 Distributing body (part of multi-ball guiding means, movable means)
325 Special Route Taxiway (part of distribution channel, advantageous side channel)
326, 3326 normal route taxiway (part of distribution channel, unfavorable side channel)
340 defined area hole (part of defined area)
410, 5410 first branch region (branch region)
411 abutment wall (part of first means, abutment inflow means)
421a movable plate (flow mode changing means)
431 distribution projection (part of the first means)
441 first specific area hole (part of advantageous passage channel)
441a, 2441a First specific area switch (part of first specific area, part of advantageous specific area, part of first passage channel)
442a, 2442a Second specific area switch (part of first specific area, part of second specific area, part of first passage, part of second passage)
443a, 2443a Third specific area switch (part of second specific area, part of second passage channel)
2411 time blocking plate (part of passage prevention means)
2420 electromagnetic solenoid (part of first means, part of passage prevention means)
3321 guide rail (part of multi-sphere guide means, part of guide area)
3323 special route hole (advantageous side opening)
3324 Normal route hole (unfavorable side opening)
4322 retention channel (part of multi-ball guide means, retention means)
4323 Injection solenoid (part of multi-ball induction means, driving means)
5411 working wall (part of first means, abutment inflow means)
6440 specific area hole (part of composite specific area)
6440i entrance opening (entrance opening)
6450 profit augmentation device (part of second means)
6451 first rotating member (part of movable means)
6452 second rotating member (part of movable means)
6460 slide delay device (part of delay movable means)
7411h Projecting member (part of displacement means)
7412 Tilting floor (part of displacement means, part of passage channel, connecting channel)
7413 Inclined channel (part of passing channel)
7421 first annular member (first distribution part, part of passage flow path)
7422 second annular member (second distribution part, part of passage flow path)
7420 Rotation distribution device (part of first means, part of blocking member)
7422 Second annular member (part of blocking member)
7440 specific area hole (part of specific area)
7441 First specific area hole (part of advantageous specific area)
7442 second specific area hole (part of first specific area)
7443 Third specific area hole (part of second specific area)
7453 screw member (part of contact inflow means, part of flow down means)
8500 Pre-prize running-down device (sphere flow-down means)
8512 Top opening (receiving port)
8520 retractable member (part of operation means, part of action switching means, part of change means)
8543 Sorting device (part of sorting means)
8544b recessed groove 8544c long hole (exhaust port)
8544e Projecting member (auxiliary operation means)
8600, 9600 transmission device (part of operation means, part of action switching means, part of change means, part of transmission means)
10560 removal device (part of change means)
INR8 internal flow path (part of connecting flow path, part of flow path)
KM1, KM2 drive motor (driving means)
Nmax Maximum number of consecutive balls formed (maximum number of consecutive balls)
R1 first branch guidance channel (part of first passage channel, part of second passage channel, part of passage channel)
R2 Second branch guiding channel (part of first passing channel, part of second passing channel)
R3 Third branch guidance channel (part of first passage channel, part of second passage channel)
R4 special induction channel (a part of the first passing channel, a part of the second passing channel, a bridging channel)
R5 First delay guide channel (a part of the first passing channel, a part of the second passing channel)
R6 Second delay induction channel (part of second passage channel)
RS1 arc side (one side where the game ball travels)
RS2 Arc side (the side where the game ball travels)

Claims (1)

A game area formed so that a game ball can flow down, a ball entrance arranged in the game area and into which a game ball can enter, and a game ball arranged upstream of the ball entrance and entering the ball entrance. In a gaming machine comprising a guideable ball flow down means,
The spherical flow down means is
A flow-down route through which the game ball flows down;
A first position where the game ball projecting onto the flow path and flowing down the flow path can collide, and a second position where the game ball retreats from the first position and is less likely to collide with the game ball than the first position. an operation means configured to be displaceable and capable of applying a load to the game ball flowing down the flow path when positioned at the first position;
In the gaming machine, in a first state in which the operating means is positioned at the first position, the operating means moves to the first state after the game ball collides with the operating means and passes through a predetermined portion of the flow-down path. keep in position,
In the second state when the operating means is located at the first position, the operating means is activated when the game ball collides with the operating means and passes through the predetermined portion based on the passage of the flow-down path. displacing to the second position;
The operating means is configured to be displaceable in the front-rear direction,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the gaming machine is configured such that the game ball can be guided to the ball entrance while the operating means is maintained at the first position.

Images